Katalog

G E N E R A L C ATA L O G U E
Our team works

together, towards a common goal: there is nothing we have done yesterday that cannot be improved today.
UNITS DOCUMENTATION ACCESSORIES FITTINGS
DISTRIBUTORS
ACTUATORS
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
ACTUATORS
A global company
ACTUATORS
Metal Work Concesio. One of P Services, the Italian subsidiaries. One of Metal Work subsidiaries abroad.
Metal Work was set up in 1967 for the production of push-in fittings for compressed air systems. The company gradually extended its production and sales structure to become a leader in pneumatic systems for automation. Now the production unit in Concesio has a staff of about 350, while the national and international sales organisation staff number around 450. In 1992 Metal Work has obtained the ISO 9001 certification. To the quality managment one, in 2000 we have add the one related to the enviromental managment according the ISO 14001. To these METAL WORK S.p.A. applied the OHSAS 18001 standard in 2007 to guarantee a Management System of Occupational Safety and Health. All the certifications above mentioned have been released by the German certification body DEKRA ITS, accredited by TGA. Products are distributed through 40 branches in Italy and abroad, which offer an efficient capilla y before- and after-sales service. The product quality and an efficient sales organisation are the basis on which Metal Work fi mly stands and enable the company to meet all possible requirements in pneumatic systems for automation.
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
ACTUATORS
Total quality
Metal Work obtained ISO 9001 certification in 1992 and ISO 14001 certification in 2000, and OHSAS 18001 certification in 2007, ample proof of our way of working and daily mission. Particular care is taken at all levels, from design to energy saving, and we can safely state that, compared with conventional products, the electrical power required to operate our valves has been cut by 75% over the last few years. Certification covers not only the holding company but also the other companies in the Group, allowing both our products and our philosophy to gain world-wide recognition. All Metal Work products meet EC and other standards including electromagnetic compatibility (EMC certificate) Metal Work engineers are on ISO, UNI and ASSOFLUID committees as product standardisation is always a guarantee of product quality.
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
The product is not Metal Works only strong point. Great care is taken over customer service, with the aim of providing the best possible solution for a specific requirement within the allotted time and with the utmost safety. The Metal Work or P Service sales personnel work in close co-operation with the customer, providing the necessary backup to solve any technical problems, and search for new materials or information. Metal Work invests heavily in providing the customers with the necessary training. Our range includes all types of special products suitable for use in a wide variety of applications.
FITTINGS
A customer-oriented policy
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
Metal Work is a fully integrated manufacturing company. This system guarantees the customer a fully monitored production process and a consistently top quality product. Process engineering and product engineering come together in the constant quest for perfection. Virtually all the products are manufactured at the companys own production site allowing the company to monitor the entire process from the selection of raw materials to final assembl , thus cutting wastage and lead times. Production data and test results undergo critical analysis to enable the company to upgrade the products and the manufacturing process. Company-wide quality control is a permanent feature at Metal Work.
ACTUATORS
Quality in design, production and distribution
METAL WORK S.p.A. - Head Office - Via Segni, 5-7-9 25062 - Concesio BS Italy - Tel. 030 21 87 11 - Fax 030 21 80 569 - www.metalwork.it - metalwork@metalwork.it
ITALIAN SUBSIDIARIES
ACTUATORS
BARI P SERVICE S.r.l. Via S. Magno km 0,400 (zona industriale) 70033 Corato BA Tel. 080 898 73 94 r.a. Fax 080 898 71 45 www.pservice.it pservba@pservice.it BERGAMO P SERVICE S.r.l. Via Vienna, 28 Loc. Verdellino Zingonia 24040 Verdellino BG Tel. 035 88 53 79 Fax 035 48 20 492 www.pservice.it pservbg@pservice.it BOLOGNA P SERVICE S.r.l. Via dellArcoveggio, 190/d 40129 Bologna BO Tel. 051 70 27 11 Fax 051 70 31 14 www.pservice.it pservbo@pservice.it BRESCIA P SERVICE S.p.A. Via del Mella, 37 - Z.I. Fornaci 25131 Brescia BS Tel. 030 35 855 r.a. Fax 030 35 81 256 www.pservice.it pservbs@pservice.it CREMONA P SERVICE S.r.l. Via Sesto, 62 26100 Cremona CR Tel. 0372 27 64 8 - 32 26 7 Fax 0372 45 71 42 www.pservice.it pservcr@pservice.it LECCO P SERVICE S.r.l. Via Provinciale per Dolzago, 39 23848 Oggiono LC Tel. 0341 26 67 11 Fax 0341 26 67 12 www.pservice.it pservlc@pservice.it FILIALE DI VARESE Via Gasparoli, 197 21012 Cassano Magnago VA Tel. 0331 28 09 20 Fax 0331 28 09 21 www.pservice.it pservva@pservice.it MANTOVA P SERVICE S.r.l. Viale d/Libert, 9 - 46030 San Giorgio di Mantova MN Tel. 0376 37 41 81 Fax 0376 37 47 27 www.pservice.it pservmn@pservice.it
MILANO P SERVICE S.r.l. Via Altiero Spinelli, 57 20862 Arcore MB Tel. 039 61 80 056 039 61 50 064 Fax 039 60 120 29 www.pservice.it pservmi@pservice.it MODENA P SERVICE S.r.l. Via S. Giovanni Bosco, 267 41100 Modena MO Tel. 059 23 98 06 Fax 059 23 98 76 www.pservice.it pservmo@pservice.it NOVARA P SERVICE S.r.l. Piazzale A. Antonelli, 8 28060 S. Pietro Mosezzo Fr. Nibbia NO Tel. 0321 43 79 86 Fax 0321 43 79 93 www.pservice.it pservno@pservice.it PARMA P SERVICE S.r.l. P.za Lunardi 27/A 43100 Parma PR Tel. 0521 24 09 64 Fax 0521 24 28 47 www.pservice.it pservpr@pservice.it PAVIA P SERVICE S.r.l. Via F.lli Cagnoni, 7/9 27029 Vigevano PV Tel. 0381 83 333 Fax 0381 82 733 www.pservice.it pservpv@pservice.it PRATO P SERVICE S.r.l. Via Onorio Vannucchi, 21 59100 Prato PO Tel.: 0574 757298 Fax: 0574 757258 www.pservice.it pservpo@pservice.it RIMINI P SERVICE S.r.l. Via Piane, 23/A 47853 Coriano RN Tel. 0541 65 87 15 0541 65 81 36 Fax 0541 65 68 69 www.pservice.it pservrn@pservice.it
TORINO METAL WORK S.r.l. Via Bruino, 22/2 10040 Rivalta di Torino TO Tel. 011 90 32 666 Fax 011 90 03 632 www.pservice.it metalwto@pservice.it TREVISO P SERVICE S.r.l. Via P. A. Gemelli, 34/d 31038 Postioma di Paese TV Tel. 0422 48 45 78 r.a. Fax 0422 48 45 79 www.pservice.it pservtv@pservice.it VERONA P SERVICE S.r.l. Via Del Perlar, 92 37135 Verona VR Tel. 045 50 31 23 Fax 045 82 50 038 www.pservice.it pservvr@pservice.it VICENZA P SERVICE S.r.l. Via Progresso, 70 36035 Marano Vicentino VI Tel. 0445 56 05 90 Fax 0445 56 01 33 www.pservice.it pservvi@pservice.it
DOCUMENTATION
6
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
ITALY AUTHORIZED DEALER

NORTH PADOVA ATI S.r.l. Via Facca, 58 SS Valsugana 35013 Cittadella PD Tel. 049 94 01 777 Fax 049 94 00 665 www.aticompressori.it ati@aticompressori.it TRENTINO ALTO ADIGE E.B.I. GROUP S.r.l. Via Maccani, 197 38100 Trento TN Tel. 0461 82 55 75 (4 linee) Fax 0461 82 48 02 www.ebigroup.it info@ebigroup.it UDINE M.P. A. S.r.l. Via IV Novembre, 86 33010 Feletto Umberto UD Tel. 0432 57 52 56 Fax 0432 57 50 31 mpa@mpaservice.it CENTRE MACERATA TORRESI RAFFAELE & C S.r.l. Via Sandro Pertini, 51 62012 Civitanova Marche MC Tel. 0733 80 11 20 Fax 0733 80 11 30 www.torresiraffaele.it info@torresiraffaele.it LAZIO ATILSYSTEM S.r.l. Via Pantanaccio, 76 04100 Latina LT Tel. 0773 48 80 08 Fax 0773 69 13 04 www.atilsystem.com info@atilsystem.com CDC S.p.A. Via Casilina, 57/57A 00182 Roma RM Tel. 06 70 70 031 Fax 06 70 27 217 www.cdcspa.it info@cdcspa.it R.C.A. S.r.l. Via le lame, 20 03100 Frosinone - FR Tel.: 0775 29 23 17 Fax: 0775 29 03 22 rca@rcafr.191.it SOUTH CAMPANIA A.R.A. S.a.s. di C. Argenziano & C. Via Appia, 123/125 83042 Atripalda AV Tel. 0825 62 56 03 Fax 0825 62 47 19 www.araforniture.it info@araforniture.it OLEODINAMICA & PNEUMATICA S.a.s. di Ardolino G. & Co. Via M.le Manfredi, 24 80039 Saviano NA Tel. 081 82 11 468 Fax 081 82 11 181 oleodi15@oleodinamicadiardolino.191.it R.C.P. Service S.r.l. Via Nuova delle brecce, 176 80147 Napoli NA Tel. 081 75 24 238 Fax 081 75 22 067 www.rcpcasale.com info@rcpcasale.com
ITALY AGENCY
SARDEGNA G.CARLO LAI Via Ranieri Sampante, 6 09121 Cagliari CA Tel./Fax 070 280235 Cell. 328 3517832 lai.gianc@gmail.com
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
ACTUATORS
FOREIGN SUBSIDIARIES
ACTUATORS
EUROPE BELGIUM Metal Work Belgi/Belgique Mechelsesteenweg 277 B-1800 Vilvoorde - Belgium Tel. 0032 02 75 16 120 Fax 0032 02 75 16 161 metalwork@metalworkpneumatic.be www.metalworkpneumatic.be DENMARK Metal Work Danmark A/S Korskildelund 1 2670 Greve - Denmark Tel. 0045 70 22 23 11 Fax 0045 70 22 27 59 metalwork@metalwork.dk www.metalwork.dk FINLAND Metal Work Finland OY Lkkisepntie 11 00620 Helsinki - Finland Tel. 00358 10 836 5700 Fax 00358 09 272 2712 metalwork@metalwork.fi www.metalwork.fi FRANCE Metal Work France Sarl Parc dActivits de lEsplanade - BP 222 14 Rue Enrico Fermi 77463 Saint Thibault des Vignes Cedex - France Tel. 0033 01 60 94 00 00 Fax 0033 01 60 94 01 94 metalwork@metalwork.fr www.metalwork.fr GERMANY Metal Work Deutschland GmbH GERMAN OFFICE Rankinestrae 2 D-86899 Landsberg am Lech Germany Tel. 0049 08191 42894-0 Fax 0049 08191 42894-26 metalwork@metalwork.de www.metalwork.de AUSTRIAN OFFICE Tel. 0043 720 010100 Fax 0043 720 010100-99 metalwork@metalwork.at HOLLAND Metal Work Nederland B.V. Postbus 90 - 6710 BB EDE Voltastraat 9 - 6716 AJ EDE Holland Tel. 0031 0318 66 51 11 Fax 0031 0318 66 51 15 metalwork@metalwork.nl www.metalwork.nl POLAND Metal Work Polska Sp. z o.o. ul. Szamotulska 1, Baranowo 62-081 - Przezmierowo - Poland Tel. 0048 061 65 01 840 Fax 0048 061 65 01 849 metalwork@metalwork.pl www.metalwork.pl PORTUGAL Metal Work Portugal Lda Estrada Nacional, 1 P.C. Emiauto Pav-D Sobreiro Torio 3850 - Albergaria a Velha Portugal Tel. 00351 23 45 25 425 Fax 00351 23 45 25 426 www.metalwork.eu 8 CZECH REPUBLIC Metal Work Pneumatics CZ, s.r.o. Ostravsk 494 73925 Sviadnov Czech Republic Tel. 00420 596 748 577 Fax 00420 596 728 010 info@metalwork.cz www.metalwork.cz RUSSIA OOO Metal Work Pneumatic 121354, Moscow, Dorogobuzhskaya str., 14 build. 6 Tel.:+7 499 558 10 40 Fax:+7 499 558 10 40 info@metalworkpneumatic.ru www.metalworkpneumatic.ru SPAIN Metal Work Iberica S.A. Pol. Ind. Can Mag c/Can Mag, 9 08210 Barbera del Valles (Barcelona) - Spain Tel. 0034 937 180 244 Fax 0034 937 188 070 metalwork@metalwork.es www.metalwork.es DELEGACION NORTE Tel. 0034 946 203 999 Fax 0034 946 202 642 48220 Abadio (Bizkaia) metalwork.norte@metalwork.es DELEGACION CENTRO Tel. 0034 916 586 048 Fax 0034 916 710 638 28823 Coslada (Madrid) metalwork.centro@metalwork.es SWEDEN Metal Work Sverige AB Modemgatan, 7 235 39 Vellinge - Sweden Tel. 0046 040 42 07 00 Fax 0046 040 42 07 20 metalwork@metalwork.se www.metalwork.se SWITZERLAND Metal Work Pneumatik GmbH Langfeldstrasse 88 8500 Frauenfeld - Switzerland Tel. 0041 052 369 40 40 Fax 0041 052 369 40 41 metalwork@metalwork.ch www.metalwork.ch UK Metal Work UK Ltd Blackhill drive - Wolverton Mill Milton Keynes - MK 12 5TS Tel. 0044 01908 22 22 88 Fax 0044 01908 22 28 24 sales@metalwork.co.uk www.metalwork.co.uk UKRAINE Metal Work Ukraine TOV 26-G, Dniprovska Naberezhna Str., Litera A, 02098 Kiev Ukraine Tel. 00380 44 502 95 71 Tel. 00380 44 502 95 72 Tel./Fax 00380 44 502 95 73 www.metalwork.com.ua
AMERICAS BRAZIL Metal Work Pneumtica do Brasil Ltda RIO GRANDE DO SUL Av. Thomaz Edison, 2648 Scharlau CEP. 93125 - 140 So Leopoldo/RS - Brazil Tel. 0055 51 3590 - 7100 Fax 0055 51 3590 - 7111 metalwork@metalwork.com.br www.metalwork.com.br USA Metal Work Pneumatic USA, Inc. 1120 Eden Road, Suite 106 Arlington, TX 76001 Tel. 001 817 701 4000 Fax 001 817 701 4004 metalwork@metalwork.org www.metalwork.org
ASIA - OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Metal Work Pneumatic AUSTRALIA PTY Limited MELBOURNE OFFICE P.O.Box 4209 Dandenong South VIC 3164 10 Mickle Street Dandenong VIC 3175 Tel. 0061 03 97 06 67 18 Fax 0061 03 97 06 67 19 vicsales@metalwork.com.au www.metalwork.com.au SYDNEY OFFICE P.O. Box 6483 Wetherill Park BC NSW 2164 Unit 2, 504 - 508 Victoria Street Wetherill Park NSW 2164 Tel. 0061 2 97 25 35 99 Fax 0061 2 97 25 23 61 nswsales@metalwork.com.au CHINA Metal Work Pneumatic Components (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. SHANGHAI OFFICE Block C1, N3, Fulian third Road 201906 - Baoshan District, Shanghai - China Tel. 0086 21 36043088 Fax 0086 21 36043077 info@metalworkchina.cn www.metalworkchina.cn GUANGZHOU OFFICE Room 1923, Jinxiu Building, No. 1, Tianhe Road, Guangzhou, 510075 Tel: 0086 20 87308172 Fax: 0086 20 87308176 INDIA Metal Work Pneumatic India Private Limited BANGALORE OFFICE No. 18-20, 1St Cross, Bilekahalli Industrial Area Adj. IIMB Compound, Bannerghatta Road Bangalore - 560 076 (India) Tel. 0091 80 26480076 Fax 0091 80 26480012 sales@metalwork.in www.metalwork.in PUNE OFFICE Shop No. 1, 531/1, Shedge Villa, Post Bhugaon, Near Heera Garden, Pune-Paud Road, Tal. Mulshi, District Pune - 412 115 (India) sales.pune@metalwork.in MALAYSIA Metal Work Pneumatic (M) SDN BHD 11 Jalan Anggerik Mokara 31/52 Seksyen 31, Kota Kemuning 40460 Shah Alam Selangor Darul Ehsan - Malaysia Tel. 03 5131 3838 Tel. 03 5131 4848 Fax 03 5131 5666 metalwork@metalworkmal.com www.metalwork.it THAILAND Metal Work Pneumatic (Thailand) Co. Ltd 29/67 Moo 2, 345 Road Lumpo, Bangbuatong, Nonthaburi 11110 - Thailand Tel. 00662 961 7000 Fax 00662 961 7227 metalwork@metalwork.co.th www.metalwork.eu
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
FOREIGN AUTHORIZED DEALER

EUROPE BULGARIA Ka Matic Ltd. 9N Kuklensko shose Plovdiv - Bulgaria Cell.: 00359 88 827 9840 Tel.: 00359 32 677 772 Fax: 00359 32 677 774 info@kamatic.com www.kamatic.com CYPRUS Andrew Chr. - Demetriades Ltd. Corner Aiakos Nemeseos ST Pollouriotissa - P.O. Box 9068 1620 Nicosia - Cyprus Tel. 00357 22 43 14 50 (4 lines) Fax 00357 22 43 73 15 a.c.demetriades@cytanet.com.cy GREECE Dim. Har. Akritidis Co. P.O. Box 1284 Industrial Zone BL 56B 57022 - Sindos - Greece Tel. 0030 23 10 72 25 55 Fax 0030 23 10 72 28 28 info@akritidis.gr IRELAND Pneumatics Ltd Old Naas Road - Bluebell Dublin 12 - Ireland Tel. 0035 31 45 68 111 Fax 0035 31 45 68 108 NORWAY PMC Servi AS P.O. Box 3230 1402 Ski - Norway Tel. 0047 64 97 97 97 Fax 0047 64 97 98 99 post@pmcservi.no www.pmcservi.no REPUBLIC OF MACEDONIA Devit Compressor and Pneumatic Systems Ul. Razlovecko Vostante 24/13 MK - 1000 SKOPJE - Macedonia Tel. 00389 2 3091 660 Fax 00389 2 3061 548 devit@devit.com.mk ROMANIA S.C. Novo trade s.r.l. Str. Libertaii, 21 407035 Apahida, Jud. Cluj Romania Tel. 0040 264 434100 Fax 0040 264 403655 novotech@novotech.ro www.novotrade.ro SERBIA SHIFT d.o.o. Mileevska 52/5 11000 Beograd - Serbia Tel. +381 11 3961 195 Fax +381 11 3961 359 shift@shift.rs office@shift.r www.shift.rs SLOVENIA and CROATIA Lipro d.o.o. Ulica 15.maja 22 - 6000 Koper Capodistria - Slovenia Tel. 00386 5 62 51 343 Fax 00386 5 62 51 344 lipro@siol.net www.lipro.si 9 TURKEY HPA Teknoloji Gelistirme Makina ve Yedek Parc Imalat a San. Ic ve Dis Tic. Ltd. S ti. 1201/1 Sokak No: 4/A P21 Yenisehir - Izmir - Turkey Tel. 0090 232 469 7961 Fax 0090 232 433 9625 info@hpa.com.tr www.hpa.com.tr HUNGARY ENTRA-SYS KFT Bakay Nndor u.24. H-6724 Szeged - Hungary Tel. 0036 62 468 478 62 547 267 62 547 268 Fax 0036 62 421 403 entra-sys@vnet.hu www.entra-sys.hu AFRICA ALGERIA SARL DELTA CONTROL Rue Yahia Belhayat, 09 16035 Hydra Alger - Algeria Tel. 00213 21 69 25 57 00213 21 69 25 59 Fax 00213 21 60 42 50 deltacontrol@gmail.com www.deltacontrolalger.com BURKINA FASO AIS GROUP BURKINA P.O.BOX 06 PB 9484 Ouagadougou Burkina Faso Tel. 0022 650501250 Fax 0022 650501251 straore@aisgroupafrica.com EGYPT EL MASRY MFG. IND. HYDRAULIC ASITANA IND. COMPOUNDS EL-OBOUR EGITTO 11828 Tel. 00202 46100399 00202 46100445 Fax 00202 46100404 info@el-masry.com MOROCCO Afric Roulement 125 - 129, Bd. Ibn Tachfine Casablanca - Morocco Tel. 00212 022 407010 13 Fax 00212 022 407014 roulement@iam.net.ma www.africroulement.net REPUBLIC OF BENIN AIS GROUP COTONOU 02 BP 2083 Akpakpa - Rep. of Benin Tel. 0022 59021338100 Fax 0022 59021336788 sysoro@aisgroupafrica.com REPUBLIC OF IVORY COAST AIS GROUP 26 BP 1404 Abidjan Costa dAvorio Tel. 0022 521250401 Fax 0022 521365774 anomine@aisgroupafrica.com REPUBLIC OF TOGO AIS GROUP Baguida face a la station Texaco Lom 01 - RP Du Togo 01BP997 Tel. 0022 82719871 Fax 0022 82272094 aisgroup-togo@cafe.tg SOUTH AFRICA Goldquest International Hydraulics (Pty) Ltd 26 Barney road, Benrose Johannesburg 2094 - South Africa Tel. +27 11614 2004 Fax +27 11614 2033 admin@bmghydraulics.net www.bmghydraulics.net AMERICAS COLOMBIA NEUMATICA R. S.A.S. Carrera 28A 15-10 Local 2 Paloqueumao Bogota Colombia Tel. 0057 1 3752501 Fax 0057 1 2779920 antonio.linares@neumaticar.com www.neumaticar.com ECUADOR Ecuatoriana Industrial Termoval Cia Ltda Concepcin E5-37 y Valparaiso Quito - Ecuador Tel. 00593 22 95 28 88 Fax 00593 22 28 19 21 info@ecuatorianaindustrial.com www.ecuatorianaindustrial.com URUGUAY Fidemar S.A. Minas 1634 - CP 11200 Montevideo - Uruguay Tel. 00598 2 40 21 717 Fax 00598 2 40 21 719 info@fidema .com.uy www.fide mar.com.uy VENEZUELA Neumatica Rotonda c.a. Prolongacion Av. Michelena C.C. Atlas Locales 10 y 11 Valencia, Estado Carabobo Venezuela Tel. 0058 241 83 26 464 Fax 0058 241 83 26 283 ventas@neumaticar.com www.neumaticar.com ASIA - OCEANIA SAUDI ARABIA Mechanical World for Technical Services P.O.Box 3813 Damman 31481 Saudi Arabia Tel. 00966 38 97 84 95 Fax 00966 38 93 51 20 moiz.ahmed@mwfts.com UNITED ARAB EMIRATES ACME Industrial Hardware Trading L.L.C. P.O. Box 3636 Dubai United UAE Tel. 00971 432 32 628 Fax 00971 432 32 608 acmedxb@eim.ae SOUTH KOREA Seowon Corporation 1001 Ilsan Technotown 1141-1 Beksuk-Dong Ilsandong-Gu, Goyang City Gyunggi-Do 410-722 South Korea Tel. 0082 31 90 61 100 Fax 0082 31 90 61 101 mail@seowoncorp.com www.seowoncorp.com IRAN ERA FEAT SANAAT QESHM TRADING CO Flat 7 - Building 34 Southern Iranshahr Ave. P.O. BOX 17445-4 Tehran - Iran Tel. 0098 21 88 32 28 05 Fax 0098 21 88 30 02 97 info@erafeatco.com ISRAEL R.E.P. AUTOMATION LTD HAAMELIM ST P.O.B. 10115, 2 26110 - HAIFA BAY Tel. 00972 48403012 Fax 00972 48403013 rep@repac.co.il www.repac.co.il TAIWAN Century Automatiom Corporation 5F-8, no.1 Wu-Chuan 1 St.Road Hsin Taipei Hsien- Taiwan Tel. 00886 22 29 88 436 Fax 00886 22 29 88 436 century@cenauto.com.tw YEMEN U-TECH Al-zera a street P.O. BOX 3234 Sana a - Yemen Tel. 00967 1 200415 Fax 00967 1 473393 alhowry@yemen.net.ye
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
ACTUATORS
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
ACTUATORS
10
INDEX
ACTUATORS
P P P P P P P
CYLINDERS GRIPPERS ROTARY ACTUATORS SLIDES HYDRAULIC-PNEUMATIC ELECTRIC CYLINDER SENSORS, T-SLOT ACCESSORIES, TESTER VALVES VALVES ISLANDS SLAVES FIELDBUS
PAG.
1-2
ACTUATORS
11
PAG. 1-167 PAG. 1-187 PAG. 1-205 PAG. 1-229 PAG. 1-247 PAG. 1-285 PAGE 2-2 PAGE 2-139 PAGE 2-189
DISTRIBUTORS
P P P
UNITS
P P P P P P
SYNTESI BIT SKILLAIR NEW DEAL ONE AUTOMATIC FITTINGS FITTINGS SERIES A - B - C - D TAPARED THREAD FITTINGS WITH PTFE
PAGE PAGE PAGE
3-2 3-49
UNITS DOCUMENTATION ACCESSORIES FITTINGS
3-74
PAGE 3-144 PAGE 3-191 PAGE PAGE PAGE 4-4 4-28 4-33 4-50
PRECISION REGULATORS, PROPORTIONAL VALVES, PRESSURE SWITCHES PAGE 3-205 AUTOMATIC FITTINGS FOR USE IN THE FOOD INDUSTRY PAGE
FITTINGS
P P P P
ACCESSORIES
P P P P P P
LINE ON LINE COUPLINGS FLOW REGULATOR AUXILIARY VALVES VARIOUS ACCESSORIES PNEUMO POWER TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION ENVIRONMENT AND ENERGY SAVING EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE 94/9/EC (ATEX) ALPHANUMERIC INDEX
PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE
5-3 5-41 5-51 5-69 5-81 6-02 6-14 6-22 6-26 6-30
PAGE 5-101
DOCUMENTATION
P P P P P
SAFETY COMPONENTS: OVERVIEW OF THE STANDARDS PAGE
DISTRIBUTORS
DOCUMENTATION
ACCESSORIES
FITTINGS
UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
P P P P P P P
CYLINDERS GRIPPERS ROTARY ACTUATORS SLIDES HYDRAULIC-PNEUMATIC ELECTRIC CYLINDER SENSORS, T-SLOT ACCESSORIES, TESTER
PAG.
1-2
ACTUATORS
1-1
PAG. 1-167 PAG. 1-187 PAG. 1-205 PAG. 1-229 PAG. 1-247 PAG. 1-285
CYLINDERS SUMMARY
P GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA
PAGE 1-4
ACTUATORS
CYLINDERS ACCORDING TO STANDARDS AND VARIANTS

P ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDERS SERIES STD PAGE 1-10
CYLINDERS SUMMARY
P ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDERS SERIES TP
PAGE 1-13
P ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDERS
PAGE 1-15
P ISO 15552 CYLINDERS
PAGE 1-22
P ISO 15552 CYLINDERS SERIES STD
PAGE 1-23
P ISO 15552 CYLINDERS TYPE A
PAGE 1-25
P ISO 15552 CYLINDERS SERIES 3
PAGE 1-27
P ISO 15552 LOW FRICTIONS CYLINDERS
PAGE 1-28
P ISO 15552 ULTRA-LOW FRICTIONS CYLINDERS
PAGE 1-29
P ISO 15552 CYLINDERS WITH COMBI PISTON ROD GASKET
PAGE 1-31
P ISO 15552 CYLINDERS DIMENSIONS
PAGE 1-32
P ISO 15552 TWO-FLAT CYLINDERS
PAGE 1-35
P ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS FOR ISO 15552 CYLINDERS
PAGE 1-37
P TWIN-ROD CYLINDER SERIES TWNC
PAGE 1-49
P ISO 15552 CYLINDERS 160-200
PAGE 1-54
P ISO 21287 CYLYNDER SERIES LINER
PAGE 1-60
P COMPACT CYLINDERS SERIES CMPC
PAGE 1-72
P COMPACT CYLINDERS SERIES CMPC TWO-FLAT

1-2
PAGE 1-84
P COMPACT STOPPER CYLINDER
PAGE 1-87
P ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS FOR ISO CMPC, TWO-FLAT AND STOPPER CYLINDERS PAGE 1-91
OTHER CYLINDER
P ROUND CYLINDER SERIES RNDC PAGE 1-98
P SHORT-STROKE CYLINDERS SERIES SSCY
PAGE -103 1
P CARTRIDGE MICRO-CYLINDER SERIES CRTC
PAGE -110 1
P COMPACT GUIDED CYLINDERS SERIES CMPG
PAGE -112 1
RODLESS CYLINDERS
P RODLESS CYLINDER SERIES STD PAGE -118 1
P RODLESS CYLINDER WITH GUIDE V
PAGE -123 1
P RODLESS CYLINDER WITH BALL RECIRCULATING GUIDE
PAGE -127 1
P RODLESS CYLINDER SERIES DOUBLE
PAGE -132 1
P ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS FOR RODLESS STD, GUIDE V, WITH BALL CIRCULATION GUIDE AND DOUBLE CYLINDERS P RODLESS CYLINDER SERIES PU
PAGE -133 1
PAGE -139 1
P RODLESS CYLINDER WITH MAGNETIC SLIDING SERIES MAGNETIC SLIDE
PAGE -149 1
STAINLESS STELL CYLINDERS

P STAINLESS STEEL ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDER PAGE -153 1
P STAINLESS STEEL ROUND CYLINDERS RNDC
PAGE -157 1
P STAINLESS STEEL ISO 15552 CYLINDERS
PAGE -161 1
1-3
CYLINDERS SUMMARY
ACTUATORS
GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA
ACTUATORS
Compressed air The cylinders have been designed for use with unlubricated air, in which case no maintenance is required. If lubricated air is used, lubrication must be continuous because the additional lubrication removes the lubricant applied at the factory. With reference to ISO/DIN 8573-1, the compressed air to use is class 3-4-3, i.e.: Solid particle classe 3: 10.000 particles/m3 with d , =1 micron and 500 particles/m3 with d , = 5 micron Humidity classe 4: Pressure dewpoint , = +3 C Oil classe 3: Concentration total oil , = 1 mg/m3 Gasket material Please refer to page 6-7 of the technical documentation for compatibility data. Some families of Metal Work cylinders are available with gaskets made of different materials. Polyurethane: the best in terms of long-life, resistance to wear and reduced friction. Chemically compatible with: Pure aliphatic hydrocarbons (butane, propane, gasoline) Any impurities (moisture, alcohol, acid or alkaline compounds) can chemically attack polyurethane Mineral oil and grease (some additives can chemically attack the material) Silicone oil and grease Water up to +50C Resistance to ozone and ageing Not compatible with: Ketones, esters, ethers Alcohos, glycols Hot water, steam, alkali, amines, acids. Good elasticity down to 35C (for low temperature PU version only). NBR: These gaskets have a shorter life than polyurethane gaskets. However, they are recommended for use in environments causing the formation of water condensate, such as tropical climates, where polyurethane gaskets may tend to deteriorate quickly due to hydrolysis. Chemically compatible with: Methane, butane, propane, oily acids Aliphatic hydrocarbons Lubrication oils Gasoline Not compatible with: Ozone and exposure to sunlight Good elasticity down to 35C (for low temperature NBR version only) FKM/FPM: Can withstand temperatures as high as 150C. This makes them ideal for use on rodless cylinders, high-speed applications, involving high temperatures at the sliding lips. Chemically compatible with: Mineral oil and grease, slight swelling with oil grade ASTM no. 1and 3 Silicon oil and grease Animal and vegetable oil and fat Aliphatic hydrocarbons (gasoline, butane, propane, natural gas) Aromatic hydrocarbons (benzol, toluene) Chlorinated hydrocarbons (tetrachloroethylene) Fuels Ozone, atmospheric agents, ageing Not compatible with: Polar solvents (acetone, methylethylchetone, diethyl ether, dioxane) Glycol-based brake fluid Ammonia gas, amines, alkali Superheated water vapour Low molecular organic acids (formic and acetic acid)
No-stick-slip cylinders Standard cylinders are designed to ensure trouble-free operation under any conditions, particularly at high speed. Operation tends to be irregular and jerky at very low speeds in the presence of side loads. In this case, no-stick-slip cylinders are recommended as they allow smooth operation. These versions feature specifi tribological properties and preferably polyurethane gaskets. Radial oscillation of the piston rod These cylinders have been designed to apply forces in the direction of the axis and not to withstand side loads. If you intend to use the cylinder piston rod with side loads, the play between the piston rod and guide bushing must be taken into account. Indicatively, each 100-mm stroke corresponds to 1-mm radial oscillation measured at the end of the piston rod. Cylinder operating life The life of cylinders depends on numerous factors including axial and radial loads, speed, frequency of use, temperature, shocks, air loss (limits). Below are a few factors that must be taken purely as a reference. They are not binding or guaranteed due to the variability of different factors. Without radial load: ISO 15552 cylinders and round cylinders with polyurethane gaskets: 15.000 km. ISO 15552 cylinders and round cylinders with NBR gaskets: 8.000 km. ISO 6432 cylinders, SSC cylinders and compact cylinders with polyurethane gaskets: 30 million cycles. ISO 6432 cylinders and SSC cylinders with NRB gaskets: 15 million cycles. Rodless cylinders: 5.000 km. Stroke tolerances The actual cylinder stroke has a tolerance with respect to the nominal stroke, in compliance with any applicable laws, within the following ranges: 32 - 50 ISO 15552 cylinders -0 +2 mm 63 - 200 -0 +2.5 mm -1 +1 mm 8 - 25 ISO 6432 Round cylinders 32 - 50 -0.5 +1.5 mm 12 - 50 SSC cylinders -1 +1 mm 63 - 100 -1 +1.5 mm 12 - 100 -0.5 +1.5 mm Compact cylinders Compact cylinders ISO 21287 20 - 100 -0.5 +1.5 mm Rodless cylinders -1 +2 mm 16 - 40 Air loss All the cylinders have air losses, mainly around the gaskets. ISO 10099 establishes the maximum loss allowed in a new cylinder (see table below): Cylinder diameter 8-10-12 16-20-25 32-40-50 63-80-100 125-160-200 Loss (Nl/hour) 0.6 0.8 1.2 2 3 Metal Works own standards are more rigorous than ISO standards, but air loss still occurs. Strokes exceeding the maximum value specified in the catalogu Metal Work can supply cylinders with strokes greater than those specifie in the catalogue, considering the production technological limits. The Metal Work Sales Department can provide you will full details. However, it is up to the end user to use these special cylinders properly, by guiding the piston rod, avoiding peak loads, etc. Magnetic sensors The magnetic fiel generated by permanent magnets housed in the piston assembly changes in shape and intensity depending on the presence of magnetic metal masses in the vicinity of the cylinder. These masses may prevent the sensors from switching correctly, in which case non-magnetic materials should be used. In particular, the tie rods of short-stroke and compact cylinders should preferably be made of stainless steel.

1-4
CALCULATING PEAK LOAD ON THE PISTON ROD During operation, the piston rod of the cylinder CONSTRAINT behaves like a rod subjected to peak load (bending + compression). In the case of long strokes, it is necessary to make sure the diameter of the piston rod is correct for the load applied and the type of cylinder and piston rod mounting. The following formulae can be used to do this. A. Calculating the maximum force with a given stroke and piston rod diameter:
#
0.7
B. Calculating the minimum acceptable piston rod diameter with a given stroke and force:
$
0.5
Where: F Force applied [N] Diameter of the piston rod [mm] C Stroke [mm] K Free length coefficient depending on the mounting see diagrams
1.5
CHART OF SPEED / MAXIMUM ABSORBABLE LOAD For the cylinder to reach the end-of-stroke position without suffering damaging impact due to intensity and repetition, it is necessary to annul the kinetic energy of the moving mass and the relative work generated. The maximum absorbable load depends on the transference speed and the absorption capacity of the standard pneumatic cushion in the various cylinders. The chart gives the speed and absorbable mass in various diameters at a pressure of 6 bar, under the best regulation conditions and in a horizontal direction.
1-5
ACTUATORS
CONSUMPTION OF AIR IN THE CYLINDERS
ACTUATORS
Cylinder bore D mm 12 16 20 25
Piston rod diameter d mm 4 6 8 12 12 16 20 20 25 32 32 40 40
Motion thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction
32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200
Useful area Air consumption during thrust and traction in Nl/cm of stroke, depending on the working pressure P in bar at 20C cm2 1 bar 2 bar 3 bar 4 bar 5 bar 6 bar 7 bar 8 bar 9 bar 10 bar 1.13 0.0023 0.0034 0.0045 0.0057 0.0068 0.0079 0.0090 0.0102 0.0113 0.0124 1.00 0.0020 0.0030 0.0040 0.0050 0.0060 0.0070 0.0080 0.0090 0.0100 0.0110 2.01 0.0040 0.0060 0.0080 0.0100 0.0121 0.0141 0.0161 0.0181 0.0202 0.0221 1.73 0.0035 0.0052 0.0069 0.0086 0.0104 0.0121 0.0138 0.0156 0.0173 0.0190 3.14 0.0063 0.0094 0.0126 0.0157 0.0188 0.0220 0.0251 0.0283 0.0314 0.0346 2.64 0.0053 0.0079 0.0106 0.0132 0.0158 0.0185 0.0211 0.0238 0.0264 0.0290 4.91 0.0098 0.0147 0.0196 0.0245 0.0295 0.0344 0.0393 0.0442 0.0491 0.0540 3.78 0.0076 0.0113 0.0151 0.0189 0.0227 0.0264 0.0302 0.0340 0.0378 0.0415 8.04 0.016 0.024 0.032 0.040 0.048 0.056 0.064 0.072 0.080 0.088 6.91 0.014 0.021 0.028 0.035 0.042 0.049 0.058 0.063 0.070 0.076 12.56 0.025 0.038 0.050 0.063 0.076 0.088 0.100 0.113 0.126 0.138 10.55 0.021 0.032 0.042 0.053 0.063 0.074 0.088 0.095 0.106 0.116 19.63 0.039 0.059 0.079 0.098 0.118 0.137 0.157 0.177 0.196 0.216 16.49 0.033 0.050 0.066 0.082 0.099 0.115 0.132 0.149 0.165 0.181 31.16 0.062 0.093 0.125 0.156 0.187 0.218 0.249 0.280 0.312 0.343 28.02 0.056 0.084 0.112 0.140 0.168 0.196 0.224 0.252 0.280 0.308 50.24 0.100 0.150 0.200 0.250 0.301 0.351 0.402 0.452 0.502 0.552 45.36 0.091 0.138 0.181 0.227 0.272 0.318 0.363 0.408 0.454 0.500 78.54 0.157 0.238 0.314 0.382 0.471 0.549 0.628 0.706 0.785 0.862 70.50 0.141 0.211 0.282 0.352 0.423 0.493 0.564 0.635 0.705 0.775 122.66 0.245 0.368 0.490 0.613 0.736 0.859 0.981 1.104 1.226 1.349 114.67 0.229 0.344 0.459 0.573 0.688 0.803 0.917 1.032 1.147 1.262 201.06 0.402 0.603 0.804 1.005 1.206 1.407 1.608 1.809 2.010 2.211 188.49 0.377 0.565 0.754 0.942 1.130 1.319 1.508 1.696 1.884 2.673 314.15 0.628 0.942 1.257 1.571 1.885 2.199 2.513 2.827 3.145 3.456 301.59 0.603 0.905 1.206 1.508 1.810 2.111 2.413 2.714 3.016 3.318
FORCE OF SPRINGS IN SINGLE-ACTING CYLINDERS (THEORETICAL)

ISO 15552 SINGLE-ACTING CYLINDERS Force with spring Max. stroke compressed N mm 63 250 88 250 102 250 102 250 SSC SINGLE-ACTING CYLINDERS Force with spring Max. stroke compressed N mm 6 25 7 25 12 25 14 25 33 50 45 50 70 50 81 50 ROUND SINGLE-ACTING CYLINDERS Force with spring Max. stroke compressed N mm 86 250 95 250 108 250
Bore mm 32 40 50 63
Force with spring extended N 35 51 64 64
Bore mm 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Force with spring extended N 1.5 3 4 5 6 15 20 25
Bore mm 8 10 12 16 20 25
ISO 6432 SINGLE-ACTING CYLINDERS Force with spring Max. stroke compressed N mm 3 50 5 50 7 50 20 50 22 50 28 50
Force with spring extended N 1 1 3 5 12 17
Bore mm 32 40 50
Force with spring extended N 34 50 62
P1 = Force with spring extended P2 = Force with spring compressed Cx = Required stroke Cmax = Max stroke
1-6
Bore mm 6 10 16 6 10 16 6 10 16
SINGLE-ACTING CARTRIDGE CYLINDERS Force with spring Max. stroke compressed N mm 3.7 5 7.8 5 7.2 5 3.9 10 9.6 10 13.3 10 3.9 15 9.1 15 13.3 15
Force with spring extended N
FORCES GENERATED DURING THRUST AND TRACTION (THEORETICAL)

Cylinder bore D mm 8 10 12 16 16 20 20 25 25 32 40 40 50 50 63 63 80 80 100 125 160 200 Piston rod diameter d mm 4 4 6 6 8 8 10 8 10 12 12 16 16 20 16 20 20 25 25 32 40 40 Motion thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction thrust traction Useful area cm2 0.50 0.38 0.79 0.66 1.13 0.85 2.01 1.73 2.01 1.51 3.14 2.64 3.14 2.36 4.91 4.41 4.91 4.12 8.04 6.91 12.57 11.44 12.57 10.56 19.63 17.62 19.63 16.49 31.17 29.16 31.17 28.03 50.27 47.12 50.27 45.36 78.54 73.63 122.72 114.68 201.06 188.50 314.16 301.59 Thrust and traction force in daN depending on the operating pressure in bar 2 bar 3 bar 4 bar 5 bar 6 bar 7 bar 8 bar 9 bar 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 0.8 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.3 2.6 3.0 3.4 1.6 2.4 3.1 3.9 4.7 5.5 6.3 7.1 1.3 2.0 2.6 3.3 4.0 4.6 5.3 5.9 2.3 3.4 4.5 5.7 6.8 7.9 9.0 10.2 1.7 2.5 3.4 4.2 5.1 5.9 6.8 7.6 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.1 12.1 14.1 16.1 18.1 3.5 5.2 6.9 8.6 10.4 12.1 13.8 15.6 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.1 12.1 14.1 16.1 18.1 3.0 4.5 6.0 7.5 9.0 10.6 12.1 13.6 6.3 9.4 12.6 15.7 18.8 22.0 25.1 28.3 5.3 7.9 10.6 13.2 15.8 18.5 21.1 23.8 6.3 9.4 12.6 15.7 18.8 22.0 25.1 28.3 4.7 7.1 9.4 11.8 14.1 16.5 18.8 21.2 9.8 14.7 19.6 24.5 29.5 34.4 39.3 44.2 8.8 13.2 17.6 22.0 26.4 30.8 35.2 39.7 9.8 14.7 19.6 24.5 29.5 34.4 39.3 44.2 8.2 12.4 16.5 20.6 24.7 28.9 33.0 37.1 16.1 24.1 32.2 40.2 48.3 56.3 64.3 72.4 13.8 20.7 27.6 34.6 41.5 48.4 55.3 62.2 25.1 37.7 50.3 62.8 75.4 88.0 100.5 113.1 22.9 34.3 45.7 57.2 68.6 80.0 91.5 102.9 25.1 37.7 50.3 62.8 75.4 88.0 100.5 113.1 21.1 31.7 42.2 52.8 63.3 73.9 84.4 95.0 39.3 58.9 78.5 98.2 117.8 137.4 157.1 176.7 35.2 52.9 70.5 88.1 105.7 123.4 141.0 158.6 39.3 58.9 78.5 98.2 117.8 137.4 157.1 176.7 33.0 49.5 66.0 82.5 99.0 115.5 131.9 148.4 62.3 93.5 124.7 155.9 187.0 218.2 249.4 280.6 58.3 87.5 116.6 145.8 175.0 204.1 233.3 262.5 62.3 93.5 124.7 155.9 187.0 218.2 249.4 280.6 56.1 84.1 112.1 140.2 168.2 196.2 224.2 252.3 100.5 150.8 201.1 251.3 301.6 351.9 402.1 452.4 94.2 141.4 188.5 235.6 282.7 329.9 377.0 424.1 100.5 150.8 201.1 251.3 301.6 351.9 402.1 452.4 90.7 136.1 181.4 226.8 272.1 317.5 362.9 408.2 157.1 235.6 314.2 392.7 471.2 549.8 628.3 706.9 147.3 220.9 294.5 368.2 441.8 515.4 589.0 662.7 245.4 368.2 490.9 613.6 736.3 859.0 981.7 1104.5 229.4 344.0 458.7 573.4 688.1 802.7 917.4 1032.1 402.1 603.2 804.2 1005.3 1206.4 1407.4 1608.5 1809.6 377,0 565.5 754.0 942.5 1131.0 1319.5 1508.0 1696.5 628.3 942.5 1256.6 1570.8 1885.0 2199.1 2513.3 2827.4 603.2 904.8 1206.4 1508.0 1809.6 2111.1 2412.7 2714.3
1 bar 0.5 0.4 0.8 0.7 1.1 0.8 2.0 1.7 2.0 1.5 3.1 2.6 3.1 2.4 4.9 4.4 4.9 4.1 8.0 6.9 12.6 11.4 12.6 10.6 19.6 17.6 19.6 16.5 31.2 29.2 31.2 28.0 50.3 47.1 50.3 45.4 78.5 73.6 122.7 114.7 201.1 188.5 314.2 301.6
10 bar 5.0 3.8 7.9 6.6 11.3 8.5 20.1 17.3 20.1 15.1 31.4 26.4 31.4 23.6 49.1 44.1 49.1 41.2 80.4 69.1 125.7 114.4 125.7 105.6 196.3 176.2 196.3 164.9 311.7 291.6 311.7 280.3 502.7 471.2 502.7 453.6 785.4 736.3 1227.2 1146.8 2010.6 1885.0 3141.6 3015.9
1-7
ACTUATORS
WEIGHT OF CYLINDERS
ACTUATORS
8 10 12 16 20 25
Micro-cylinder series ISO 6432 Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 40 0.234 55 0.334 41 0.257 59 0.371 77 0.419 111 0.635 93 0.491 133 0.708 181 0.732 233 1.121 241 1.100 334 1.722
16 20 25
Micro-cylinder ISO 6432 series TP Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 66 0.377 101 0.604 94 0.628 131 1.03 144 0.908 207 1.536
12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Single-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 45 1.24 63 1.65 91 2.14 144 3.04 185 4.14 275 5.05 412 7.09 587 9.32 393 14.41 673 21.94
Short-stroke cylinder series SSCY Through-rod Non-ratating Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 52 1.47 64 1.35 72 2.05 88 1.6 104 2.75 126 2.37 167 3.65 189 3.25 200 4.72 260 4.56 295 5.94 373 5.49 437 8.9 592 7.89 621 10.91 854 10.57 1485 16.9 1740 25.87 2841 25.9 2692 30.77 Compact cylinder series CMPC Through-rod Non-ratating Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 104 1.82 105 1.90 124 1.90 109 1.81 204 2.95 181 2.78 233 3.32 220 3.15 282 4.05 306 3.96 408 5.29 457 5.20 605 7.98 709 7.64 656 8.90 977 8.56 1624 15.02 1851 14.33 3100 19.93 3710 17.87
Oscillating Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 272 4.14 386 5.05 620 7.09 889 9.32 -
12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Single-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 96 1.59 105 1.51 171 2.35 201 2.73 246 3.17 370 4.41 552 6.42 779 7.34 1468 12.57 2988 16.11
Through-rod non-rotating Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 114 2.12 129 2.20 214 3.39 252 3.76 343 4.84 495 6.08 768 9.21 1054 10.13 2027 16.78 3850 21.70
32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200
Cylinder series ISO 15552, ISO 15552 TWO-FLAT Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 433 2.2 494 3.09 660 3.15 783 4.73 1087 4.57 1348 7.04 1443 5.03 1718 7.44 2815 7.49 3260 10.16 3897 8.79 4425 12.33 6988 13.42 8040 18 12979 22.92 13800 30 17000 28 18000 39
32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Cylinder series ISO 15552 type A, ISO 15552 type A TWO-FLAT Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 460 3.09 576 3.98 716 4.08 916 5.66 1155 5.86 1513 8.33 1524 5.92 1945 8.33 2886 9.07 3520 11.74 3965 9.48 4779 13.02 7093 14.11 8642 18.69
32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Cylinder ISO 15552 series 3 Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 434 2.30 495 3.19 660 3.22 783 4.80 1079 4.50 1340 6.97 1427 4.78 1702 7.24 2774 6.73 3219 10.58 3836 7.726 4364 11.58 6529 11.63 7581 17.94
32 40 50 63
Cylinder ISO 15552 Ultra-low frictions Single-rod Weight [g] Stroke = 0 504 774 1245 1697
Weight [g] each mm 1.64 2.09 3.02 3.36
1-8
32 40 50
Round cylinder series RNDC Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 404 1.44 455 2.04 660 1.58 808 3.14 1235 3.59 1507 6.03
32 40 50 63 80
Compact cylinder series CMPC TWO-FLAT Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 261 3.17 297 4.05 394 4.41 432 5.29 595 6.42 648 7.98 845 7.34 129 8.90 1524 12.57 1680 15.02
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
ISO 21287 cylinder series LINER Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 98 2.49 110 3.10 119 2.63 133 3.24 182 3.62 197 4.50 228 4.09 243 4.98 330 5.67 355 7.25 461 6.52 487 8.10 991 10.11 1066 12.58 1869 13.78 2029 17.63 Rodless cylinder Series Double Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 561 1.72 1607 3.58 3737 7.68
32 40 50 63 80 100
Twin-rod cylinder series TWNC Single-rod Through-rod Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 725 2.57 790 3.79 945 2.81 1065 4.03 1499 3.96 1737 5.72 2360 5.72 2628 8.85 4300 9.59 4730 15.52 6270 10.89 6775 16.8
Standard 16 25 32 40 63 (Std) 63 (Heavy) Weight [g] Stroke = 0 244 746 1707 2911 7280 Weight [g] each mm 0.86 1.79 3.84 5.55 9.22
with Guide Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 460 1.79 1.421 2.99 3.025 5.04 4.434 6.75 10.860 10.65 13.275 14.02
with Guida V Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 953 1.98 2.150 3.21 3.210 4.67 9.230 9.27 -
25 32 40 50
Rodless cylinder series PU Weight [g] Stroke = 0 1009 1535 2702 4875 Guide unit Type GDS Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 150 0.78 150 0.78 420 1.22 420 1.22 772 1.76 1000 1.76 1900 3.13 2300 3.13 3800 4.9 7000 4.9 Compact Stopper cylinder Trunnion version Weight [g] 210 420 1.190 -
Weight [g] each mm 2.54 3.72 4.78 7.50
16 20 25
Rodless cylinder series MAGNETIC SLIDE Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 490 0.262 795 0.325 1250 0.487
12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Type GDH and GDM Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm 374 0.78 374 0.78 759 1.22 759 1.22 1200 1.76 2000 3.13 3300 4.9 4750 4.9 8500 7.26 12000 7.26
16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Compact guided cylinder Non-cushioned (approximate) Cushioned (approximate) Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Weight [g] Stroke = 0 each mm Stroke = 0 each mm 295 4.77 414 4.77 486 6.38 543 6.38 550 10.01 735 10.01 942 16.51 1.354 16.51 1028 18.04 1.479 18.04 1355 23.76 1.949 23.76 1900 32.56 2.714 32.56 3910 55.77 5710 73.48 -
x Stroke 20x15 32x20 50x30 80x30 80x40
Roller version Weight [g] 220 460 1.300 4.500 4.750
1-9
ACTUATORS
ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDERS SERIES STD
ACTUATORS
Mini-cylinders to ISO 6432 with a chamfered stainless steel barrel. The cylinder head dimensions have been reduced for some sizes so that they can be used where there are space restrictions. Can be used with different types of sensors. Available in various versions with a wide range of accessories: with or without magnet single and double acting single or through rod with pneumatic cushioning ( 16-20-25) gaskets made of NBR, POLYURETHANE, and FKM/FPM (for high temperatures), and low-temperature gaskets special executions on request fixin accessories, guide units and mechanical rod locking
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Standard strokes bar MPa C mm mm
Polyurethane
NBR
FKM/FPM
Low temperature
Versions Magnet for sensors Inrush pressure single piston rod through-rod Forces generated at 6 bar thrust/retraction Weights Notes
bar bar
10 1 10 to +80 10 to +80 10 to +150 (non-magnetic cylinders) 35 to +80 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 8; 10; 12; 16; 20; 25 Chamfered barrel Single-acting: for bores 8 to 25 strokes from 1 to 50 Double-acting: for bores 8 to 10 strokes from 1 to 100 for bores 12 to 16 strokes from 1 to 200 for bores 20 to 25 strokes from 1 to 500 Double-acting, cushioned: for bores 16 strokes from 1 to 300 for bores 20 to 25 strokes from 1 to 500 Double-acting, Double-acting cushioned, Single-acting retracted piston rod, Through-rod, Through-rod cushioned, Version with piston rod block, no-stick slip All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request. 8 10 12 16 20 25 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.6 1 1 1 0.8 0.8 0.8 See page 1-7 See page 1-8 For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air. Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, thick chromed b HEAD: anodised aluminium alloy c PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM d GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert e BARREL: AISI 304 steel f HALF-PISTON: acetal resin g PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM h MAGNET: plastoneodymium i CUSHIONING GASKET: NBR or FKM/FPM j NEEDLE: OT 58 with needle out movement safety system even when fully open k BUSHING (optional): self-lubricating bronze
1-10
DIMENSIONS OF STANDARD VERSIONS

+ = ADD STROKE
8 10 12 16 20 25
AM +0.0;-2.0 12 12 16 16 20 22
BE M12x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5
CD H9 4 4 6 6 8 8
D 16.7 16.7 19 19.7 27.9 33
D1 4 4 6 6 8 10
E M5 M5 M5 1/8 1/8 1/8
G 6 6 6 6 8 9
EE M5 M5 M5 M5 G 1/8 G 1/8
EW d13 8 8 12 12 16 16
L 6.5 6.5 9 9 12 12
L1 86 86 104 111 129 143
L2 10 10 13 13 14 17
L3 12 12 17 17 17 20
L4 10 10 10 10 15.5 17.1
L5 46 46 49 56 68 73
L6 46 46 47 53 61 66.5
KK M4 M4 M6 M6 M8 M10x1.25
XC 1 64 64 75 82 95 104
WF 1,2 16 16 22 22 24 28
KW 7 7 8 8 7 7
KV 19 19 24 24 32 32
MR 12 12 16 16 18 21
NA 15 15 17 18 24 30
NB 15 15 17 18 24 30
SW 7 7 10 10 13 17
CH 3 3 5 5 7 8
K 3 3 3.5 3.5 4.6 5
DIMENSIONS OF STANDARD VERSIONS WITH THROUGH-ROD

+ = ADD STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE
8 10 12 16 20 25
AM +0.0;-2.0 12 12 16 16 20 22
BE M12x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5
D 16.7 16.7 19 19.7 27.9 33
D1 4 4 6 6 8 10
G 6 6 6 6 8 9
EE M5 M5 M5 M5 G 1/8 G 1/8
LL 102 102 125 132 156 173
L3 12 12 17 17 17 20
L4 10 10 10 10 15.5 17.1
L5 46 46 49 56 68 73
KK M4 M4 M6 M6 M8 M10x1.25
WF 1,2 16 16 22 22 24 28
KW 7 7 8 8 7 7
KV 19 19 24 24 32 32
NA 15 15 17 18 24 30
NB 15 15 17 18 24 30
SW 7 7 10 10 13 17
CH 3 3 5 5 7 8
K 3 3 3.5 3.5 4.6 5
1-11
ACTUATORS
KEY TO CODES
ACTUATORS
CYL 101 102 104 n 106 n 109 110 111 112 n 113 t 114 t n 115 116 n 117
112 TYPE SE axial coupling DEM axial coupling SE through-rod SE cushioned DEA DE SE DEM DEMA DEM through-rod DEMA through-rod DEM for mechanical lock DEMA for mechanical lock
0 0 Standard U Bronze rear head bushing V Without head nut S Non-magnetic s G No stick slip
16 BORE t 08 t 10 t 12 t 16 t 20 t 25
0020 STROKE For the maximum suppliable strokes, look at the technical data
A C Z X
C MATERIAL C45 chrome rod, aluminium piston rod C45 chrome rod, technopolymer piston rod Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston Stainless steel piston rod and nut technopolymer piston
P GASKETS P Polyurethane N NBR V FKM/FPM B Low temperature
DE: DEM: DEMA: DEA: SE:
Double-acting (non-cushioned, not magnetic) Magnetic double-acting (non-cushioned) Magnetic double-acting (cushioned) Cushioned double-acting (non-magnetic) Single-acting (magnetic)
s t n
Only available for non-magnetic versions (S) and with aluminium piston (A or Z) For speeds lower than 0.2m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only Stainless steel piston rod Available from 16 Available from 12 For 16 to 25 aluminium piston, stainless stell piston rod
NOTES
1-12
ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDERS SERIES TP
Minicylinders manufactured according to the ISO 6432 regulation having high resistance technopolymer heads and anodized aluminium liner. Available in various versions with a wide range of accessories: with or without magnet single and double acting-single or through rod gaskets made of POLYURETHANE fixin accessories and guide units.
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Standard strokes Versions Forces generated at 6 bar thrust/retraction Weights Inrush pressure single piston rod through-rod Notes bar MPa C mm mm mm
POLYURETHANE 10 1 10 to +60 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 16; 20; 25 Aluminium liner chamfered on the heads 16: from 1 to 200 20 to 25: from 1 to 500 Double-acting, Double Through-rod (for both there are magnetic and non magnetic versions) See page 1-7 See page 1-8 8 10 12 16 20 25 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.8 1 1 1 0.8 0.8 0.8 The standard version is lacking of the head nut Use of fittings with a taper thread is NOT recommended. Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems.
bar bar
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, thick chromed b HEADS: high resistance technopolymer c PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane d GUIDE OPERATOR: technopolymer e BARREL: drawn anoside aluminium alloy f PISTON GASKET: polyurethane g MAGNET: plastoneodymium h STATIC O-RINGS: NBR i COVER PLATE: technopolymer
1-13
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
+ = ADD STROKE
16 20 25
AM 16 20 22
BE M16x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5
CD (H9) 6 8 8
D 21 25 30
D1 6 8 10
G 4.7 7.7 7.7
EE M5 1/8 1/8
EW (d13) 12 16 16
OH 12 16 17
L 11 15 15
L1 111 129 143
L2 13 14 17
L3 17 17 20
L4 9.5 15.5 15.5
L5 56 68 73
KK M6 M8 M10x1.25
XC(1) 82 95 104
WF 22 24 28
KW 8 7 7
KV 24 32 32
MR 16 18 21
SW 10 13 17
CH 5 7 8
K 3.5 4.6 5.5
16 20 25
MAX LOCKING TORQUE [Nm] BE (front/rear) EE 12/8 1.2 22/15 3 22/15 3
DIMENSIONS OF STANDARD VERSIONS WITH THROUGH-ROD

16 20 25
AM 16 20 22
BE M16x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5
D 21 25 30
D1 6 8 10
G 4.7 7.7 7.7
EE M5 1/8 1/8
OH 12 16 17
LL 132 156 173
L3 17 17 20
L4 9.5 15.5 15.5
L5 56 68 73
KK M6 M8 M10x1.25
WF 22 24 28
KW 8 7 7
KV 24 32 32
SW 10 13 17
CH 5 7 8
K 3.5 4.6 5.5
16 20 25
MAX LOCKING TORQUE [Nm] BE EE 12 1.2 22 3 22 3
KEY TO CODES
CYL 110 TYPE 110 DE non-magnetic minicylinder 112 DEM minicylinder 114 DEM through-rod minicylinder 3 3 TP heads (standard) 4 TP heads (standard) + head nut 16 BORE n 16 20 25 0 0 S Standard Non-magnetic 020 STROKE For the maximum suppliable strokes, look at the technical data C MATERIAL C C45 chrome rod X Stainless rod P GASKETS P Polyurethane
DE: Double-acting (non-cushioned, not magnetic). DEM: Double action magnetic (unless otherwise specified not cushioned.
As standard the cylinders are already no stick-slip version. This version dont provide the nut on the head. n 16 will be only in version with stainless rod (X).
1-14
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDERS: FIXINGS

FOOT MODEL A
Code W0950080001 8 W0950080001 10 W0950120001 12 W0950120001 16 W0950200001 20 W0950200001 25 *ISO 6432 values
Note: Individually packed
FLANGE MODEL C
Code W0950080002 8 W0950080002 10 W0950120002 12 W0950120002 16 W0950200002 20 W0950200002 25 *ISO 6432 values D 12 12 16 16 22 22 W 1.4 13 13 18 18 19 23 FB H13 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 TF Js14 30 30 40 40 50 50 UF 40 40 52 52 66 66 UR 22 22 30 30 40 40 S 3 3 4 4 5 5 Weight [g] 10 10 26 26 52 52
COUNTER-HINGE MODEL BC
Code W0950080005 8 W0950080005 10 W0950120005 12 W0950120005 16 W0950200005 20 W0950200005 25 *ISO 6432 values AO 2.5 2.5 2 2 4 4 LG 22 22 25 25 32 32 TR Js13 12.5 12.5 15 15 20 20 NH 0.2 24 24 27 27 30 30 MO 18 18 25 25 30 30 AB1 4 4 6 6 8 8 AB H13 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 R 6 6 7 7 10 10 S 2.5 2.5 3 3 4 4 Weight [g] 24 24 40 40 78 78
Note: Supplied complete with 1 pin and 2 snap rings
NUT FOR HEADS MODEL D

Code 0950080010 0950080010 0950120010 0950120010 0950200010 0950200010 8 10 12 16 20 25 F M12x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 CH 19 19 24 24 32 32 H 7 7 8 8 7 7 Weight [g] 12 12 20 20 44 44
NUT FOR PISTON RODS MODEL DA

Code 0950080011 0950080011 0950120011 0950120011 0950200011 0950322010 8 10 12 16 20 25 F M4 M4 M6 M6 M8 M10x1.25 CH 7 7 10 10 13 17 H 3 3 4 4 5 6 Weight [g] 0.6 0.6 1 1 3 7
1-15
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDERS
ACTUATORS
D 12 12 16 16 22 22
XS 1.4 24 24 32 32 36 40
AU 11 11 14 14 17 17
AO 5 5 6 6 8 8
NH 0.3 16 16 20 20 25 25
TR Js14 25 25 32 32 40 40
US 35 35 42 42 54 54
AB H13 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 6.5 6.5
R 10 10 13 13 20 20
S 3 3 4 4 5 5
Weight [g] 22 22 42 42 90 90
FORK MODEL GK-M
ACTUATORS
Code W0950080020 W0950080020 W0950120020 W0950120020 W0950200020 W0950322020
8 10 12 16 20 25
M 4 4 6 6 8 10
C 8 8 12 12 16 20
B 4 4 6 6 8 10
A 8 8 12 12 16 20
L 21 21 31 31 42 52
F 16 16 24 24 32 40
D M4 M4 M6 M6 M8 M10x1.25
N 11 11 16 16 22 26
Weight [g] 8 8 20 20 48 92
ROD EYE MODEL GA-M

Code W0950080025 W0950080025 W0950120025 W0950120025 W0950200025 W0950322025 8 10 12 16 20 25 M 5 5 6 6 8 10 C 10 10 11 11 13 15 B 8 8 9 9 12 14 B1 6 6 6.75 6.75 9 10.5 A 18 18 20 20 24 28 L 36 36 40 40 48 57 F 27 27 30 30 36 43 D M4 M4 M6 M6 M8 M10x1.25 G 9 9 10 10 12.5 15 G1 11 11 13 13 16 19 CH 9 9 11 11 14 17 Weight [g] 22 22 28 28 50 78
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDERS: MAGNETIC SENSORS
E RETRACTABLE SENSOR WITH INSERTION FROM ABOVE

Code Description W0952025390 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952029394 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952022180 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952028184 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952125556 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX W0952025500* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952029504* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 W0952022500* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952128184* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 * For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288 Note: Individually packed
F SENSOR CIRCLIP MOD. DSW

Code W0950000608 W0950000610 W0950000612 W0950000616 W0950000620 W0950000625 Bore 8 10 12 16 20 25 Model Circlip DSW - 08 Circlip DSW - 10 Circlip DSW - 12 Circlip DSW - 16 Circlip DSW - 20 Circlip DSW - 25 9.3 11.3 13.3 17.3 21.3 26.3 B 12.3 14.3 16.3 20.3 24.3 29.3 C 11 12 13 15.5 17.5 20 D 24 26 28 32 36 41.5 E 12.3 12.3 12.3 12.3 14 14 F 9 9 9 9 9 9
G UNIVERSAL SENSOR CIRCLIP

Code Bore W0950001103 8 to 25 Model Sensor circlip
Note: Individually packed MATERIAL Circlip: stainless steel Sensor holder: plastic
1-16
A SENSORS MOD. DSM

ACTUATORS
B 10 10 10 10 10 10 B 10 10 10 10 10 10 Code W0950000201 W0950000222 W0950000232 Bore 8 to 25 8 to 25 8 to 25 Model REED sensor DSM2 - C525 HS HALL PNP sensor DSM3 - N225 HALL NPN sensor DSM3 - M225
For technical data see page 1-286 Note: Individually packed
B SENSOR CIRCLIP MOD. DXF FOR STAINLESS STEEL BARREL

Code W0950000508 W0950000510 W0950000512 W0950000516 W0950000520 W0950000525 Bore 8 10 12 16 20 25 Model Circlip DXF - 09 Circlip DXF - 11 Circlip DXF - 13 Circlip DXF - 17 Circlip DXF - 21 Circlip DXF - 26 9.3 11.3 13.3 17.3 21.3 26.3 A 15 16.5 17.5 18.5 21 23.5
C SENSOR CIRCLIP MOD. DXF FOR ALUMINIUM BARREL

Code W0950000108 W0950000110 W0950000112 W0950000116 W0950000120 W0950000125 Bore 8 10 12 16 20 25 Model Circlip DXF 12- 8 Circlip DXF 14-10 Circlip DXF 16-12 Circlip DXF 20-16 Circlip DXF 24-20 Circlip DXF 29-25 12 14 16 20 24 29 A 17 18 19 21 23 28
Note: Individually packed. For the 16 in addition to the circlip 2 reduction rings, for the 20 and 25 1 reduction ring.
USE SENSORS
SERIES STD
SERIES TP
1-17
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDERS: MECHANICAL PISTON ROD LOCK

TECHNICAL DATA
ACTUATORS
Operating pressure Temperature range Installation Mechanics Operation Fluid Locking force Pilot port MATERIALS body shoe spring piston gasket
bar MPa C
3 to 6 0.3 to 0.6 -10 to +80 In any position Double shoe with mechanical locking Mechanical stick-slip NC bidirectional Lubricated or unlubricated compressed air 12-16: 180 N / 20: 250 N 25: 400 N M5
Aluminium Brass NBR Synthetic, with added teflo NBR
OPERATING PRINCIPLE The mechanical piston rod lock is a normally-closed mechanism. In the absence of pneumatic piloting, the two shoes (A) lock the cylinder rod in both directions (Fig. 1). With pneumatic piloting, the piston rod guide forces the shoes to come right up to each other and overcome the counter spring (B) force and the piston rod can slide (Fig. 2). It is important to remember that the mechanical piston rod lock is a static type, which means that it is necessary to stop the cylinder piston rod pneumatically before locking the part mechanically. Fig. 1 Fig. 2
DIMENSIONS
+ = ADD STROKE
BLOCK WITH THREADLOCKER
Code W5010001099 W5010001099 W5010001100 W5010001101
12 16 20 25
A m / 25 m / 25 27 27
B 25 m / 25 m / 38 38
C 31.5 31.5 40 40
D 20 20 20 20
E M5 M5 M5 M5
F M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5
G 12 12 23 23
H 19 19 21 21
I 23 23 24 24
L 47 47 58 58
M 52 52 65 68
N 53 60 71 76
P(1.2) 57 57 72 76
Weight [g] 100 100 100 100
1-18
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDERS: GUIDE UNIT

Guide units series DS-DH-DM ensure optimal alignment and anti-rotation effect of the pneumatic cylinder connected to it. The guide units can be used separately or combined in order to get complete handling units: in which case the guide units can be coupled using the type A and C anchorage (foot and flange) The guide unit can be coupled to ISO 6432 cylinders ( 12 - 25). The following versions are available: U PROFILE*: for limited loads and speeds (GDS) H PROFILE*: for high loads (GDH) H PROFILE**: for high speeds (GDM) For weights, see technical data page 1-8
* With bronze guide bushing ** With ball guide bushing GUIDE ELEMENTS
SERIES GDS-GDH Body: Guide bushing: Piston rod: Body: Guide bushing: Piston rod: aluminium alloy self-lubricating syntered bronze and wiper rings chromed rolled steel aluminium alloy linear guide ball bearings and wiper rings tempered and chromed steel
SERIES GDM
GUIDE UNIT LOAD DIAGRAM
S = PROJECTION B = BARYCENTRE P = USEFUL LOAD
1-19
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF TYPE GDH-GDM
ACTUATORS
+ = ADD THE STROKE = CENTERING PINHOLES
12 16 20 25
A 30 30 34 34
A1 27 27 32 32
B 65 65 79 79
B1 63 63 76 76
C 75 75 108 108
C1 10 10 12 12
Ch 8 8 13 13
Ch1 19 19 27 27
D 4 4 6 6
D1 5 5
E 15 15 20 20
E1 32 32 40 40
E2 54 54 68 68
E3 6.5 6.5 8.5 8.5
E4 24 24 38 38
E5 32.5 32.5 32.5 32.5
E6 22 22 23 23
E7 11 11 15 15
F M4 M4 M6 M6
F1 M4 M4 M5 M5
F2 8.5 8.5 10.5 10.5
F3 5.1 5.1 6.5 6.5
F4 7.5 7.5 9 9
F5 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5
G H I L 15 15 46 130 15 15 46 130 22 20 58 160 22 20 58 160
L1 M N P 53 54 15 5.5 60 54 15 5.5 71 65 15 7 76 65 15 7
S U 10 37 10 37 12 58 12 58
GDH (BRONZE GUIDE BUSHING)

Code W0700122 W0700162 W0700202 W0700252 Bore 12 16 20 25 Type UNIT MW DH 012 UNIT MW DH 016 UNIT MW DH 020 UNIT MW DH 025
STROKE
Cylinder stroke [mm] from to 0 75 75 125 125 175 175 225 225 275 275 345 345 425 425 525 Guide stroke [mm] 50 100 150 200 250 320 400 500
Enter the stroke in 3 digits (e.g. 50 = 050).
GDM (BALL GUIDE BUSHING)

Code W0700123 W0700163 W0700203 W0700253 Bore 12 16 20 25 Type UNIT MW DM 012 UNIT MW DM 016 UNIT MW DM 020 UNIT MW DM 025
Note: Thanks to the dimensional features, it is possible to extend the use of GDH/GDM guides to cylinders with strokes up to 25 mm above the nominal guide stroke. The table here shows the stroke/cylinder range that can be used depending on the nominal stroke of the guide.
1-20
DIMENSIONS OF TYPE GDS

A 12 30 16 30
A1 27 27
B 65 65
B1 63 63
C 38 38
C1 10 10
Ch 8 8
Ch1 D 19 4 19 4
E 15 15
E1 32 32
E2 54 54
E3 E4 6.5 24 6.5 24
E5 25 25
E6 22 22
F F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 G M4 M4 8.5 5.1 7.5 4.5 15 M4 M4 8.5 5.1 7.5 4.5 15
H 15 15
I 46 46
L 70 70
L1 53 60
M 54 54
N 13 13
P P1 S 5.5 4.5 10 5.5 4.5 10
A 20 40 25 40
A1 38 38
A2 24 65
B B1 100 90 100 90
C 48 48
C1 12 12
Ch 13 13
Ch1 D 27 6 27 6
E 15 15
E1 70 70
E2 55 55
E3 E4 E5 8.5 46.5 32 8.5 46.5 32
E6 10 10
E7 30 30
F F1 F2 M8 M6 14 M8 M6 14
F3 9 9
F4 11 11
F5 G 6.5 22 6.5 22
H 20 20
I 76 76
L 77 77
L1 71 76
M 65 71
N 17 17
P 9 9
P1 S 6.5 12 6.5 12
GDS (BRONZE GUIDE BUSHING)

Code W0700121 W0700161 W0700201 W0700251 Bore 12 16 20 25 Type UNIT MW DS 012 UNIT MW DS 016 UNIT MW DS 020 UNIT MW DS 025
STROKE
Cylinder stroke [mm] from to 0 50 51 100 101 150 151 200 201 250 Guide stroke [mm] 50 100 150 200 250
Note: Thanks to the dimensional features, it is possible to use the range of strokes - cylinders, as shown in the table here, without the guide piston rods projecting beyond the cylinder fixin value (L1 +).
1-21
ACTUATORS
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS (EX ISO 6431)
ACTUATORS
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS
Cylinders made to ISO 15552 available in various versions and with a wide range of accessories: Configuratio with or without magnet Single-or double acting single-or through-rod Wide choice of NBR, POLYURETHANE and FKM/FPM gaskets (for high temperatures, for low temperature) Special versions on request Fixing accessories, guide units and mechanical piston rod lock. They are available in three series, which differ according to the shape of the barrel and, consequently, the type of sensors and accessories that can be mounted. These cylinders are called series STD, type A, series 3.
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bore Design Standard stroke bar MPa psi C
Polyurethane
NBR
FKM/FPM
Low Temperature
Versions Sensor magnet Inrush pressure
Notes Forces generated at 6 bar thrust/retraction Weights
10 1 145 10 to +80 10 to +80 10 to +150 (non-magnetic cyl.) 35 to +80 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous mm 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; 100; 125 Heads with Tap Tite screws mm Single-acting: for bores 32 to 63 strokes from 1 to 250 Double-acting: for bores 32 to 80 strokes from 1 to 2800 for bores 100 to 125 strokes from 1 to 2600 Double-acting cushioned, Single-acting retracted piston rod cushioned, Through-rod cushioned, Long cushioning, High-temperature, Piston rod lock, Oil seal, Through-rod oil seal, Low friction, Non-stick-slip. All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request. 32; 40: 0.4 bar 50; 63 strokes < 1500 mm: 0.3 bar; strokes > 1500 mm: 0.4 bar 80; 100; 125 strokes < 1500 mm: 0.2 bar; strokes > 1500 mm: 0.4 bar For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air. Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems See page 1-7 See page 1-8
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, thick chromed b HEAD: die cast aluminium c PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM d GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert e BARREL: drawn anodised calibrated aluminium f HALF-PISTON: self-lubricating technopolymer with built-in cushioning olives (aluminium with PTFE pad for diameters 80-100-125) g PISTON GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM h MAGNET: plastoferrite i BUFFER + Static O-rings: NBR or FKM/FPM j CUSHIONING GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM k CUSHIONING NEEDLE: OT 58 with needle out movement safety system even when fully open l SCREWS: Tap Tite for assembly
1-22
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS SERIES STD (EX ISO 6431)
ISO 15552 cylinders, featuring a smooth barrel with no longitudinal slots. This means it is easier to clean the cylinder and there are fewer points where dirt can collect. Specifi brackets are required for mounting magnetic sensors.
BARREL CROSS SECTION
1-23
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS SERIES STD
ACTUATORS
KEY TO CODES CYLINDER ISO 15552 STD
ACTUATORS
CYL 120 121 122 124 125 126 127 134 136 137
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS SERIES STD
121 TYPE Double-acting, cuschioned, non-magnetic Double-acting, cushioned Through-rod Double-acting, non-cuschioned Opposed Single-acting Tandem Rod lock version Version with piston rod lock Piston rod lock + guide unit
0 0 Diameter S Non-magnetic s G No stick slip
32 BORE 32 40 50 63 80 n 100 n 125
A C Z X
C MATERIAL C45 chromed rod, aluminium piston rod: standard for all cylinders with 1000 mm-stroke cylinders and for cylinder with 80 mm and over C45 chromed rod, technopolymer piston: standard for cylinders of 32 to 63 mm with <1000 mm strokes Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston Stainless steel piston rod and nut technopolymer piston
N P V B
P GASKETS NBR gaskets Polyurethane gaskets FKM/FPM gaskets Low temperature
n In the code of cylinder with letter in fourth position 100 becomes A1; 125 becomes A2 Only available for versions with aluminium piston (A or Z) Available until 63 and only the versions with piston in aluminum (A or Z)
s For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only Available up to 100 Not available for gaskets V or B
KEY TO CODES CYLINDER ISO 15552 STD LOW-FRICTION

CYL 123 A B C D E F A TYPE Low friction, type A Low friction, type B Low friction, type C Low friction, type D Low friction, type E Low friction, type F 32 BORE 32 40 50 63 80 A1 = 100 A2 = 125 0050 STROKE 32 to 80 stroke 1 to 2800 mm 100 to 125 stroke 1 to 2600 mm C MATERIAL C45 chromed rod, aluminium piston rod: standard for all cylinders with 1000 mm-stroke cylinders and for cylinder with 80 mm and over C45 chromed rod, technopolymer piston: standard for cylinders of 32 to 63 mm with <1000 mm strokes Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston Stainless steel piston rod and nut technopolymer piston P GASKETS N NBR gaskets P Polyurethane gaskets V FKM/FPM gaskets
A C Z X
KEY TO CODES CYLINDER ISO 15552 STD LONG-CUSHIONING

CYL 131 A B C D E F G H I L M N O Q R S T U V A TYPE 200 mm front/rear cushioning cone 200 mm ext. 150 mm front/rear cushioning cone 150 mm ext. 100 mm front/rear cushioning cone 100 mm ext. 150 mm front/rear cushioning cone 200 mm ext. 100 mm front/rear cushioning cone 200 mm ext. 50 mm front/rear cushioning cone 100 mm ext. 100 mm front/rear cushioning cone 150 mm ext. 200 mm front cushioning cone 200 mm ext. 150 mm front cushioning cone 150 mm ext. 100 mm front cushioning cone 100 mm ext. 150 mm front cushioning cone 200 mm ext. 100 mm front cushioning cone 150 mm ext. 50 mm front cushioning cone 100 mm ext. 200 mm rear cushioning cone 200 mm ext. 150 mm rear cushioning cone 150 mm ext. 100 mm rear cushioning cone 100 mm ext. 150 mm rear cushioning cone 200 mm ext. 100 mm rear cushioning cone 200 mm ext. 50 mm rear cushioning cone 100 mm ext. 32 BORE 32 40 50 63 0050 STROKE 1 to 2600 mm C MATERIAL C45 chromed rod, aluminium piston rod for all sizes Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston P GASKETS N NBR gaskets P Polyurethane gaskets V FKM/FPM gaskets
A Z
1-24
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS TYPE A (EX ISO 6431)
ISO 15552 cylinders, featuring a barrel with longitudinal slots on three sides for inserting and securing retractable sensors. The same slots can also be used for valves and other mechanical parts.

a SLOTS FOR RETRACTABLE SENSOR
1-25
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS TYPE A
ACTUATORS
KEY TO CODES CYLINDER ISO 15552 TYPE A
ACTUATORS
CYL
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS TYPE A
121 TYPE 121 Double-acting, cushioned 122 Through-rod 124 Double-acting, non-cuschioned 125 Opposed 126 Single-acting 127 Tandem 134 Rod lock version 136 Version with piston rod lock 137 Piston rod lock + guide unit
A A Standard s B No stick slip C Non-magnetic
32 BORE 32 40 50 63 80 A1 = 100 A2 = 125
A C Z X
C MATERIAL C45 chromed rod, aluminium piston rod: standard for all cylinders with 1000 mm-stroke cylinders and for cylinder with 80 mm and over C45 chromed rod, technopolymer piston: standard for cylinders of 32 to 63 mm with <1000 mm strokes Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston Stainless steel piston rod and nut technopolymer piston
N P V B
P GASKETS NBR gaskets Polyurethane gaskets FKM/FPM gaskets Low temperature
Only available for versions with aluminium piston (A or Z) Available until 63 and only the versions with piston in aluminum (A or Z) For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only Available up to 100
Not available for gaskets V or B
KEY TO CODES CYLINDER ISO 15552 LOW-FRICTION TYPE A

CYL 129 A B C D E F A TYPE Low friction, type A Low friction, type B Low friction, type C Low friction, type D Low friction, type E Low friction, type F 32 BORE 32 40 50 63 80 A1 = 100 A2 = 125 0050 STROKE 32 to 80 stroke 1 to 2800 mm 100 to 125 stroke 1 to 2600 mm C MATERIAL C45 chromed rod, aluminium piston rod: standard for all cylinders with 1000 mm-stroke cylinders and for cylinder with 80 mm and over C45 chromed rod, technopolymer piston: standard for cylinders of 32 to 63 mm with <1000 mm strokes Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston Stainless steel piston rod and nut technopolymer piston P GASKETS N NBR gaskets P Polyurethane gaskets V FKM/FPM gaskets
A C Z X
KEY TO CODES CYLINDER ISO 15552 LONG-CUSHIONING TYPE A

CYL 130 A B C D E F G H I L M N O Q R S T U V A TYPE 200 mm front/rear cushioning cone 200 mm ext. 150 mm front/rear cushioning cone 150 mm ext. 100 mm front/rear cushioning cone 100 mm ext. 150 mm front/rear cushioning cone 200 mm ext. 100 mm front/rear cushioning cone 200 mm ext. 50 mm front/rear cushioning cone 100 mm ext. 100 mm front/rear cushioning cone 150 mm ext. 200 mm front cushioning cone 200 mm ext. 150 mm front cushioning cone 150 mm ext. 100 mm front cushioning cone 100 mm ext. 150 mm front cushioning cone 200 mm ext. 100 mm front cushioning cone 150 mm ext. 50 mm front cushioning cone 100 mm ext. 200 mm rear cushioning cone 200 mm ext. 150 mm rear cushioning cone 150 mm ext. 100 mm rear cushioning cone 100 mm ext. 150 mm rear cushioning cone 200 mm ext. 100 mm rear cushioning cone 200 mm ext. 50 mm rear cushioning cone 100 mm ext. 32 BORE 32 40 50 63 0050 STROKE 1 to 2600 mm A MATERIAL C45 chromed rod, aluminium piston rod for all sizes Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston P GASKETS N NBR gaskets P Polyurethane gaskets V FKM/FPM gaskets
A Z
1-26
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS SERIES 3 (EX ISO 6431)
ISO 15552 cylinders, featuring specially-shaped barrels designed to reduce weight to a minimum. Two T-slots on the same side as the threaded fitting can take retractable sensors. The other three sides of the barrel are smooth, with no slots, and hence easy to clean.

a SLOTS FOR RETRACTABLE SENSOR
KEY TO CODES
CYL 121 122 124 125 126 127 134 n 136 n 137 121 TYPE Double-acting, cushioned Through-rod Double-acting, non-cuschioned Opposed Single-acting Tandem Rod lock version Version with piston rod lock Piston rod lock + guide unit 3 3 4 5 Series 3 Series 3 No stick slip Series 3 Non-magnetic 32 BORE 32 40 50 63 80 A1 = 100 A2 = 125 0050 STROKE For the maximum suppliable strokes, look at the technical data C MATERIAL C45 chromed rod, aluminium piston rod: standard for all cylinders with 1000 mm-stroke cylinders and for cylinder with 80 mm and over C45 chromed rod, technopolymer piston: standard for cylinders of 32 to 63 mm with <1000 mm strokes Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston Stainless steel piston rod and nut technopolymer piston N GASKETS NBR gaskets Polyurethane gaskets FKM/FPM gaskets Low temperature
A C Z X
N P V B
Only available for versions with aluminium piston (A or Z) Available until 63 and only the versions with piston in aluminum (A or Z) For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only
Available until 100 n Not available for gasket V or B
1-27
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS SERIES 3
ACTUATORS
ISO 15552 LOW-FRICTION CYLINDERS (EX ISO 6431) CODE 123 FOR SERIES STD CODE 129 FOR TYPE A
ACTUATORS
ISO 15552 LOW FRICTIONS CYLINDERS The low-friction cylinder is typically used as a dandy or tensioning cylinder since it is a single-acting cylinder without a return spring. The configuration are shown below: 1) The best type is A as it involves less friction. 2) Type B should be used when the cylinder is working under normal conditions outside the pneumatic cushioning area. Cushioning is only for emergency use. It acts as a shock absorber in the case of malfunction. 3) Type C differs from type A due to the presence of a piston rod gasket that prevents dirt getting in when operating in dirty environments. 4) Type D differs from type B due to the presence of a piston rod gasket that prevents dirt getting in when operating in dirty environments. 5) Type E should be used when the pressurized chamber is the front one. 6) For type F, see point 2. NB. THE CYLINDER IS ALWAYS SINGLE-ACTING WITHOUT A RETURN SPRING.
TYPE Rear chamber pressure Rear chamber pressure and cushioning in case of impact Rear chamber pressure and piston rod gasket Rear chamber pressure, cushioning in case of impact and piston rod gasket Front chamber pressure Front chamber pressure and cushioning in case of impact A B C D E F GASKETS 1 1+3 1+5 1+3+5 2+5 2+5+4
COMPONENTS a Rear chamber piston gasket made of polyurethane ( 32 to 125) b Front chamber piston gasket made of polyurethane ( 32 to 125) c Rear chamber cushioning gasket made of polyurethane d Front chamber cushioning gasket made of polyurethane e Piston rod gasket made of polyurethane
1-28
ISO 15552 ULTRA-LOW FRICTIONS CYLINDERS (EX ISO 6431)
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bore Standard stroke Design Versions Sensor magnet Inrush pressure bar MPa psi C
NBR 10 1 145 10 to +80 Unlubricated air mm 32; 40; 50; 63 mm 1 to 1200 Heads with Tap Tite screws Double-acting magnetic, Double-acting non-magnetic (always no stick slip cylinder) All the versions with or without magnet bar 32 = 0.08 40 = 0.06 50 = 0.05 63 = 0.04 See page 1-7 See page 1-8 There may be leakage between the two chambers in the presence of low pressures (up to 1 bar)
Forces generated at 6 bar thrust/retraction Weights Notes
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, thick chromed b HEAD: die cast aluminium c PISTON ROD GASKET: NBR d GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze insert e BARREL: drawn anodised calibrated aluminium f PISTON GASKET: NBR g HALF-PISTON: aluminium alloy h MAGNET: plastoferrite i GUIDE RING: special technopolymer j BUFFER + Static O-rings: NBR k CUSHIONING NEEDLE: OT 58 with needle out movement safety system even when fully open l SCREWS: Tap Tite for assembly
1-29
ISO 15552 ULTRA-LOW FRICTIONS CYLINDERS
A typical ultra-low friction cylinder is generally used as an oscillating or tensioning cylinder. It is single acting, in the sense that compressed air is normally fed into one of the two chambers only. An external force acts on the other side. Metal Works ultra-low friction cylinder is designed as a double-acting one, which means the compressed air can be fed into the rear or either the front chamber. They are built to comply with ISO 15552 and are available with or without a magnet. Supplied with a series 3 barrel. A through-rod version is not available. These cylinders are always non-cushioned. The gaskets are made of NBR. A full range of accessories is available.
ACTUATORS
DIAGRAM OF THE CLEAN FRICTIONS
ACTUATORS
ISO 15552 ULTRA-LOW FRICTIONS CYLINDERS
Friction clearly a [N]
Pressure P [bar]
The clean friction values a in N have been obtained by inserting in the back chamber the pressure P in bars, and simultaneously by detecting the necessary force F in N to make the rod re-enter, applying the following formula: a = F [(P x S) x 9.81] where S is the thrust section in cm2 KEY TO CODES
CYL 123 TYPE 123 Ultra-low friction 3 3 5 Double-acting magnetic Double-acting not magnetic 32 BORE 32 40 50 63 0100 STROKE From 1 to 1200 mm A MATERIAL C45 chromed rod, aluminium piston rod Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston N GASKETS N NBR gaskets
A Z
ALL the cylinders are no stick slip. ALL the cylinders are non-cushioned. Ultra-low friction cylinders are not available in the through-rod version.
1-30
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS WITH COMBI PISTON ROD GASKET (EX ISO 6431)
FEATURES AND ADVANTAGES COMBI gaskets have three functions - sealing, scraping and securing. The outer projection of the scraper ring secures the cylinder head in its seat, so steel retaining rings are not required. This eliminates the risk of corrosion due to the presence of metal. Friction is reduced. The materials used in the scraper ring and sealing element make the gasket extremely long lasting. Cylinders with COMBI gaskets can be used with unlubricated dry air. The cylinder head seat is the same as for other Metal Work cylinder gaskets, so the cylinder head is standard.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE The gasket is housed in the cylinder head a. Inside the cylinder there is compressed air c. Dirt d deposits on the piston rod b. The sealing element e provides the pneumatic seal. The scraper ring f cleans the piston rod. The projection g on the scraper ring secures the gasket in the cylinder head seat.
TECHNICAL DATA Bores: 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; 100; 125. The same as for ISO 15552 cylinders with NBR gaskets. Maximum recommended speed: 1 m/s.
KEY TO CODES The codes for ISO 15552 cylinders apply, the last letter C identifying the type of gasket. Example: 1210320100CC: ISO 15552 cylinder, dual-acting, cushioned, magnetic, diameter 32, stroke 100 mm, piston rod made of C45 chrome, COMBI piston rod gasket, other gaskets NBR.
1-31
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS WITH COMBI PISTON ROD GASKET
In some applications the piston rod is exposed to pollutants and dirt, which tend to adhere to the surface. Ordinary gaskets are made of relatively soft elastomers as their main job is to provide a pneumatic seal. In critical applications they are unable to scrape dirt off the surface of the piston rod. COMBI piston rod gaskets are designed to solve these problems. They are made up of two separate parts: a sealing element, inside the cylinder, made of a special NBR elastomer with a Shore A hardness of 80 to provide a pneumatic seal. a scraper ring, outside the cylinder, made of highly wear-resistant plastic.
ACTUATORS
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS DIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONS OF STANDARD VERSION
ACTUATORS
+ = ADD THE STROKE

TYPE A SERIES STD SERIES 3
DIMENSIONS OF THROUGH-ROD VERSION

+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE
SERIES STD SERIES 3
TYPE A
32 40 50 63 80 100 125
PL 10 12 14 16 18 20 25
VD 6.5 8 13 14 12 14 20
A 10 10 10 10 12 12 10
B 30 35 40 45 45 55 60
B1 28 33 38 40 43 49 54
WH 26 30 37 37 46 51 65
C1 16 20 25 25 33 38 45
CH1 10 13 17 17 22 22 27
CH2 17 19 24 24 30 30 41
CH3 6 6 8 8 10 10 12
KK M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M27x2
D 12 16 20 20 25 25 32
TG 32.5 38 46.5 56.5 72 89 110
VA 4 4 4 4 4 4 6
F 22 24 32 32 40 40 54
EE G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G3/8 G3/8 G1/2 G1/2
RT M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10 M12
E 46 54 64.5 75.5 94 111 135
L 120 135 143 158 174 189 225
L0 94 105 106 121 128 138 160
ZM 146 165 180 195 220 240 290
BG 14.5 14.5 17.5 17.5 21.5 21.5 25.5
N 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 6.5
P 6 6 6 6 10 10 12
Q 4 4 6 6 7 7 8
VERSION 126 (SINGLE-ACTING)

Upper limit 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 Stroke < C < C < C < C < C < C < C < C < C < C Lower limit 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 L0- 32 94 94 115 136 157 178 199 220 241 262 L0 - 40 105 105 129.5 154 178.5 203 227.5 252 276.5 301 L0 - 50 106 106 130.5 155 179.5 204 228.5 253 277.5 302 L0 - 63 121 121 145.5 170 194.5 219 243.5 268 292.5 317 L - 32 120 120 141 162 183 204 225 246 267 288 L - 40 135 135 159.5 184 208.5 233 257.5 282 306.5 331 L - 50 143 143 167.5 192 216.5 241 265.5 290 314.5 339 L - 63 158 158 182.5 207 231.5 256 280.5 305 329.5 354
ISO ISO NON ISO NON ISO NON ISO NON ISO NON ISO NON ISO NON ISO NON ISO
1-32
DIMENSIONS OF 100 mm CUSHIONING VERSION

+ = ADD THE STROKE
SERIES STD SERIES 3
TYPE A
32 40 50 63
PL 10 12 14 16
VD 6.5 8 13 14
A 10 10 10 10
B 30 35 40 45
B1 29 34 38 38
WH1 106 107 113.5 113.5
C2 96 97 101.5 101.5
CH1 10 13 17 17
CH2 17 19 24 24
CH3 6 6 8 8
CH4 27 30 35 35
KK M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5
D 12 16 20 20
TG 32.5 38 46.5 56.5
VA1 79 76.5 76.5 76.5
F 22 24 32 32
EE G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G3/8
RT M6 M6 M8 M8
E 46 54 64.5 75.5
L1 200 212 219.5 234.5
L0 94 105 106 121
BG 14.5 14.5 17.5 17.5
N 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5
P 6 6 6 6
Q 4 4 6 6

32 40 50 63 WH1 156 157 162.5 162.5 C2 146 147 150.5 150.5 VA1 129 121.5 119.5 123.5 L1 250 262 268.5 283.5

32 40 50 63 WH1 206 207 213.5 213.5 C2 196 197 201.5 201.5 VA1 179 176.5 176.5 176.5 L1 300 312 319.5 334.5
1-33
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF TANDEM VERSION
ACTUATORS
++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE
32 40 50 63 80 100 125
WH 26 30 37 37 46 51 65
VA 4 4 4 4 4 4 6
R 55 55 68 68 92 92 120
L 243 265 280 310 348 368 440
L1 273 299 321 351 398 423 511
Refer to standard cylinders for other values.
DIMENSIONS OF OPPOSED VERSION

X1 = STROKE CYLINDER 1 X2 = STROKE CYLINDER 2
32 40 50 63 80 100 125
WH 26 30 37 37 46 51 65
R 55 55 68 68 92 92 120
L 243 265 280 310 348 368 440
L1 295 325 354 384 440 470 570
Refer to standard cylinders for other values.
1-34
ISO 15552 TWO-FLAT CYLINDERS (EX ISO 6431)
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bore Design Maximun stroke Versions Sensor magnet Inrush pressure Max torque on piston rod Maximum rotation on the rod Forces generated at 6 bar thrust/retraction Weights Notes bar MPa psi C mm mm
POLYURETHANE 10 1 145 10 to +80 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 32; 40; 50; 63 Heads with Tap Tite screws 32 = 300 40 = 400 50 = 500 63 = 500 Double-acting cushioned, Through-rod cushioned, no-stick slip All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request. 32 = 0.4 40 = 0.4 50 = 0.3 63 = 0.3 32 = 0.2 40 = 0.4 50 = 1 63 = 1 32 = 0.70 40 = 0.75 50 = 0.65 63 = 0.65 See page 1-7 See page 1-8 * For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air.
bar Nm degrees
KEY TO CODES FOR ISO 15552 TWO-FLAT STD CYLINDERS

CYL 121 TYPE 120 Double-acting, cuschioned, non-magnetic 121 Double-acting, cuschioned 122 Through-rod 0 0 S s G Diameter Non-magnetic No stick slip 32 BORE 32 40 50 63 0050 STROKE 32 stroke 1 to 300 mm 40 stroke 1 to 400 mm 50 to 63 stroke 1 to 500 mm F MATERIAL Two Flat piston rod AISI 303 stainless steel nut P GASKETS P Polyurethane gaskets
Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems s For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only
KEY TO CODES FOR ISO 15552 TWO-FLAT TYPE A CYLINDERS

CYL 121 TYPE 121 Double-acting, cuschioned 122 Through-rod A A s B C Standard No stick slip Non-magnetic 32 BORE 32 40 50 63 0050 STROKE 32 stroke 1 to 300 mm 40 stroke 1 to 400 mm 50 to 63 stroke 1 to 500 mm F MATERIAL Two Flat piston rod AISI 303 stainless steel nut P GASKETS P Polyurethane gaskets
Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems s For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only
1-35
ISO 15552 TWO-FLAT CYLINDERS
This version of cylinder is used to keep the parts fixe to the piston rod at an angle and to apply torques within the specifie limits. The piston rod of the Two Flat has two opposing longitudinal surfaces; it is made of stainless steel. The front cylinder head includes a sintered bronze bush that matches the profil of the piston rod and prevents it from rotating on its own axis. A special polyurethane gasket ensures pneumatic seal and prevents the accumulation of dirt. This technical solution is more reliable and gives a better pneumatic seal than with square or hexagonal piston rods. Supplied in series STD, with a smooth barrel, and type A, with a barrel with slots for retractable sensors. They are available in several versions and with a wide range of accessories: with or without magnet double acting, single piston rod double acting, through rod; one piston rod is Two Flat, the other cylindrical fixin accessories.
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
ISO 15552 TWO-FLAT CYLINDERS
+ = ADD THE STROKE

32 40 50 63
A 10 12 14 16
A1 7 9 14 14
A2 10 10 10 10
B 30 35 40 45
C 26 30 37 37
C1 16 20 25 25
CH 10 13 17 17
CH1 6 6 8 8
CH2 10 13 17 17
CH3 17 19 24 24
D M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5
D1 12 16 20 20
D2 15 19 19 23
E 32.5 38 46.5 56.5
E1 5 5 5 5
F 22 24 32 32
G G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G3/8
G1 M6 M6 M8 M8
H 47 53 65 75
L 120 135 143 158
L0 94 105 106 121
L1 74 81 78 89
L2 146 165 180 195
M 9 9 12 12
N 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5
P 6 6 6 6
Q 4 4 6 6
1-36
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 15552 STD, TYPE A, SERIES 3, TWO FLAT: FIXINGS
FOOT - MODEL A
+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950322001 W0950402001 W0950502001 W0950632001 W0950802001 W0951002001 W0951252001 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 AB 7 9 9 9 12 14 16 AH 32 36 45 50 63 71 90 AO 11 15 15 15 20 25 15 AT 4 4 4 6 6 6 7 AU 24 28 32 32 41 41 45 TR 32 36 45 50 63 75 90 E 45 52 65 75 95 115 140 XA 144 163 175 190 215 230 270 SA 142 161 170 185 210 220 250 Weight [g] 76 100 162 266 456 572 1130
Note: ndividually packed with 2 screws
FEMALE HINGE - MODEL B

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950322003 W0950402003 W0950502003 W0950632003 W0950802003 W0951002003 W0951252003 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 UB 45 52 60 70 90 110 130 CB 26 28 32 40 50 60 70 FL 22 25 27 32 36 41 50 CD 10 12 12 16 16 20 25 XD 142 160 170 190 210 230 275 MR 10 12 12 16 16 20 25 L 12 15 15 20 20 25 30 Weight [g] 116 160 252 394 670 1085 2000
Note: Supplied with 4 screws, 4 washers, 2 snap-rings, 1 pin
MALE HINGE - MODEL BA

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950322004 W0950402004 W0950502004 W0950632004 W0950802004 W0951002004 W0951252004 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 EW 26 28 32 40 50 60 70 FL 22 25 27 32 36 41 50 MR 11 13 13 17 17 21 26 CD 10 12 12 16 16 20 25 L 12 15 15 20 20 25 30 XD 142 160 170 190 210 230 275 Weight [g] 94 124 220 316 578 850 1590
Note: Supplied with 4 screws, 4 washers
ARTICULATED MALE HINGE - MODEL BAS

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950322006 W0950402006 W0950502006 W0950632006 W0950802006 W0951002006 W0951252006 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 DL 22 25 27 32 36 41 50 MS 16 19 19 24 24 30 36 L 12 15 15 20 20 25 30 XN 142 160 170 190 210 230 275 CX 10 12 12 16 16 20 25 EX 14 16 16 21 21 25 31 Weight [g] 106 142 236 336 572 840 1520
CETOP HINGE FOR MODEL B - MODEL GL

Code W0950322008 W0950402008 W0950502008 W0950632008 W0950802008 W0951002008 W0951252008 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 A 26 28 32 40 50 60 70 B 19 26 26 33 33 44 44 C 7 9 9 11 11 14 14 D 10 12 12 16 16 20 25 E 25 32 32 40 40 50 50 F 20 32 32 50 50 70 70 G 32 45 45 63 63 90 90 H 37 54 54 75 75 103 103 I 41 52 52 63 63 80 80 L 18 25 25 32 32 40 40 M 8 10 10 12 12 16 16 N 10 12 12 15 15 22 22 Weight [g] 96 216 212 440 464 985 1000
1-37
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 15552 CYLINDERS
ACTUATORS
HINGE FOR MODEL B - MODEL GS ISO

ACTUATORS
Code W0950322108 W0950402108 W0950502108 W0950632108 W0950802108 W0951002108 32 40 50 63 80 100 B 25.5 27.5 31.5 39.5 49.5 59.5 C 32.5 38 46.5 56.5 72 89 D 45 52 65 75 95 115 E 7 7 9 9 11 11 G 32 36 45 50 63 73 J 11 13 13 17 17 21 L 10 10 12 12 16 16 M 10 12 12 16 16 20 N 10 12 12 15 15 22 Weight [g] 106 138 252 350 655 980
ISO 15552 HINGE FOR MODEL B - MODEL AB7

Code W0950322017 W0950402017 W0950502017 W0950632017 W0950802017 W0951002017 W0951252017 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 EM 26 28 32 40 50 60 70 B 20 22 26 30 30 38 45 HB 6.6 6.6 9 9 11 11 14 CK 10 12 12 16 16 20 25 TE 38 41 50 52 66 76 94 RA 18 22 30 35 40 50 60 PH 32 36 45 50 63 71 90 UR 31 35 45 50 60 70 90 UL 51 54 65 67 86 96 124 L 3 2 3 2 7 5 10 BT 8 10 12 14* 14 17* 20 EA 10 15* 16 16 20 20 30 P 21 21 21 21 21 11 21 Q 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Weight [g] 60 85 162 191 332 522 960
* Dimensions not to ISO 15552
FRONT FLANGE - MODEL C

Code W0950322002 W0950402002 W0950502002 W0950632002 W0950802002 W0951002002 W0951252002 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 TF 64 72 90 100 126 150 180 UF 80 90 110 120 153 178 220 E 50 55 65 75 95 115 140 MF 10 10 12 12 16 16 20 R 32 36 45 50 63 75 90 FB 7 9 9 9 12 14 16 W 16 20 25 25 30 35 45 Weight [g] 246 290 522 670 1420 2040 4300
Note: Supplied with 4 screws
REAR FLANGE - MODEL C

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950322002 W0950402002 W0950502002 W0950632002 W0950802002 W0951002002 W0951252002 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 TF 64 72 90 100 126 150 180 UF 80 90 110 120 153 178 220 E 50 55 65 75 95 115 140 MF 10 10 12 12 16 16 20 R 32 36 45 50 63 75 90 FB 7 9 9 9 12 14 16 ZF 130 145 155 170 190 205 245 Weight [g] 246 290 522 670 1420 2040 4300
Note: Supplied with 4 screws.
ROD NUT - MODEL S

Code 0950322010 0950402010 0950502010 0950802010 0951252010 32 40 50/63 80/100 125 F M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M27x2 H 6 7 8 9 12 CH 17 19 24 30 41 Weight [g] 6 12 20 32 74
1-38
FORK MODEL GK-M

Code W0950322020 W0950402020 W0950502020 W0950502020 W0950802020 W0950802020 W0951252020 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 M 10 12 16 16 20 20 30 C 20 24 32 32 40 40 54 B 10 12 16 16 20 20 30 A 20 24 32 32 40 40 55 L 52 62 83 83 105 105 148 F 40 48 64 64 80 80 110 D M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M27x2 N 26 32 40 40 48 48 65 Weight [g] 92 148 340 340 690 690 1835
ROD EYE - MODEL GA-M

Code W0950322025 W0950402025 W0950502025 W0950502025 W0950802025 W0950802025 W0951252025 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 M 10 12 16 16 20 20 30 C 15 17 22 22 26 26 36 B1 10.5 12 15 15 18 18 25 B 14 16 21 21 25 25 37 A 28 32 42 42 50 50 70 L 57 66 85 85 102 102 145 F 43 50 64 64 77 77 110 D M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M27x2 G 15 17.5 22 22 27.5 27.5 40 CH 17 19 22 22 30 30 41 G1 19 19 22 22 27 27 50 Weight [g] 78 116 226 226 404 404 1190
SELF ALIGNING ROD COUPLER - MODEL GA-K

Code W0950322030 W0950402030 W0950502030 W0950502030 W0950802030 W0950802030 32 40 50 63 80 100 A M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 B 20 24 32 32 40 40 C 20 20 32 32 40 40 D 71 75 103 103 119 119 F 22 22 32 32 32 32 E 4 4 4 4 4 4 SW1 12 12 20 20 20 20 SW2 30 30 41 41 41 41 SW3 30 30 41 41 41 41 SW4 19 19 30 30 30 30 SW5 17 19 24 24 30 30 Weight [g] 216 220 620 620 680 680
NOTES
1-39
ACTUATORS
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 15552 CYLINDERS: INTERMEDIATE HINGE

INTERMEDIATE HINGE - MODEL EN, FOR STD AND STD TWO-FLAT SERIES
+ = ADD THE STROKE + 1/2 = ADD HALF THE STROKE Code 0950322007 0950402007 0950502007 0950632007 0950802007 0951002007 0951252007 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 X (min) 63 72 83 86.5 104 113.5 135 XV 73 82.5 90 97.5 110 120 145 X (max) 83 93 97 108.5 116 126.5 155 TM 50 63 75 90 110 132 160 TL 12 16 16 20 20 25 25 TD e 9 12 16 16 20 20 25 25 TK 22 28 32 35 40 45 50 UW 65 75 95 105 130 145 175 Weight [g] 282 582 880 1230 2030 2600 3900
ACTUATORS
Note: Supplied complete with 4 grub screws, 2 pins
INTERMEDIATE HINGE - MODEL EN, FOR TYPE A AND TYPE A TWO-FLAT SERIES
= ADD THE STROKE + + 1/2 = ADD HALF THE STROKE Code 0950322107 0950402107 0950502107 0950632107 0950802107 0951002107 0951252107 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 X (min) 63 72 83 86.5 104 113.5 135 XV 73 82.5 90 97.5 110 120 145 X (max) 83 93 97 108.5 116 126.5 155 TM 50 63 75 90 110 132 160 TL 12 16 16 20 20 25 25 TD e 9 12 16 16 20 20 25 25 TK 22 28 28 36 36 45 50 UW 65 75 95 105 130 145 175 Weight [g] 170 360 580 950 1480 2140 2950
Note: Supplied with 8 grub screws, 2 pins
COUNTER-HINGE FOR MODEL EN - MODEL EL

Code W0950322009 W0950402009 W0950402009 W0950632009 W0950632009 W0951002009 W0951002009 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 A 46 55 55 65 65 75 75 A1 32 36 36 42 42 50 50 B 18 21 21 23 23 28.5 28.5 C 30 36 36 40 40 50 50 C1 15 18 18 20 20 25 25 D1 11 15 15 18 18 20 20 D2 7 9 9 11 11 13 13 D 12 16 16 20 20 25 25 E 6.5 8.5 8.5 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5 H 10.5 12 12 13 13 16 16 L 22 28 28 35 35 40 40 Weight [g] 162 278 278 414 414 715 715
Note: 2-pieces pack with 4 screws
1-40
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 15552 CYLINDERS: MECHANICAL ROD BLOCK

TECHNICAL DATA
Locking force MATERIAL body shoe spring piston gasket Pilot port
Aluminium Brass NBR Synthetic material with added Teflo NBR M5 or 1/8
OPERATING PRINCIPLE The mechanical piston rod lock is a normally-closed mechanism. In the absence of pneumatic piloting, the two shoes (A) lock the cylinder rod in both directions (Fig. 1). With pneumatic piloting, the piston rod guide forces the shoes to come right up to each other and overcome the counter spring (B) force and the piston rod can slide (Fig. 2). It is important to remember that the mechanical piston rod lock is a static type, which means that it is necessary to stop the cylinder piston rod pneumatically before locking the part mechanically. Fig. 1 Fig. 2
DIMENSIONS
+ = ADD THE STROKE
Code W5010001102 W5010001103 W5010001104 W5010001109 W5010001106 W5010001107 W5010001108
32 40 50 63 80 100 125
L1 58 65 82 82 110 115 167
L2 48 55 70 70 90 100 122
L4 8 8 15 15 18 18 22
L7 45 50 60 70 90 105 140
L8 34 38 48 49.5 61 68 86.5
D 12 16 20 20 25 25 32
D1 30 35 40 45 45 55 60
D2 35 40 50 60 80 100 130
D3 25 28 35 38 48 58 65
H 46.5 53 64 75 95 110.5 150
A 32.5 38 46.5 56.5 72 89 110
T1 13 13 16 16 20 20 30
M M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10 M12
Z M6x20 M6x20 M8x30 M8x30 M10x35 M10x35 M12x40
Q M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8
L0 94 105 106 121 128 138 160
L 162 180 200 215 251 266 347
Weight [g] 150 200 500 700 1700 2700 5600
1-41
ACTUATORS
Pilot pressure Temperature range Operation Mechanics
bar MPa C F
4 to 8 0.4 to 0.8 -10 to +80 14 to 176 NC - bidirectional Double shoe with mechanical lock Mechanical stick-slip 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 N 650 1100 1600 2500 4000 6300 8700
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 15552 CYLINDERS: GUIDE UNITS

ACTUATORS
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 15552 CYLINDERS Guide units series DS-DH-DM ensure optimal alignment and anti-rotation effect of the pneumatic cylinder connected to it. The guide units can be used separately or combined in order to get complete handling units, in which case the guide units can be coupled using the type A and C anchorage (pin and flange) The guide units can be coupled to ISO 15552 cylinders ( 32 to 100). The following versions are available: U PROFILE*: for limited loads and speeds (GDS) H PROFILE*: for high loads (GDH) H PROFILE**: for high speeds (GDM) STANDARD STROKES: 50 - 100 - 150 - 200 - 250 - 320 - 400 - 500 * Bronze guide bushings ** Ball guide bushings (For weights, see technical data page 1-9)
COMPONENTS
SERIES GDS-GDH Body: Guide bushing: Piston rod: Body: Guide bushing: Piston rod: aluminium alloy self-lubricating sintered bronze and wiper rings chromed rolled steel aluminium alloy ball linear bearings and scraper ring tempered stainless steel
SERIES GDM
GRAPH OF GUIDE UNIT LOADS
S = PROJECTION B = BARYCENTRE P = PAY LOAD
1-42
DIMENSIONS TYPE GDS

VIEW X-Y
32 40 50 63 80 100
A 48 56 66 76 98 118
A1 45 53 63 73 95 115
B 100 106 125 132 165 185
B1 95 101 120 127 160 180
C 48 58 59 76 90 110
C1 12 15 15 15 16 16
DH7 6 6 6 6 6 6
E 32.5 38 46.5 56.5 72 89
E1 32.5 38 46.5 56.5 50 70
E2 78 84 100 105 130 150
E3 58 64 80 95 130 150
F M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
F1 6.5 6.5 8.5 8.5 11 11
F2H7 6 6 6 6 6 6
G 18 21 24 24 31 31
H 31 36 45 45 56 56
I 74 80 96 104 130 152
L 108 120 130 145 170 190
L1 94 105 106 121 128 138
M 46 52 65 65 71 71
N 17 21 25 25 34 39
O 7.8 10 6.3 9.8 20 20
O1 7.8 10 6.3 9.8 9 10.5
S 12 12 16 16 20 20
CH 15 15 22 22 27 27
DIMENSIONS TYPE GDH-GDM

VIEW X-Y
32 40 50 63 80 100
A 49 58 69 85 105 129
A1 45 54 63 79 99 120
B 97 115 137 152 189 213
B1 90 110 130 145 180 200
C 125 139 148 182 215 220
C1 12 15 15 15 20 20
CH 13 15 22 22 27 27
DH7 6 6 6 6 6 6
E 32.5 38 46.5 56.5 72 89
E2 78 84 100 105 130 150
E3 61 69 85 100 130 150
F M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
F1 6.5 6.5 8.5 8.5 11 11
F2H7 6 6 6 6 6 6
G 18 21 24 24 31 31
H 31 36 45 45 56 56
I 74 87 104 119 148 172
L 177 192 205 237 280 280
L1 94 105 106 121 128 138
M 47 53 63 62 76 76
N 17 21 26 26 34 39
O 4.3 11 18.5 15.3 21 24.5
S 12 16 20 20 25 25
U 76 81 78 111 128 128
1-43
ACTUATORS
ORDER CODE GUIDE UNIT
ACTUATORS
Version Sliding on bronze bushings (GDS)
Code W0700321... W0700401... W0700501... W0700631... W0700801... W0701001...
Bore 32 40 50 63 80 100
Type UNIT MW DS 032... UNIT MW DS 040... UNIT MW DS 050... UNIT MW DS 063... UNIT MW DS 080... UNIT MW DS 100...
Sliding on bronze bushings (GDH)
W0700322... W0700402... W0700502... W0700632... W0700802... W0701002...
32 40 50 63 80 100
UNIT MW DH 032... UNIT MW DH 040... UNIT MW DH 050... UNIT MW DH 063... UNIT MW DH 080... UNIT MW DH 100...
Sliding on ball bearing (GDM)
W0700323... W0700403... W0700503... W0700633... W0700803... W0701003...
32 40 50 63 80 100
UNIT MW DM 032... UNIT MW DM 040... UNIT MW DM 050... UNIT MW DM 063... UNIT MW DM 080... UNIT MW DM 100...
Note: To complete the type and code, add the 3-digit stroke (e.g. 50=050)
DIMENSIONS PISTON ROD LOCK + GUIDE UNIT COD. 137

32 40 50 63 80 100 C 74 85 107 107 136 143
1-44
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 15552 CYLINDERS: MAGNETIC SENSORS

RETRACTABLE SENSOR WITH INSERTION FROM ABOVE SENSOR MOD. DSM
SENSOR SUPPORT BRACKETS FOR SENSORS DSM 32 to 40
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. Can be used on all ISO 15552 cylinders. Use the adaptor to secure to STD cylinders. For technical data see pag. 1-288
ADAPTOR FOR RETRACTABLE SENSOR
Code W0950000711
Description Bracket D.32 DST 80
50 to 63
Code W0950001001
Description Adaptor DSS005 for DST/ST brackets
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM a ISO 15552 cylinder with Serie STD or Serie 3 barrel b Sensor bracket mod. DST ( 32 to 125) c Adaptor d Retractable sensor with insertion from above
Code W0950000712
80 to 125
Code W0950000713
Description Bracket D.80-100-125 DST 82
1-45
Code W0952025390 W0952029394 W0952022180 W0952028184 W0952125556 W0952025500* W0952029504* W0952022500* W0952128184*
Description HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8
Code Description W0950000201 REED sensor DSM2-C525 HS W0950000222 E.HALL PNP sensor DSM3-N225 W0950000232 E. HALL NPN sensor DSM3-M225 Can be used on ISO 15552 cylinders in the STD series and series 3. For technical data see pag. 1-286
ACTUATORS
VALVE ASSEMBLY ON CYLINDER FOR TYPE A AND SERIES 3 CYLINDERS
ACTUATORS
With this type of cylinder, the valves (D) can be mounted directly using the retracting sensor slot, without requiring the use of intermediate brackets. This can be done using the special plates (A), which come with both the M3 and M4 threads, and screws (B) of the size, type and quantity shown in the table below. For ISO 1 and ISO 2 valves, the kit on which the valve is to be mounted (codes shown in the tables) will be fitte to the cylinder using the special plates (A) and the screws (B) listed in the table.
Type of valve to mount (D) MACH 11 SERIE 70 1/8 SERIE 70 1/4 SERIE 70 1/2 ISO 1 ISO 2
M3 fixing plate (A) code 0950003002 n 2
M4 fixing plate (A) code 0950003001 n 2 n 2 n 2 n 2 n 2
Screw (B) for connection to cylinder (one per plate) M3x16 UNI 5931 (DIN 912) M4x25 UNI 5931 (DIN 912) M4x30 UNI 5931 (DIN 912) M4x45 UNI 5931 (DIN 912) M4x8 UNI 7688 (DIN 965A) M4x8 UNI 7688 (DIN 965A)
Washer (B) (one per screw) A3.2 UNI 1751 (DIN 127A) A4.3 UNI 1751 (DIN 127A) A4.3 UNI 1751 (DIN 127A)
Valve assembly kit 0950002001 0950002002
FIXING BRACKET SERIES KCV FOR TYPE A AND SERIES 3 CYLINDERS Fig.
Fig.
VALVE FIXING BRACKET - CYLINDER (Fig. A)

Code 0950322090 0950402090 0950502090 0950632090 0950802090 0951002090 0951252090 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 A 54 59.5 71.5 81.5 99 119.5 148 B 40 40 40 40 60 60 60 C 29.5 32.2 37 42 53.5 63.5 76.5 D 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 ISO 1 E 64.5 67.2 72 77 88.5 98.5 111.5 D 124 124 124 124 124 124 124 ISO 2 E 70.5 73.2 78 83 94.5 104.5 117.9 Applicable valves MACH 16 Series 70 1/8-1/4 ISO 1 - ISO 2 MACH 16 Series 70 1/8-1/4 ISO 1 - ISO 2 MACH 16 Series 70 1/8-1/4 ISO 1 - ISO 2 MACH 16 Series 70 1/8-1/4 ISO 1 - ISO 2 Series 70 1/8-1/4-1/2 ISO 1 - ISO 2 Series 70 1/8-1/4-1/2 ISO 1 - ISO 2 Series 70 1/8-1/4-1/2 ISO 1 - ISO 2 Weight [g] 80 86 93 101 222 258 298
KIT FOR FIXING VALVES TO BRACKETS, FOR SERIES KCV BRACKETS

Code 0950002003 0950002004 0950002006 0950002001 0950002002 Valve kit MACH 16 Series 70 1/8-1/4 Series 70 1/2 ISO 1 ISO 2 Composition 2 hex. screws M3x25 with washer 2 hex. screws M4x50 with washer 2 hex. screws M5x50 with washer Adaptor + ISO 1 BASE SIDE + screws + washers (Fig.B) Adaptor + ISO 2 BASE SIDE + screws + washers (Fig.B) Weight [g] 4 8 20 230 350
1-46
VALVE ASSEMBLY ON CYLINDER FOR 32-40-50-63 FOR 80-100-125
CYLINDERS ISO 15552 STD AND TYPE A TWO-FLAT: SPARE PARTS
Code 009 . . . 0101F 009 . . . 0110F 009 . . . 0111 009 . . . 0604 009 . . . 0704F 009 . . . 0800
Bore 32 to 63 32 to 63 32 to 63 32 to 63 32 to 63 32 to 63
Type Set of polyurethane gaskets Complete polyurethane front head kit Complete polyurethane rear head kit Complete polyurethane piston kit Complete polyurethane head A+P+piston kit Magnet
Parts 4-5-6-9-10 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-14-17-18 4-5-6-7-8-14-17-18 9-10-16-17 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-14-16-17-18 12
1-47
ACCESSORIES - SPARE PARTS FOR ISO 15552 CYLINDERS
ACTUATORS
CYLINDERS ISO 15552 STD, TYPE A AND SERIES 3: SPARE PARTS

NEW RELEASE
STD
ACTUATORS
SPARE PARTS FOR ISO 15552 CYLINDERS
TYPE A
SERIES 3
Code 009 . . . 0101 009 . . . 0502 009 . . . 0110N 009 . . . 0304N 009 . . . 0111N 009 . . . 0305N 009 . . . 0604 009 . . . 0604 009 . . . 0602 009 . . . 0602 009 . . . 0704N 009 . . . 0704N 009 . . . 0702N 009 . . . 0702N 009 . . . 0800
Bore 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 63 80 to 125 32 to 63 80 to 125 32 to 63 80 to 125 32 to 63 80 to 125 32 to 125
Type Complete set of polyurethane gaskets Complete set of NBR gaskets Complete polyurethane front head kit Complete NBR front head kit Complete polyurethane rear head kit Complete NBR rear head kit Complete polyurethane piston kit Complete polyurethane piston kit Complete NBR piston kit Complete NBR piston kit Complete polyurethane head A+P+piston kit Complete polyurethane head A+P+piston kit Complete NBR head A+P+pistion kit Complete NBR head A+P+piston kit Magnet
Parts 2-4-5-9-10 2-4-5-9-10 1-2-3-4-5-17-18 1-2-3-4-5-17-18 4-5-8-17-18 4-5-8-17-18 9-10-16-17 9-10-11-13-15-18 9-10-16-17 9-10-11-13-15-18 1-2-3-4-5-8-9-10-16-17-18 1-2-3-4-5-8-9-10-11-13-15-17-18 1-2-3-4-5-8-9-10-16-17-18 1-2-3-4-5-8-9-10-11-13-15-17-18 12
OLD RELEASE
STD
TYPE A
Code 009 . . . 0101 009 . . . 0502 009 . . . 0110 009 . . . 0304 009 . . . 0111 009 . . . 0305 009 . . . 0604 009 . . . 0604 009 . . . 0602 009 . . . 0602 009 . . . 0704 009 . . . 0704 009 . . . 0702 009 . . . 0702 009 . . . 0800
Bore 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 125 32 to 63 80 to 125 32 to 63 80 to 125 32 to 63 80 to 125 32 to 63 80 to 125 32 to 125
Type Complete set of polyurethane gaskets Complete set of NBR gaskets Complete polyurethane front head kit Complete NBR front head kit Complete polyurethane rear head kit Complete NBR rear head kit Complete polyurethane piston kit Complete polyurethane piston kit Complete NBR piston kit Complete NBR piston kit Complete polyurethane head A+P+piston kit Complete polyurethane head A+P+piston kit Complete NBR head A+P+pistion kit Complete NBR head A+P+piston kit Magnet
Parts 2-4-5-9-10 2-4-5-9-10 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-14-17-18 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-14-17-18 4-5-6-7-8-14-17-18 4-5-6-7-8-14-17-18 9-10-16-17 9-10-11-13-15-18 9-10-16-17 9-10-11-13-15-18 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-14-16-17-18 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-13-14-15-17-18 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-14-16-17-18 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-13-14-15-17-18 12
1-48
TWIN-ROD CYLINDER SERIES TWNC
Anti-rotation cylinders with axial dimensions to ISO 15552. Serie STD barrel. standard configuratio with magnet double-acting passing twinner rods and single passing rod polyurethane gasket
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Strokes Design Esecution Forces generated at 6 bar thrust/retraction bar MPa psi C mm mm 10 1 145 10 to +80 Filtered, unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous. 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; 100 from 25 to 500 Extruded profil Magnetic standard cushioned 32: 434/350 40: 678/597 50: 1060/940 63: 1683/1471 80: 2714/2295 100: 4241/3812 See page 1-9 Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems
Weight Notes
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: thick chromed steel b HEAD: aluminium alloy c PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane d GUIDE BUSHING: sintered bronze e BARREL: drawn anodised aluminium alloy f PISTON: aluminium alloy g PISTON GASKET: polyurethane h MAGNET: plastoferrite i BUFFER+STATIC O-rings: NBR j CUSHIONING GASKET: front NBR, rear polyurethane k NEEDLE: OT 58 brass l SCREWS: Tap Tite for fixin and assembly m GUIDE RING: special technopolymer n REAR CUSHIONING CONE: OT58 brass o FRONT CUSHIONING CONE: aluminium p FLANGE: zinc-plated steel
1-49
ACTUATORS
TWIN RODS CYLINDER
ACTUATORS
+ = ADD THE STROKE
32 40 50 63 80 100
PL 10 12 14 16 18 20
PL1 13 12 14 16 18 20
A 10 10 10 10 12 12
A1 10.5 10 10 10 12 12
B 30 35 40 45 45 55
CH3 6 6 8 8 10 10
TG 32.5 38 46.5 56.5 72 89
VA 4 4 4 4 4 4
EE G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G3/8 G3/8 G1/2
RT M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
E 46 54 64.5 75.5 94 111
L0 100 100 106 116 131 138
BG 14.5 14.5 17.5 17.5 21.5 21.5
N 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
P 6 6 6 6 10 10
P1 8 6 6 6 10 10
P2 19 22 30 38 50 70
Q 4 4 6 6 7 7
Q1 4 6 6 7 7
C 15 15 18 22 25 25
I 18 22 30 38 48 60
K h9 32 40 50 63 80 100
S 10 10 12 16 22 22
O 4 4 5 5 5 5
V 40 40 43 47 50 50
U 45 49 54 69 89 109
G2 M6 M8 M8 M10 M12 M12
G3 M8 M10 M12 M12
SINGLE THROUGH-ROD CYLINDER

+ = ADD THE STROKE
32 40 50 63 80 100
PL 10 12 14 16 18 20
PL1 13 12 14 16 18 20
A 10 10 10 10 12 12
A1 10.5 10 10 10 12 12
B 30 35 40 45 45 55
CH1 10 13 17 17 22 22
CH2 17 19 24 24 30 30
CH3 6 6 8 8 10 10
TG 32.5 38 46.5 56.5 72 89
EE G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G3/8 G3/8 G1/2
RT M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
E 46 54 64.5 75.5 94 111
L0 100 100 106 116 131 138
BG 14.5 14.5 17.5 17.5 21.5 21.5
N 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
P 6 6 6 6 10 10
P1 8 6 6 6 10 10
P2 19 22 30 38 50 70
Q 4 4 6 6 7 7
Q1 4 6 6 7 7
C 15 15 18 22 25 25
C1 16 20 25 25 33 38
D 12 16 20 20 25 25
F 22 24 32 32 40 40
I 18 22 30 38 48 60
K h9 32 40 50 63 80 100
KK M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5
S 10 10 12 16 22 22
O 4 4 5 5 5 5
V 40 40 43 47 50 50
VD 6.5 8 13 14 12 14
U 45 49 54 69 89 109
G2 M6 M8 M8 M10 M12 M12
G3 M8 M10 M12 M12
WH 26 30 37 37 46 51
KEY TO CODES
CYL W140 TYPE W140 Double-acting cylinder, magnetic, cushioned W142 Double-acting cylinder, magnetic, cushioned single through-rod 032 BORES 032 040 050 063 080 100 0025 STROKE 0025 to 0500 mm Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems.
1-50
ACCESSORIES FOR TWIN-ROD CYLINDER: FIXINGS

FOOT - MODEL A/S
+ = ADD THE STROKE
Note: Individually packed with 2 screws For fixin the leg to the supporting surface, it is advisable to use a DIN 7984 sunk-headed screw

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950322003 W0950402003 W0950502003 W0950632003 W0950802003 W0951002003 32 40 50 63 80 100 D 26 28 32 40 50 60 E 22 25 27 32 36 41 F 11 13 13 17 17 21 G 10 12 12 16 16 23 H 10 10 12 12 16 16 H3 162 165 176 195 217 229 L 45 52 60 70 90 110 Weight [g] 116 160 252 394 670 1085
Note: Supplied with 4 screws, 4 washers, 2 snap-rings and 1 pin

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950322004 W0950402004 W0950502004 W0950632004 W0950802004 W0951002004 32 40 50 63 80 100 D 26 28 32 40 50 60 E 22 25 27 32 36 41 F 11 13 13 17 17 21 G 10 12 12 16 16 20 H 10 10 12 12 16 16 H3 162 165 176 195 217 229 Weight [g] 94 124 220 316 578 850

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950322006 W0950402006 W0950502006 W0950632006 W0950802006 W0951002006 32 40 50 63 80 100 E 22 25 27 32 36 41 F 16 19 19 24 24 30 H 10 10 12 12 16 16 H3 162 165 176 195 217 229 M 10 12 12 16 16 20 N 14 16 16 21 21 25 Weight [g] 106 142 236 336 572 840
Note: Supplied with 4 screws, 4 washers.

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950322002 W0950402002 W0950502002 W0950632002 W0950802002 W0951002002 32 40 50 63 80 100 B 64 72 90 100 126 150 B1 80 90 110 120 153 178 B2 50 55 65 75 95 115 B3 10 10 12 12 16 16 B4 32 36 45 50 63 75 D4 7 9 9 9 12 14 L 140 140 149 163 181 188 Weight [g] 246 290 522 670 1420 2040
1-51
ACCESSORIES FOR TWIN-ROD CYLINDER SERIES TWNC
ACTUATORS
Code W0950323001 W0950403001 W0950503001 W0950633001 W0950803001 W0951003001
32 40 50 63 80 100
AB 7 9 9 9 12 14
AH 32 36 45 50 63 71
AO 35 43 47 47 61 66
AT 4 4 4 6 6 6
AU 24 28 32 32 41 41
TR 32 36 45 50 63 75
UH 45 52 65 75 95 115
H1 164 168 181 195 222 229
H2 148 156 170 180 213 220
Weight [g] 76 98 156 246 406 540
FRONT FLANGE - MODEL C/S
ACTUATORS
Code W0950323002 W0950403002 W0950503002 W0950633002 W0950803002 W0951003002
32 40 50 63 80 100
B 64 72 90 100 126 150
B1 80 90 110 120 153 178
B2 50 55 65 75 95 115
B3 10 10 12 12 16 16
B4 32 36 45 50 63 75
D4 7 9 9 9 12 14
V1 30 30 31 35 34 34
Weight [g] 228 288 486 569 1145 1760
INTERMEDIATE HINGE - MODEL EN

+ = ADD THE STROKE +1/2 = ADD HALF THE STROKE Code 0950322007 0950402007 0950502007 0950632007 0950802007 0951002007 32 40 50 63 80 100 N1 50 63 75 90 110 132 N2 12 16 16 20 20 25 N3 12 16 16 20 20 25 N4 22 28 32 35 40 45 N5 65 75 95 105 130 145 A6 79 82 91.5 95.5 108 110.5 A7 91 90 97.5 104.5 115.5 119 A8 103 98 103.5 113.5 123 127.5 Weight [g] 282 582 880 1230 2030 2600
Note: Supplied with 4 screws, 2 pin
COUNTER-HINGE FOR MODEL EN - MODEL EL

Code W0950322009 W0950402009 W0950402009 W0950632009 W0950632009 W0951002009 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 46 55 55 65 65 75 A1 32 36 36 42 42 50 B 18 21 21 23 23 28.5 C 30 36 36 40 40 50 C1 15 18 18 20 20 25 D1 11 15 15 18 18 20 D2 7 9 9 11 11 13 D 12 16 16 20 20 25 E 6.5 8.5 8.5 10.5 10.5 12.5 H 10.5 12 12 13 13 16 L 22 28 28 35 35 40 Weight [g] 162 278 278 414 414 715
COUNTER-HINGE CETOP FOR MODEL B - MODEL GL

Code W0950322008 W0950402008 W0950502008 W0950632008 W0950802008 W0951002008 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 26 28 32 40 50 60 B 19 26 26 33 33 44 C 7 9 9 11 11 14 D 10 12 12 16 16 20 E 25 32 32 40 40 50 F 20 32 32 50 50 70 G 32 45 45 63 63 90 H 37 54 54 75 75 103 I 41 52 52 63 63 80 L 18 25 25 32 32 40 M 8 10 10 12 12 16 N 10 12 12 15 15 22 Weight [g] 96 216 212 440 464 985
COUNTER-HINGE ISO FOR MODEL B - MODEL GS

Code W0950322108 W0950402108 W0950502108 W0950632108 W0950802108 W0951002108 32 40 50 63 80 100 B 25.5 27.5 31.5 39.5 49.5 59.5 C 32.5 38 46.5 56.5 72 89 D 45 52 65 75 95 115 E 7 7 9 9 11 11 G 32 36 45 50 63 73 J 11 13 13 17 17 21 L 10 10 12 12 16 20 M 10 12 12 16 16 20 N 10 12 12 15 15 22 Weight [g] 106 138 252 350 655 980
1-52
ACCESSORIES FOR TWIN-ROD CYLINDER: MAGNETIC SENSORS

SENSOR SERIES DSM
For technical data see page 1-286
SENSOR BRACKET 32 to 40
Code W0950000711 Description Bracket D.32-40 DST 80
50 to 63
Code W0950000712
Description Bracket D.50-63 DST 81
80 to 100
Code W0950000713
Description Bracket D.80-125 DST 82
NOTES
1-53
ACTUATORS
Code W0950000201 W0950000222 W0950000232
Description REED sensor DSM2-C525 HS E.HALL PNP sensor DSM3-N225 E.HALL NPN sensor DSM3-M225
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS 160-200 (ex ISO 6431)
ACTUATORS
ISO 15552 CYLINDERS 160-200
Cylinders made to ISO 15552 available in various versions and with a wide range of accessories: configuratio with or without magnet double-acting single-or through-rod NBR gaskets or FKM/FPM (high temperature) available with mounted intermediate hinge special configuration on request
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Design Standard strokes Weight Forces generated at 6 bar (tensile stress) bar MPa C mm
NBR 10 1
FKM/FPM
-10 to +150 Round barrel with tie rods 25-50-75-80-100-125-150-200-250-300-350-400-500-600-700-800-900-1000 See page 1-8 See page 1-7
-10 to +80
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, thick chromed b HEAD: die cast aluminium c PISTON ROD GASKET: NBR or FKM/FPM d GUIDE BUSHING: sintered bronze e BARREL: drawn anodised aluminium alloy f PISTON: aluminium g PISTON GASKET: NBR or FKM/FPM h MAGNET: plastoferrite i CUSHIONING CAP: aluminium j CUSHIONING GASKET+ Static O-rings: NBR or KM/FPM F k CUSHIONING NEEDLE: OT 58 with needle out movement safety system even when fully open l SCREWS: galvanised steel m TIE RODS: galvanised steel n GUIDE BELT: technopolimer
1-54
DIMENSIONS OF STANDARD VERSION

+ = ADD THE STROKE
160 200
B 180 220
C 65 75
E 65 75
D 140 175
G 50 60
L1 124 122
L2 260 275
Q 80 95
K 28 29

160 200
B 180 220
C 65 75
E 65 75
D 140 175
G 50 60
L1 124 122
L2 260 275
L3 338 370
Q 80 95
K 28 29
DIMENSIONS OF VERSION WITH INTERMEDIATE HINGE

+ = ADD THE STROKE
160 200
E 200 250
F 32 32
H1 150 165
H2 190 205
I 32 32
L2 260 275
Q 80 95
S 40 40
For the missing values, refer to standard cylinders. In your order, please specify the desired value for H1
1-55
ACTUATORS
KEY TO CODES FOR ROUND BARREL
ACTUATORS
CYL
W121 TYPE W120 Double-acting, cushioned, non magnetic W121 Double-acting, cushioned, W122 Double-acting, cushioned, through-rod W123 Double-acting, cushioned, through-rod, non magnetic W124 Double-acting, non-cushioned
160 DIAMETER-EXECUTION 160 200 160 stainless steel piston rod 200 stainless steel piston rod 160 FKM/FPM gasket, stainless steel piston rod VA4 200 FKM/FPM gasket, stainless steel piston rod KA3 160 FKM/FPM gasket, C45 piston rod KA4 200 FKM/FPM gasket, C45 piston rod AA3 160 + intermediate hinge AA4 200 + intermediate hinge GA3 160 no stick-slip GA4 200 no stick-slip 160 200 XA3 XA4 VA3
0050 STROKE 0025 to 2800 mm
0200 EXECUTION Specify H1 value ONLY for version with intermediate hinge
Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only
VERSION WITH SHAPED BARREL
An alternative to the round barrel version is a version with a shaped barrel. The technical data, components and dimensions are the same as for the round barrel version. Note: Type with intermediate hinge not available.
KEY TO CODES FOR SHAPED BARREL

CYL 120 121 122 124 121 TYPE Double-acting, cuschioned, non-magnetic Double-acting, cuschioned, Double-acting, cuschioned, through-rod Double-acting, non-cuschioned 160 DIAMETER-EXECUTION 160 160 200 200 SA3 160 non magnetic SA4 200 non magnetic GA3 160 no stick-slip GA4 200 no stick-slip 0050 STROKE 0025 to 2800 mm A MATERIAL A C45 chromed, piston rod Z Stainless steel chromed, piston rod N GASKETS N NBR gaskets V FKM/FPM gaskets
Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only
1-56
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 15552 CYLINDERS 160-200: FIXINGS

FOOT - MODEL A
+ = ADD THE STROKE
Note: Individually packed with 2 screws

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0951602003 160 W0952002003 200 U 170 170 O 90 90 Q 30 30 P 20 25 N 35 35 F3 314 335 V 25 25 Weight [g] 3300 4300
Note: Supplied complete with 4 screws, 4 washers, 2 snap rings

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0951602004 160 W0952002004 200 O1 90 90 O 30 30 P 20 25 N 35 35 F3 314 335 V 25 25 Weight [g] 2150 3550
Note: Supplied complete with 4 screws, 4 washers
FLANGE - MODEL C (FRONT AND REAR)

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0951602002 160 W0952002002 200 A 180 225 B 270 312 B2 230 270 D1 115 135 K 18 22 R1 59 70 P 20 25 F1 279 300 Weight [g] 6900 12800
1-57
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 15552 CYLINDERS 160-200
ACTUATORS
Code W0951602001 160 W0952002001 200
AB 18 22
AH 115 135
AO 80 100
AT 10 10
AU 60 70
H1 319 345
H2 300 320
TR 115 135
UH 180 220
Weight [g] 2400 4000
CETOP COUNTER-HINGE - MODEL GL
ACTUATORS
+= ADD THE STROKE
Code W0951602008 160 W0951602008 200
B4 110 110
B5 154 154
D4 63 63
D5 110 110
N2 55 60
N3 140 140
S3 50 50
K3 18 18
P F3 Weight [g] 20 314 2300 20 335 2300
COUNTER-HINGE MODEL EL
Code A W0951602009 160 92 W0951602009 200 92 A1 60 60 B 40 40 C 60 60 C1 30 30 D1 25 25 D2 17 17 D 32 32 E H L 16.5 22.5 48 16.5 22.5 48 Weight [g] 2740 2740

Code M W0952002025 160 35 W0952002025 200 35 Note: Individually packed C 41 41 B1 28 28 B 43 43 A 80 80 L F D G 165 125 M36x2 46 165 125 M36x2 46 CH 50 50 G1 58 58 Weight [g] 1645 1645
FORK - MODEL GK-M

Code M W0951602020 160 35 W0951602020 200 35 Note: Individually packed C 72 72 B 35 35 A 70 70 L F D 188 144 M36x2 188 144 M36x2 N 84 84 Weight [g] 3850 3850
ROD NUT - MODEL S

Code F W0951602010 160 M36x2 W0951602010 200 M36x2 Note: Individually packed H 14 14 CH 55 55 Weight [g] 170 170
1-58
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 15552 CYLINDERS 160-200: MAGNETIC SENSORS

RETRACTABLE SENSOR WITH INSERTION FROM ABOVE MAGNETIC SENSOR
Code W0952025390 W0952029394 W0952022180 W0952028184 W0952125556 W0952025500* W0952029504* W0952022500* W0952128184*
Code Description W0950000201 REED sensor DSM2-C525 W0950000222 E.HALL PNP sensor DSM3-N225 W0950000232 E.HALL NPN sensor DSM3-M225 NB: For technical data see page 1-286
SENSOR SUPPORT BRACKET FOR STANDARD VERSION (WITH ROUND BARREL)
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. NB: For technical data see page 1-288
Code 0951602093
Description Bracket 160-200
SENSOR SUPPORT BRACKET FOR OLD VERSION BARREL (SHAPED) 160

Code W0950001001 Description Adaptor DSS005 for DST/ST brackets
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM a ISO 15552 cylinder with traditional barrel b Sensor bracket mod. ST ( 160 and 200) c Adaptor d Retractable sensor with insertion from above
Code W0950000715 Description Bracket ST 160
200
Code W0950000716
Description Bracket ST 200
1-59
ACTUATORS
ISO 21287 CYLYNDER SERIES LINER
ACTUATORS
Compact cylinder to ISO 21287, LINER series, available in different versions to meet all possible requirements: With or without magnet Double acting, single or through piston rod Double acting, perforated through piston rod Single acting, extended, retracted or through piston rod Single acting, perforated through rod Double acting anti-rotating version and double acting through piston rod Polyurethane or FKM/FPM gaskets (for high temperatures) also available Dimensions and centre distances to ISO 21287. The heads have been eliminated for ease of installation, improved sturdiness and precision. The metal lining is designed to withstand heavy-duty work, tensile stress and impact. Technopolymer parts can withstand dynamic and pneumatic thrust. The lining virtually acts as a bearing to which most of user accessories are attached. The wide range of anchors provide numerous fixin points. Retractable magnetic limit switches can be mounted to identify the position in the cylinder grooves.
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Versions bar MPa psi C mm
POLYURETHANE 10 1 145
FKM/FPM
Magnet for sensors Inrush pressure for single piston rod for through-rod Forces generated at 6 bar thrust/retraction Weights Notes
bar bar
-10 to +60 ( 20 to 63) -10 to +150 (non-magnetic cylinders) -10 to +80 ( 80 to 100) Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous. 20; 25; 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; 100 with ISO 21287 fixin centre distances With profil Double-acting, Double-acting through-rod, Single-acting extended or retracted rod, Single-acting through-rod, Double-acting through-rod perforated, Double-acting non-rotating, Double-acting through-rod non-rotating, No stick slip All versions are available with male or female piston rod. All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request. 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.8 0.8 see page 1-7 see page 1-9 For correct operation, it is advisable to use 50 mm filtere air For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air.
COMPONENTS 20-25 a PISTON ROD: stainless steel, thick chromed b END CAP: high-performance technopolymer c BARREL: drawn anodised and calibrated aluminium alloy d PISTON GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperature) e MAGNET: plastoneodimio f PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperature) g GUIDE BUSHING: sintered bronze h STATIC O-RINGS: NBR or FKM/FPM (for high temperature)
1-60
COMPONENTS 32-63 a PISTON ROD: C45 stell or stainless steel, thick chromed b END CAP: high-performance technopolymer c BARREL: drawn anodised and calibrated aluminium alloy d PISTON GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperature) e MAGNET: 32 plastoneodimio - 40 to 63 plastoferrite f PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperature) g GUIDE BUSHING: sintered bronze h STATIC O-RINGS: NBR or FKM/FPM (for high temperature)
COMPONENTS 80-100 a PISTON ROD: C45 stell or stainless steel, thick chromed b END CAP: anodized aluminium alloy c BARREL: drawn anodised and calibrated aluminium alloy d PISTON GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperature) e MAGNET: plastoferrite f PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperature) g GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert h STATIC O-RINGS: NBR or FKM/FPM (for high temperature)
FIXING OPTIONS
A Fixing to structural work with a through screw, using the thread in the heads B Direct fixin from above using long through screws or tie rods. Non-magnetic stainless steel must be used (e.g. AISI 304) C Fixing with feet; the ordering code covers the supply of one foot and two screws for fixin to the cylinder D Fixing with a flang mounted on the front or rear head; the ordering code covers the supply of a flang and four screws for fixin to the cylinder E Fixing with articulated hinge to compensate for slight system misalignment and turn freely The ordering code covers the supply of a hinge and four screws for fixin to the cylinder.
1-61
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Bore Min. load (N) Max. load (N)
20 8.40 20.90
25 13.90 33.20
32 19.00 35.90
40 24.80 53.70
50 36.30 62.20
63 50.20 82.30
80 77.60 118.90
100 131.80 183.30
STROKES FOR COMPACT CYLINDERS ISO 21287

Standard stroke for single-acting cylinders 20 to 100 R 25 mm Standard stroke for other types 20 to 25 R 5 to 60 mm 32 to 100 R 5 to 80 mm Max. recommended strokes for other types 20 to 25 R 300 mm 32 to 63 R 400 mm 80 to 100 R 500 mm Max. recommended strokes for non-rotating cylinders 20 to 63 R 120 mm 80 to 100 R 150 mm Max recommended strokes for through-rod perforated 20 to 40 R 5 to 80 mm 50 to 63 R 5 to 100 mm 80 to 100 R 5 to 160 mm
Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems
MAXIMUM LOADS FOR NON-ROTATING VERSION TRANSVERSAL FORCE FOR NON-ROTATING TRANSVERSAL FORCE FOR NON-ROTATING THROUGH-ROD TORQUE DEPENDING ON STROKE
Stroke (mm)
1-62
DIMENSIONS OF DOUBLE-ACTING 20 to 50 AND SINGLE-ACTING 20 to 50

SE-DE MALE PISTON ROD + * 1 2 = ADD THE STROKE = SECTION WITH TOLERANCE = SENSOR SLOT = SEAT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS
SE EXTENDED PISTON ROD
SE MALE EXTENDED PISTON ROD
20 25 32 40 50
AF 14 14 16.5 16.5 17
AM 16 16 19 19 22
BG 17.5 17.5 21.5 21.5 21
CH 8 8 10 10 13
CH1 13 13 17 17 19
D1H9 6 6 6 6 6
D5 7.5 7.5 9 9 10.5
E 35.5 39.5 47 55.5 66.5
E1 36.5 40 48.2 56.5 67.8
EE M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8
KF M6 M6 M8 M8 M10
KK M8 M8 M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25
LA 4.2 4.2 4 4 4.5
MM 10 10 12 12 16
PL 12 13 16 16 15.5
RR 4.2 4.2 5.1 5.1 6.8
RT M5 M5 M6 M6 M8
T2 3 3.5 4 4 3
TG0.2 22 26 32.5 38 46.5
WH 6 6 7 7 8
ZA+0.3 -0 37 39 44 45 45
ZB 43 45 51 52 53

SE-DE MALE PISTON ROD + * 1 2 = ADD THE STROKE = SECTION WITH TOLERANCE = SENSOR SLOT = SEAT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS
63 80 100
AF 17 22 24
AM 22 28 28
BG 21 22.5 25.5
CH 13 17 22
CH1 19 24 30
D1H9 8 8 8
D5 10.5 14 14
E 76.5 95.5 114
E1 78.3 95.5 114
EE G1/8 G1/8 G1/8
KF M10 M12 M12
KK M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5
LA 4.5 5 5
MM 16 20 25
PL1 8 14 19
PL 15.5 16.5 19.2
RR 6.8 8.5 8.5
RT M8 M10 M10
T2 3.5 4 4
TG 0.2 56.5 72 89
WH 8 10 10
ZA+0.4 -0 49 54 67
ZB 57 64 77
1-63
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF THROUGH-ROD 20 to 50
ACTUATORS
SE-DE MALE PERFORATED THROUGH-ROD
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE 1 = SENSOR SLOT 2 = SEAT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS
SE-DE MALE PISTON ROD

20 25 32 40 50
AF 14 14 16.5 16.5 17
AM 16 16 19 19 22
BG 17.5 17.5 21.5 21.5 21
CH 8 8 10 10 13
CH1 13 13 17 17 19
D5 E 7.5 35.5 7.5 39.5 9 47 9 55.5 10.5 66.5
E1 36.5 40 48.2 56.5 67.8
EE M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8
KF M6 M6 M8 M8 M10
KK M8 M8 M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25
LA 4.2 4.2 4 4 4.5
MM 10 10 12 12 16
P1 3 3 4 4 6
P2 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 4
PL 12 13 16 16 15.5
RR 4.2 4.2 5.1 5.1 6.8
RT M5 M5 M6 M6 M8
TG0.2 22 26 32.5 38 46.5
WH 6 6 7 7 8
ZA+0.3 -0 37 39 44 45 45
ZB 43 45 51 52 53
ZM 49 51 58 59 61

SE-DE MALE PERFORATED THROUGH-ROD + = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE 1 = SENSOR SLOT 2 = SEAT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS SE-DE MALE PISTON ROD
63 80 100
AF 17 22 24
AM 22 28 28
BG CH 21 13 22.5 17 25.5 22
CH1 19 24 30
D5 E E1 EE KF 10.5 76.5 78.3 G1/8 M10 14 95.5 95.5 G1/8 M12 14 114 114 G1/8 M12
KK LA MM M12x1.25 4.5 16 M16x1.5 5 20 M16x1.5 5 25
P1 6 G1/8 G1/8
P2 4 5 6
PL1 8 14 19
PL RR 15.5 6.8 16.5 8.5 19.2 8.5
RT M8 M10 M10
TG 0.2 56.5 72 89
WH 8 10 10
ZA+0.4 -0 49 54 67
ZB 57 64 77
ZM 65 74 87
1-64
DIMENSIONS OF NON-ROTATING 20 to 50
+ * 1 2 = ADD THE STROKE = SECTION WITH TOLERANCE = SENSOR SLOT = SEAT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS
NON-ROTATING FEMALE THROUGH-ROD

NON-ROTATING MALE THROUGH-ROD

20 25 32 40 50
AF 14 14 16.5 16.5 17
AM 16 16 19 19 22
BG 17.5 17.5 21.5 21.5 21
CH 8 8 10 10 13
CH1 13 13 17 17 19
D1H9 6 6 6 6 6
D4 17 22 28 33 42
D5 7.5 7.5 9 9 10.5
D6 M4 M5 M5 M5 M6
D7H9 14 17 17 22
E 35.5 39.5 47 55.5 66.5
E1 36.5 40 48.2 56.5 67.8
EE M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8
FB 4 5 5 5 6
KF M6 M6 M8 M8 M10
KK M8 M8 M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25
LA 4.2 4.2 4 4 4.5
ME 8 8 10 10 12
MM 10 10 12 12 16
PL 12 13 16 16 15.5
RR 4.2 4.2 5.1 5.1 6.8
RT M5 M5 M6 M6 M8
T1 3.5 3.5 3.5 5
T2 TG0.2 3 22 3.5 26 4 32.5 4 38 3 46.5
WH 6 6 7 7 8
ZA+0.3 -0 37 39 44 45 45
ZB 43 45 51 52 53
ZM 49 51 58 59 61
1-65
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
+ * 1 2
= ADD THE STROKE = SECTION WITH TOLERANCE = SENSOR SLOT = SEAT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS
ISO 21287 CYLYNDER SERIES LINER NON-ROTATING FEMALE THROUGH-ROD


AF 63 17 80 22 100 24
AM 22 28 28
BG 21 22.5 25.5
CH 13 17 22
CH1 19 24 30
D1H9 8 8 8
D4 50 65 80
D5 10.5 14 14
D6 M6 M8 M10
D7H9 22 24 24
E 76.5 95.5 114
E1 78.3 95.5 114
EE G1/8 G1/8 G1/8
FB 6 8 10
KF M10 M12 M12
KK M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5
LA 4.5 5 5
ME 12 14 14
MM 16 20 25
PL1 8 14 19
PL 15.5 16.5 19.2
RR 6.8 8.5 8.5
RT M8 M10 M10
T1 5 7.5 7.5
T2 3.5 4 4
TG0.2 56.5 72 89
WH 8 10 10
ZA+0.4 -0 49 54 67
ZB 57 64 77
ZM 65 74 87
1-66
KEY TO CODE
CYL 28 TYPE 28 Compact cylinder ISO 21287 male piston rod 29 Compact cylinder ISO 21287 female piston rod 0 t 0 Double-acting 1 Double-acting through-rod 2 Double-acting through-rod perforated 3 Single-acting retracting piston rod 4 Single-acting extended piston rod 5 Single-acting through-rod 6 Single-acting through piston rod perforated 7 Double-acting non-rotating A Double-acting through-rod non-rotating 0 0 Magnetic m S Non-magnetic s G No stick slip 20 BORE 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 0 0 Standard 050 STROKE e f p X MATERIAL C C45 piston rod chromium plated X Stainless steel piston rod and nut A C45 chromed rod, aluminium piston Z Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston P GASKETS P Polyurethane gaskets E V FKM/FPM gaskets
For the maximum suppliabe stroke, see page 1-62 Can also be used as double-acting with spring return t For versions 29 only (female piston rod) s For 20 to 25 the standard version (0 or S) For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only In the code of cylinder with letter in fourth position 100 becomes A1 E Only for standard double acting and standard through rod double acting version m Compulsory for 20 and 25 version Z Only for 32 to 63 P version (Polyurethane gaskets) e Only for 20 to 63 P version (Polyurethane gaskets) f Only for 32 to 100 V version (FKM/FPM gaskets) and for 80 and 100 P version (Polyurethane gaskets) p Only for 20 to 100 V version (FKM/FPM gaskets) and for 80 and 100 P version (Polyurethane gaskets)
NOTES
1-67
ACTUATORS
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 21287 CYLINDERS: FIXING

FOOT - MODEL A
+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950206001 W0950256001 W0950322001 W0950402001 W0950502001 W0950632001 W0950802001 W0951002001 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 AB 6.6 6.6 7 9 9 9 12 14 AH 27 30* 32* 36* 45 50 63 71* AO 6 6 11* 15* 15* 15* 20* 25* AT 4 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 AU 16 16 24* 28* 32* 32* 41* 41* E 36 40 45 52 65 75 95 115 SA 69 71 92* 101* 109* 113* 136* 149* TR 22 26 32 36 45 50 63 75 XA 59 61 75* 80* 85* 89* 105* 118* Weight [g] 46 52 76 100 162 266 456 572
ACTUATORS
ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 21287 CYLYNDER SERIES LINER
Note: Individually packed with 2 screws * IMPORTANT: Values not to ISO 21287. Cylinder pins to ISO 15552 are used.
FEMALE HINGE-MODEL B
+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950322003 W0950402003 W0950502003 W0950632003 W0950802003 W0951002003 32 40 50 63 80 100 CB H14 26 28 32 40 50 60 CD H9 10 12 12 16 16 20 FL 22 25 27 32 36 41 L 12 15 15 20 20 25 MR 10 12 12 16 16 20 UB H14 45 52 60 70 90 110 XD 73 77 80 89 100 118 Weight [g] 112 159 250 390 668 1047
Note: Supplied with 4 screws, 4 washers, 2 snap-rings and 1 pin
MALE HINGE-MODEL BA
+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950206004 W0950256004 W0950322004 W0950402004 W0950502004 W0950632004 W0950802004 W0951002004 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 CD H9 8 8 10 12 12 16 16 20 EW 16 16 26 28 32 40 50 60 FL 20 20 22 25 27 32 36 41 L 14 14 12 15 15 20 20 25 MR 8 8 11 13 13 17 17 21 XD 63 65 73 77 80 89 100 118 Weight [g] 44 48 94 124 220 316 578 850
FLANGE 20 to 25 - MODEL C (FRONT AND REAR)

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950206002 20 W0950256002 25 E 36 40 FB 6.6 6.6 MF 10* 10* TF 55 60 UF 70 76 ZF 53* 55* Weight [g] 184 226
Note: Supplied with 4 screws * IMPORTANT: Non ISO 21287 norm fixin distance

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950322002 W0950402002 W0950502002 W0950632002 W0950802002 W0951002002 32 40 50 63 80 100 E 50 55 65 75 95 115 FB 7 9 9 9 12 14 MF 10 10 12 12 16 16 R 32 36 45 50 63 75 TF 64 72 90 100 126 150 UF 80 90 110 120 153 178 ZF 61 62 65 69 80 93 Weight [g] 246 290 522 670 1420 2040
1-68

+ = ADD THE STROKE
FLANGE FOR OPPOSITE CYLINDERS

Code 0950203060 0950253060 0950323060 0950403061 0950503061 0950633061 0950803061 0951003061 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 M 12.5 13 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 16.5 19.5 Weight [g] 45 57 88 106 158 258 452 801
Note: Supplied complete with 1 pin, 4 screws
ASSEMBLING OPPOSING CYLINDERS
FORK - MODEL GK-M

Code W0950200020 W0950200020 W0950322020 W0950322020 W0950402020 W0950402020 W0950502020 W0950502020 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 16 16 20 20 24 24 32 32 B 8 8 10 10 12 12 16 16 C 16 16 20 20 24 24 32 32 D M8 M8 M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 F 32 32 40 40 48 48 64 64 L 42 42 52 52 62 62 83 83 M 8 8 10 10 12 12 16 16 N 22 22 26 26 32 32 40 40 Weight [g] 48 48 92 92 148 148 340 340

Code W0950200025 W0950200025 W0950322025 W0950322025 W0950402025 W0950402025 W0950502025 W0950502025 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 24 24 28 28 32 32 42 42 B 12 12 14 14 16 16 21 21 B1 9 9 10.5 10.5 12 12 15 15 C 13 13 15 15 17 17 23 23 CH 14 14 17 17 19 19 22 22 D M8 M8 M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 F 36 36 43 43 50 50 64 64 G 12.5 12.5 15 15 17.5 17.5 22 22 G1 16 16 19 19 22 22 27 27 L 48 48 57 57 66 66 85 85 M 8 8 10 10 12 12 16 16 Weight [g] 50 50 78 78 116 116 226 226
1-69
ACTUATORS
Code W0950322006 W0950402006 W0950502006 W0950632006 W0950802006 W0951002006
32 40 50 63 80 100
CX 10 12 12 16 16 20
DL 22 25 27 32 36 41
EX 14 16 16 21 21 25
MS 16 18 21 23 28 30
R1 12 15 19 20 24 25
XN 73 77 80 89 100 118
Weight [g] 106 142 236 336 572 840
COMPENSATION JOINT - MODEL GA
ACTUATORS
Code W0950326021 W0950326021 W0950406021 W0950406021 W0950506021 W0950506021
32 40 50 63 80 100
A 49 49 59 59 79 79
B 36 36 42 42 58 58
C 30 30 36 36 44 44
CH 13 13 15 15 22 22
D 11 11 14 14 17 17
D1 6.5 6.5 8.5 8.5 10.5 10.5
F M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5
G 39.5 39.5 44 44 59 59
G1 17 17 19 19 26 26
P 6.5 6.5 8.5 8.5 10.5 10.5
S 12 12 15 15 20 20
S1 10 10 13.5 13.5 15 15
Weight [g] 172 172 286 286 628 628
COUNTER-HINGE CETOP 32 to 100

Code W0950322008 W0950402008 W0950502008 W0950632008 W0950802008 W0951002008 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 26 28 32 40 50 60 B 19 26 26 33 33 44 C 7 9 9 11 11 14 D 10 12 12 16 16 20 E 25 32 32 40 40 50 F 20 32 32 50 50 70 G 32 45 45 63 63 90 H 37 54 54 75 75 103 I 41 52 52 63 63 80 L 18 25 25 32 32 40 M 8 10 10 12 12 16 N 10 12 12 15 15 22 Weight [g] 96 216 212 440 464 985
COUNTER-HINGE 16 to 25 - MODEL BC
Code W0950200005 20 W0950200005 25 A 32 32 B 30 30 B1 16 16 C 20 20 D 6.5 6.5 E 4 4 F 30 30 M 8 8 R 10 10 S 4 4 Weight [g] 78 78
Note: Supplied complete with 1 pin and and 2 snap rings

Code W0950200030 W0950200030 W0950322030 W0950322030 W0950402030 W0950402030 W0950502030 W0950502030 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A M8 M8 M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 B 20 20 20 20 24 24 32 32 C 20 20 20 20 20 20 32 32 D 57 57 71 71 75 75 103 103 E 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 F 12.5 12.5 22 22 22 22 32 32 SW1 7 7 12 12 12 12 20 20 SW2 17 17 30 30 30 30 41 41 SW3 17 17 30 30 30 30 41 41 SW4 11 11 19 19 19 19 30 30 SW5 13 13 17 17 19 19 24 24 Weight [g] 56 56 216 216 220 220 620 620
RETRACTABLE SENSOR WITH INSERTION FROM ABOVE

Code W0952025390 W0952029394 W0952022180 W0952028184 W0952125556 W0952025500* W0952029504* W0952022500* W0952128184* Description HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8
1-70
SPARE PARTS FOR ISO 21287 CYLINDER

COMPACT CYLINDERS ISO 21287 (POLYURETHANE)
Code 009 . . .L001 009 . . .L001 009 . . .L001 009 . . .L101 009 . . .L101 009 . . .L201 009 . . .L201 009 . . .7401 009 . . .L401 009 . . .7401 009 . . .7501 009 . . .L501 009 . . .L901 009 . . .L901 009 . . .L901
Bores 20, 25 32 to 63 80, 100 20, 25, 80, 100 32 to 63 20, 25, 80, 100 32 to 63 20, 25 32 to 63 80 to 100 20, 25, 80, 100 32 to 63 20, 25 32 to 63 80, 100
Type Complete set of gaskets polyurethane Complete set of gaskets polyurethane Complete set of gaskets polyurethane Front head kit Front head kit Rear head kit Rear head kit Piston kit polyurethane Piston kit polyurethane Piston kit polyurethane Magnet Magnet Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit polyurethane Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit polyurethane Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit polyurethane
Parts dfh dfhlq dfhl bfgh bfghq hj hjq dek deklmq deklm e eq bdefghjk bdefghjklmq bdefghjklm
NOTES
1-71
SPARE PARTS FOR ISO 21287 CYLYNDER SERIES LINER
ACTUATORS
COMPACT CYLINDERS SERIES CMPC
ACTUATORS
Compact cylinder series CMPC available in numerous versions to meet a full range of requirements: With or without magnet Single-acting extended rod, retracted or through-rod Dual-acting non-rotating and dual-acting through-rod versions Tandem with two, three or four stages Multi-position with two and three stages Fixing centre distances to ISO 15552 from 32 to 100 and from 20 to 100 complying with French standard NFE 49-004-1 and 2 (UNITOP). 12 and 16 have centre distances compatible with trade cylinders. The special profil and outer heads locked onto the barrel by screws ensure optimal guiding of the cylinder and multiple fixin options with a wide range of mountings. To determine the position in the relevant cylinder slots, it is possible to mount retracting magnetic limit switches. Available also in a version having FKM/FPM gaskets (for high temperature) from 20 to 100.
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Versions Magnet for sensors Inrush pressure single piston rod through-rod Forces generated at 6 bar thrust/retraction Weights Notes bar MPa psi C mm mm mm
FKM/FPM
bar bar
10 to +80 10 to +150 (non-magnetic cylinders) Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 12; 16; interchangeable with similar products 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; 100 with ISO 15552 fixin centre distances 20; 25; 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; 100 with NFE 49-004-1 and 2 fixin centre distances With profile heads with screws Double-acting, Single-acting extended or retracted rod, Through-rod, Through-rod perforated, Single-acting through-rod, Through-rod non-rotating, no-stick slip All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request. 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 1 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 See page 1-7 See page 1-8 For correct operation, it is advisable to use 50 mm filtere air For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air.
COMPONENTS 12 to 25 a PISTON ROD: stainless steel, thick chromed b HEAD: extruded anodised aluminium alloy c BARREL: drawn anodised and calibrated aluminium alloy d PISTON GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM e MAGNET: neodymium-plastic f PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM g GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert h STATIC O-RINGS: NBR or FKM/FPM i SECURING SCREWS: zinc-plated steel
1-72
COMPONENTS 32 to 100 a PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, thick chromed b HEAD: extruded anodised aluminium alloy c BARREL: drawn anodised and calibrated aluminium alloy d PISTON GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM e MAGNET: 12 to 32 neodymium-plastic 40 to 100 plastoferrite f PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM g GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert h STATIC O-rings: NBR or FKM/FPM i SECURING SCREWS: zinc-plated steel
TECHNICAL DATA a Compact cylinder available with two separate fixin centre distances 32 to 100 to ISO 15552 20 to 100 to NFE 49-004-1 and 2 b Pre-wired retracting sensor with or without connector c Plastic strip to keep out dirt and/or protect the sensor wire cod. W0950000160 d Ball-and-socket joint code W095 2030 e Example of cylinder mounting with feet code W095 6001. All mountings come complete with cylinder assembly screws f Sensor slot g Piston rod with male or female thread as required
COMPACT CYLINDER FIXING OPTIONS
A Fixing to structural work with a through screw, using the thread in the heads B Direct fixin from above using long through screws or tie rods. Non-magnetic stainless steel must be used (e.g. AISI 304) C Fixing with feet; the ordering code covers the supply of one foot and two screws for fixin to the cylinder D Fixing with a flang mounted on the front or rear head; the ordering code covers the supply of a flang and four screws for fixin to the cylinder E Fixing with articulated hinge to compensate for slight system misalignment and turn freely The ordering code covers the supply of a hinge and four screws for fixin to the cylinder
1-73
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Bore Min. load (N) Max. load (N)
12 4.40 9.80
16 4.90 14.20
20 8.40 20.90
25 13.90 33.20
32 19.00 35.90
40 24.80 53.70
50 36.30 62.20
63 50.20 82.30
80 77.60 118.90
100 131.80 183.30
STROKES FOR COMPACT CYLINDERS

Standard stroke for single-acting cylinders 12 R 10 mm 16 to 100 R 25 mm Standard stroke for other types 12 to 16 R from 5 to 40 mm 20 to 25 R from 5 to 50 mm 32 to 100 R from 5 to 80 mm Max. recommended strokes for other types 12 to 25 R 200 mm 32 to 40 R 300 mm 50 to 63 R 400 mm 80 to 100 R 500 mm Max. recommended strokes for non-rotating cylinders 12 to 63 R 120 mm 80 to 100 R 150 mm Max recommended strokes for through-rod perforated 20 to 40 R from 5 to 80 mm 50 to 63 R from 5 to 100 mm 80 to 100 R from 5 to 160 mm
Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems
MAXIMUM LOADS FOR NON-ROTATING VERSION TRANSVERSAL FORCE FOR NON-ROTATING TRANSVERSAL FORCE FOR NON-ROTATING THROUGH-ROD TORQUE DEPENDING ON STROKE
Stroke (mm)
1-74

SE-DE MALE PISTON ROD + = ADD THE STROKE 1 = SENSOR SLOT
12 16 20 25
A 29 29 36.5 40.5
B 18 18 22 26
C 6 8 10 10
CH 5 7 8 8
CH1 10 13 17 17
D 30 30 37.5 41.5
E H9 6 6 6 6
F 4 4 4 4
G 38 38 38 39.5
H 8 8 8 8
H1 30 30 30 31.5
L 18.5 18.5 18.5 19
M 8 10 12 12
N 42.5 42.5 42.5 45
O M4 M4 M5 M5
O1 3.2 3.2 4.2 4.2
P M3 M4 M5 M5
Q M5 M5 M5 M5
R M6 M8 M10x1.25 M10x1.25
S 16 20 22 22
S1 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.5
NORM UNITOP UNITOP

SE-DE MALE PISTON ROD + = ADD THE STROKE 1 = SENSOR SLOT 7 = ONLY FOR 63 to 100 8 = SEAT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS
32 40 50 63 80 100
A 47 56 67 80 102 123
ISO 32.5 +0.1 -0.4 38 46.5 56.5 72 89
B UNITOP 32 +0.4 -0.1 42 50 62 82 103
B2 13 17 21
C 12 12 16 16 20 25
CH 10 10 13 13 17 22
CH1 17 17 19 19 24 30
D 48.5 57.5 69 82 105 126
E H9 6 6 6 8 8 8
F 4 4 4 4 4 4
G 44.5 45.5 45.5 50 56 66.5
H 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 8.5 10.5
H1 37 38 38 42.5 47.5 56
L 4 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
M 14 14 16 16 20 24
N 50.5 52 53 57.5 64 76.5
ISO M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
O UNITOP M6 M6 M8 M10 M10 M10
ISO 5.2 5.2 6.2 6.2 8.5 8.5
O1 UNITOP 5.2 5.2 6.2 8.5 8.5 8.5
P M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M12
Q G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/4
R M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M20x1.5
S 22 22 24 24 32 40
S1 6 6.5 7.5 7.5 8 10
1-75
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE * = SECTION WITH TOLERANCE 1 = SENSOR SLOT
12 16 20 25
A 29 29 36.5 40.5
B 18 18 22 26
B1 9.9 9.9 12 15.6
C 6 8 10 10
C1 5 5 6 6
CH 5 7 8 8
CH1 10 13 17 17
D 30 30 37.5 41.5
E H9 6 6 6 6
F 4 4 4 4
G 38 38 38 39.5
H 8 8 8 8
H1 30 30 30 31.5
L 18.5 18.5 18.5 19
M1 x strokes ,5 >5 N 5 8 42.5 5 10 42.5 7 12 42.5 7 12 45
N1 48.5 48.5 50.5 53
N2 53 53 55 58.5
O M4 M4 M5 M5
O1 3.2 3.2 4.2 4.2
P M3 M4 M5 M5
Q M5 M5 M5 M5
R M6 M8 M10x1.25 M10x1.25
S 16 20 22 22
T 2 2 3.5 4
U H9 6 8 10 14
V H8 3 3 4 5
Z M3 M3 M4 M5
NORM UNITOP UNITOP
1-76

+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE * = SECTION WITH TOLERANCE 1 = SENSOR SLOT 7 = ONLY FOR 63 TO 100 8 = SLOT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS
32 40 50 63 80 100 32 40 50 63 80 100
A 47 56 67 80 102 123
ISO 32.5 +0.1 -0.4 38 46.5 56.5 72 89 M1 x strokes ,5 >5 14 9 14 9 16 11 16 11 20 15 24 19
B UNITOP 32 +0.4 -0.1 42 50 62 82 103 N 50.5 52 53 57.5 64 76.5
B1 19.8 23.3 29.7 35.4 46 56.6 N1 60.5 62 65 69.5 78 90.5
B2 13 17 21 N2 66.5 68.5 72.5 77 86 100.5
B3 16.1 20 24 30 38.5 48 ISO M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
C 12 12 16 16 20 25 O UNITOP M6 M6 M8 M10 M10 M10
C1 8 8 10 10 12 12 ISO 5.2 5.2 6.2 6.2 8.5 8.5
CH 10 10 13 13 17 22 O1 UNITOP 5.2 5.2 6.2 8.5 8.5 8.5
CH1 17 17 19 19 24 30 P M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M12
D 48.5 57.5 69 82 105 126 Q G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/4
E H9 6 6 6 8 8 8 R M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M20x1.5
F 4 4 4 4 4 4 S 22 22 24 24 32 40
G 44.5 45.5 45.5 50 56 66.5 T 4.5 4.5 6 6 8 9
H 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 8.5 10.5 U H9 17 17 22 22 28 30
H1 37 38 38 42.5 47.5 56 V H8 5 5 6 6 8 10
L 4 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 Z M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M10
1-77
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE 1 = SENSOR SLOT
SE-DE MALE PERFORATED THROUGH-ROD
SE-DE MALE THROUGH-ROD
12 16 20 25
A 29 29 36.5 40.5
B 18 18 22 26
C 6 8 10 10
CH 5 7 8 8
CH1 10 13 17 17
D 30 30 37.5 41.5
G 38 38 38 39.5
H 8 8 8 8
H1 30 30 30 31.5
L 18.5 18.5 18.5 19
M 8 10 12 12
M1 x strokes ,5 >5 5 8 5 10 7 12 7 12
N 42.5 42.5 42.5 45
N2 47 47 47 50.5
O M4 M4 M5 M5
O1 3.2 3.2 4.2 4.2
P M3 M4 M5 M5
P2 1.5 1.5
Q M5 M5 M5 M5
R M6 M8 M10x1.25 M10x1.25
S 16 20 22 22
NORM UNITOP UNITOP

+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE 1 = SENSOR SLOT 7 = ONLY FOR 63 TO 100 8 = SLOT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS SE-DE MALE PERFORATED THROUGH-ROD
SE-DE MALE THROUGH-ROD
32 40 50 63 80 100
A 47 56 67 80 102 123
ISO 32.5 +0.1 -0.4 38 46.5 56.5 72 89
B UNITOP 32 +0.4 -0.1 42 50 62 82 103
B2 13 17 21
C 12 12 16 16 20 25
CH 10 10 13 13 17 22
CH1 17 17 19 19 24 30
D 48.5 57.5 69 82 105 126
G 44.5 45.5 45.5 50 56 66.5
H 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 8.5 10.5
H1 37 38 38 42 47.5 56
L 4 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
M 14 14 16 16 20 24
M1 x strokes ,5 >5 N 14 9 50.5 14 9 52 16 11 53 16 11 57.5 20 15 64 24 19 76.5
N2 56.5 58.5 60.5 65 72 86.5
ISO M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
O UNITOP M6 M6 M8 M10 M10 M10
ISO 5.2 5.2 6.2 6.2 8.5 8.5
O1 UNITOP 5.2 5.2 6.2 8.5 8.5 8.5
P M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M12
P1 1/8 1/4
P2 2.5 2.5 4 4 5 6
Q G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/4
R M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M20x1.5
S 22 22 24 24 32 40
1-78
DIMENSIONS OF TANDEM 20 to 25 - 4-STAGES

++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE +++ = ADD THREE TIMES THE STROKE ++++ = ADD FOUR TIMES THE STROKE 1 = SENSOR SLOT 2 = CYLINDERS OUT 5 = CYLINDERS IN MALE PISTON ROD
TANDEM 3 STAGES
TANDEM 2 STAGES
20 25
A 36.5 40.5
B 22 26
C 10 10
CH 8 8
CH1 17 17
D 37.5 41.5
E H9 6 6
F 4 4
G G1 114.5 89 118 92
G2 63.5 66
H 8 8
H1 8 8
L 10 10
M 12 12
N N1 119 93.5 123.5 97.5
N2 68 71.5
O M5 M5
P M5 M5
Q M5 M5
R S M10x1.25 22 M10x1.25 22
NORM UNITOP UNITOP
1-79
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF TANDEM 32 to 100 - 4-STAGES
ACTUATORS
++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE +++ = ADD THREE TIMES THE STROKE ++++ = ADD FOUR TIMES THE STROKE
2 = CYLINDERS OUT FOR 32 to 63 5 = CYLINDERS IN FOR 32 to 63 6 = CYLINDERS IN FOR 80; 100 9 = CYLINDERS OUT FOR 80; 100 1 = SENSOR SLOT 7 = ONLY FOR 63 to 100 8 = SLOT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS
MALE PISTON ROD
COMPACT CYLINDERS SERIES CMPC TANDEM 3-STAGES
TANDEM 2-STAGES
32 40 50 63 80 100
A 47 56 67 80 102 123
ISO 32.5 +0.1 -0.4 38 46.5 56.5 72 89
B UNITOP 32 +0.4 -0.1 42 50 62 82 103
B2 13 17 21
C 12 12 16 16 20 25
CH 10 10 13 13 17 22
CH1 17 17 19 19 24 30 O UNITOP M6 M6 M8 M10 M10 M10
D 48.5 57.5 69 82 105 126
E H9 6 6 6 8 8 8 O1 UNITOP 5.2 5.2 6.2 8.5 8.5 8.5
F 4 4 4 4 4 4
G 154 162.5 163.5 182 204.5 243
G1 117.5 123.5 124 138 155 184
G2 81 84.5 85 94 105.5 125.5
H 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 8.5 10.5
H1 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
K 10.5 14.5
K1 10.5 14.5
32 40 50 63 80 100
L 4 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
M 14 14 16 16 20 24
N 160 169 171 189.5 212.5 253
N1 123.5 130 131.5 145.5 163 194
N2 87 91 92.5 101.5 113.5 135.5
ISO M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
ISO 5.2 5.2 6.2 6.2 8.5 8.5
P M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M12
Q G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/4
R M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M20x1.5
S 22 22 24 24 32 40
1-80
DIMENSIONS OF MULTI-POSITION 12 to 25 - 3-STAGES

1 = SENSOR SLOT 2 = CYLINDER 1 OUT 3 = CYLINDER 2 OUT 4 = CYLINDER 3 OUT 5 = CYLINDERS 1-2-3 IN X1 = CYLINDER 1 STROKE X2 = CYLINDER 2 STROKE X3 = CYLINDER 3 STROKE MALE PISTON ROD
CIL 3
CIL 2
CIL 1
MULTI-POSITION 2-STAGES
2 = CYLINDER 1 OUT 3 = CYLINDER 2 OUT 5 = CYLINDERS 1-2 IN X1 = CYLINDER 1 STROKE X2 = CYLINDER 2 STROKE
CIL 2
CIL 1
12 16 20 25
A 29 29 36.5 40.5
B 18 18 22 26
C 6 8 10 10
CH 5 7 8 8
CH1 10 13 17 17
D 30 30 37.5 41.5
E H9 6 6 6 6
F 4 4 4 4
G 89 89 89 92
G1 63.5 63.5 63.5 66
H 8 8 8 8
H1 8 8 8 8
H2 33.5 33.5 33.5 34
H3 59 59 59 60
L 10 10 10 10
M 8 10 12 12
N 93.5 93.5 93.5 97.5
N1 68 68 68 71.5
O M4 M4 M5 M5
P M3 M4 M5 M5
Q M5 M5 M5 M5
R M6 M8 M10x1.25 M10x1.25
S 16 20 22 22
NORM UNITOP UNITOP
1-81
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF MULTI-POSITION 32 to 100 - 3-STAGES
ACTUATORS
1 = SENSOR SLOT 2 = CYLINDER 1 OUT FOR 32 to 63 3 = CYLINDER 2 OUT FOR 32 to 100 4 = CYLINDER 3 OUT FOR 32 to 100 5 = CYLINDER 1-2-3 IN FOR 32 to 63 6 = CYLINDER 1-2-3 IN FOR 80 to 100 7 = ONLY FOR 63 to 100 8 = SLOT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS 9 = CYLINDER 1 OUT FOR 80 to 100
X1 = CYLINDER 1 STROKE X2 = CYLINDER 2 STROKE X3 = CYLINDER 3 STROKE
MALE PISTON ROD
COMPACT CYLINDERS SERIES CMPC MULTI-POSITION 2-STAGES

2 = CYLINDER 1 OUT FOR 32 to 63 3 = CYLINDER 2 OUT FOR 32 to 100 5 = CYLINDER 1-2 IN FOR 32 to 63 6 = CYLINDER 1-2 IN FOR 80 to 100 9 = CYLINDER 1 OUT FOR 80 to 100 X1 = CYLINDER 1 STROKE X2 = CYLINDER 2 STROKE
32 40 50 63 80 100
A 47 56 67 80 102 123
ISO 32.5 +0.1 -0.4 38 46.5 56.5 72 89
B UNITOP 32 +0.4 -0.1 42 50 62 82 103
B2 13 17 21
C 12 12 16 16 20 25
CH 10 10 13 13 17 22
CH1 17 17 19 19 24 30
D 48.5 57.5 69 82 105 126 O UNITOP M6 M6 M8 M10 M10 M10
E H9 6 6 6 8 8 8
F 4 4 4 4 4 4 O1 UNITOP 5.2 5.2 6.2 8.5 8.5 8.5
G 117.5 123.5 124 138 155 184
G1 81 84.5 85 94 105.5 125.5
H 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 8.5 10.5
H1 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
H2 44 46.5 47 51.5 58 69.3
H3 80.5 85.5 86 95.5 107.5 128
32 40 50 63 80 100
K 10.5 14.5
K1 10.5 14.5
L 4 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
M 14 14 16 16 20 24
N 123.5 130 131.5 145.5 163 194
N1 87 91 92.5 101.5 113.5 135.5
ISO M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
ISO 5.2 5.2 6.2 6.2 8.5 8.5
P M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M12
Q G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/4
R M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M20x1.5
S 22 22 24 24 32 40
1-82
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAMS
MULTI-POSITION TANDEM
LEGENDA P = Stage 1 stroke R = Stage 2 stroke T = Stage 3 stroke Fa Fb Fc Fd = F1+F2 [N] = F1+F2+F3 [N] = F1+F2+F3+F4 [N] = F5 [N]
1 = STAGE 1 2 = STAGE 2 3 = STAGE 3
KEY TO CODE
CYL 23 TYPE 23 Compact cylinder centre distances to UNITOP male piston rod 24 Compact cylinder centre distances to UNITOP female piston rod n 25 Compact cylinder centre distances to ISO male piston rod n 26 Compact cylinder centre distances to ISO female piston rod 1 0 Double-acting 1 Double-acting through-rod 2 Double-acting through-rod perforated 3 Single-acting retracting piston rod 4 Single-acting extended piston rod 5 Single-acting through-rod 6 Single-acting through-rod piston rod perforated t 7 Double-acting non-rotating A Double-acting through-rod non-rotating 0 0 Magnetic m S Non-magnetic s G No stick slip 25 BORE 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 O 0 A B C Standard 2-stage tandem 3-stage tandem 4-stage tandem 050 STROKE e f p X MATERIAL C C45 piston rod chromium plated X Stainless steel piston rod and nut A C45 chromed rod, aluminium piston Z Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston P GASKETS P Polyurethane gaskets E V FKM/FPM gaskets
MULTI-POSITION P Stage 1 R Stage 2 T Stage 3
For the maximum suppliabe stroke, see page 1-74 In the code of cylinder with letter in fourth position 100 becomes A1 n Codes only for cylinders 32 to100 Can also be used as double-acting with spring return Available from 20 t For versions 24 and 26 only (female piston rod) s For 12 to 25 the standard version (0 or S) its already no stick slip For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only E Only for standard double acting and standard through rod double acting version m Compulsory for 20 and 25 version Z Only for 32 to 63 P version (Polyurethane gaskets) e Only for 12 to 63 P version (Polyurethane gaskets) f Only for 32 to 100 V version (FKM/FPM gaskets) and for 80 and 100 P version (Polyurethane gaskets) p Only for 20 to 100 V version (FKM/FPM gaskets) and for 80 and 100 P version (Polyurethane gaskets)
The ordering codes for a Multi-position cylinder is a combination of several codes, each describing a stage. Coding example for a UNITOP multiposition cylinder 2 stages 20 strokes 40 + 10 (total stroke 50 mm) male rod: 1 STADIO (P) : 230020P040XP + 2 STADIO (R): 230020R050XP Coding example for a UNITOP multiposition cylinder 3 stages 20 strokes 15 + 30 + 40 (total stroke 85 mm) male rod: 1 STADIO (P): 230025P015XP + 2 STADIO (R): 230025R045XP + 3 STADIO (T): 230025T085XP
1-83
ACTUATORS
COMPACT CYLINDERS SERIES CMPC TWO-FLAT
ACTUATORS
This version is used to keep at an angle the objects fixe onto the piston rod and to apply torques within the specifie limits. The piston rod in two-fla cylinders has two opposing longitudinal surfaces and is made entirely of stainless steel. The front head of the cylinder includes a sintered bronze bush that engages the piston rod and prevents it from rotating. A special polyurethane gasket guarantees air-tightness and dirt removal. This technical solution is more airtight and reliable than square or hexagonal piston rods. These compact cylinders come in the following versions: with or without a magnet dual-acting, single piston rod dual-acting, through piston rod one piston rod is two-flat and the other is cylindrical fixin centre distances compatible with ,ISO 15552 (former ISO 6431), or with French standard NFE 49-004-1 and 2 (UNITOP). The special profil and the fact that the external heads are screwed onto the liner give an excellent guide. Numerous fixin options are available thanks to wide range of anchor points. Retractable magnetic limit switches can be mounted in slots in the cylinder to measure the position.
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Maximum strokes Versions Magnet for sensors Inrush pressure Max torque on piston rod Maximum rotation on the rod Weights Notes bar MPa psi C mm mm mm
POLYURETHANE 10 1 145 -10 to +80 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 32; 40; 50; 63; 80 with ISO 15552 fixin centre distances 32; 40; 50; 63; 80 with NFE 49-004-1 and 2 fixin centre distances With profile heads with screws 32-40 = 300; 50-63 = 400; 80 = 500 Double-acting, Double-acting Through-rod All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request 32 = 0.8; from 40 to 80 = 0.6 32 and 40 = 0.2; 50 and 63 = 0.4; 80 = 1 32 and 40 = 0.70 ; 50 and 63 = 0.75; 80 = 0.65 See page 1-9 Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air.
bar Nm degrees
COMPONENTS 12 to 25 a PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, two-fla b HEAD: extruded anodised aluminium alloy c BARREL: drawn anodised and calibrated aluminium alloy d PISTON GASKET: polyurethane e MAGNET: 32 neodymium - 40 to 100 plastoferrite f PISTON ROD GASKET TWO-FLAT: polyurethane g GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze h STATIC O-rings: NBR i SECURING SCREWS: zinc-plated steel
1-84
FIXING OPTIONS
A Fixing to structural work with a through screw, using the thread in the heads B Direct fixin from above using long through screws or tie rods. Non-magnetic stainless steel must be used (e.g. AISI 304) C Fixing with feet; the ordering code covers the supply of one foot and two screws for fixin to the cylinder. D Fixing with a flang mounted on the front or rear head; the ordering code covers the supply of a flang and four screws for fixin to the cylinder E Fixing with articulated hinge to compensate for slight system misalignment and turn freely The ordering code covers the supply of a hinge and four screws for fixin to the cylinder
KEY TO CODE
CYL 23 24 25 26 23 TYPE Compact cylinder centre distances to UNITOP male piston rod Compact cylinder centre distances to UNITOP female piston rod Compact cylinder centre distances to ISO male piston rod Compact cylinder centre distances to ISO female piston rod 1 0 Double-acting 1 Double-acting through-rod 0 0 Magnetic S Non-magnetic s G No stick slip 32 BORE 32 40 50 63 80 0 0 Standard 050 STROKE F MATERIAL F TWO-FLAT piston rod AISI 303 stainless stell P GASKETS P Polyurethane gaskets
For the maximum suppliable strokes, look at the technical data s For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only
1-85
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF DOUBLE-ACTING
ACTUATORS
+ = ADD THE STROKE 1 = SENSOR SLOT 7 = ONLY FOR 63 to 100 8 = SEAT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS
DE MALE PISTON ROD
32 40 50 63 80
A 47 56 67 80 102
ISO 32.5 +0.1 -0.4 38 46.5 56.5 72
B UNITOP 32 +0.4 -0.1 42 50 62 82
B2 13 17
C 12 12 16 16 20
C1 9 9 11.5 11.5 13
CH 10 10 13 13 17
CH1 17 17 19 19 24
D 48.5 57.5 69 82 105
E H9 6 6 6 8 8
F 4 4 4 4 4
G 44.5 45.5 45.5 50 56
H 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 8.5
H1 37 38 38 42.5 47.5
K 30 35 40 45 45
L 4 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5
M 14 14 16 16 20
N 59.5 61 64.5 69 77
ISO M6 M6 M8 M8 M10
O UNITOP M6 M6 M8 M10 M10
ISO 5.2 5.2 6.2 6.2 8.5
O1 UNITOP 5.2 5.2 6.2 8.5 8.5
P M6 M6 M8 M8 M10
Q G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8
R M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5
S 22 22 24 24 32
DIMENSIONS OF THROUGH-ROD
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE 1 = SENSOR SLOT 7 = ONLY FOR 63 TO 80 8 = SLOT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS DE MALE PISTON ROD
32 40 50 63 80
A 47 56 67 80 102
ISO 32.5 +0.1 -0.4 38 46.5 56.5 72
B UNITOP 32 +0.4 -0.1 42 50 62 82
B2 13 17
C 12 12 16 16 20
C1 9 9 11.5 11.5 13
CH 10 10 13 13 17
CH1 17 17 19 19 24
D 48.5 57.5 69 82 105
G 44.5 45.5 45.5 50 56
H 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 8.5
H1 37 38 38 42 47.5
K 30 35 40 45 45
L 4 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5
M 14 14 16 16 20
M1 x strokes >5 ,5 N 14 9 50.5 14 9 52 16 11 53 16 11 57.5 20 15 64
N2 65.5 67.5 72 76.5 85
ISO M6 M6 M8 M8 M10
O UNITOP M6 M6 M8 M10 M10
ISO 5.2 5.2 6.2 6.2 8.5
O1 UNITOP 5.2 5.2 6.2 8.5 8.5
P M6 M6 M8 M8 M10
Q G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8
R M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5
S 22 22 24 24 32
1-86
COMPACT STOPPER CYLINDER
Compact stopper cylinders designed for stopping moving parts or chucks. With or without magnet execution Single-acting, oversize extended piston rod Can be also used as double-acting whith spring return Fixing centre distances to ISO 15552 for 32, 50, 80 and French standard NFE 49-004-1 and 2 (UNITOP). In the relevant cylinder slots, it is possible to mount retracting magnetic sensor.
Chuck impact direction TECHNICAL DATA

Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Stroke bore Design Versions Magnet for sensors Inrush pressure Weights Notes bar MPa psi C 10 1 145 10 to +80 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous mm 20 x15; 32 x 20; 50 x 30; 80 x 30; 80 x 40 a with NFE 49-004-1 and 2 fixin centre distances (UNITOP) mm 32 x 20; 50 x 30; 80 x 30; 80 x 40 with ISO 15552 fixin centre distances With profile heads with screws Single-acting extended rod, Can be also used as double-acting whith spring return All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request bar 20: 1.2; 32-50: 1; 80: 0.5 See page 1-9 For correct operation, it is advisable to use 50 mm filtere air
COMPONENTS 20 a PISTON ROD: Stainless steel, thick chromed b HEAD: extruded anodised aluminium alloy c BARREL: drawn anodised and calibrated aluminium alloy d PISTON GASKET: polyurethane e MAGNET: neodymium-plastic f PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane g GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert h STATIC O-RINGS: NBR i SECURING SCREWS: zinc-plated steel j RETURN SPRING: spring stainless steel k WHEEL: zinc-plated steel
1-87
ACTUATORS
COMPONENTS 32, 50, 80
ACTUATORS
a PISTON ROD: Stainless steel, thick chromed b HEAD: extruded anodised aluminium alloy c BARREL: drawn anodised and calibrated aluminium alloy d PISTON GASKET: polyurethane e MAGNET: 32 neodymium-plastic - 50 to 80 plastoferrite f PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane g GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert. h STATIC O-rings: NBR i SECURING SCREWS: zinc-plated steel j RETURN SPRING: spring stainless steel k WHEEL: zinc-plated steel COMPACT STOPPER CYLINDER FIXING OPTIONS A Fixing with screws, using the thread in the rear heads B Direct fixin from above using long through screws or tie rods. Non-magnetic stainless steel must be used (e.g. AISI 304) C Fixing with screws, using the thread in the front heads. D Fixing using flang fixe onto the cylinder.
FORCE OF SPRINGS IN COMPACT STOPPER CYLINDERS (THEORETICAL)

Stroke bore Min. load (N) Max. load (N) 20 x 15 13.7 21.2 32 x 20 22.4 36.0 50 x 30 50.2 115.9 80 x 30 97.9 178.5 80 x 40 71.0 178.5
LOAD GRAPH TRUNNION VERSION ROLLER VERSION
Impact mass [kg]
Impact velocity [m/min]
Impact mass [kg]
Impact velocity [m/min]
With stopper cylinders it is important to keep to the values shown in the graph to prevent early breakage of the mechanical parts. The values shown are only valid with about 1 mm plastic deformation (stopper on chuck).
1-88
20 STROKE 15 mm TRUNNION VERSION

1 = SENSOR SLOT
Code Description 23B0200015XP Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 20, stroke 15 23BS200015XP Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 20, stroke 15 (non-magnetic version)
32 STROKE 20 mm; 50 STROKE 30 mm TRUNNION VERSION

1 = SENSOR SLOT 8 = SEAT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS
B A 32x20 47 50x30 67 ISO 32.5 +0.1 -0.4 46.5 UNITOP 32 +0.4 -0.1 50 C 20 32 D 48.5 69 D1 38 53 E H9 6 6 F 4 4 G 64.5 75.5 H 7.5 7.5 H1 57 68 L 4 4.5 N 80.5 99.5 N1 20 30 ISO M6 M8
O UNITOP M6 M8
ISO 5.2 6.2
O1 UNITOP 5.2 6.2
Q G1/8 G1/8
Code 23B0320020XP 25B0320020XP 23BS320020XP 25BS320020XP 23B0500030XP 25B0500030XP 23BS500030XP 25BS500030XP
Description Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 32, stroke 20 UNITOP Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 32, stroke 20 ISO 15552 Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 32, stroke 20 UNITOP (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 32, stroke 20 ISO 15552 (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 50, stroke 30 UNITOP Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 50, stroke 30 ISO 15552 Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 50, stroke 30 UNITOP (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, trunnion 50, stroke 30 ISO 15552 (non-magnetic version)
1-89
ACTUATORS
20 STROKE 15 mm ROLLER VERSION
ACTUATORS
1 = SENSOR SLOT
Code Description 23C0200015XP Compact stopper cylinder, roller 20, stroke 15 23CS200015XP Compact stopper cylinder, roller 20, stroke 15 (non-magnetic version)
32 STROKE 20 mm; 50 STROKE 30 mm; 80 STROKE 30 AND 40 mm ROLLER VERSION

1 = SENSOR SLOT 7 = ONLY FOR 80 8 = SEAT FOR DIN 7984 SCREWS
32x20 50x30 80x30 80x40
A 47 67 102 102
ISO 32.5 +0.1 -0.4 46.5 72 72
B UNITOP 32 +0.4 -0.1 50 82 82
B2 17 17
C 20 32 50 50
D 48.5 69 105 105
D1 38 53 76 76
E H9 6 6 8 8
G 64.5 75.5 126 136
F 4 4 4 4
H 7.5 7.5 8.5 8.5
H1 57 68 117.5 127.5
H2 3 4 8 8
H3 6 6 10 10
H4 3.5 7 11 11
H5 7.5 12 18 18
ISO M6 M8 M10 M10
O UNITOP M6 M8 M10 M10
ISO 5.2 6.2 8.5 8.5
O1 UNITOP 5.2 6.2 8.5 8.5
L 4 4.5 5.5 5.5
L1 8 10 18 18
N 80.5 99.5 141 151
N1 38 50.5 63 73
Q G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8
R 9 12.5 18 18
Code 23C0320020XP 25C0320020XP 23CS320020XP 25CS320020XP 23C0500030XP 25C0500030XP 23CS500030XP 25CS500030XP 23C0800030XP 25C0800030XP 23CS800030XP 25CS800030XP 23C0800040XP 25C0800040XP 23CS800040XP 25CS800040XP
Description Compact stopper cylinder, roller 32, stroke 20 UNITOP Compact stopper cylinder, roller 32, stroke 20 ISO 15552 Compact stopper cylinder, roller 32, stroke 20 UNITOP (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, roller 32, stroke 20 ISO 15552 (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, roller 50, stroke 30 UNITOP Compact stopper cylinder, roller 50, stroke 30 ISO 15552 Compact stopper cylinder, roller 50, stroke 30 UNITOP (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, roller 50, stroke 30 ISO 15552 (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, roller 80, stroke 30 UNITOP Compact stopper cylinder, roller 80, stroke 30 ISO 15552 Compact stopper cylinder, roller 80, stroke 30 UNITOP (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, roller 80, stroke 30 ISO 15552 (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, roller 80, stroke 40 UNITOP Compact stopper cylinder, roller 80, stroke 40 ISO 15552 Compact stopper cylinder, roller 80, stroke 40 UNITOP (non-magnetic version) Compact stopper cylinder, roller 80, stroke 40 ISO 15552 (non-magnetic version)
1-90
ACCESSORIES FOR STOPPER CYLINDER

FLANGE 32, 50, 80
+ = ADD THE STROKE 32 50 80 A 50 68 107 B 80 110 160 C 64 90 135 D 32 45 63 E 7 9 12 N 54.5 57.5 111 S 10 12 15 Weight [g] 210 502 1575 UNITOP Code W0950326302 W0950506302 W0950806302
ACCESSORIES FOR COMPACT AND COMPACT TWO-FLAT CYLINDERS

FOOT - MODEL A
+ = ADD THE STROKE CMPC UNITOP, TWO-FLAT UNITOP Code A W0950126001 s 12 30 W0950126001 s 16 30 W0950206001 20 36 W0950256001 25 40 W0950322001 32 45 W0950406001 40 60 W0950406001F 40 60 W0950506001 50 68 W0950506001F 50 68 W0950636001 63 84 W0950636001F 63 84 W0950806001 80 102 W0951006001 100 123 Only for Two-Flat version CMPC ISO, TWO-FLAT ISO Code W0950322001 32 W0950402001 40 W0950502001 50 W0950632001 63 W0950802001 80 W0951002001 100 B 17.5 17.5 22 22 35 28 28 32 32 39 39 42 45 C 18 18 22 26 32 42 42 50 50 62 62 82 103 D 13 13 16 16 24 20 20 24 24 27 27 30 33 E 5.5 5.5 6.6 6.6 7 9 9 9 9 11 11 11 13.5 H 22 22 27 30 31.9 42.5 42.5 47 47 59.5 59.5 65.5 78 N 55.5 55.5 58.5 58.5 74.5 72 72 77 77 84.5 84.5 94 109.5 N1 64 64 70 71.5 92.5 85.5 85.5 93.5 93.5 104 104 116 132.5 S 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 6 6 8 8 Weight [g] 26 26 46 52 76 88 88 176 176 276 276 392 558
A 45 52 65 75 95 115
B 35 43 47 47 61 65
C 32 36 45 50 63 75
D 24 28 32 32 41 41
E 7 9 9 9 12 14
H 31.9 36 45 50 63 71
N 74.5 80 85 89.5 105 117.5
N1 92.5 101.5 109.5 114 138 148.5
S 4 4 4 6 6 6
Weight [g] 76 100 162 266 456 572
Note: Individually packed with 2 screws. s Non UNITOP norm fixin distance
MALE HINGE-MODEL BA
+ = ADD THE STROKE CMPC UNITOP, TWO-FLAT UNITOP Code B W0950126004 s 12 12 W0950126004 s 16 12 W0950206004 20 16 W0950256004 25 16 CMPC ISO, TWO-FLAT ISO Code W0950322004 32 W0950402004 40 W0950502004 50 W0950632004 63 W0950802004 80 W0951002004 100 D 16 16 20 20 M 6 6 8 8 N 58.5 58.5 62.5 62.5 R 6 6 8 8 S 6 6 6 6 Weight [g] 24 24 44 48
B 26 28 32 40 50 60
D 22 25 27 32 36 41
M 10 12 12 16 16 20
N 72.5 77 80 89.5 100 117.5
R 11 13 13 17 17 21
S 10 10 12 12 16 16
Weight [g] 94 124 220 316 578 850
Note: Supplied with 4 screws, 4 washers s Non UNITOP norm fixin distance
1-91
ISO Code W0950326302 W0950506312 W0950806312
32 50 80
A 50 65 95
B 80 110 153
C 64 90 126
D 32 45 63
E 7 9 12
N 54.5 57.5 112
S 10 12 16
Weight [g] 210 447 1190
ACTUATORS
FEMALE HINGE-MODEL B
+ = ADD THE STROKE CMPC UNITOP, TWO-FLAT UNITOP Code B W0950322003 32 45 W0950406003 40 52 W0950506003 50 60 W0950636003 63 70 W0950806003 80 90 W0951006003 100 110 CMPC ISO, TWO-FLAT ISO Code W0950322003 32 W0950402003 40 W0950502003 50 W0950632003 63 W0950802003 80 W0951002003 100
ACTUATORS
B1 26 28 32 40 50 60
D 22 25 27 32 36 41
M 10 12 12 16 16 20
M1 14 14 18 23 28
N 72.5 77 80 89.5 100 117.5
R 11 12.5 12.5 15 15 20
S 10 9 11 11 13 15
Weight [g] 116 184 266 470 670 1110
B 45 52 60 70 90 110
B1 26 28 32 40 50 60
D 22 25 27 32 36 41
M 10 12 12 16 16 23
N 72.5 77 80 89.5 100 117.5
R 11 13 13 17 17 21
S 10 10 12 12 16 16
Weight [g] 116 160 252 394 670 1085
Note: Supplied with 4 screws, 4 washers, 2 snap-rings and 1 pin.

+ = ADD THE STROKE CMPC Code W0950126002 s W0950126002 s W0950206002 W0950256002 12 16 20 25 A 29 29 36 40 B 55 55 70 76 C 43 43 55 60 E 5.5 5.5 6.6 6.6 N 48 48 48 49.5 S 10 10 10 10 Weight [g] 112 112 184 226
Note: Supplied with 4 screws s Non UNITOP norm fixin distance

+ = ADD THE STROKE CMPC UNITOP Code W0950322002 W0950406002 W0950506002 W0950636002 W0950806002 W0951006002 TWO FLAT UNITOP Code W0950322002 W0950406002F W0950506002F W0950636002F W0950806002F 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 50 60 68 87 107 128 B 80 102 110 130 160 190 C 64 82 90 110 135 163 D 32 36 45 50 63 75 E 7 9 9 9 12 14 N 54.5 55.5 57.5 65 71 81.5 S 10 10 12 15 15 15 Weight [g] 246 454 655 1255 1900 2700
32 40 50 63 80
A 50 60 68 87 107
B 80 102 110 130 160
C 64 82 90 110 135
D 32 36 45 50 63
E 7 9 9 9 12
N 54.5 55.5 57.5 65 71
S 10 10 12 15 15
Weight [g] 246 454 655 1255 1900
CMPC ISO, TWO FLAT ISO Code W0950322002 32 W0950402002 40 W0950502002 50 W0950632002 63 W0950802002 80 W0951002002 100 Note: Supplied with 4 screws
A 50 55 65 75 95 115
B 80 90 110 120 153 178
C 64 72 90 100 126 150
D 32 36 45 50 63 75
E 7 9 9 9 12 14
N 54.5 55.5 57.5 62 72 82.5
S 10 10 12 12 16 16
Weight [g] 246 290 522 670 1420 2040
1-92

+ = ADD THE STROKE CMPC ISO, TWO FLAT ISO Code W0950322006 32 W0950402006 40 W0950502006 50 W0950632006 63 W0950802006 80 W0951002006 100 B 14 16 16 21 21 25 D 22 25 27 32 36 41 M 10 12 12 16 16 20 N 72.5 77 80 89.5 100 117.5 R 16 19 19 24 24 30 S 10 10 12 12 16 16 Weight [g] 106 142 236 336 572 840
FLANGE FOR OPPOSITE CYLINDERS

CMPC UNITOP Code 0950123060 s 0950123060 s 0950203060 0950253060 0950323060 0950403060 0950503060 0950633060 0950803060 0951003060 CMPC ISO Codice 0950323060 0950403061 0950503061 0950633061 0950803061 0951003061 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 M 12.5 12.5 12.5 13 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 16.5 19.5 Weight [g] UNITOP ISO 29 29 45 57 88 88 106 106 172 158 274 258 470 452 826 801
Note: Supplied complete with 1 pin, 4 screws s Non UNITOP norm fixin distance
ASSEMBLING OPPOSING CYLINDERS
FORK - MODEL GK-M

CMPC UNITOP AND ISO, TWO FLAT UNITOP AND ISO Code A B C D W0950120020 12 12 6 12 M6 W0950200020 16 16 8 16 M8 W0950322020 20 20 10 20 M10x1.25 W0950322020 25 20 10 20 M10x1.25 W0950322020 32 20 10 20 M10x1.25 W0950322020 40 20 10 20 M10x1.25 W0950402020 50 24 12 24 M12x1.25 W0950402020 63 24 12 24 M12x1.25 W0950502020 80 32 16 32 M16x1.5 W0950802020 100 40 20 40 M20x1.5 Note: Individually packed F 24 32 40 40 40 40 48 48 64 80 L 31 42 52 52 52 52 62 62 83 105 M 6 8 10 10 10 10 12 12 16 20 N 16 22 26 26 26 26 32 32 40 48 Weight [g] 20 48 92 92 92 92 148 148 340 690
1-93
ACTUATORS

CMPC UNITOP AND ISO, TWO FLAT UNITOP AND ISO Code A B B1 C CH D W0950120025 12 20 9 6.75 11 11 M6 W0950200025 16 24 12 9 13 14 M8 W0950322025 20 28 14 10.5 15 17 M10x1.25 W0950322025 25 28 14 10.5 15 17 M10x1.25 W0950322025 32 28 14 10.5 15 17 M10x1.25 W0950322025 40 28 14 10.5 15 17 M10x1.25 W0950402025 50 32 16 12 17 19 M12x1.25 W0950402025 63 32 16 12 17 19 M12x1.25 W0950502025 80 42 21 15 23 22 M16x1.5 W0950802025 100 50 25 18 27 30 M20x1.5 Note: Individually packed.
ACTUATORS
F 30 36 43 43 43 43 50 50 64 77
G 10 12.5 15 15 15 15 17.5 17.5 22 27.5
G1 13 16 19 19 19 19 22 22 27 34
L 40 48 57 57 57 57 66 66 85 102
M 6 8 10 10 10 10 12 12 16 20
Weight [g] 28 50 78 78 78 78 116 116 226 404
COMPENSATION JOINT - MODEL GA

CMPC UNITOP, ISO, TWO FLAT Code A B W0950326021 20 49 36 W0950326021 25 49 36 W0950326021 32 49 36 W0950326021 40 49 36 W0950406021 50 59 42 W0950406021 63 59 42 W0950506021 80 79 58 W0950806021 100 89 65 Note: Individually packed. C 30 30 30 30 36 36 44 51 CH 13 13 13 13 15 15 22 27 D 11 11 11 11 14 14 17 19 D1 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 8.5 8.5 10.5 12.5 F M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x.125 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 G 39.5 39.5 39.5 39.5 44 44 59 69 G1 17 17 17 17 19 19 26 31 P 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 8.5 8.5 10.5 12.5 S 12 12 12 12 15 15 20 20 S1 10 10 10 10 13.5 13.5 15 20 Weight [g] 172 172 172 172 286 286 628 1200
COUNTER-HINGE CETOP 32 to 100

CMPC UNITOP AND ISO, TWO FLAT UNITOP AND ISO Code A B C D E W0950322008 32 26 19 7 10 25 W0950402008 40 28 26 9 12 32 W0950502008 50 32 26 9 12 32 W0950632008 63 40 33 11 16 40 W0950802008 80 50 33 11 16 40 W0951002008 100 60 44 14 20 50 Note: Supplied complete with 4 screws, 4 washers F 20 32 32 50 50 70 G 32 45 45 63 63 90 H 37 54 54 75 75 103 I 41 52 52 63 63 80 L 18 25 25 32 32 40 M 8 10 10 12 12 16 N 10 12 12 15 15 22 Weight [g] 96 216 212 440 464 985
COUNTER-HINGE 16 to 25 - MODEL BC
CMPC UNITOP Code W0950120005 W0950120005 W0950200005 W0950200005 12 16 20 25 A 25 25 32 32 B 25 25 30 30 B1 12 12 16 16 C 15 15 20 20 D 5.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 E 2 2 4 4 F 27 27 30 30 M 6 6 8 8 R 7 7 10 10 S 3 3 4 4 Weight [g] 40 40 78 78
Note: Supplied complete with 1 pin and and 2 snap rings
1-94

CMPC UNITOP, ISO, TWO FLAT UNITOP E ISO Code A B C W0950120030 12 M6 10 10 W0950200030 16 M8 20 20 W0950322030 20 M10x1.25 20 20 W0950322030 25 M10x1.25 20 20 W0950322030 32 M10x1.25 20 20 W0950322030 40 M10x1.25 20 20 W0950402030 50 M12x1.25 24 20 W0950402030 63 M12x1.25 24 20 W0950502030 80 M16x1.5 32 32 W0950802030 100 M20x1.5 40 40 Note: Individually packed. D 35 57 71 71 71 71 75 75 103 119 E 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 F 8.5 12.5 22 22 22 22 22 22 32 32 SW1 5 7 12 12 12 12 12 12 20 20 SW2 SW3 13 13 17 17 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 41 41 41 41 SW4 7 11 19 19 19 19 19 19 30 30 SW5 10 13 17 17 17 17 19 19 24 30 Weight [g] 24 56 216 216 216 216 220 220 620 680

VALVE ASSEMBLY ON CYLINDER With this type of cylinder, the valves (D) can be mounted directly using the retracting sensor slot, without requiring the use of intermediate brackets. This can be done using the special plates (A) which come with both M3 and M4 threads, and screws (B) of the size, type and quantity shown in the table below. The plates are supplied complete with 2 stud pins, one M3 and one M4 (C). After the valve centre distance and the position of the valve have been determined, the plates can be secured to the cylinder. A position memory will be created to facilitate subsequent maintenance on the valve.
Type of valve to mount (D) MACH 11 SERIE 70 1/8 SERIE 70 1/4
Fixing plate (A) CODE 0950003000 n 2 n 2 n 2
Position memory: grub screw (C) to be used M4 M3 M3
Screw (B) for connection to the cylinder (one per plate) M3x16 UNI 5931 (DIN 912) M4x25 UNI 5931 (DIN 912) M4x30 UNI 5931 (DIN 912)
Washer (B) (one per screw) A3.2 UNI 1751 (DIN 127A) A4.3 UNI 1751 (DIN 127A)
1-95
ACTUATORS
SPARE PARTS
COMPACT CYLINDERS, SERIES CMPC
SPARE PARTS FOR COMPACT, COMPACT TWO-FLAT AND STOPPER CYLINDERS
ACTUATORS
Code 009 . . . 7001 009 . . . 7101 0090327101 009 . . . 8101 009 . . . 7201 0090327201 009 . . . 8201 009 . . . 7401 009 . . . 7501 009 . . . 7901 0090327901 009 . . . 8901
Bores 12 to 100 12 to 100 32 40 to 100 12 to 100 32 40 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 32 40 to 100
Type Complete set of gaskets polyurethane Front cylinder head kit for UNITOP polyurethane Front cylinder head kit for ISO 32 polyurethane Front cylinder head kit for ISO polyurethane Rear cylinder head kit for UNITOP polyurethane Rear cylinder head kit for ISO 32 polyurethane Rear cylinder head kit for ISO polyurethane Piston kit polyurethane Magnet Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for UNITOP polyurethane Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for ISO 32 polyurethane Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for ISO polyurethane
Parts dfh bgfhi bgfhi bgfhi hij hij hij deklm e bdefghijklm bdefghijklm bdefghijklm
COMPACT CYLINDERS, SERIES CMPC TWO-FLAT
Code 009 . . . 7001F 009 . . . 7101F 0090327101F 009 . . . 8101F 009 . . . 7201 0090327201 009 . . . 8201 009 . . . 7401 009 . . . 7501 009 . . . 7901F 0090327901F 009 . . . 8901F
Bores 32 to 80 40 to 80 32 40 to 80 40 to 80 32 40 to 80 32 to 80 32 to 80 40 to 80 32 40 to 80
Type Set of gaskets Front cylinder head kit for UNITOP Front cylinder head kit for ISO 32 Front cylinder head kit for ISO Rear cylinder head kit for UNITOP Rear cylinder head kit for ISO 32 Rear cylinder head kit for ISO Piston kit Magnet Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for UNITOP Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for ISO 32 Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for ISO
Parts dhl bgfhi bgfhi bgfhi hij hij hij deklim e bdefghijklm bdefghijklm bdefghijklm
1-96
COMPACT CYLINDERS, STOPPER
Code 009 . . . 7060 009 . . . 7160 0090327160 009 . . . 8160 009 . . . 7201 009 . . . 7260 0090327201 009 . . . 8260 0090207401 009 . . . 7460 009 . . . 7501 009 . . . 7960 0090327960 009. . . 8960
Bores 20; 32; 50; 80 20; 32; 50; 80 32 50; 80 20; 32 50; 80 32 50; 80 20 32; 50; 80 20; 32; 50; 80 20; 32; 50; 80 32 50; 80
Type Complete set of gaskets Front cylinder head kit for UNITOP Front cylinder head kit for ISO 32 Front cylinder head kit for ISO Rear cylinder head kit for UNITOP 20 - 32 Rear cylinder head kit for UNITOP Rear cylinder head kit for ISO 32 Rear cylinder head kit for ISO Piston kit 20 Piston kit Magnet Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for UNITOP Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for ISO 32 Front + rear cylinder head + piston kit for ISO
Parts dfh bgfhi bgfhi bgfhi hij hij hij hij dek deklm e bdefghijklm bdefghijklm bdefghijklm
NOTES
1-97
SPARE PARTS FOR COMPACT, COMPACT TWO-FLAT AND STOPPER CYLINDERS
ACTUATORS
ROUND CYLINDER SERIES RNDC
ACTUATORS
Clean profil cylinders available in different versions: configuratio with or without magnet single- and double-acting - single or through-rod pneumatic cushioning on request range of gaskets available in NBR, POLYURETHANE and FKM/FPM (for high temperatures)
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Versions Magnet for sensors Standard strokes bar MPa psi C
POLYURETHANE 10 1 145 10 to +80
NBR
FKM/FPM
LOW TEMPERATURE
Inrush pressure Forces generated at 6 bar thrust/retraction Weights Notes
10 10 10 1 1 1 145 145 145 10 to +80 10 to +150 (non-magnetic cylinders) 35 to +80 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous mm 32; 40; 50 Screwed heads Double-acting, Double-acting through-rod, Double-acting cushioned, Double-acting through-rod cushioned, Single-acting, Single-acting through-rod, no-stick slip All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request mm Single-acting: for bores 32 to 50 strokes from 1 to 250 Double-acting: for bores 32 to 50 strokes from 1 to 500 Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems bar 32 and 40: 0.4 - 50: 0.3 See page 1-7 See page 1-9 For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air.
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, thick chromed b PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM c GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert d BARREL: drawn anodised aluminium alloy e HALF-PISTON: self-lubricating technopolymer with integrated cushioning olives f MAGNET: plastoferrite g PISTON GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM h HEAD: anodised aluminium alloy i HEAD: anodised aluminium alloy
1-98

+ = ADD STROKE
DIMENSIONS OF THROUGH-ROD VERSIONS

DIMENSIONS OF STANDARD DOUBLE-ACTING AND THROUGH-ROD

32 40 50 D M30x1.5 M38x1.5 M45x1.5 E M8x1 M10x1 M12x1.5 F 22 24 32 G 30 38 45 CH1 10 13 17 I 96 113 120 L 172 198 220 M M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 N 14 16 18 O G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 P 38 46 57 R 78 89 96 S 12 16 20 SW 17 19 24 T 49 57 62 CH2 36 43 54 V 30 35 38 W 40 45 50 L1 220 251 284
DIMENSIONS OF STANDARD SINGLE-ACTING AND THROUGH-ROD

I 40 113 145.5 178 210.5 243 L 40 198 230.5 263 295.5 328 R1 40 146 178.5 211 243.5 276 L1 40 251 283.5 316 348.5 381
Lower limit 0 50 100 150 200
Stroke , C # , C # , C # , C # , C #
Upper limit 50 100 150 200 250
32 96 125 154 183 212
50 120 155.5 191 226.5 262
32 172 201 230 259 288
50 220 255.5 291 326.5 362
32 127 156 185 214 243
50 158 193.5 229 264.5 300
32 220 249 278 307 336
50 284 319.5 355 390.5 426
For all the other values, see previous table, except for T and R which are both replaced by R1
1-99
ACTUATORS
KEY TO CODES
ACTUATORS
CYL n 104 109 110 n 111 112 113 114 115
112 TYPE SE through-rod DEA DE SE DEM DEMA DEM through-rod DEMA through-rod
0 0 Standard s G No stick slip S Non-magnetic
32 BORE 32 40 50
A C Z X
C MATERIAL C45 chrome rod, aluminium piston rod C45 chrome rod, technopolymer piston rod Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston Stainless steel piston rod and nut technopolymer piston
P N V B
P GASKETS polyurethane NBR FKM/FPM low temperature
DE: DEM: DEMA: DEA: SE:
Double-acting (non-cushioned, not magnetic) Magnetic double-acting (non-cushioned) Magnetic double-acting (cushioned) Cushioned double-acting (non-magnetic) Single-acting (magnetic)
Only available for non-magnetic versions (S) and with aluminium piston (A or Z) s For speeds lower than 0.2m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only n Only available for versions with aluminium piston (A or Z)
NOTES
1-100
ACCESSORIES FOR ROUND CYLINDER: FIXINGS

FOOT MODEL AC
+ = ADD STROKE
COUNTER-HINGE MODEL BC
+ = ADD STROKE Code W0950320005 W0950400005 W0950500005 32 40 50 A 40 50 54 B 35 40 45 C 24 30 34 D 4 5 6 E 7 9 9 F 8 10 10 G 12 13 14 H 46.1 56.1 69.1 I 20 28 36 L 127 146 158 M 60 72.5 89 R 12 13 14 SW 13 17 19 Weight [g] 152 262 401
HEAD LOCK RING MODEL G

Code W0950320010 W0950400010 W0950500010 32 40 50 A M30x1.5 M38x1.5 M45x1.5 B 45 50 58 C 7 8 9 Weight [g] 46 56 124
FORK MODEL GK-M

Code W0950322020 W0950402020 W0950502020 32 40 50 M 10 12 16 C 20 24 32 B 10 12 16 A 20 24 32 L 52 62 83 F 40 48 64 D M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 N 26 32 40 Weight [g] 92 148 340
1-101
ACCESSORIES FOR ROUND CYLINDER SERIES RNDC
ACTUATORS
Code W0950320002 W0950400002 W0950500002
32 40 50
A 124 153 160
B 50 60 64
C 7 10 10
D 4 5 6
E 14 20 20
F 52 60 70
G 7 9 9
H 14 18 20
I 28 30 40
L 150 178 190
M 66 80 90
N 49 58 70
O 28 33 40
Weight [g] 104 190 296
SPHERICAL JOINT MODEL GA-M
ACTUATORS
Code W0950322025 W0950402025 W0950502025
32 40 50
M 10 12 16
C 15 17 22
B1 10,5 12 15
B 14 16 21
A 28 32 42
L 57 66 85
F 43 50 64
D M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5
G 15 17.5 22
CH 17 19 22
Weight [g] 78 116 226
ACCESSORIES FOR ROUND CYLINDER SERIES RNDC
ARTICULATED JOINT MODEL GA-K

Code W0950322030 W0950402030 W0950502030 32 40 50 A M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 B 20 24 32 C 20 20 32 D 71 75 103 E 4 4 4 F 22 22 32 SW1 12 12 20 SW2 30 30 41 SW3 30 30 41 SW4 19 19 30 SW5 17 19 24 Weight [g] 216 220 620
FLEXIBLE COLLAR - MODEL GA

Code W0950326021 W0950406021 W0950506021 32 40 50 A 49 59 79 B 36 42 58 C 30 36 44 CH 13 15 22 D 11 14 17 D1 6.5 8.5 10.5 F M10x1.25 M12x.125 M16x1.5 G 39.5 44 59 G1 17 19 26 P 6.5 8.5 10.5 S 12 15 20 S1 10 13.5 15 Weight [g] 172 286 628
ACCESSORIES FOR ROUND CYLINDER: MAGNETIC SENSORS

SENSOR
Code W0950000201 W0950000222 W0950000232 Description REED sensor DSM2 - C525 HS E. HALL PNP sensor DSM3-N225 E. HALL NPN sensor DSM3-M225
N.B.: For technical data see page 1-286
SENSOR CIRCLIP
Code W0950000132 W0950000140 W0950000150 Bore 32 40 50 Model Circlip DXF 36 - 32 Circlip DXF 45 - 40 Circlip DXF 52 - 50 36 45 55 A 29.5 34.5 38.5 B 10 10 10
FOR MOUNTING ON THE CYLINDER 50 INSERT THE ALUMINIUM SPACER a YOU FIND IN THE PACKAGE
1-102
SHORT-STROKE CYLINDERS SERIES SSCY
Compact cylinders suitable for installation in limited spaces: configuratio with or without magnet single or double-acting - single or through-rod anti-rotation version and with built-in fixing possible choice of NBR, POLYURETHANE or FKM/FPM gaskets special design on request.
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Standard strokes bar MPa C mm mm
Polyurethane 10 1 10 to +80
NBR
FKM/FPM
Low Temperature
Versions Magnet for sensors Inrush pressure single piston rod through-rod Forces generated at 6 bar thrust/retraction Weight Notes
bar bar
10 10 10 1 1 1 10 to +80 10 to +150 (non-magnetic cylinders) 35 to +80 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 12 ; 16 ; 20 ; 25 ; 32 ; 40 ; 50 ; 63 ; 80 ; 100 With profil Double acting: 12 to 25, stroke 5 to 50 mm 32 to 40, stroke 5 to 70 mm 50 to 63, stroke 5 to 110 mm 80 to 100, stroke 5 to 150 mm Single-acting: 12 to 25, stroke 5 to 25 mm 32 to 63, stroke 5 to 50 mm Anti-rotation: 12 to 63, stroke 5 to 120 mm 80 to 100, stroke 5 to 150 mm Perforated through-rod: 20 to 40, stroke 5 to 100 mm 50 to 63, stroke 5 to 130 mm 80 to 100, stroke 5 to 165 mm Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems Double-acting, Double-acting through-rod, Single-acting retracted piston rod, Single acting extended piston rod, Single-acting through-rod, Perforated through-rod, Anti-rotation, Oscillating male, Oscillating female, no-stick slip* All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 1 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 See page 1-7 See page 1-8 * Using for speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. For no-stick-slip versions use no-lubricated air only
COMPONENTS
a b c d e f g h i PISTON ROD: C45 steel or stainless steel, thick chromed HEAD: 12 to 25 nichel-plated brass 32 to 100 anodised aluminium PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert BARREL: drawn anodised aluminium alloy HALF-PISTON: 12 to 63 acetal resin 80 to 100 in aluminium with PTFE guide pad PISTON GASKET: polyurethane, NBR or FKM/FPM MAGNET: 12 to 25 neodymium - 32 to 100 plastoferrite Static O-rings: NBR or FKM/FPM
1-103
ACTUATORS
FIXING METHOD
ACTUATORS
Fix directly from above using long through-screws or tie rods. Non-magnetic stainless steel must be used (e.g. AISI 304).
DIMENSIONS STANDARD VERSIONS

+ = ADD THE STROKE
DIMENSIONS OF DOUBLE ACTING

12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 23.5 28 32 37 45 54.5 66 80 100 124 B 13 20 22 26 32 40 50 62 82 103 C 6 8 10 10 12 12 16 16 20 25 C1 5.5 7.5 9 9 11 11 15 15 19 24 D 28 33 37 47.5 56 62.7 73 88 110 134 E 26 28 32 39 48 54.5 66 80 100 124 F 11 11 11 18 18 18 18 23 26 26 G 32.5 33 32 33 37 39.5 39.5 42 57 64 G1 36.5 40.8 44.7 46.2 48.7 67.2 74.7 H 6.5 6.7 6.5 8.5 10 10 11 12 14 15 H1 10.5 10.5 10.5 8.5 10 10 11 12 14 15 J 3.7 3.7 4.6 4.6 5.5 5.5 6.6 9 9 11 K 6 6 7.5 7.5 10 10 11 15 15 18 L 3.7 3.7 4.6 4.6 5.7 5.7 6.8 9 9 11 M 7 10 10 10 15 15 18 18 18 20 N 38 37.5 36.5 42.5 48.3 53.2 53.2 57.7 75.2 84.3 O 20 25 30 35 35 44 56 P M3 M5 M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M12 Q M5 M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 R 20 22 28 36 40 50 62 82 103 S 8 8 8 15 15 15 15 15 19 19 CH 5 7 8 8 10 10 13 13 17 22 T 2 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 3.5 3.5 4 5 U 9.5 10 11 14 18 20 25 31 41 51.5 V 16.5 19 21 28 32 35.5 40 48 60 72
DIMENSIONS OF SINGLE-ACTING, RETRACTED PISTON ROD

12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 stroke 5 to 25 5 to 25 5 to 25 5 to 25 5 to 25 > 25 to 50 5 to 25 > 25 to 50 5 to 25 > 25 to 50 5 to 25 > 25 to 50 A 23.5 28 32 37 45 B 13 20 22 26 32 C 6 8 10 10 12 12 16 16 C1 5.5 7.5 9 9 11 11 15 15 D 28 33 37 47.5 56 E 26 28 32 39 48 F 11 11 11 18 18 G 32.5 33 32 33 37 45 39.5 47.5 39.5 47.5 42 50 G1 36.5 40.8 48.8 44.7 52.7 46.2 54.2 48.7 56.7 H 6.5 6.7 6.5 8.5 10 10 11 12 H1 10.5 10.5 10.5 8.5 10 10 11 12 J 3.7 3.7 4.6 4.6 5.5 5.5 6.6 9 K 6 6 7.5 7.5 10 10 11 15 L 3.7 3.7 4.6 4.6 5.7 5.7 6.8 9 M 7 10 10 10 15 15 18 18 N 38 37.5 36.5 42.5 48.3 56.3 53.2 61.2 53.2 61.2 57.7 65.7 O 20 25 30 35 35 P M3 M5 M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M8 Q M5 M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 R 20 22 28 36 S 8 8 8 15 15 15 15 15 CH 5 7 8 8 10 10 13 13 T 2 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 3.5 3.5 U 9.5 10 11 14 18 20 25 31 V 16.5 19 21 28 32 35.5 40 48
54.5 40 66 80 50 62
62.7 54.5 18 73 88 66 80 18 23
G1/8 40 G1/8 50 G1/8 62
1-104
DIMENSIONS OF SINGLE-ACTING EXTENDED PISTON ROD

12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
stroke 5 to 25 5 to 25 5 to 25 5 to 25 5 to 25 > 25 to 50 5 to 25 > 25 to 50 5 to 25 > 25 to 50 5 to 25 > 25 to 50
A 23.5 28 32 37 45
B 13 20 22 26 32
C 6 8 10 10 12 12 16 16
C1 5.5 7.5 9 9 11 11 15 15
D 28 33 37 47.5 56
E 26 28 32 39 48
F 11 11 11 18 18
54.5 40 66 80 50 62
62.7 54.5 18 73 88 66 80 18 23
G 32.5 33 32 33 37 45 39.5 47.5 39.5 47.5 42 50
G1 36.5 40.8 48.8 44.7 52.7 46.2 54.2 48.7 56.7
H 6.5 6.7 6.5 8.5 10 10 11 12
H1 10.5 10.5 10.5 8.5 10 10 11 12
J 3.7 3.7 4.6 4.6 5.5 5.5 6.6 9
K 6 6 7.5 7.5 10 10 11 15
L 3.7 3.7 4.6 4.6 5.7 5.7 6.8 9
M 7 10 10 10 15 15 18 18
N 38 37.5 36.5 42.5 48.3 56.3 53.2 61.2 53.2 61.2 57.7 65.7
O 20 25 30 35 35
P M3 M5 M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M8
Q M5 M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8
R 20 22 28 36
S 8 8 8 15 15 15 15 15
CH 5 7 8 8 10 10 13 13
T 2 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 3.5 3.5
U 9.5 10 11 14 18 20 25 31
V 16.5 19 21 28 32 35.5 40 48
G1/8 40 G1/8 50 G1/8 62
DIMENSIONS OF 12 ANTI-ROTATION
+ = ADD THE STROKE
12
A B 23.5 13
C 6
C1 5.5
D 28
E 26
F 11
G H 32.5 6.5
H1 J 10.5 M6
L 12
N 38
Z1 16
Z2 11
Q M5
S 8
U 9.5
V AA 16.5 8
BB 3.5
CC 6
DD 3.5
FF M3
GG 4
1-105
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF 16 TO 100 ANTI-ROTATION
ACTUATORS
+ = ADD THE STROKE
16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
A 28 32 37 45 54.5 66 80 100 124
B 20 22 26 32 40 50 62 82 103
C 8 10 10 12 12 16 16 20 25
C1 7.5 9 9 11 11 15 15 19 24
D 33 37 47.5 56 62.7 73 88 110 134
E 28 32 39 48 54.5 66 80 100 124
F 11 11 18 18 18 18 23 26 26
G 33 32 33 37 39.5 39.5 42 57 64
G1 36.5 40.8 44.7 46.2 48.7 67.2 74.7
H 6.7 6.5 8.5 10 10 11 12 14 15
H1 10.5 10.5 8.5 10 10 11 12 14 15
J 3.7 4.6 4.6 5.5 5.5 6.6 9 9 11
K 6 7.5 7.5 10 10 11 15 15 18
L 3.7 4.6 4.6 5.7 5.7 6.8 9 9 11
N 37.5 36.5 42.5 48.3 53.2 53.2 57.7 75.2 84.3
Z1 20 22 22 26 34 43 55 70 94
Z2 15 18 22 26 34 43 55 70 94
Q M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/4 G1/4
R 20 22 28 36 40 50 62 82 103
S 8 8 15 15 15 15 15 19 19
CH 7 8 8 10 10 13 13 17 22
U 10 11 14 18 20 25 31 41 51.5
V 19 21 28 32 35.5 40 48 60 72
AA 8 8 8 10 10 12 12 14 17
BB 3.5 5 5 6 6 7 9 9 9
CC 6 7.5 7.5 10 10 11 14 14 14
DD 3.5 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 6.5 9 9 9
EE 6 7.5 8 10 10 11 15 15 18
FF M3 M4 M4 M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M8
GG 4 6 6 8 8 10 10 12 12
O 20 25 30 35 35 44 56
1-106
DIMENSIONS OF THROUGH-ROD
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE PERFORATED THROUGH-ROD
DIMENSION OF DOUBLE ACTING THROUGH-ROD AND PERFORATED THROUGH-ROD

12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 23.5 28 32 37 45 54.5 66 80 100 124 B 13 20 22 26 32 40 50 62 82 103 C 6 8 10 10 12 12 16 16 20 25 C1 5.5 7.5 9 9 11 11 15 15 19 24 D 28 33 37 47.5 56 62.7 73 88 110 134 d** 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 4 5 6 E 26 28 32 39 48 54.5 66 80 100 124 F 11 11 11 18 18 18 18 23 26 26 G2 36.7 36.8 36 35.7 37 39.5 39.5 42 57 64 G3 42.7 44.5 49.9 52.9 55.4 77.4 85.4 H 10.5 10.5 10.5 8.5 10 10 11 12 14 15 H1 10.5 10.5 10.5 8.5 10 10 11 12 14 15 J 3.7 3.7 4.6 4.6 5.5 5.5 6.6 9 9 11 K 6 6 7.5 7.5 10 10 11 15 15 18 L 3.7 3.7 4.6 4.6 5.7 5.7 6.8 9 9 11 M 7 10 10 10 15 15 18 18 18 20 N1 47.7 45.8 45.0 54.7 59.5 66.9 66.9 73.4 93.4 104.6 O 20 25 30 35 35 44 56 P M3 M5 M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M12 Q M5 M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 R 20 22 28 36 40 50 62 82 103 S 8 8 8 15 15 15 15 15 19 19 CH 5 7 8 8 10 10 13 13 17 22 T 2 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 3.5 3.5 4 5 U 9.5 10 11 14 18 20 25 31 41 51.5 V 16.5 19 21 28 32 35.5 40 48 60 72 X* 5.5 4.5 4.5 6 7.5 8.5 7 9 8 9.6
* for 12, 16, 20: (N1++) = (G2+) + (X) + (X+) ** column for perforated through-rod only
DIMENSION OF SINGLE-ACTING THROUGH-ROD

12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 stroke 5 to 25 5 to 25 5 to 25 5 to 25 5 to 25 > 25 to 50 5 to 25 > 25 to 50 5 to 25 > 25 to 50 5 to 25 > 25 to 50 A 23.5 28 32 37 45 B 13 20 22 26 32 C 6 8 10 10 12 12 16 16 C1 5.5 7.5 9 9 11 11 15 15 D 28 33 37 47.5 56 E 26 28 32 39 48 F 11 11 11 18 18 G2 36.7 36.8 36 35.7 37 45 39.5 47.5 39.5 47.5 42 50 G3 42.7 44.5 52.5 49.9 57.9 52.9 60.9 55.4 63.4 H 10.5 10.5 10.5 8.5 10 10 11 12 H1 10.5 10.5 10.5 8.5 10 10 11 12 J 3.7 3.7 4.6 4.6 5.5 5.5 6.6 9 K 6 6 7.5 7.5 10 10 11 15 L 3.7 3.7 4.6 4.6 5.7 5.7 6.8 9 M 7 10 10 10 15 15 18 18 N1 47.7 45.8 45.0 57.7 59.5 67.5 66.9 74.9 66.9 74.9 73.4 81.4 O 20 25 30 35 35 P M3 M5 M5 M5 M6 Q M5 M5 M5 G1/8 G1/8 R 20 22 28 36 S 8 8 8 15 15 CH 5 7 8 8 10 T 2 2 2 2 2.5 U 9.5 10 11 14 18 X* 5.5 4.5 4.5 6 7.5 7.5 35.5 8.5 8.5 40 7 7 48 9 9 V 16.5 19 21 28 32
54.5 40 66 80 50 62
62.7 54.5 18 73 88 66 80 18 23
M6 G1/8 40 15 M8 G1/8 50 15 M8 G1/8 62 15
10 2.5 20 13 3.5 25 13 3.5 31
* for 12, 16, 20: (N 1++) = (G2+) + (X) + (X+)
1-107
ACTUATORS
KEY TO CODES
ACTUATORS
CYL n 208 n 209 n 210 n 211 212 213 214 n 215 217 t 218 221 222 n 223
212 TIPOLOGIA Single-acting retracted rod, non-magnetic Single-acting extended rod, non-magnetic Single-acting, retracted rod Single acting, extended rod Double acting, magnetic Double acting, non-magnetic Double acting, through-rod Single-acting, retracted, anti-rotation Double acting, anti-rotation Double acting, perforated through-rod Oscillating male hinge (up to 63 only) Oscillating female hinge (up to 63 only) Single-acting, through-rod
0 0 Standard S Non-magnetic s G No stick slip
40 BORE 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
C MATERIAL A C45 chrome rod, aluminium piston rod 12 to 63 mm C C45 chrome rod, technopolymer piston rod (standard 80 to 100 mm) Z Stainless steel piston rod and nut aluminium piston 12 to 63 mm X Stainless steel piston rod and nut technopolymer piston (standard 80 to 100 mm)
P N V B
P GASKETS Polyurethane gaskets NBR gaskets FKM/FPM gaskets Low temperature
In the code of cylinder with letter in fourth position 100 becomes A1 n Available up to 63 t Available from 20
Only available for non-magnetic versions (S) and with aluminium piston (A or Z) s For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only
DIMENSIONS: SAME AS 222 VERSION (FEMALE HINGE MOD. B)

+ = ADD THE STROKE 32 40 50 63 stroke 5 to 70 5 to 70 5 to 110 5 to 110 D2 10 12 12 16 G 59 64.5 66.5 74 G 62.8 69.7 73.2 80.7 H6 22 25 27 32 H8 10 10 12 12 N 70.3 78.2 80.2 89.7 R 11 13 13 17 S1 26 28 32 40 S2 45 52 60 70
Note: For other dimensions, refer to the standard version
DIMENSIONS: SAME AS 221 VERSION (MALE HINGE MOD. BA)

+ = ADD THE STROKE 32 40 50 63 stroke 5 to 70 5 to 70 5 to 110 5 to 110 D2 10 12 12 16 G 59 64.5 66.5 74 G1 62.8 69.7 73.2 80.7 H6 22 25 27 32 H8 10 10 12 12 N 70.3 78.2 80.2 89.7 R 11 13 13 17 S1 26 28 32 40
Note: For other dimensions, refer to the standard version.
1-108
DIMENSIONS OF MALE NIPPLE FOR PISTON ROD

Code 219001200 219001600 219001600 219002500 219003200 219004000 219005000 219005000 219008000 219010000 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 D M6 M8 M8 M10x1.25 M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 d M3 M5 M5 M5 M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M12 B 16 20 20 22 22 24 32 32 40 40 C 6 9 9 9 12 12 15 15 15 18 CH 4 6 6 7 7 10 13 13 17 17 Weight [g] 3 8 8 12 14 14 20 20 96 102
ACCESSORIES FOR SHORT-STROKE CYLINDERS: MAGNETIC SENSORS

Code W0950000252 W0950000253 W0950014360 Bore 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 Model Reed sensor DCB 2C-425 Sensor HALL PNP DCB3-N225 Sensor HALL NPN DCB3-M225 Version Reed connector + bracket - CB Hall PNP connector + bracket - CB Hall NPN connector + bracket - CB
N.B.: For technical data see page 1-287
SPARES PARTS FOR SHORT-STROKE CYLINDERS
Code 009 . . . 0010 009 . . . 0011 009 . . . 0015 009 . . . 0021 009 . . . 0023 009 . . . 0005 009 . . . 0006 009 . . . 0031 009 . . . 0033 009 . . . 0001
Bores 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100 12 to 100
Type Complete polyurethane front head kit Complete NBR front head kit Complete NBR rear head kit Complete polyurethane piston kit Complete NBR piston kit Complete set of polyurethane gaskets Complete set of NBR gaskets Complete polyurethane front+rear head kit + piston Complete NBR front+rear head kit + piston Magnet
Parts abcdef abcdef ghij klmno klmno bdehjmo bdehjmo abcdefghijklmno abcdefghijklmno p
1-109
ACCESSORIES - SPARE PARTS FOR SHORT-STROKE CYLINDERS SERIES SSCY
ACTUATORS
CARTRIDGE MICRO-CYLINDER SERIES CRTC
ACTUATORS
Single-acting micro-cylinders with threaded body for fixin in small space or directly inside the machine body, owing to the external O-ring which ensures perfect seal. ATTENTION: in case of cycles with high frequences its advisable that the piston doesnt reach the end of the stroke during the rod coming out stage.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Strokes Port Versions Design Seal OR on the body (not included in the supply) bar MPa C 2 to 6 0.2 to 0.6 10 to +80 Lubricated or unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 6 ; 10 ; 16 5 ; 10 ; 15 M5 Single-acting Mechanically edged 6 10 16 6 10 16 OR 7x1 9.5x1.5 16x1.5 STROKE 5 10 14 16 30 35 76 84
mm mm
Weight
15 19 40 90
COMPONENTS a Nickel-plated brass body b NBR rubber piston rod gasket c AISI 303 steel piston/piston rod (for 6 - 10) Brass piston (for 16) d Steel spring e Zinc-plated steel nut f Brass bushing g AISI 303 steel piston rod (for 16) h Zinc-plated steel nut
1-110
CARTRIDGE CYLINDER DIMENSIONS, 6, 10, 16
6 10 16
C 5 7 6
CH 9 14 20
CH1 5.5 7 8
E 8 10.5 13
F M3 M4 M5
G 8.5 12 19
H M10x1 M15x1.5 M22x1.5
M M5 M5 M5
N 2.4 2 4
S 3 4 5
SW 14 19 27
ASSEMBLY SEAT DIMENSIONS

L Stroke 10 5 6 7 L1 Stroke 10 17 17 20 L2 Stroke 10 19 19 21 L3 Stroke 10 24 26 31
6 10 16
5 5 6 7
15 5 6 7
5 10 11 15
15 24 24 25
5 12 13 17
15 26 26 27
5 16 20 26
15 31 34 36
K 8.5 12 19
M1 M10x1 M15x1.5 M22x1.5
KEY TO CODES
Code W1000060005 W1000060010 W1000060015 W1000100005 W1000100010 W1000100015 W1000160005 W1000160010 W1000160015 Description CYL. CRTC-006-0005-S000-00 CYL. CRTC-006-0010-S000-00 CYL. CRTC-006-0015-S000-00 CYL. CRTC-010-0005-S000-00 CYL. CRTC-010-0010-S000-00 CYL. CRTC-010-0015-S000-00 CYL. CRTC-016-0005-S000-00 CYL. CRTC-016-0010-S000-00 CYL. CRTC-016-0015-S000-00
KEY TO CODES
CYL C R T C TYPE Cartridge microcylinder 010 DIAMETER 006 010 016 0010 STROKE 0005 0010 0015 S 0 00 TYPE Single-acting retracted piston rod 0 0 FURTHER DESCRIPTION 0 0 SPECIAL DESIGN
1-111
ACTUATORS
A Stroke 5 10 15 19.5 26.5 33.5 23 29.5 36.5 27 32 37
B Stroke 5 10 15 14.5 21.5 28.5 16 22.5 29.5 21 26 31
COMPACT GUIDED CYLINDERS SERIES CMPG
ACTUATORS
The guided compact cylinder series CMPG is a robust and practical solution with a built-in guide unit. The rod guiding bushes are mounted directly in the anodized aluminium alloy lining. Two guiding solutions are available: sintered bronze bushes coupled with ground carbon chromed steel rods, or ball recirculation bushes coupled with tempered, chromed and ground steel rods. There are grooves on one side of the body to house the retractable sensors. In the non-cushioned version, the stop is silenced by NBR front gaskets, and the cushioned version has adjustable pins to graduate braking. Threaded holes and calibrated holes are provided for fixin the dowel pins.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Strokes bar MPa psi C F mm mm
CUSHIONED
NO-CUSHIONED
Version Weights
1 to 10 0.1 to 1 14.5 to 145 -10 to +80 14 to 176 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, mast be continuos 16; 20; 25; 32; 40; 50; 63 16; 20; 25; 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; 100 16: 20 - 30-40-50 16: 10-20-25*-30-40-50-75-100-150-200 20; 25: 20-30-40-50-75-100-150 20; 25: 20-25*-30-40-50-75-100-150-200 32 to 63: 25-50-75-100-150-175 32 to 100: 25-50-75-100-150-200 Other strokes on request but with the same cylinder dimensions as the standard stroke immediately above With bronze bushings With ball bearings See page 1-9 * only bronze bushings version
COMPONENTS a BARREL: anodized aluminium alloy b PISTON ROD: grinded chrome steel c GUIDE ROD: grinded chrome steel d GUIDE ROD: hardened and tempered chrome steel e REAR BASE: anodized aluminium alloy f FRONT BASE: anodized aluminium alloy g GUIDE BUSHING: self-lubricating bronze h BUFFER GASKET: NBR i PISTON: aluminium alloy j MAGNET: plastoferrite k PISTON GASKET: (PARKER PRADIFA) NBR l GUIDE RING: PTFE m SLIDE BUSHING: sintered bronze n BALL BEARINGS o DUST SCRAPER RING: NBR or FKM/FPM p GREASE NIPPLES: zinc-plated or stainless steel q FLANGE: anodized aluminium alloy
1-112
MAXIMUM SIDE LOAD

10 35 29 20 29 31 52 56 71 72 25 27 50 67 197 89 197 89 295 138 295 138 354 236 540 471 30 26 27 45 48 61 62 40 23 38 39 79 54 78 100 14 24 49 50 66 52 109 217 109 217 177 314 177 314 207 687 344 1074 150 10 12 38 27 50 37 78 138 78 138 125 184 125 184 153 413 254 629 175 70 122 70 122 112 163 112 163 200 8 8 31 32 41 30 65 110 65 110 103 148 103 148 128 335 213 511
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
NB: Forces are expressed in N
MAXIMUM TORQUE ON PLATE

mm 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Guide unit Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls 10 0.51 0.74 20 0.45 0.60 0.92 1.28 1.55 1.98 25 0.40 0.85 1.42 3.94 1.97 4.40 2.46 7.36 3.45 7.85 3.94 11.78 9.34 22.55 21.56 30 0.36 0.50 0.79 1.08 1.32 1.70 40 0.32 0.72 0.72 1.78 1.18 2.16 Stroke (mm) 50 75 0.28 0.24 0.65 0.54 0.64 1.05 1.59 1.24 1.04 1.70 2.20 1.66 2.95 2.46 1 2.96 3.45 2.96 1.45 6.38 5.9 4.90 2.44 10.8 6.38 5.40 2.46 11.77 9.80 7.84 5.88 31.38 19.62 16.68 13.73 63.72 100 0.20 0.45 0.90 1 1.44 1.4 1.97 2.44 2.46 5.4 4.4 8.35 4.9 9.3 6.88 24.5 14.7 49.1 150 0.46 0.35 0.69 0.61 1.10 1.02 1.55 2.40 1.70 3 3 4.5 3.4 5 5.30 10.40 10.65 26.6 175 1.38 2.43 1.55 2.73 2.78 4.06 3.05 4.46 200 0.12 0.25 0.56 0.49 0.90 0.82 1.24 2.18 1.40 2.40 2.50 3.60 2.80 4 4.40 11.7 8.90 21.6
NB: Forces are expressed in Nm
ASSEMBLY OPTIONS If the compact guided cylinder is mounted as shown in figur A, there need to be two through holes in the frame for the guide columns.
1-113
Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls Bushes Balls
ACTUATORS
mm 16
Guide unit
Stroke (mm) 50 75 20 16 34 29 35 58 70 54 48 78 73 60 168 138 60 276 168 138 60 276 256 216 89 393 256 216 89 393 305 256 158 864 471 413 314 1374
STOPPER FUNCTIONS
ACTUATORS
The graph refers to a 50mm-stroke cylinder.
LIFTING FUNCTIONS The graph refers from 25 to 50 mm-stroke cylinders with ball re-circulation guide unit
The graph refers from 75 to 100 mm-stroke cylinders with ball re-circulation guide unit
The graph refers to 50 mm-stroke cylinders with bushing guide unit
1-114
DIMENSIONS OF NO-CUSHIONED COMPACT GUIDED CYLINDERS

+ = ADD THE STROKE
BORE 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
S Version BA (Bronze Bushings) 10 12 16 20 20 25 25 28 35
Version BB (Ball Bearings) 10 10 16 20 20 ** ** 25 30
** for strokes 25 and 50 = 20 for strokes 75 = 25 *= BORE 16 20 25 L stroke 75 to 200 76 79.5
0 to 50 45 49 49.5
16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
A 33 36 42 51 51 59 72 92 112
A1 25 29 38 49 49 56 69 88 108
B 64 74 88 114 124 140 150 188 224
B1 62 72 86 112 122 138 148 185 221
C 33 37 37.5 37.5 44 44 49 56.5 66
C1 10 10 10 10 10 12 12 16 16
D 9 9 9 9 11 11 11 15.5 19
E 16 18 26 30 30 40 50 60 80
E1 7 10 10 5 10 10 10 15 15
E2 52 60 70 96 106 120 130 160 190
E3 54 64 76 100 110 124 132 166 200
F M5 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8
F1 M5 M5 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10 M12 M14
F2 M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
G 10.5 11 11.5 12.5 14 14 14 19 23
H 32.5 38 46.5 56.5 72 89
KH7 4 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 8
I 40 46 56 80 90 100 110 140 170
L * * * 73.5 73.5 83 83 93 105
M 22 26 32 38 38 44 44 56 62
M1 42 52 62 80 90 100 110 140 170
M2 15 17 21 25.5 25.5 29.5 36 46 56
M3 18 19 21 25.5 25.5 29.5 36 46 56
N 8 9 8 15 21 27 31.5 37 40
P 45 49 49.5 49.5 56 58 63 74.5 84
Q 8 10 12 16 16 20 20 25 30
R 13 13 14 16 17 17 20 21 25
T 20 20 25 20 20 25 25 30 35
U Z1 8 5.5 8 4.5 9 2 11 1.5 11 1.5 12.5 1.5 15 1.5 18 2 21 2
Z2 2.5 2.5 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2
1-115
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF CUSHIONED COMPACT GUIDED CYLINDERS
ACTUATORS
+ = ADD THE STROKE
BORE 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
S Version BA (Bronze Bushings) 10 12 16 20 20 25 25
Version BB (Ball Bearings) 10 10 16 20 20 ** **
** for strokes 25 and 50 = 20 for strokes 75 = 25 *= BORE 16 20 25 L stroke 75 to 200 105.5 108.5
0 to 50 70 74 74.5
16 20 25 32 40 50 63
A 33 36 42 51 51 59 72
A1 25 29 38 49 49 56 69
B 64 74 88 114 124 140 150
B1 62 72 86 112 122 138 148
C 58 62 62.5 62.5 69 69 74
C1 10 10 10 10 10 12 12
D 9 9 9 9 11 11 11
E 16 18 26 30 30 40 50
E1 32 35 35 30 35 35 35
E2 52 60 70 96 106 120 130
E3 54 64 76 100 110 124 132
F M5 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4
F1 M5 M5 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
F2 M6 M6 M8 M8
G 10.5 11 11.5 12.5 14 14 14
H 32.5 38 46.5 56.5
KH7 4 5 5 6 6 6 6
I 40 46 56 80 90 100 110
L * * * 106.5 106.5 118 118
M 22 26 32 38 38 44 44
M1 42 52 62 80 90 100 110
M2 15 16.5 21 25.5 25.5 29.5 36
M3 18 19.5 21 25.5 25.5 29.5 36
N 8 9 8 15 21 27 31.5
P 78 78.5 82.5 89 93 98
Q 8 10 12 16 16 20 20
R 13 13 14 16.5 17 17 20
T 20 20 25 20 20 25 25
U Z1 8 5.5 8 4.5 9 2 11 1.5 11 1.5 12.5 1.5 15 1.5
Z2 2.5 2.5 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
for bronze bushings = 78; for ball bearing = 75
1-116
KEY TO CODES
W 1 4 3 TYPE 0 3 2 DIAMETER 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 A1=100 2 3 4 5 2 VERSION bronze bushings ball bearings cushioned with brass bushings cushioned with ball bearings 02 5 STROKE CUSHIONED VERSION 16: 20, 30, 40, 50 20 to 25: 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150 32 to 63: 25, 50, 75, 100, 150, 175 NOT CUSHIONED VERSION 16: 10, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200 20 to 25: 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200 32 to 100: 25, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200 Other strokes on request but with the same cylinder dimensions as the standard stroke immediately above.
Not cushioned version only Bronze bushings version only
ACCESSORIES FOR COMPACT GUIDED CYLINDER: MAGNETIC SENSORS

Code Description W0952025390 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952029394 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952022180 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952028184 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952125556 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX W0952025500* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952029504* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 W0952022500* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952128184* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 * For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. NB: For technical data see page 1-288
NOTES
1-117
ACCESSORIES FOR COMPACT GUIDED CYLINDERS SERIES CMPG
ACTUATORS
RODLESS CYLINDER SERIES STD
ACTUATORS
Rodless cylinders come in fiv different bores - 16, 25, 32, 40 and 63 mm and the design incorporates numerous innovations. Calibrated extruded anodized aluminium alloy barrel Sensor slots and accessory slots in the barrel itself Longitudinal seal by means of specially-shaped indeformable stainless steel strips Strokes 100 to 5700 mm with 1mm intervals Adjustable integrated pneumatic cushioning Adjustable limit switches and decelerations can be applied at any time For this type of cylinder (size 32 and upwards), the valves can be fitte directly using the retracting sensors without requiring any intermediate brackets. Refer to the table on page 1-46
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Type of construction Strokes bar MPa psi C F mm mm
NBR
FKM/FPM
Recommended speeds Max. speed with decelerators Weight Notes
1 to 8 0.1 to 0.8 14.5 to 116 10 to +80 14 to 176 50 mm unlubricated filtere air Lubrication, if used, must be continuous. 16, 25, 32, 40, 63 Double-acting rodless cylinder with direct transmission system 16: from 100 to 5000 with 1mm interval 25, 32 e 40: from 100 to 5700 with 1mm interval 63: from 100 to 5500 with 1mm interval V ,1 m/s (NBR) V $1 m/s (FKM/FPM) ,1 m/s (NBR) 2 m/s (FKM/FPM) See page 1-9 For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air.
COMPONENTS a CYLINDER HEAD: aluminium alloy b BARREL: profile anodized aluminium alloy c PISTON GASKET: NBR or FKM/FPM d CENTRAL ELEMENT: aluminium alloy e SCRAPER: Hostaform f O-RING: FKM/FPM g PISTON: Hostaform h CUSHIONING CONE: aluminium alloy i STATIC O-RINGS: NBR or FKM/FPM j SLIDE: aluminium alloy k OUTER STRIP: stainless steel l INNER STRIP: stainless steel m BAND SUPPORT: Hostaform
1-118
DIMENSIONING - FORCE AND TORQUE
16 25 32 40 63
DIAGRAM OF SPEED AND MAXIMUM CUSHIONABLE LOAD For the cylinder to reach the end-of-stroke position without intense or repeated impact which would damage it, it is necessary to annul the kinetic energy of the moving mass and the work generated. The maximum cushionable load depends on the traversing speed and the absorption of the air buffer supplied standard with the various cylinders. The diagram shows the speeds and cushionable mass for the various diameters at a pressure of 6 bar.
Piston rate [m/sec]
Mass to be buffered [Kg]
MAXIMUM LOAD ACCORDING TO THE DISTANCE BETWEEN SUPPORTS
Load L (N)
Distance K [mm]
1-119
N.B.: When the cylinder is subjected simultaneously to torque and force, it is advisable to keep to the following equations. Ma = F x ha Mr = L x hv + G x hr Mv = F x hv
ACTUATORS
Bore
Centre Distance Y 9 14 18 22 44
Actual Force F at 6 bar [N] 110 250 420 640 1550
Cushioning stroke [mm] 15 21 26 32 40
Max. load L [N] 120 300 450 750 1650
Ma max [Nm] 4 15 30 60 200
Mr max [Nm] 0.3 1 2 4 8
Mv max [Nm] 0.5 3 4 8 24
RODLESS CYLINDER SERIES STD DIMENSIONS 16 to 40

+ = ADDED STROKE 16 25 32 40
ACTUATORS
A 130 200 250 300
B 12 17 23 45
C 15 23 27 30
D 76 120 150 150
E 64 100 110 110
F 48 80 90 90
G M5 1/8 1/4 1/4
H 12 18.5 22 24
J 6.4 8.5 10.5 15
K 32 50 55 55
M M4 M5 M6 M6
M1 M3 M5 M6 M6
M2 M5 M6 M8 M8
N 7 12 14 17.5
N1 8 11 12 12
O 6 13 12 12
P 43.5 66 86 97
R 23.5 29.6 36 36.8
S 18 23 27 28
T 2.75 3.3 4.4 4.4
U 10 15 18 18
V 18 27 40 54
VS 18 27 36 54
W 27 40 56 69
WS 27 40 52 72
W1 13.5 20 30 36
W2 9 13.5 22 27
Y 4.5 6.5 8 9
Z1 37.5 53 74 85
Z2 24 33 44 49
Z3 4.5 6.5 8 11.8
Z4 28 42 70 70
1-120
DIMENSIONS 63
+ = ADDED STROKE
Basic supply A, B, C, D to feed to left chambers E, F, G, H to feed the right chambers Note: B, C, D, F, G and H are supplied closed with threaded plugs If you modify the position of an inner plug following the instructions provided with the cylinder, you can arrange: all feeds from the left all feeds from the right A, B feed the left chambers E, F feed the right chambers C, D feed the right chambers G, H feed the left chambers
VERSION WITH SWING CARRIAGE
NOTE: For other dimensions see code 270 16 25 32 40 63 A 25 37 70 70 80 B 4.5 5.5 6.5 6.5 M8 C 13 20 38 38 32 D 2 3 5 5 8 E 20 30 90 90 80 F 10 16 75 75 65 G 55 55 37 H 47-50 72-75 91-100 111-120 155-162 L 28 42 70 70 82
1-121
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS VERSION WITH ADJUSTABLE LIMIT SWITCH AND SHOCK ABSORBERS
ACTUATORS
16 25 32 40 63
B Max 42 72 90 105 105
C1 22 44 56 74 65
D M12x1 M14x1.5 M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M36x1.5
E 17 29 32.8
G 9 11 14
W7 38 53 74 89 128.5
W8 46 67 89 108 153
WS4 42 50 60 75 103
Y1 7.5 5 4 1.5
Z4 7 8 10 12.5 16
Z5 7.5 9.8 12.2 12.7 19
Stroke 10.4 16 22 25 25
Max. cushioned force For stroke [J] For hour [J] 10 14125 26 34000 54 53700 90 70000 160 91000
Max. impact force [N] 1000 2800 3750 5500 11120
Max. thrust force [N] 220 530 890 1550 2220
For graphs to help choose shock absorbers see page 1-137
KEY TO CODES
CYL 27 TYPE 27 Rodless cylinder 0 0 1 2 3 Standard With swing drive Twin cushioned series Double Double-acting cushioned Magnetic + adjustable limit switches and shock absorbers 0 0 Magnetic S Non-magnetic n G No stick slip 2 5 BORE 16 25 32 40 63 0050 STROKE 16: from 100 to 5000 mm 25 to 40: from 100 to 5700 mm 63 from 100 to 5500 mm C N GASKETS N NBR gasket V FKM/FPM gasket
n For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only For speed $ 1/m/s Available up to 32
1-122
RODLESS CYLINDER WITH GUIDE V
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Type of construction Strokes Recommended speeds Max. speed with decelerators Weight Notes bar MPa psi C F
NBR
FKM/FPM
1.5 to 8 0.15 to 0.8 21.8 to 116 10 to +80 14 to 176 50 mm unlubricated filtere air Lubrication, if used, must be continuous mm 25, 32, 40, 63 Double-acting rodless cylinder with direct transmission system mm 25, 32 and 40: from 100 to 5700 with 1mm interval 63: from 100 to 5500 with 1mm interval V ,1 m/s (NBR) V $1 m/s (FKM/FPM) ,1 m/s (NBR) 2 m/s (FKM/FPM) See page 1-9 For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air.
COMPONENTS a CYLINDER HEAD: aluminium alloy b BARREL: profile anodized aluminium alloy c PISTON GASKET: NBR or FKM/FPM d CENTRAL ELEMENT: aluminium alloy e SCRAPER: Hostaform f O-RING: FKM/FPM g PISTON: Hostaform h CUSHIONING CONE: aluminium alloy i STATIC O-RINGS: NBR or FKM/FPM j SLIDE: aluminium alloy k OUTER STRIP: stainless steel l INNER STRIP: stainless steel m BAND SUPPORT: Hostaform n V GUIDE PLATE: Hostaform
1-123
Two opposed V-shaped guide units are obtained directly in the anodized aluminium cylinder liner, on which a cover with two acetalic resin wearresistant pads slides. The cover has a tip-up-type carriage-piston rod coupling. In this way the carriage only transfers loads axially and does not support loads and moments in other directions. The play of the pads can be adjusted by means of side threaded grub screws. Therefore, it is possible to recover the wear of pads, which can be replaced without the need for dismantling the cylinder. This family of rodless cylinders has the same features as the basic versions: such as an integrated adjustable pneumatic cushioning, sensor slots and accessory holding slots. A version is available with adjustable limit switches and hydraulic decelerators. They can be purchased separately and applied at any time to the basic cylinders as well.
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Bore 25 32 40 63
Centre Distance Y 14 18 22 44
Actual Force F at 6 bar [N] 200 300 490 1300
Cushioning stroke [mm] 21 26 32 40
Max. load L [N] 350 400 700 1800
Ma max [Nm] 22 40 70 250
Mr max [Nm] 5 10 26 80
Mv max [Nm] 22 40 70 250
N.B.: The loads can be applied for speeds below 0.2 m/s. For higher speeds, it is advisable not to exceed 1 m/s N.B.: When the cylinder is subjected simultaneously to torque and force, it is advisable to keep to the following equations Ma = F x ha Mr = L x hv + G x hr Mv = F x hv
Piston rate [m/sec]
Load L (N)
Distance K [mm]
1-124
DIMENSIONS 25 to 40
+ = ADDED STROKE
Only for 25
25 32 40
A 200 250 300
AG 25 25
AO 2 2.6 9.4
B 17 23 45
C 23 27 30
D 120 150 150
E 90 110 110
F 45 40 40
G 1/8 1/4 1/4
H 18.5 22 24
J 8.5 10.5 15
K 45 55 55
M M5 M5 M6
M1 M5 M6 M6
M2 80 90 90
N 12 15 17.5
N1 8 12 12
O 5.5 6.4 6.4
P 67.5 88 98.5
Q 21 17.5 17.5
R 46 66 80
S 26 45 45
T 10 10.5 17.5
V 27 40 54
VS 27 36 54
W 40 56 69
WS 40 52 72
W1 20 30 36
W2 13.5 22 27
Y 6.5 8 9
Z1 57.5 79.5 89.9
Z2 37.5 49.5 53.9
Z3 6.5 8 11.8
1-125
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS 63
ACTUATORS
+ = ADDED STROKE
Basic supply A, B, C, D to feed to left chambers E, F, G, H to feed the right chambers Note: B, C, D, F, G and H are supplied closed with threaded plugs If you modify the position of an inner plug following the instructions provided with the cylinder, you can arrange: all feeds from the right all feeds from the left A, B feed the left chambers E, F feed the right chambers C, D feed the right chambers G, H feed the left chambers
DIMENSIONS VERSION WITH ADJUSTABLE LIMIT SWITCH AND SHOCK ABSORBERS 25 32; 40 63
B Max C1 C2 D F 25 84 35 9 M14x1.5 80 32 110 45 11 M20x1.5 100 40 120 60 14 M25x1.5 100 63 122 65 M36x1.5 120 For graphs to help choose shock absorbers see page 1-137
W7 53 74 89 128.5
W8 67 89 108 153
WS4 50 60 75 103
Z4 8 10 12.5 16
Z5 9.8 12.2 12.7 19
Stroke 16 22 25 25
Max. cushioned force For stroke [J] For hour [J] 26 34000 54 53700 90 70000 160 91000
Max. impact force [N] 2800 3750 5500 11120
Max. thrust force [N] 530 890 1550 2220
KEY TO CODES
CYL 27 TYPE 27 Rodless cylinder 7 7 Double-acting cushioned Magnetic with guide V 8 Double-acting cushioned Magnetic with guide V + adjustable limit switches and decelerator 0 0 Magnetic S Non-magnetic G No stick slip 2 5 BORE 25 32 40 63 0050 STROKE 25 to 40: from 100 to 5700 mm 63 from 100 to 5500 mm C N GASKETS N NBR gasket V FKM/FPM gasket
For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only For speed $ 1/m/s
1-126
RODLESS CYLINDER WITH BALL RECIRCULATING GUIDE
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Type of construction Strokes bar MPa Psi C F mm mm
NBR
FKM/FPM
Threaded ports Assembly Recommended speed Max. speed with decelerators Weight Notes
0.5 to 8 0.05 to 0.8 7 to 116 -10 to +80 14 to 176 50 mm unlubricated filtere air lubrication, if used, must be continuous 16, 25, 32, 40, 63 Doubl-acting rodless cylinder with direct transmission system 16: from 100 to 1350 with 1 interval 25: from 100 to 2300 with 1 interval 32: from 100 to 2300 with 1 interval 40: from 100 to 2250 with 1 interval 63 standard: from 100 to 2100 with 1 interval 63 heavy: from 100 to 2650 with 1 interval M5, G1/8, G1/4, G3/8 As required ,1 m/s $1 m/s ,1 m/s 2 m/s See page 1-7 For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air.
COMPONENTS For version 275 a CYLINDER: see construction details on page 1-118 b GUIDE: hardened steel c SHOE: steel with hardened ball circulation d SLIDE SUPPORT: anodised aluminium For version 276 Besides the details specifie above: e END-OF-STROKE STUD PIN: zinc-plated steel, complete with 2 zinc-plated nuts for fixin f DECELERATOR: burnished steel, complete with 2 zinc-plated or burnished nuts for fixin g DECELERATOR SUPPORT: anodised aluminium h BRACKET: hardened-and-tempered and zinc-plated steel
1-127
The range of rodless cylinders with ball circulation guides is available with fiv different bores 16, 25, 32, 40 and 63. The bore 63 can be supplied in two versions: the standard one for intermediate loads and the heavy one for considerably weighty loads. Besides the general features specifie for standard rodless cylinders, the other main features are: Very high load capacity, acting in all directions without discharging onto the cylinder slide. Hardened steel guide connected fi mly to the cylinder barrel. Ball circulation shoes constructed using special technology that make them very silent when the guide slides, with very long maintenance intervals. For example, they only need lubricating every 2000 km or once a year, using type 2 grease, preferably containing lithium soap. Extra sturdy slide support with various holes for fixin the loads. Holes for centring pins are also provided. 100 to 2650 stroke at intervals of 1 mm. Integrated pneumatic adjustable cushioning. Adjustable limit switches and decelerations can be applied at any time. For this type of cylinder (size 32 and upwards), the valves can be fitte directly using the retracting sensors without requiring any intermediate brackets. Refer to the table on page 1-46
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONING - FORCES AND MOMENTS

Actual force F at 6 bar [N] 16 110 25 250 32 420 40 640 63 standard 1550 63 heavy 1550
ACTUATORS
Version
Cushioning stroke [mm] 15 21 26 32 40 40
K [mm] 35 50.5 59 68 84 91
X [mm] 16 21 22.5 24.7 23.1 29.2
Y [mm] 29 44 53.5 58 79 79
Z [mm] 33 51.5 70 73 100 88
Max load L [N] 500 1500 3000 4000 6000 10000
Max load G [N] 500 1500 3000 4000 6000 10000
Ma max [Nm] 16 100 200 200 400 600
Mr max [Nm] 15 50 100 140 140 400
Mv max [Nm] 16 100 200 200 400 600
N.B.: when the cylinder is subjected simultaneously to torque and force, it is advisable to keep to the following equations Ma = F x (hr + Y) Mr = G x (hr + z) + Lx (hv + X) Mv = F x (K + hv)
Piston rate [m/sec]
Load L (N)
Distance K [mm]
1-128
DIMENSIONS 16
+ = ADD THE STROKE
DIMENSIONS 25
+ = ADD THE STROKE
DIMENSIONS 32; 40
+ = ADD THE STROKE
32 40
A 250 300
B 23 45
C 27 30
H 22 24
J 10.5 15
N 14 17.5
P 86 97
V 40 54
VS 36 54
W 56 69
WS 52 72
WS1 85 104
W1 30 36
W2 22 27
W3 95 98
W4 70 73
W5 99 102
W6 78.5 88
Y 8 9
Z1 74 85
Z3 8 11.8
1-129
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS 63
ACTUATORS
HEAVY
Basic supply A, B, C, D to feed to left chambers E, F, G, H to feed the right chambers Note: B, C, D, F, G and H are supplied closed with threaded plugs. If you modify the position of an inner plug following the instructions provided with the cylinder, you can arrange: all feeds from the right all feeds from the left A, B feed the left chambers E, F feed the right chambers C, D feed the right chambers G, H feed the left chambers
STANDARD
+ = ADD THE STROKE
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAMS
16 25 32 40 63
A min 8 10 4 3
Horizontal layout Interm. support code (1) Leg code (2) W0950164004 W0950167001 W0950254004 W0950257001 W0950324004 W0950328035 W0950404004 W0950407001 W0950637032 W0950637001
B min 12 10 11 5
Vertical layout Interm. support code (1) Leg code (2) W0950164004 W0950167001 W0950254004 W0950257001 W0950324004 W0950327001 W0950404004 W0950407001 W0950637036 W0950637001
1-130
DIMENSION VERSION WITH ADJUSTABLE LIMIT SWITCH AND SHOCK ABSORBERS 16 to 63
16 25 32 40 63 63
Version standard heavy
B max 50 72 90 105 105 105
C1 22 44 56 74 65 65
D M12x1 M14x1.5 M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M36x1.5 M36x1.5
E 17 29 32.8
G 9 11 14
W7 38 53 74 89 128.5 128.5
W8 46 67 89 108 153 153
WS2 52 71 82.5 92
WS3 56 80.5 91 108
WS4 42 50 60 75 103 103
Y1 7.5 5 4 1.5
Z4 7 8 10 12.5 16 16
Z5 7.5 9.8 12.2 12.7 19 19
Stroke 10.4 16 22 25 25 25
Max. cushioned force Per stroke [J] Per hour [J] 10 14125 26 34000 54 53700 90 70000 160 91000 160 91000
Max. impact force [N] 1000 2800 3750 5500 11120 11120
Max. thrust force [N] 220 530 890 1550 2220 2220
KEY TO CODES
CYL 27 TYPE 27 Rodless cylinder 5 5 6 Double-acting cushioned magnetic with ball circulation guides Double-acting cushioned magnetic with ball circulation guides + adjustable limit switch and shock absorbers 0 S n G A n B C 0 STD Magnetic STD Non-magnetic STD No stick slip HEAVY Magnetic HEAVY No stick slip HEAVY Non-magnetic 2 5 BORE 16 25 32 40 63 0050 STROKE 16: 100 to 1350 mm 25 - 32: 100 to 2300 mm 40: 100 to 2250 mm 63 std: 100 to 2100 mm 63 heavy: 100 to 2650 mm C N GASKETS N NBR gasket V FKM/FPM gasket
n For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only For speed $ 1/m/s
1-131
ACTUATORS
RODLESS CYLINDER SERIES DOUBLE
DIMENSIONING FORCES AND MOMENTS
ACTUATORS
Bore 2x16 2x25 2x32
Actual force F at 6 bar [N] 200 480 820
Cushioning stroke [mm] 15 21 26
Max load L [N] 240 600 900
Ma max [Nm] 8 30 60
Mr max [Nm] 2.4 8 16.5
Mv max [Nm] 1 6 10
RODLESS CYLINDER SERIES DOUBLE
For technical data see page 1-118 For the weights see page 1-9
DIMENSIONS OF RODLESS CYLINDER, DOUBLE SERIES

+ = ADD THE STROKE
2x16 2x25 2x32
A 130 200 250
B 12 17 23
C 15 23 27
D 76 120 150
E 64 100 110
F 48 80 90
G M5 1/8 1/4
H 12 18.5 22.5
J 6.4 8.5 10.5
K 32 50 55
M M5 M6 M6
N 10 15 12
M1 M3 M5 M6
N1 7 12 14
O 16 20 20
P 53.5 74 95
R 48 66 86.5
S 42 59 77.5
T 3 3.5 4.5
U 34 50 70
VW 42 63 86
VS 18 27 40
WW 51 72 100
WS 27 41 56
Y 4.5 7 8
Z 37.5 53.5 74
Piston rate [m/sec]
1-132
ACCESSORIES FOR RODLESS STD, GUIDE V, WITH BALL RECIRCULATING GUIDE CYLINDERS
FOOT 16; 25
+ = ADDED STROKE Code W0950167001 W0950257001 16 25 AB 3.6 5.5 AH 1.5 2 AO 14 22 AT 1.6 2.5 AU 4 6 TR 18 27 UH 26 40 H 150 232 Weight [g] 10 32
FOOT 32; 40
+ = ADDED STROKE Code W0950327001 W0950407001 32 40 AB 6.6 9 AH 4 2 AO 25 25 AT 20 20 AU 8 11.5 AV 20 30 TR 36 54 UH 51 71 H 284 327 Weight [g] 88 112
FOOT 63
+ = ADDED STROKE Code W0950637001 63 AB 11 AT 7 AO 64 AU 15 TR 78 UH 103 H 460 Weight [g] 360
INTERMEDIATE FOOT 16; 25 FOR STD AND GUIDE A V

Code W0950167031 W0950257031 0950254024* 16 25 25 AB 5.5 5.5 5.5 AH 3 4 4 AO 20 20 20 AT 5 6 6 TR 41 48 48 UH 53 60 60 Weight [g] 4 6 6
Note: Individually packed. * For the guide V version only
INTERMEDIATE FOOT 32; 40 FOR STD AND GUIDE A V

Code W0950327032 W0950407032 32 40 AB 6.5 6.5 AH 5 7 AO 55 60 AT 8 8 AV 40 45 TR 61.5 70-75 UH 73 85 Weight [g] 72 104
Note: plate supplied complete with 4 screws, 4 fixin plates
1-133
ACTUATORS
INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT 63 FOR VERSION STD, GUIDE V AND VERTICAL POSITION BALL RECIRCULATING
ACTUATORS
Code W0950637032
63
AB 8.5
AH 7.5
AO 55
AT 7.5
TR 78
UH 103
Weight [g] 330
Note: plate supplied complete with 4 screws, 4 fixin plates
INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT 16 to 25 FOR BALL RECIRCULATING

Code W0950164004 W0950254004 16 25 AB 3.5 5.5 AB1 AH M3 3 M5 4 AO 12 20 AV 6 10.5 TR 20 30.5 TR1 4 6 TR2 8 12 UH 32.5 49
Note: Supplied complete with 4 screws
INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT 32 to 40 FOR BALL RECIRCULATING

Code W0950324004 W0950404004 32 40 AB 6.5 6.5 AB1 AH M6 5 M6 6.6 AO 55 60 AT 5 8 AV 40 45 TR 55 63 TR1 6 7.5 TR2 13 15 UH 66 77
Note: Supplied complete with 4 screws, 4 plates.
INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT KIT 63 FOR HORIZONTAL POSITION BALL RECIRCULATING

Code W0950637036 63 AB 8.5 AH 7.5 AO 55 AT 8.5 TR 78 UH 103
Note: Supplied complete with 4 screws, 4 plates.
NOTES
1-134
ACCESSORIES FOR RODLESS CYLINDER SERIE DOUBLE
FOOT 16; 25
Note: Individually packed complete with 2 screws
FOOT 32
Code W0950328036 Descrizione Foot DOUBLE 32 Weight [g] 156
VERTICAL FOOT 16; 25

Code W0950167001 W0950257001 AB 2x16 3.6 2x25 5.5 AH 1.5 4 AO 14 22 AT 1.6 2.5 AU 4 6 TR 18 27 UH 26 40 H 150 232 Weight [g] 10 32
VERTICAL FOOT 32
Code W0950328035 Description Vertical foot 32 Weight [g] 92
INTERMEDIATE FOOT 16 to 32
Code W0950168037 W0950258037 W0950328037 2x16 2x25 2x32 AB 3.5 5.5 6.5 AH 3 4 5 AO 12 20 55 AT 6 6 8 AV 6 10.5 40 TR 60.5 84.5 111.5 UH 64 96 123 Weight [g] 16 34 96
Note: Supplied complete with 8 screws, 8 fixin plates (plates for 32 only)
1-135
ACCESSORIES FOR RODLESS CYLINDER SERIE DOUBLE
ACTUATORS
Code W0950168001 W0950258001
AB 2x16 3.6 2x25 5.5
AH 1.5 2
AO 14 22
AT 1.6 2.5
AU 4 6
TR 42 63
UH 51 72
H 150 232
Weight [g] 18 54
ACCESSORIES FOR CONVERTING STD RODLESS CYLINDERS INTO SWING CYLINDERS

KIT TO TRANSFORM INTO SWING VERSION
ACTUATORS
16 to 40
63
Code W0950167035 W0950257035 W0950327035 W0950327035 W0950637035
16 25 32 40 63
Weight [g] 34 118 450 450 810
Note: 16 to 40: Supplied complete with 1 adaptor, 1 support, 1 pin, 1 bushing 63: Supplied complete with 1 plate, 1 support, 1 pin, 2 bushings, 4 screws
ACCESSORIES FOR RODLESS STD, GUIDE V, WITH BALL RECIRCULATING GUIDE AND DOUBLE CYLINDERS
DRIVE PIN
Code W0950167034 W0950257034 W0950327034 W0950327034 W0950637034 16 25 32 40 63 A 2.9 5 8 8 10 B 28 42 70 70 82 C 5 8 12 12 14 Weight [g] 6 16 52 52 100
SWING SUPPORT 16; 25

Code W0950167033 W0950257033 16 25 A 25 37 B 4.5 5.5 C 13 20 D 2 3 E 20 30 F 10 16 Weight [g] 14 40
SWING SUPPORT 32; 40; 63

Code W0950327033 W0950327033 W0950637033 32 40 63 A 70 70 80 B 6.5 6.5 M8 C 38 38 32 D 5 5 8 E 90 90 80 F 75 75 65 G 55 55 37 Weight [g] 274 274 400
ACCESSORIES: SENSOR MAGNETIC

SLIM SENSOR
For use on the rodless cylinder guide V 25 or when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288.
SENSOR SUPPORT 16; 25

Code 0950164001 Description Sensor support STD
Note: Supplied with 1 stud pin, 2 screws
1-136
SENSOR SUPPORT 16 FOR RODLESS CYLINDER WITH RECIRCULATING BALL
0950164003 0950164001
Sensor support short Sensor support std
A B
Note: Supplied complete with 2 screws, 1 pin
ACCESSORIES: SHOCK ABSORBERS

ADJUSTABLE LIMIT SWITCH AND SHOCK ABSORBERS KIT 16 25 to 40 63
Code Description Weight [g] 125 0950164002 Rodless cylinder limit switch and shock absorbers 16 0950254002 Rodless cylinder limit switch and shock absorbers 25 260 460 0950324002 Rodless cylinder limit switch and shock absorbers 32 730 0950404002 Rodless cylinder limit switch and shock absorbers 40 1620 0950634002 Rodless cylinder limit switch and shock absorbers 63 Note: Supplied complete with 1 shock absorber support, 1 standard shock absorber, 1 shock absorber nut, 1 limit switch grub screw, 1 grub screw nut ( 2 for 63), 1 bracket, 1 bracket screw, 4 locking grub screws (for 16 and 25), 4 locking plates and 4 screws (for 32 and 40)
ADJUSTABLE LIMIT SWITCH AND SHOCK ABSORBERS KIT FOR RODLESS CYLINDER WITH GUIDE V 25 to 40 63
Code 0950254004 0950324004 0950404004 0950634004 Description Rodless cylinder limit switch and shock absorbers 25 Rodless cylinder limit switch and shock absorbers 32 Rodless cylinder limit switch and shock absorbers 40 Rodless cylinder limit switch and shock absorbers 63 Weight [g] 260 460 730 1620
Note: Supplied complete with 1 shock absorber support, 1 standard shock absorber, 1 shock absorber nut, 1 limit switch grub screw, 1 grub screw nut ( 2 for 63) , 1 bracket, 1 bracket screw, 4 locking grub screws (for 25), 4 locking plates and 4 screws (for 32 and 40)
SHOCK ABSORBERS
Code 0950004003 0950004004 0950004005 0950004006 0950004007 Description Shock absorbers PR015 MF1 + nut M12x1 Shock absorbers PR025 MC2 + nut M14x1.5 Shock absorbers PR050 MC2 + nut M20x1.5 Shock absorbers PR0100 MF2 + nut M25x1.5 Shock absorbers PR0125 MF3 + nut M36x1.5 16 25 32 40 63
GRAPHS TO HELP CHOOSE THE RIGHT SHOCK ABSORBERS 16 25 32
40
63
The dotted areas indicate that the SHOCK ABSORBERS is supplied standard. Other options can be selected depending on the speed [m/sec] and the maximum work force [J/stroke] to dissipate at each stroke. Refer to the diagrams above to select the correct option.
1-137
ACCESSORIES FOR RODLESS STD, GUIDE V, WITH BALL RECIRCULATING GUIDE AND DOUBLE CYLINDERS
ACTUATORS
Code sensor support
Description sensor support
Type sensor support
Mounting on the carriage opposite side
Mounting on the guide opposite side
SPARE PARTS FOR STD RODLESS CYLINDERS, GUIDE V, BALL RECIRCULATING GUIDE, DOUBLE
LAST RELEASE CYLINDER
ACTUATORS
Round-headed Allen screw
SPARE PART FOR STD RODLESS CYLINDERS, GUIDE V, WITH BALL RECIRCULATING GUIDE AND DOUBLE
Solid orange scraper
a Bands support Kit b Piston kit c d e f g j NBR gaskets Kit (FKM/FPM for g) c d e f g j FKM/FPM gaskets Kit h i Bands Kit (inner/outer) k V guide plate kit BANDS SUPPORT KIT POS 1 (Y)
16 25 32 40 63 Code White 0090165080 0090255080 0090325080 0090405080 *0090635080 Code Black 0090165081 0090255081 0090325081 0090405081 *0090635081 Code Orange 0090165082 0090255082 0090325082 0090405082 *0090635082 Code Light grey 0090165083 0090255083 0090325083 0090405083 *0090635083 Code Dark grey 0090165084 0090255084 0090325084 0090405084 *0090635084
Spare parts label on one cylinder side
BANDS KIT (INNER AND OUTER) POS 8-9

Code Yellow 0090165085 0090255085 0090325085 0090405085 *0090635085 16 25 32 40 63 Code 0090166 0090256 0090326 0090406 0090636...
V GUIDE PLATE KIT POS 11

25 32 40 63 Code 0090255060 0090325060 0090325060 0090635060
* For 63, the kit includes a strip support and a shim in the colour ordered Therefore, two kits must be ordered for each cylinder
Complete the code with the 4 figur cylinder stroke
PISTON KIT POS 2 (X)

16 25 32 40 63 Code Type 0 (0 rings) 0090165015 0090255015 0090325015 0090405015 0090635015 Code Type 1 (1 rings) 0090165016 0090255016 0090325016 0090405016 0090635016 Code Type 2 (2 rings) 0090165017 0090255017 0090325017 0090405017 0090635017 Code Type 3 (3 rings) 0090165018 0090255018 0090325018 0090405018 0090635018 Code Type A (4 rings) 0090255019 0090325019
NBR GASKET KIT POS 3-4-5-6-7-10

16 25 32 40 63 Code 0090165022 0090255022 0090325022 0090405022 0090635022
FKM/FPM GASKET KIT POS 3-4-5-6-7-10

16 25 32 40 63 Code 0090165023 0090255023 0090325023 0090405023 0090635023
NOTES If the ends of the carriage appear as below indicated, please contact our commercial department for the spare parts INTERMEDIATE RELEASE OLD RELEASE
Allen screw with self-locking nut
Allen screw with self-locking nut
Solid orange scraper
Black Finned scraper
1-138
RODLESS CYLINDER SERIES PU
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Type of construction Strokes Recommended speeds Max. speed with decelerators Weight Notes bar MPa psi C F mm
NBR 1 to 8 0.1 to 0.8 14.5 to 116 -10 to +80 14 to +176 50 mm unlubricated filtere air Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 25, 32, 40, 50 Double-acting rodless cylinder with direct transmission system from 100 to 5700 mm with 1mm interval , 2 ,2 See page 1-9 For speeds lower than 0.2 m / s to prevent surging, use the version No stick-slip and non-lubricated air
m/s m/s
COMPONENTS a CYLINDER HEAD: anodized aluminium alloy b BARREL: profile anodized aluminium alloy c PISTON GASKET: polyurethane d V-SHAPED GUIDE SHOE: Hostaform e DUST SCRAPER: Hostaform f PISTON: Hostaform g CUSHIONING CONE: anodized aluminium alloy h STATIC O-RINGS: NBR i SLIDE: anodized aluminium alloy j OUTER STRIP: stainless steel k INTERNAL STRAP: polyurethane + steel strands l DIRECTION CHANGE: Hostaform m BUFFER: NBR
1-139
Series PU rodless cylinders have an internal strip for longitudinal tightness made of polyurethane (PU) with a harmonic steel wire core. This solution gives excellent air tightness values. It is particularly suitable for high-speed and highly cyclical applications, even with long strokes. The external strip, which merely provides protection against of foreign bodies entry, is made of harmonic steel. The anodised aluminium cylinder liner has a T-slot on either side for housing the retracting sensors. Cylinder control solenoid valves can also be housed in these slots and secured by means of plates and screws (see General Catalogue page 1-46). There are plastic anti-wear guide shoes on either side of the carriage to increase the load capacity. They engage V-slots in the cylinder liner. All the cylinders incorporate adjustable pneumatic cushioning. One version has hydraulic decelerators + adjustable limit switches. These can also be added at a later stage by purchasing the relevant kit. The balanced drive version avoids having to transmit transverse torques and forces to the carriage whenever the load is supported by guides outside the cylinder.
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Bore Centre Distance Y 25 16.5 32 20.1 40 25.3 50 30.4
Cushioning stroke [mm] 20 24 33 39
Actual Force F at 6 bar [N] 250 420 640 1000
G [N] 350 450 750 900
Max. load L + [N] 480 650 900 1100
Max. load L - [N] 350 450 750 900
Ma max [Nm] 22 40 70 90
Mr max [Nm] 5 10 26 32
Mv max [Nm] 10 20 35 45
Piston speed [m/sec]
Load L (N)
Distance K [mm]
1-140
DIMENSIONS
1 and 6 feed the left-hand chamber from the left side 4 feeds the left-hand chamber from the right side 2, 3 and 5 feed the right-hand chamber from the right side NOTE: 3, 4, 5 and 6 are closed with threaded caps
25 32 40 50 25 32 40 50
A 200 250 300 350 W3 16.5 19 22 31.8
B 14.5 19.5 19.8 19.9 W4 25.5 31.9 37.7 51.6
C 20 20 23 23
D D1 max 131 171 214.5 168 264.3 198 W6 4 W7 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
D2 10 10 Z1 57 67 83.5 106
E 84 124 150 170 Z2 51.2 61 75.7 97
E1 11 11 5.2 6.2 Z3 9.3 9.3 11 11
F 50 30 40 50
F1 100 130 150
G G1/8 G1/8 G1/4 G1/4
H 15.7 15.7 18 18
J K 11 30 11 50 12.5 70 12.5 80
M M5 M5 M6 M8
M1 M4 M5 M5 M6
M2 5.2 5.2 6.5 8.5
M3 H10 M4 8 M6 8 M6 10 M5 12 M6
N 13 13.5 15 16
N1 7.5 7.5 11 12.5
N2 2.1 2.1 2 2
O 4 4 5.5 6.5
P 63 73 92.5 115
R 40 48 60 74
S 19 19 21 24
S1 33 42
V 32.5 40 49 72
W 42 52 63 86
W1 26.5 31.2 37.7 53.4
W2 20.3 24.3 29.7 46.4
W5 21.2 27 31.5 43
1-141
ACTUATORS
RODLESS CYLINDER WITH SWING CARRIAGE
ACTUATORS
NOTE: For other dimensions see code 270
25 32 40 50
A 37 37 52 52
B 5.5 5.5 6.5 6.5
C 20 20 26.8 26.8
D 3 3 5 5
E 30 30 90 90
F 16 16 77 77
F1 37 37
H 73 - 75 83 - 85 103.5 - 105.5 125.3 - 128.3
L 42 42 49 49
DIMENSIONS VERSION WITH ADJUSTABLE LIMIT SWITCH AND SHOCK ABSORBERS

NOTE: For other dimensions see code 270
25 32 40 50
B Max 50 75 88 82
D M14x1.5 M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M25x1.5
E 21.5 26.7 36 49
G 12 14 16 20
W7 61.5 74.4 86.7 108.5
W8 72 88.7 106 129
WS4 42 52 63 86
Z4 9.2 10.3 13.5 17.5
Z5 6 11.2 13 9
Stroke 16 22 25 25
Max. cushioned force For stroke [J] For hour [J] 26 34000 54 53700 90 70000 90 70000
Max. impact force [N] 2800 3750 5500 5500
Max. thrust force [N] 530 890 1550 1550
KEY TO CODES
CYL 27 TYPE 27 Rodless cylinder 0 0 1 3 Double acting cushioned magnetic Double acting with swing carriage Double acting + adjustable limit switch and shock absorbers 0 3 Magnetic n 4 No stick slip 5 Non-magnetic 2 5 BORE 25 32 40 50 0100 STROKE from 100 to 5700 mm C C P GASKETS P Polyurethane gaskets
n For speeds lower than 0.2 m/s, to prevent surging. Use no-lubricated air only.
1-142
ACCESSORIES FOR RODLESS CYLINDER SERIES PU

FOOT
+ = ADDED STROKE Code 0950254041 0950324041 0950404041 0950504041 25 32 40 50 AB 5.5 6.6 6.6 9 AH 2 3 3 6 - 10 AO 19 24 26 36 AT 3 4 5 6 AU 6 7 8.5 11 TR 32.5 38 45 65 UH 42 52 63 86 H 226 284 335 400 Weight [g] 30 60 90 203
INTERMEDIATE FOOT
Code W0950257038 W0950327038 W0950407038 W0950507038 25 32 40 50 AB 5.5 6.6 9 9 AH 2 3 3 10 AO 28 33 38 43 AT 3.5 4 4.5 12 TR 60 73 90 106 UH 70 85 105 122 Weight [g] 16 30 42 121
Nota: 2 brackets and 4 grub screws per pack ( 25-32-40); 2 brackets, 4 grub screws and 2 plates for pack ( 50)
SIDE INTERMEDIATE FOOT

Code 0950254051 0950324051 0950404051 0950504051 25 32 40 50 AB 5.5 5.5 7 7 AH 3.5 4 4 10 AO 28 40 40 40 AT 3.5 4 4 10 TR1 5 5 8 8 TR2 14 12 16 19 UH 57.5 61 75 90 Weight [g] 20 32 36 101
Nota: 1 bracket, 2 screws and 2 plates per pack
SLIM SENSOR
Code Description W0952025390 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952029394 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952022180 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952028184 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952125556 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX W0952025500* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952029504* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 W0952022500* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952128184* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 * For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288
ADJUSTABLE LIMIT SWITCH AND SHOCK ABSORBERS KIT

Code 0950254013 0950324013 0950404013 0950504013 25 32 40 50 Description Rodless cylinder limit switch and shock absorbers 25 series PU Rodless cylinder limit switch and shock absorbers 32 series PU Rodless cylinder limit switch and shock absorbers 40 series PU Rodless cylinder limit switch and shock absorbers 50 series PU Weight [g] 220 420 675 967
Note: supplied complete with 1 decelerator bracket, 1 standard decelerator, 1 decelerator nut, 1 limit switch grub screw, 1 limit switch grub screw nut, 1 limit switch block, 2 block screws and 2 decelerator bracket screws (nr 4 decelerator bracket screw for 40 and 50)
1-143
ACCESSORIES FOR RODLESS CYLINDER SERIES PU
ACTUATORS
SHOCK ABSORBERS
ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS FOR RODLESS CYLINDER SERIES PU
ACTUATORS
Code 0950004004 0950004005 0950004006
25 32 40-50
Description Shock absorbers PRO25 MC2 + nut M14x1.5 Shock absorbers PRO50 MC2 + nut M20x1.5 Shock absorbers PRO100 MF2 + nut M25x1.5
GRAPHS TO HELP CHOOSE THE RIGHT SHOCK ABSORBERS 25 32 40-50
The dotted areas indicate that the SHOCK ABSORBERS is supplied standard. Other options can be selected depending on the speed [m/sec] and the maximum work force [J/stroke] to dissipate at each stroke. Refer to the diagrams above to select the correct option.
SPARE PARTS FOR RODLESS CYLINDER SERIES PU
DUST SCRAPER KIT POS 6

Code 0090255025P 25 0090255025P 32 0090405025P 40 0090505025P 50 Note: 2 dust scrapers
GASKET KIT POS 3-4-5
Code 0090255024P 25 0090325024P 32 0090405024P 40 0090505024P 50 Note: 2 gasket for position
BANDS KIT (inner and outer) POS 8-9

Code 0090256 - - - - P 25 0090326 - - - - P 32 0090406 - - - - P 40 0090506 - - - - P 50 Complete the code with the 4-figur cylinder stroke
PISTON KIT POS 2
Code 0090255009P 0090325009P 0090405009P 0090505009P Note: 2 pistons
25 32 40 50
1-144
NOTES
1-145
ACTUATORS
NOTES
1-146
ACTUATORS
NOTES
1-147
ACTUATORS
NOTES
1-148
ACTUATORS
RODLESS CYLINDER WITH MAGNETIC SLIDING SERIES MAGNETIC SLIDE
N.B.: We always suggest to use flow microregulators. During the setup of the actuator, start with CLOSE flow microregulators, and open gradually till the achievment of the required speed.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Strokes Versions Design Position sensing Fixing Theoretic force at 6 bar Magnetic coupling force (static condition) Max speed Weight Notes bar MPa psi C F mm mm
16
20
25
N N m/s
2 to 7 0.2 to 0.7 29 to 101 -10 to 60 14 to 140 Unlubricated 50 mm filtere air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 16; 20; 25 from 10 to 1000 with 1 intervals Magnetic uncushioned/cushioned Swinging magnet uncushioned/cushioned Double-acting rodless cylinder, with magnetic coupling transmission system Magnet for limit switch sensor Hex nuts (supplied standard) - Legs - Flanges 118 185 288 200 300 500 0.4 0.4 0.4 See page 1-9 Lubricate the slide every 2000 km or once a year, through the lubricators
COMPONENTS 20 a SLIDE: anodized aluminium alloy b WIPER RING: polyurethane c TIE ROD: stainless steel, thick-chromed d BARREL: AISI 304 stainless steel e HEAD: anodized aluminium alloy f CUSHIONING GASKET: NBR g NEEDLE: OT 58 with needle-out movement safety system, even when fully open h HEAD NUT: OT 58 nickel-plated i HALF-PISTON: aluminium alloy j PISTON GASKET: polyurethane k BUFFER: NBR l INT/EXT MAGNETS: neodymium m INT/EXT GUIDES: thermoplastic resin with lubricating additive n GREASE NIPPLE: steel o Static O-rings: NBR
1-149
The magnetic-slide rodless cylinder operates pneumatically and is equipped with a piston and a slide with magnets. The slide runs freely along the liner, following the piston movements, thanks to the magnetic coupling force between the two. If an axial force exceeding the magnetic coupling force is applied to the slide, it disengages. It is therefore important to operate within the pressure, force and speed ranges shown in the catalogue. The load is fixe onto the slide using four threaded holes. The cylinder is secured at the ends by means of nuts, flange and brackets. This solution is recommended when there is limited space for assembly, there must be no air leaks or impurities must be prevented from entering. Available with three bores 16-20-25, in the basic or swinging versions, with adjustable pneumatic cushioning or non-adjustable cushioning. Designed for use with magnetic sensors.
ACTUATORS
ADMISSIBLE AXIAL FORCE F AS A FUNCTION OF THE LEVER ARM A
ADMISSIBLE AXIAL FORCE F AS A FUNCTION OF THE STROKE C
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS
+ = ADD STROKE MAGNETIC SENSOR SLOT DIMENSIONS
a Grease nipple b External cursor, 360 adjustment c Sensor magnet d Position for magnetic sensors (N.B. customer must provide supports)
16 20 25
A 35 42 50
B 125 135 150
C M5 G1/8 G1/8
DC 17.3 21.3 26.5
DT M16x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5
F M5x7 M5x10 M6x11
F1 8x3 8x3 10x4
I 26 32 36
L 205 217 238
L1 181 185 206
L2 169 169 188
L3 12 16 16
L4 10 15.5 17.1
L5 28 25 28
L6 62.5 67.5 75
L7 22 17 19
L8 6 8 9
CH 24 32 32
H 8 7 7
X 14 17.5 21.5
Y 9 9 9
1-150
KEY TO CODES
CYL 27 TYPE 27 Rodless cylinder A VERSION A Magnetic sliding DEM B Magnetic sliding DEMA C Magnetic sliding swinging DEM D Magnetic sliding swinging DEMA 0 0 Magnetic 1 6 BORE 16 20 25 0050 STROKE For the maximum suppliable strokes, look at the technical data X MATERIAL X Stainless steel tie rod P GASKETS P Polyurethane
DEM: Magnetic double-acting (non-cushioned) DEMA: Magnetic double-acting (cushioned)
NOTES
1-151
ACTUATORS
ACCESSORIES FOR RODLESS CYLINDER WITH MAGNETIC SLIDING: FIXING

FOOT
ACTUATORS
+ = ADD STROKE
Code 0950164040 0950204040 0950204040
16 20 25
D 16 22 22
A 42 54 54
B 20 25 25
C 14 17 17
H 0.3 27 30 30
R 13 20 20
F 0.2 5.5 6.5 6.5
I Js 32 40 40
L 209 219 240
L1 161 161 182
S 4 5 5
Weight [g] 50 105 105
Note: individually pocket
ACCESSORIES FOR RODLESS CYLINDER WITH MAGNETIC SLIDING SERIES MAGNETIC SLIDE
FLANGIA MOD. C
+ = ADD STROKE Code W0950120002 W0950200002 W0950200002 16 20 25 D 16 22 22 FB H13 5.5 6.5 6.5 TF Js14 40 50 50 UF 52 66 66 UR 30 40 40 L 189 195 216 S 4 5 5 Weight [g] 26 52 52
Note: individually pocket
KIT FOR SWING VERSION

Code 0950164050 0950204050 0950254050 16 20 25 A 67 74 87 B 40 42 50 D 10 10 12 F 0.1 5.5 5.5 6.5 H 28.5 32 38 H1 46 53 63 H2 40 43 50 H3 7 7 8 I 26 32 36 I2 26 32 36 L 73.5 80.5 96.5 L1 53 60 68 L2 52 59 68 S 4 4 5 Weight [g] 288 345 576
Note: individually pocket. Supplied with 8 screws
The swinging version kit can be used to avoid bending moments and lateral loads on the slide. It can also be used to compensate for misalignments with respect to the load guide. Max alignment error 1mm.
ACCESSORIES: MAGNETIC SENSOR

* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288. Note: Individually packed.
1-152
STAINLESS STEEL ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDER
ISO 6432 stainless steel micro-cylinders are available in various versions with a wide range of accessories with or without magnet execution double-acting - single or through-rod gaskets: Polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperatures) fixin accessories
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Standard strokes Versions Magnet for sensors Notes
POLYURETHANE
FKM/FPM
bar 10 MPa 1 C 10 to +80 10 to +150 (non-magnetic cylinders) Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous mm 16; 20; 25 Chamfered heads mm max 500 Double-acting, Double-acting through-rod All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request. Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: AISI 316 steel b HEAD: AISI 304 steel c PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM d GUIDE BUSHING: sintered bronze e BARREL: AISI 304 steel f PISTON: brass g PISTON GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM h MAGNET: plastoferrite i Static O-rings: NBR or FKM/FPM
1-153
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
+ = ADD STROKE
16 20 25
AM 16 20 22
BE M16x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5
CD H9 6 8 8
CH 5 7 9
D 19 27 30
D1 6 8 10
EE M5 G 1/8 G 1/8
EW d13 12 16 16
G 5 8 8
KK M6 M8 M10x1.25
L 9 12 12
L1 109 131 140
L2 11 16 14
L3 18 20 22
L5 55 67 68
MR 16 18 21
NB 18 25.5 28.5
WF 22 24 28
XC 82 95 104
DIMENSIONS DOUBLE-ACTING THROUGH-ROD

16 20 25
AM 16 20 22
BE M16x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5
CH 5 7 9
D 19 27 30
D1 6 8 10
EE M5 G 1/8 G 1/8
G 5 8 8
KK M6 M8 M10x1.25
LL 129,5 156 169
L3 18 20 22
L5 55 67 68
NB 18 25.5 28.5
WF 1,2 22 24 28
KEY TO CODES
W 1 8 Stainless steel cylinder 0 1 0 TYPE DEM DEM through-rod 0 S V 0 VERSION Standard (magnetic) Non-magnetic FKM/FPM gasket 1 6 DIAMETER 16 20 25 0 0 2 0 STROKE 0 to 500 mm
DEM: Magnetic double-acting (non-cushioned) Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems
1-154
ACCESSORIES FOR STAINLESS STEEL ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDER: FIXINGS

STAINLESS STEEL LEG MODEL A
*ISO 6432 values Note: Individually packed
STAINLESS STEEL FLANGE MODEL C

Code W095X120002 W095X200002 W095X200002 16 20 25 D 16 22 22 FB 5.5 6.6 6.6 W 1.4 18 19 23 S 4 5 5 TF 40 50 50 UF 52 66 66 UR 30 40 40 Weight [g] 26 52 52
*ISO 6432 values Note: Individually packed
STAINLESS STEEL COUNTER-HINGE MODEL BC

Code W095X120005 W095X200005 W095X200005 16 20 25 AB1 6 8 8 AB 5.5 6.6 6.6 AO 2 4 4 LG 25 32 32 MO 24 31 31 N 12.1 16.1 16.1 NH 27 30 30 R 7 10 10 S 3 4 4 TR 15 20 20 Weight [g] 40 78 78
Note: Supplied complete with 1 pin and 2 snap rings
STAINLESS STEEL NUT FOR HEADS

Code W095X120010 W095X200010 W095X200010 16 20 25 CH 22 27 27 F M16x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5 H 5 8 8
1-155
ACCESSORIES FOR STAINLESS STEEL ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDER
ACTUATORS
Code W095X120001 W095X200001 W095X200001
16 20 25
AB 5.5 6.6 6.6
AU 14 17 17
AO 6 8 8
D 16.1 22.1 22.1
NH 20 25 25
XS 1.4 22 36 40
R 13 20 20
S 4 5 5
TR 32 40 40
US 42 54 54
Weight [g] 42 90 90
STAINLESS STEEL NUT FOR PISTON RODS
ACTUATORS
Code W095X120011 W095X200011 W095X322011
16 20 25
CH 10 13 17
F M6 M8 M10x1.25
H 4 5 6
Weight [g] 1 3 7
ACCESSORIES FOR STAINLESS STEEL ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDER
STAINLESS STEEL FORK-MODEL GK-M

Code W095X120020 W095X200020 W095X322020 16 20 25 A 12 16 20 B 6 8 10 C 12 16 20 D M6 M8 M10x1.25 F 24 32 40 L 31 42 52 M 6 8 10
ACCESSORIES: MAGNETIC SENSORS

SLIM SENSOR
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288 Note: Individually packed
SENSOR CIRCLIP
Code W0950001103 Bore 8 to 63 Description Sensor circlip
1-156
STAINLESS STEEL ROUND CYLINDERS RNDC
Stainless steel clean profil cylinders available in different versions: with or without magnet execution double-acting - single or through-rod gaskets: Polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperatures)
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Versions Magnet for sensors Standard strokes Notes bar MPa psi C mm
FKM/FPM
mm
10 to +80 10 to +150 (non-magnetic cylinders) Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 32; 40; 50; 63 Chamfered heads Double-acting, Double-acting through-rod All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request. max 500 Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: AISI 316 steel b PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM c GUIDE BUSHING: sintered bronze d BARREL: AISI 304 steel e PISTON: aluminium f MAGNET: plastoferrite g PISTON GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM h i HEAD:AISI 304 steel j BUFFER: polyurethane k GUIDE RING: PTFE
1-157
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
+ = ADD STROKE

32 40 50 63
A 36.5 44 55 67.5
CH1 10 13 17 17
D M30x1.5 M38x1.5 M45x1.5 M45x1.5
E M8x1 M10x1 M12x1.5 M14x1.5
F 20 24 32 32
G 30 38 45 45
I 96 113 120 124
L 168 198 220 224
L1 212 251 284 288
M M10x1.5 M12x1.75 M16x2 M16x2
N 14 16 18 18
O G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G3/8
P 38 46 57 70
R 78 89 96 98
S 12 16 20 20
T 47 57 62 63
V 30 35 38 38
W 38 45 50 50
CHIAVE DI CODIFICA
W 1 8 Stainless steel cylinder 0 1 0 TYPE DEM DEM through-rod 0 S V 0 VERSION Standard (magnetic) Non-magnetic FKM/FPM gasket 3 2 DIAMETER 32 40 50 63 0 0 3 2 STROKE 32 to 63 stroke 0 to 500 mm
DEM: Magnetic double-acting (non-cushioned) Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems
1-158
ACCESSORIES FOR STAINLESS STEEL ROUND CYLINDER: FIXINGS

STAINLESS STEEL LEG MODEL AC
+ = ADD STROKE
STAINLESS STEEL COUNTER-HINGE MODEL BC

+ = ADD STROKE Code W095X320005 W095X400005 W095X500005 W095X630005 32 40 50 63 A 40 50 54 65 B 35 40 45 50 C 24 30 34 35 D 4 5 6 6 E 7 9 9 9 F 8 10 10 15 G 12 13 14 16 H 46.1 56.1 69.1 82.1 I 20 28 36 42 L 125 146 158 161 M 58.1 70.1 86.1 99.1 R 12 13 14 16
Nota: Supplied complete with 2 screws
STAINLESS STEEL HEAD RING NUT MODEL G

Code W095X320010 W095X400010 W095X500010 W095X500010 32 40 50 63 A M30x1.5 M38x1.5 M45x1.5 M45x1.5 B 45 52 58 58 C 7 8 9 9

Code W095X320020 W095X400020 W095X500020 W095X500020 32 40 50 63 A 20 24 32 32 B 10 12 16 16 C 20 24 32 32 D M10x1.5 M12x1.75 M16x2 M16x2 F 40 48 64 64 L 52 62 83 83 M 10 12 16 16
1-159
ACCESSORIES FOR STAINLESS STEEL ROUND CYLINDERS RNDC
ACTUATORS
Code W095X320002 W095X400002 W095X500002 W095X630002
32 40 50 63
A 124 153 160 164
B 48 60 64 64
C 7 10 10 10
D 4 5 6 6
E 14 20 20 20
F 52 60 70 76
G 7 9 9 9
H 14 18 20 20
I 28 30 40 50
L 148 178 190 194
M 66 80 90 96
N 49 58 70 80
O 28 33 40 45
ACTUATORS
Code W095X320011 W095X400011 W095X500011 W095X500011
32 40 50 63
F M10x1.5 M12x1.75 M16x2 M16x2
CH 17 19 24 24
H 6 7 8 8
Weight [g] 6 12 20 20
ACCESSORIES FOR STAINLESS STEEL ROUND CYLINDERS RNDC
STAINLESS STEEL OSCILLATING PIN

+ = ADD STROKE Code W095X320007 W095X400007 W095X500007 W095X630007 Note: 2- piece pack 32 40 50 63 A M8X1 M10X1 M12X1.5 M14X1.5 CH 5 6 6 8 D 8 9.5 11 13 E 14 16.5 20 26 F 10 12 14 16 H 51 61 75 92 L1 125 146 158 161 L4 47 57 62 63

SLIM SENSOR
SENSOR CIRCLIP
Code W0950001103 Bore 8 to 63 Description Sensor circlip
1-160
STAINLESS STEEL ISO 15552 CYLINDERS (EX ISO 6431)
Stainless steel cylinders made to ISO 15552 available in various versions and with a wide range of accessories: with or without magnet execution double-acting single- or through-rod gaskets: Polyurethane or FKM/FPM (for high temperatures) fixin accessories, guide units and mechanical piston rod lock
TECHNICAL DATA
Max operating pressure Temperature range Fluid Bores Design Standard strokes Versions Magnet for sensors Notes bar MPa psi C mm mm
FKM/FPM
10 to +80 10 to +150 Unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 32; 40; 50; 63; 80; 100 Heads with tie rods max 1000 Double-acting cushioned, Double-acting through-rod cushioned All versions come complete with magnet. Supplied without magnet on request Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems
COMPONENTS a PISTON ROD: AISI 316 steel b HEAD: AISI 304 steel c PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM d GUIDE BUSHING: sintered bronze e BARREL: AISI 304 steel f ENBLOC GASKET: NBR or FKM/FPM g MAGNET: plastoferrite h Static O-rings: NBR or FKM/FPM i CUSHIONING GASKET: polyurethane or FKM/FPM j CUSHIONING NEEDLE: AISI 304 steel k TIE ROD: AISI 316 steel l NEEDLE-RETAINING RING: technopolymer
1-161
STAINLESS STEEL ISO 15552 CYLINDERS
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
STAINLESS STEEL ISO 15552 CYLINDERS
+ = ADD STROKE

32 40 50 63 80 100
A 14 14 14 16 16 18
A1 9 9 9 9 9 9
A2 11.3 13 12.7 15.8 16.3 15.5
B 30 35 40 45 45 55
C 26 30 37 37 46 51
C1 18 22 25.5 25 35 38
CH 10 13 16 16 21 21
CH1 6 6 8 8 10 10
D M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5
D1 12 16 20 20 25 25
E 32.5 38 46.5 56.5 72 89
E1 4 4 4 4 4 4
F 22 24 32 32 40 40
G G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G3/8 G3/8 G1/2
G1 M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
H 50 55 65 75 95 110
L 121 135 143 158 174 189
L0 95 105 106 121 128 138
L1 67 77 78 89 96 102
L2 147 165 180 195 220 240
P 6 8 11.8 11.7 15.5 15.5
KEY TO CODES
W 1 8 Stainless steel cylinder 4 5 4 TYPE DEMA DEMA through-rod 0 S V 0 VERSION Standard (magnetic) Non-magnetic FKM/FPM gasket 3 2 DIAMETER 32 40 50 63 80 A1=100 0 0 3 2 STROKE 0 to 1000 mm
DEMA: Magnetic double-acting (cushioned) Maximum recommended strokes. Higher values can create operating problems For this version the cylinder will be not magnetic
1-162
ACCESSORIES FOR STAINLESS ISO 15552 CYLINDER: FIXINGS

STAINLESS STEEL INTERMEDIATE HINGE - MODEL EN
Note: Supplied complete with 8 grub screws
STAINLESS STEEL SHORT FOOT MOUNTING

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W095X322001 W095X402001 W095X502001 W095X632001 W095X802001 W095XA12001 32 40 50 63 80 100 AB 7 9 9 9 12 14 AH 32 36 45 50 63 71 AO 35 36 47 45 55 57 AT 4 4 5 5 6 6 AU 24 28 32 32 41 41 TR 32 36 45 50 63 75 UH 45 52 65 75 95 115 H1 145 163 175 190 215 230 H2 143 161 170 185 210 220
STAINLESS STEEL FEMALE HINGE - MODEL B

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W095X322003 W095X402003 W095X502003 W095X632003 W095X802003 W095XA12003 32 40 50 63 80 100 B 45 52 65 75 95 115 D 26 28 32 40 50 60 E 22 25 27 32 36 41 G 10 12 12 16 16 20 H3 142 160 170 190 210 230 R 10 12 12 16 16 20 S 9 9 11 11 14 14
Note: Supplied with 4 screws, 4 washers. WITHOUT PIN.
FEMALE HINGE INOX PIN

Code W095X322050 W095X402050 W095X502050 W095X632050 W095X802050 W095XA12050 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 53 60 68 78 98 118 B 46 53 61 71 91 111 C 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.3 D 10 12 12 16 16 20 E 9.6 11.5 11.5 15.2 15.2 19
Note: Supplied with 2 snap-rings
1-163
ACCESSORIES FOR STAINLESS STEEL ISO 15552 CYLINDERS
ACTUATORS
Code W095X322007 W095X402007 W095X502007 W095X632007 W095X802007 W095XA12007
32 40 50 63 80 100
N1 50 63 75 90 110 132
N2 12 16 16 20 20 25
N3 12 16 16 20 20 25
N4 22 28 32 35 40 45
N5 65 75 95 105 130 145
STAINLESS STEEL MALE HINGE - MODEL BA
ACTUATORS
+ = ADD THE STROKE
Code W095X322004 W095X402004 W095X502004 W095X632004 W095X802004 W095XA12004
32 40 50 63 80 100
D 26 28 32 40 50 60
E 22 25 27 32 36 41
F 10 12 12 16 16 20
G 10 12 12 16 16 20
H 9 9 11 11 14 14
H3 143 160 170 190 210 230
STAINLESS STEEL ISO COUNTER-HINGE FOR MODEL B - MODEL GS

Code W095X322008 W095X402008 W095X502008 W095X632008 W095X802008 W095XA12008 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 26 28 32 40 50 60 B 20 22 26 30 30 38 C 6.6 6.6 9 9 11 11 D 10 12 12 16 16 20 E 38 41 50 52 66 76 F 18 22 30 35 40 50 G 32 36 45 50 63 71 H 31 35 45 50 60 70 I 51 54 65 67 86 96 L 3 2 3 2 7 5 M 8 10 12 14 14 17 N 10 15 16 16 20 20
STAINLESS STEE FRONT FLANGE - MODEL C

Code W095X322002 W095X402002 W095X502002 W095X632002 W095X802002 W095XA12002 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 80 90 110 120 150 170 A1 64 72 90 100 126 150 B 45 52 65 75 95 115 B1 32 36 45 50 63 75 S 10 10 12 12 16 16 D 7 9 9 9 12 14 W 16 20 25 25 30 35
STAINLESS STEE REAR FLANGE - MODEL C

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W095X322002 W095X402002 W095X502002 W095X632002 W095X802002 W095XA12002 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 80 90 110 120 150 170 A1 64 72 90 100 126 150 B 45 52 65 75 95 115 B1 32 36 45 50 63 75 S 10 10 12 12 16 16 D 7 9 9 9 12 14 L 105 115 118 133 144 154
1-164

Code W095X322020 W095X402020 W095X502020 W095X502020 W095X802020 W095X802020 32 40 50 63 80 100 A 20 24 32 32 40 40 B 10 12 16 16 20 20 C 20 24 32 32 40 40 D M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5 F 40 48 64 64 80 80 L 52 62 83 83 105 105 M 10 12 16 16 20 20

SLIM SENSOR
SENSOR BRACKET
Code W0950001100 Bore 32 to 100 Description Sensor bracket
Note: Individually packed MATERIAL Bracket: zinc-plated aluminium Sensor holder: zinc-plated aluminium Fixing screw: zinc-plated aluminium
1-165
ACTUATORS
Code W095X322011 W095X402011 W095X502011 W095X502011 W095X802011 W095X802011
32 40 50 63 80 100
F M10x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M20x1.5 M20x1.5
H 6 7 8 8 9 9
CH 17 19 24 24 30 30
Weight [g] 6 12 20 20 32 32
NOTES
1-166
ACTUATORS
GRIPPERS SUMMARY
P GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA GRIPPERS
PAGE 1-168
P GRIPPERS WITH TWO PARALLEL JAWS, SERIES P1
PAGE 1-172
P GRIPPERS WITH TWO PARALLEL JAWS, SERIES P2
PAGE 1-174
P GRIPPERS WITH TWO PARALLEL JAWS, LONG STROKE, SERIES P4
PAGE 1-176
P GRIPPERS WITH TWO HINGED JAWS, SERIES P7
PAGE 1-179
P TECHNOPOLYMER HINGED GRIPPERS, SERIES P8
PAGE 1-181
P GRIPPERS 180 WITH 2 HINGED JAWS SERIES P9
PAGE 1-183
P GRIPPERS WITH THREE PARALLEL JAWS, SERIES P11
PAGE 1-185
1-167
GRIPPERS SUMMARY
ACTUATORS
GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA GRIPPERS
NOMENCLATURE
ACTUATORS
a b c d e
f g h i
Pneumatic gripper Jaws Clamping finge Sensor slot F = clamping force of one jaw only If a gripper has three jaws, with F = 25 N, so the total clamping force is 25 x 3 = 75 N Load L = distance between the barycentre of the load and the reference surface C = stroke of a single jaw Fa = maximum axial force applied to the grippers
FIG. 1.1
TYPES Parallel gripper: the jaws move in a straight line. There may be two, three or even four jaws.
Hinged gripper: the jaws are hinged and move along the arc of a circle. It is generally cheaper than a parallel gripper but there are some limitations (see fig. 1.5) If the part has varying dimensions, the contact area changes (see fig. 1.6 If the part is cylindrical with varying dimensions, the position of the axis of the clamped part varies (see fig. 1.7 Gripper with retracting jaws: the jaws have an opening angle of about 90. The clamping fingers can retract fully from the work top, and so, in ce tain cases, it is possible to avoid one linear retraction motion (see fig. 1.5)
Toggle gripper: a hinged gripper with a toggle-action mechanism to achieve high clamping forces. Clamping is irreversible even when there is no pressure, so the part cannot be released accidentally. The opening angle is 90 so it acts as retracting gripper. The clamping force is high within a limited angle only.
Number of jaws: two-jaw grippers are used for prism-shaped parts or cylindrical ones with a single diameter. Three-jaw grippers can be used for cylindrical parts with different diameters.
1-168
CLAMPING FINGERS The clamping fingers must be as light and sho t as possible to keep inertia to a minimum. The longer the clamping fingers, the less force is available (see fig. 1.2 Wider fingers are only heavie , they do not increase friction (see fig. 1.3) FIG. 1.2 FIG. 1.3
NO
EXAMPLE OF CLAMPING FINGERS FIG. 1.4
OK
EXAMPLE OF RETRACTING HINGED GRIPPERS FIG. 1.5
EXAMPLE OF USE LIMITATIONS OF HINGED GRIPPERS FIG. 1.6
FIG. 1.7
1-169
ACTUATORS
CALCULATIONS
ACTUATORS
First of all, determine the necessary clamping force. Then decide which type of gripper can ensure this force with required pressure and clamping distance. To help designers calculate the clamping force, we propose two levels of calculation.
DRAWING TO CALCULATE GRIPPER CLAMPING FORCE FIG. 1.8
APPROXIMATION METHOD Clamping force of each jaw [N] $ 200 x weight of part [kg] / number of jaws.
Data M n F Mass of part Number of jaws Clamping force of each jaw Unit of measurement kg N Formula Example 1.2 3 $ 200 x 1.2/3 = 80
$ 200 x M/n
1-170
PRECISION COMPUTING METHOD

Data M a T d ax ay az m Mass of part Acceleration Angle speed Width of clamping finge Clamping diameter of part Distance along X of the barycentre from clamping centre Distance along Y of the barycentre from clamping centre Distance along Z of the barycentre from clamping centre Finger/part friction coefficien Some examples: Smooth steel on smooth metal Rough steel on smooth metal Soft material, e.g. Vulkolan Coupled shape (vedi fig. 1.4 Forces applied to barycentre of part. When determining the forces, assess for each direction: Force x weight Force of inertia x linear acceleration Force of inertia x angular velocity Force along gripper axis Force perpendicular to jaw Force tangent to jaw Force equivalent to clamping centre: Unit of measur. Kg m/s2 rad/s mm mm mm mm mm Formula Example 1.2 5 in direction Y 0 8 16 0 0 25 0.2 m = 0.1 m = 0.2 - 0.3 m = 0.4 m=1
Fx Fy Fz
N N N N N N
M x 9.81 Mxa Mx2xr Fx = weight 1.2 x 9.81 = 11.8 N Fy = F. of inertia = 1.2 x 5 = 6 N Fz = O
Ft eq Equivalent tangential force
Fy eq Equivalent perpendicular force
Fs teo Theoretical clamping force
Greater of (Fteq/2m) and (Fyeq)
Greater of (42.8/2.02) and 75 = 107
Clamping force
FsTeo 1.5 (safety coefficient
= 107 1.5 = 160 N
NOTES
1-171
ACTUATORS
GRIPPER WITH 2 PARALLEL JAWS SERIES P1
ACTUATORS
Dual-acting parallel gripper for internal and external clamping. Anodized aluminium alloy body and tempered steel jaws. Bottom or side fixing. All sizes come with magnets and sensor slots.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C
P1-20
P1-32
Temperature range Fluid Bores Clamping force at 6.3 bar 20 mm from the top surface during opening and closing Single jaw stroke Weight
mm N mm Kg
2 to 8 0.2 to 0.8 29 to 116 5 to 70 20 m filtere , lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuou 20 32 70 170 5 0.50 5 0.70
TABLE OF CLAMPING FORCES FOR VARIOUS POINTS OF APPLICATION
1-172
DIMENSIONS OF GRIPPERS P1-20
F (N)
140
100 80 60 40 20 0 0 10 20 30 40 2 bar 50 60 70 80 90 8 bar 6.3 bar 4 bar
L [mm]

Code W1550320001 Description Gripper with 2 parallel jaws P1-32
F (N)
280 240 200 6.3 bar 160 120 4 bar 8 bar
80 2 bar 40 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
L [mm]
ACCESSORIES
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288
1-173
120
ACTUATORS
Code W1550200001
Description Gripper with 2 parallel jaws P1-20
GRIPPERS WITH 2 PARALLEL JAWS SERIES P2
ACTUATORS
GRIPPERS WITH 2 PARALLEL ROLLER-RECIRCULATION JAWS SERIES P2
Double-acting system with clamping in both directions. All the grippers come with magnet and sensor slots.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C cycles/s
P2 -16
P2-20
P2- 25
Operating temperature Maximum operating frequency Fluid Size Bore Single jaw stroke Clamping force at 6.3 bar 20 mm from the top surface during opening and closing Weight
mm mm N Kg
2 to 8 0.2 to 0.8 29 to 116 -10 to +80 2 20 m filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuou 16 20 25 16 20 25 4 5 7 45 100 135 0.12 0.24 0.45
1-174
DIMENSIONS OF GRIPPER P2-16
F (N)
100 8 bar 80 60 40 20 0 6.3 bar 4 bar 2 bar
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
L [mm]

F (N)
160 140 8 bar
120 6.3 bar 100 80 60 40 20 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 4 bar 2 bar
L [mm]

F (N)
280 240 200 160 120 80 40 0 0 6.3 bar 4 bar 2 bar 8 bar
10
20 30
40
50 60 70
80
90 100 110
L [mm]
ACCESSORIES
SENSOR
Code W0950044180 W0950045390* Description Sensor REED 2 wires 24 VDC 1 m Sensor HALL 3 wires 24 VDC 2 m
* For technical data see page 1-289
1-175
ACTUATORS
Code W1570160200
Description Gripper with 2 parallel jaws P2-16
GRIPPERS WITH 2 PARALLEL LONG-STROKE JAWS SERIES P4
ACTUATORS
These are grippers with 2 parallel long-stroke jaws. The mechanical design makes them suitable for clamping bulky parts. All grippers, except for the smallest ones, can mount a retracting magnetic proximity sensor.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C cycles/s mm mm N kg
P4-10
P4-12
P4-16
P4-25
P4-30
Operating temperature Maximum operating frequency Fluid Bore Single jaw stroke Clamping force at 6.3 bar 20 mm from the top surface during opening and closing Weight
3 to 7 0.3 to 0.7 43 to 101 -10 to +80 1 20 m filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuo 2 x 10 2 x 12 2 x 16 2 x 30 2 x 30 5 10 15 30 60 30 45 75 280 280 0.18 0.3 0.5 2.95 3.7
1-176
F (N)
50 40 30 20 10 0
6.3 bar 4 bar 3 bar
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
L [mm]

Code W1580120200 Description Gripper with 2 long-stroke jaws P4-12
F (N)
60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 3 bar 8 bar 6.3 bar 4 bar
L [mm]

F (N)
140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 8 bar 6.3 bar 4 bar 3 bar
L [mm]
1-177
8 bar
ACTUATORS
Code W1580100200
Description Gripper with 2 long-stroke jaws P4-10
ACTUATORS
Code W1580250200
Description Gripper with 2 long-stroke jaws P4-25
400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0
F (N)
8 bar 6.3 bar
4 bar 3 bar
10
20 30
40
50 60 70
L [mm]
80
90 100 110 120

400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0
F (N)
8 bar 6.3 bar
4 bar 3 bar
10
20 30
40
50 60 70
L [mm]
80
90 100 110 120
ACCESSORIES
SENSOR FOR P4 10
RETRACTABLE SENSOR WITH INSERTION FROM ABOVE FOR P4-12-30

Code Description W0952025390 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952029394 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952022180 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952028184 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952125556 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX W0952025500* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952029504* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 W0952022500* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952128184* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 * For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. * For technical data see page 1-288
1-178
GRIPPERS WITH 2 HINGED JAWS SERIES P7
Hinged grippers with 30 opening angle. Bores 16, 20, 32 and 50 mm. All grippers are magnetic with slots in the body with retracting sensors.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C N kg
P7-16
P7-20
P7-32
P7-50
Fluid Temperature range Clamping force at 6.3 bar 20 mm from the centre of rotation of the jaws, during opening and closing Weight
2 to 10 2 to 10 2 to 10 2 to 10 0.2 to 1 0.2 to 1 0.2 to 1 0.2 to 1 29 to 145 29 to 145 29 to 145 29 to 145 20 m filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuou -10 to +80 27 50 120 380 0.12 0.19 0.5 1.6

Code W1590160200 Description Gripper with 2 hinged jaws P7-16
F (N)
50 40 30 20 10 0 8 bar 6.3 bar 4 bar 2 bar
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
L [mm]
1-179
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Code W1590200200
F (N)
60 50 40 30 8 bar 6.3 bar 4 bar
Description Gripper with 2 hinged jaws P7-20
20 10 0 0
2 bar
10
20
30
40
L [mm]
50
60
70
80
90

Code W1590320200
F (N)
280 240 200 160 120 80 40 0 0 8 bar 6.3 bar 4 bar 2 bar
10
20 30
40
50
60 70
80
90 100 110
L [mm]

Code W1590500200
F (N)
6.3 bar 8 bar
400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0
4 bar
2 bar
10
20 30
40
50 60 70
L [mm]
80
90 100 110 120
ACCESSORIES
Code Description W0952025390 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952029394 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952022180 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952028184 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952125556 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX W0952025500* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952029504* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 W0952022500* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952128184* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 * For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. * For technical data see page 1-288
1-180
TECHNOPOLYMER HINGED GRIPPERS SERIES P8
Single-acting hinged grippers, normally open, made entirely of technopolymer. Three sizes with clamping force 25-80 N at 6 bar. This solution makes the entire system lighter. This gripper is corrosion-resistant and antimagnetic. It comes complete with spring-loaded bracket for pre-loading the piece (force 1.5-6 N) and sensor holders.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa bar C
P8-32
P8-40
P8-50
Operating temperature Fluid Life Jaw opening angle Clamping force per jaw at 6 bar Applicable weight (recommended) Air consumption per cycle Opening time Closing time Weight of grippers Moment of inertia Repeatability
N kg cm3 sec sec g kg cm2 mm
4 to 7 0.4 to 0.7 58 to 101 -10 to +60 20 m filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuo Over 2 million cycles 8 22.5 48 80 0.2 0.4 0.8 0.5 1 1.8 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.08 0.08 36 45 60 0.04 0.12 0.15 0.1 0.1 0.1
TABLE OF MOMENTS
Gripper P8 - 32 P8 - 40 P8 - 50 FA (N) 3 5 8 Mx (Ncm) 9 23 49 My (Ncm) 10 20 30 Mz (Ncm) 10 20 40 P (N) 22.5 47.5 80
1-181
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
* Removable part clamping system ** Induction sensor
Code W0710010002
Description Tecnopolimer hinged grippers P8-32

* Removable part clamping system ** Induction sensor Code W0710010003 Description Tecnopolimer hinged grippers P8-40

* Removable part clamping system ** Induction sensor Code W0710010004 Description Tecnopolimer hinged grippers P8-50
ACCESSORIES
INDUCTION SENSOR
Code W0950037391 Description Induction sensor 4 mm PNP-NO-2 m
1-182
GRIPPER 180 WITH 2 HINGED JAWS SERIES P9
Toggle-type pivoted grippers, with adjustable opening angle. High clamping forces. Body made of hard anodized aluminium, jaws and moving parts made of tempered steel. Bottom or side fixing All sizes come with magnets and sensor slots.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C
P9-32
P9-40
Temperature range Fluid Bores Jaw opening angle Clamping force at 6.3 bar 40 mm from the jaw pivot during opening and closing Weight
2 to 8 0.2 to 0.8 29 to 116 -10 to +80 Filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuous 32 Adjustable 180 160 0.85 40 260 1.5
mm N Kg
1-183
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Code W1530320180
Description Hinged gripper P9-32
F (N)
280
240 200 160 120 80 40 0 0 10 8 bar 6.3 bar 4 bar 2 bar
20 30
40
50 60 70
80
90 100 110
L [mm]

Code W1530400180 Description Hinged gripper P9-40
F (N)
360 320 280 240 200 160 120 80 40 0 0 10 2 bar 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 8 bar 6.3 bar
4 bar
L [mm]
ACCESSORIES
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. * For technical data see page 1-288
1-184
Double-acting grippers with three self-centring jaws, internal and external clamping. The body contains slots for mounting retracting magnetic sensors.
TECHNICAL DATA
Min./max. operating pressure bar MPa psi C
P11-16
P11-20
P11-25
P11-60
Temperature range Fluid Bore mm Single jaw stroke mm Clamping force at 6.3 bar 22 mm from the top surface, during opening and closing N Weight kg Maximum operating frequency cycles/s
2 to 7 0.2 to 0.7 29 to 101 -10 to +80 20 m filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuou 16 20 25 60 3 4 5 12.5 38 62 110 900 0.12 0.21 0.3 2.7 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.2

Code W1570160300 Description Grippers with 3 parallel jaws P11-16
F (N)
60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 10 20 30 40 3 bar 50 60 8 bar 6.3 bar 4 bar 70 80 90
L [mm]
1-185
GRIPPERS WITH 3 PARALLEL JAWS - SERIES P11
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Code W1570200300
Description Grippers with 3 parallel jaws P11-20
F (N)
140 120 100 80
GRIPPERS WITH 3 PARALLEL JAWS - SERIES P11
60 40 20 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 2 bar 60 8 bar 6.3 bar 4 bar 80 90
70
L [mm]

F (N)
280 240 200 160 120 80 40 0 2 bar 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 8 bar 6.3 bar 4 bar 80 90 100 110
L [mm]

F (N)
1200 1050 900 750 600 450 300 150 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 4 bar 2 bar 6.3 bar 8 bar
L [mm]
ACCESSORIES
SENSOR FOR P11 16-60
1-186
SUMMARY ROTARY ACTUATORS
P GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA ROTARY ACTUATORS
PAGE 1-188
P ROTARY ACTUATORS SERIES R1
PAGE 1-189
PAGE 1-192
PAGE 1-195
P ROTARY ACTUATORS SERIES R3 WITH EXTERNAL SHOCK ABSORBERS
PAGE 1-200
1-187
SUMMARY ROTARY ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA ROTARY ACTUATORS
DEVICES
CALCULATIONS The following needs to be calculated: Absorbed kinetic energy Axial forces on the shaft or rotating flang Radial force on the shaft or rotating flang Overturning moment Then compare each of the 4 sizes with the admissible ones shown in the catalogue for each rotary actuator. Remember that the application of optional hydraulic decelerator, where envisaged, doubles the kinetic energy that can be absorbed by the actuator.
ACTUATORS
GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA ROTARY ACTUATORS
The use of hydraulic decelerators means it is possible to increase absorbed power. Some models in the catalogue have built-in decelerators. For those without, the user can mount decelerators outside the actuator. With horizontal axis rotation, if the masses are distributed asymmetrically it may be difficult to keep a constant rotation speed using flow regulators on . In this case it is advisable to use a decelerator.
SIZING
HOW TO CALCULATE KINETIC ENERGY
Denomination Unit of measurement Formula Example
a
t Jta E Fr Fa M
Angle of rotation Rotation time Moment of inertia of rotating masses N.B.: added those of the individual masses Kinetic energy Radial force (Remember to take into account centrifugal forces) Axial force Overturning moment
rad s Kg m2 Nm N N Nm
p = degrees . _____ 180
p = 90 = _____ rad. 2 2
= S Ji a = 1/2 Jw2 = 2J . ___ t (Fc = M . w2 . R)
_ +
= 0.078 + 0.02 + 0.133 = 0.232 p __ 2 2 = 2 . 0.232 . ___ = 0.57 2
_ +
50 10
= M + Fr . a + Fa . b
= 50 x 0.1 + 10 x 0 = 5
MOMENTS OF INERTIA FOR THE MOST COMMON SHAPES

Denomination Unit of measurement Formula Disco Kg m Kg m2 Md2 = _____ 8 Mass distant from rotation axis Example
M d J
Disk mass Disk diameter Moment of inertia of the disk
7 0.3 7 . 0.32 = _________ = 0.0787 8
M R J
Mass Distance between barycenter and rotation axis Moment of inertia of the mass
Kg m Kg m2 = MR2 Parallelepiped with barycenter on rotation axis
0.5 0.2 = 0.5 x 0.22 = 0.02
M L J
Mass Side of the parallelepiped Moment of inertia of the mass
Kg m Kg m2 L = M ____ 12
2
10 0.4 10 . 0.42 = _________ = 0.13 12
1-188
ROTARY ACTUATORS SERIES R1 32 to 100
Rack-type rotary cylinders in various configurations Configuration with standard magne Version with male pinion or female hole Mechanical stroke adjustment Special configurations on reques The central body has ISO bore holes for wall fixing using ISO pin and/or flange fitting N.B.: We always suggest to use flow microregulators. During the setup of the actuator, start with CLOSE flow microregulators, and open gradually till the achievment of the required speed.
TECHNICAL DATA
Gaskets Operating pressure bar MPa psi C
32
40
50
63
80
100
Temperature range Fluid Bores Rotation angle Type of construction Configuratio Axial load Max. moment (6 bar - 0.6 Mpa)
mm
N Nm
2500 4.5
NBR 10 1 145 10 to + 80 Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air. Lubrication, if used, must be continuous. 32 ; 40 ; 50 ; 63 ; 80 ; 100 90; 180; 270; 360 Extruded profil Magnetic standard cushioned 2800 4500 5600 8500 12.5 16 32 70
12200 120
N.B. The product is supplied with negative end-of-stroke piston (in the proximity of head A). The first cycle involves movement of the piston (towards head B) with consequent anti-clockwise rotation of the pinion ACTUAL ROTATION ANGLE Cylinders without regulation of the rotation angle: the manufactural tolerance is + 4/0 compared to the nominal value Cylinders with regulation of the rotation angle: the possible regulation ranges from + 2/- 20.
COMPONENTS a BARREL: profiled anodised aluminium allo b HEAD: die cast aluminium c CUSHIONING NEEDLE: OT 58 with needle out movement safety system even when fully open d BUFFER + Static O-rings: NBR or FKM/FPM e PISTON: aluminium f PISTON GASKET: NBR g MAGNET: plastoferrite h RACK: AISI 304 i PIGNON MALE/FEMALE: nitrided alloy steel j BALL BEARING k CENTRAL BODY: anodised aluminium l RACK GUIDE BUSH: self-lubricating sintered bronze m REGULATION SCREW: AISI 303
1-189
ROTARY ACTUATORS SERIES R1
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF ROTARY CYLINDER 32 to 100
ACTUATORS
DETAIL OF FEMALE PINION
WITHOUT ADJUSTMENT
WITH ADJUSTMENT
WITHOUT ADJUSTMENT
WITH ADJUSTMENT
Note: with the key slot in the position specified, the piston is in contact with head A L0 1 fot ROTATION ANGLE 90 180 270 360 218.7 261.1 303,5 345.9 241.4 288.6 335,6 382.8 265.9 322.4 379,0 435.5 295.1 358.0 420,8 483.6 358.3 443.1 528,0 612.8 399.8 500.4 600,9 701.4
32 40 50 63 80 100
D 0.236 0.262 0.314 0.349 0.471 0.559
A 10 10 10 10 12 12
B 30 35 40 45 45 55
BG 15.5 15.5 18.5 18.5 21.5 21.5
CM g7 14 16 19 24 28 38
CF g7 10 12 14 16 25 30
CH1 22 22 27 27 36 36
D M6 M6 M8 M10 M12 M14
E 46 54 64.5 75.5 94 111
EE G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G3/8 G3/8 G1/2
EF D10 3 4 5 5 8 8
EM H9 5 5 6 8 8 10
F 30 30 32 38 48 60
G 30 30 45 52 70 80
H 14 14 16 17 20 25
I 50 60 65 73 100 120
J 34.5 39.5 46.5 47.5 58.5 67
32 40 50 63 80 100
J1 4.5 5 7 2,5 8.5 7
J2 2 -
K 16 20 25 25 33 38
M 47 52.5 63 75 95 108
N 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
O 47 54.5 64 75 95 110
P 6 6 6 6 10 10
PL 10 12 14 16 18 20
Q 4 4 6 6 7 7
R 30 35 40 45 50 60
RT M6 M6 M8 M8 M10 M10
S 9 7 10 11 12.5 15
TG 32.5 38 46.5 56.5 72 89
TF 6.4 7.8 9.3 10.3 15.8 18.3
TM 4 5 6 8 10 14
V 68 74 85 95 125 150
V1 44.5 45 51 56 76 90.5
V2 19 22 25 27.5 39 45.5
VA 4 4 4 4 4 4
X 32 - 35.5 45.5 - 50 48.5 - 53 46.5 - 51 61 - 67 66.5 - 74.5
Y 20 25 25 30 35 45
ZM 15 17 20 25 35 45
ZF 15 17 20 25 35 45
D = Linear displacement (mm) for each degree of rotation
1-190
KEY TO CODES
W165 TYPE cylinder with male pinion cylinder with female pinion 050 BORES 032 040 050 063 080 100 1 VERSION cylinder without adjustment of rotation angle cylinder with adjustment of rotation angle 090 ANGLE OF ROTATION 090 180 270 360
W165 W166
1 2
expressed in sexagesimal degrees.

RETRACTABLE SENSOR WITH INSERTION FROM ABOVE SENSOR MOD. DSM
Code W0952025390 W0952029394 W0952022180 W0952028184 W0952125556 W0952025500* W0952029504* W0952022500* W0952128184*
Code Description W0950000201 REED sensor DSM2-C525 HS W0950000222 E.HALL PNP sensor DSM3-N225 W0950000232 E. HALL NPN sensor DSM3-M225 For technical data see pag. 1-286
SENSOR SUPPORT BRACKETS FOR SENSORS DSM 32 to 40
* For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see pag. 1-288

Code W0950000711 Description Bracket D.32 DST 80
50 to 63
Code W0950001001
Description Adaptor DSS005 for DST/ST brackets
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM a ISO 15552 cylinder with barrel Serie STD or Serie 3 b Sensor bracket mod. DST ( 32 to 100) c Adaptor d Retractable sensor with insertion from above
Code W0950000712
80 to 100
Code W0950000713
Description Bracket D.80-100-125 DST 82
1-191
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Actuator with double rack and play take-up. Four sizes 12, 16, 20 and 25. Two angles of rotation 90 and 180. Stroke adjustment system for all sizes. Pneumatic cushioning for all sizes except the smallest. There are slots in the body to house a magnetic proximity sensor. Air supply, stroke adjustment and cushioning adjustment are all on the same side. N.B.: We always suggest to use flow microregulators. During the setup of the actuator, start with CLOSE flow microregulators, and open gradually till the achievment of the required speed.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C degrees
R2-12
R2-16
R2-20
R2-25
Temperature range Angle adjustment Fluid Versions Ports Sizes Theoretical torque (DP= pressure in bar) Max. axial load Max. radial load Weight with 90 rotation Weight with 180 rotation Rotation time without load: 90 angle 180 angle
mm Nm N N Kg Kg s s
1.5 to 7 0.15 to 0.7 22 to 101 -10 to +80 35 (about +10 -25) 20 m filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuo 90/180 rotation Both at the front 12 16 20 25 0.065 x P 0.14 x P 0.25 x P 0.48 x P 8 14 40 80 8 14 40 80 0.18 0.26 0.63 0.8 0.21 0.31 0.72 1 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.3
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j k l m n ROTARY SHAFT / PINION: hardened and tempered steel BALL BEARING FLANGE: anodised aluminium PISTON / RACK: hardened and tempered steel PISTON GASKET: NBR GUIDE SHOE: PTFE MAGNET: neodymium CUSHIONING GASKET: NBR CUSHIONING PIN: zinc-plated steel HEAD: anodised aluminium PNEUMATIC CONNECTION / STROKE ADJUSTMENT: steel BARREL: anodised aluminium BASE: anodised aluminium SEAL: NBR
1-192
ROTARY ACTUATOR R2-12 90/180
Dimensions for 180 rotation are given in brackets

Code W1620162090 W1620162180 Description Rotary actuator R2-16-90 Rotary actuator R2-16-180

Code W1620202090 W1620202180 Description Rotary actuator R2-20-90 Rotary actuator R2-20-180
1-193
ACTUATORS
Code W1620122090 W1620122180
Description Rotary actuator R2-12-90 Rotary actuator R2-12-180
ACTUATORS
Code W1620252090 W1620252180
Description Rotary actuator R2-25-90 Rotary actuator R2-25-180
ACCESSORIES
MAGNETIC SENSOR 4
NOTES
1-194
Actuator with double rack and play take-up. Angle of rotation adjustable from 0 to 180. The R3 rotary actuator can come with a mechanical stop or hydraulic end-of-stroke cushioning. There is a version with flange and one with shaft (for 16-20-25-30) There are slots in the body for retracting magnetic proximity sensors, two on each side. There is hole in the flange for air pipes or wires N.B.: We always suggest to use flow microregulators. During the setup of the actuator, start with CLOSE flow microregulators, and open gradually till the achievment of the required speed.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C degrees
R3-16
R3-20
R3-22
R3-25
R3-30
R3-40
Temperature range Angle adjustment Fluid Versions Sizes Bores Theoretical torque at 6 bar Max. axial load Max. radial load Weight Rotation time without load
mm Nm N N Kg s
3 to 7 0.3 to 0.7 43.5 to 101 -10 to +80 0 to 180 20 m filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuo With mechanical stop / hydraulic decelerator 16 20 22 25 30 40 2 x 16 2 x 20 2 x 22 2 x 25 2 x 30 2 x 40 0.9 1.8 2.7 4.6 9.3 22 74 135 195 300 340 360 78 137 360 450 490 560 0.53 0.99 1.29 2.08 3.9 6.7 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3
Admissible kinetic energy WITH MECANICAL STOP (with flange W1630__2180 and with shaft W1630__5180 WITH HYDRAULIC DECELERATOR (with flange W1630__2180 and with shaft W1630__5180
Joule 0.007 0.025 0.049 0.082 0.29 0.090 1.10 0.150 1.60
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j ROTARY FLANGE: anodised aluminium PINION: hardened and tempered steel BALL BEARING PISTON / RACK: hardened and tempered steel CUSHIONING GASKET: NBR GUIDE SHOE: PTFE MAGNET: neodymium HEAD: anodised aluminium BARREL: anodised aluminium SEAL: NBR
VERSIONS: A Stroke adjustment B Stroke adjustment with inside hydraulic shock absorbers (available from 25)
1-195
ACTUATORS
ROTARY ACTUATOR R3-16
ACTUATORS
Code W1630162180 W1630165180
Description Rotary actuator with flange R3-1 Rotary actuator with shaft R3-16
VERSION WITH SHAFT

Code W1630202180 W1630205180 Description Rotary actuator with flange R3-2 Rotary actuator with shaft R3-20
VERSION WITH SHAFT
1-196

Code W1630252180 W1630253180 W1630255180 W1630256180 VERSION WITH SHOCK ABSORBERS Description Rotary actuator with flange R3-2 Rotary actuator with flange + shock absorbers R3-2 Rotary actuator with shaft R3-25 Rotary actuator with shaft + shock absorbers R3-25
VERSION WITH SHAFT
1-197
ACTUATORS
Code W1630222180
Description Rotary actuator with flange R3-2
ROTARY ACTUATOR SERIES R3-30
ACTUATORS
Code W1630302180 W1630303180 W1630305180 W1630306180 VERSION WITH SHOCK ABSORBERS
Description Rotary actuator with flange R3-3 Rotary actuator with flange + shock absorbers R3-3 Rotary actuator with shaft R3-30 Rotary actuator with shaft + shock absorbers R3-30
VERSION WITH SHAFT
ROTARY ACTUATOR SERIES R3-40

Code W1630402180 W1630403180 Description Rotary actuator with flange R3-4 Rotary actuator with flange + shock absorbers R3-4
VERSION WITH SHAFT
1-198
ACCESSORIES
SPARE PARTS
SHOCK ABSORBERS
Code 0950004011 0950004008 0950004005 25 30 40 Description Shock absorbers SPM25 MC3 short M14x1.5 Shock absorbers PM25 MC3 M14x1.5 Shock absorbers PR050 MC2 + nut M20x1.5
NOTES
1-199
ACTUATORS
ROTARY ACTUATORS SERIES R3 WITH EXTERNAL SHOCK ABSORBERS
ACTUATORS
Dual-rack actuator with automatic adjustment for wear. Hydraulic shock absorbers are arranged externally and operate at a distance from the axis of rotation which is considerably higher than for internal ones. This means that the absorbable kinetic energy is 4 to 8 times higher. It is reduced in length as there are no adjusting screws. A 90 and a 180 versions are available. Grooves are provided in the body to fix retractable magnetic proximity sensors, two on each side. A hole has been drilled in the flange for the passage of air pipes or power cables. N.B.: We always suggest to use flow microregulators. During the setup of the actuator, start with CLOSE flow microregulators, and open gradually till the achievment of the required speed.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C degrees mm mm Nm N N Nm J s
R3-16
R3-20
R3-22
R3-25
R3-30
R3-40
Temperature range Angle adjustment Fluid Sizes Bore Theoretical torque at 6 bar Max. axial load Max. radial load Max overturning moment Admissible kinetic energy Rotation time without load
3 to 7 0.3 to 0.7 43.5 to 101 -10 to +80 90 o 180 3 20 m filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air; lubrification if used, it must be continuo 16 20 22 25 30 40 2 x 16 2 x 20 2 x 22 2 x 25 2 x 30 2 x 40 0.9 1.8 2.7 4.6 9.3 22 74 135 195 300 340 360 78 137 360 450 490 560 2.4 4 5.3 9.7 12 18 0.16 0.55 0.85 1.40 1.85 3.35 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j k ROTARY FLANGE: anodised aluminium PINION: hardened and tempered steel BALL BEARING PISTON / RACK: hardened and tempered steel CUSHIONING GASKET: NBR GUIDE SHOE: PTFE MAGNET: neodymium HEAD: anodised aluminium BARREL: anodised aluminium STROKE REGULATOR WITH HYDRAULIC SHOCK ABSORBERS Block for 90 version
1-200
ROTATION ANGLE
ADMISSIBLE KINETIC ENERGY Joule [J]

Bore 16 20 22 25 30 40 With flange, 90 rotation: W1630__4090 With flange, 180 rotation: W1630__4180 0.16 0.55 0.85 1.40 1.85 3.35
position of the holes lower pins
position of the holes lower pins
DIMENSIONES - FORCES AND MOMENTS

Bore 16 20 22 25 30 40 T Theoretical torque at 6 bar [Nm] 0.9 1.8 2.7 4.6 9.3 22 FA Max. axial load [N] 74 135 195 300 340 360 FR Max. radial load [N] 78 137 360 450 490 560 M Averturing momnet [Nm] 2.4 4 5.3 9.7 12 18
ROTARY ACTUATOR SERIES R3-16 WITH EXTERNAL SHOCK ABSORBERS, 90/180

Q Block for 90 version Code W1630164090 W1630164180 Description Rotary actuator with flange + shock absorbers R3-16-90 Rotary actuator with flange + shock absorbers R3-16-180
1-201
ACTUATORS
90
180
ACTUATORS
Q Block for 90 version
Code W1630204090 W1630204180
Description Rotary actuator with flange + shock absorbers R3-20-90 Rotary actuator with flange + shock absorbers R3-20-180

Q Block for 90 version Code W1630224090 W1630224180 Description Rotary actuator with flange + shock absorbers R3-22-90 Rotary actuator with flange + shock absorbers R3-22-180
1-202

W1630254180

Q Block for 90 version Code W1630304090 W1630304180 Description Rotary actuator with flange + shock absorbers R3-30-90 Rotary actuator with flange shock absorbers R3-30-180
1-203
ACTUATORS
Code W1630254090
ACTUATORS
Code W1630404090 W1630404180
ACCESSORIES
SPARE PARTS
SHOCK ABSORBERS
Code 0950004009 0950004010 0950004011 0950004005 16 Description Shock absorbers PMX 10 MF3 M10x1 22 Shock absorbers PM 15 MF3 M12x1 25 30 Shock absorbers SPM 25 MC-C M14x1.5 40 Shock absorbers PR50 MC2 + nut M20x1.5
1-204
SUMMARY SLIDES
P GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA SLIDES
PAGE 1-206
P TWIN CYLINDERS SERIES S10
PAGE 1-207
P TWIN CYLNDERS SLIDE WITH FIXED BODY SERIES S11
PAGE 1-211 SUMMARY SLIDES

1-205
P TWIN CYLNDERS SLIDE WITH FIXED PLATES SERIES S12
PAGE 1-217
P PRECISION SLIDES SERIES S13
PAGE 1-223
OTHER GUIDE UNITS AND SLIDE
P GDS, GDH AND GDM GUIDE UNITS FOR ISO 6432
PAGE 1-19
P GDS, GDH AND GDM GUIDE UNITS FOR ISO 15552
PAGE 1-42
P SHORT-STROkE ANTI-ROTATION CYLINDERS
PAGE 1-105
P COMPACT ANTI-ROTATION CYLINDERS SERIES CMPC
PAGE 1-76
P ISO 21287 ANTI-ROTATION CYLINDERS SERIES LINER
PAGE 1-65
P TWIN-ROD CYLINDERS SERIES TWNC
PAGE 1-49
P COMPACT GUIDES CYLINDERS SERIES CMPG
PAGE 1-112
P RODLESS CYLINDERS SERIE STD
PAGE 1-118
ACTUATORS
GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA SLIDES
TYPES
ACTUATORS
The range of guide units and slides is very extensive. Guides are grouped into families.
Guide units to couple with standard cylinders. These are separate units to which an ISO 6432 or ISO 15552 cylinder is attached. Twin pneumatic cylinder. The barrel has two calibrated holes for housing two pistons and rods side by side. There are versions with a single piston rod, through piston rod and different power supplies depending on whether you wish to fix the barrel or the flange to the ends of the piston rod.
GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA SLIDES
Pneumatic single piston cylinders with supports at the end of the piston rod. The common factor in all the various configurations is that, as well the calibrated hole for the piston in the cylinder body or front head, there are other slots housing bushes or guide bearings for additional piston rods.
Rodless cylinders. In these cylinders the piston rod is integral with a carriage on the outside of the barrel, so there is no piston rod. We offer versions in which the barrel is open, with a C-shaped section, and piston and carriage linked mechanically.
Guides with pneumatic actuator. The main part of this actuators is the guiding section which determines the shape, applications, loads, maximum strokes and cost. The pneumatic part is housed in one of the bodies of the unit or it comes as a complete cylinder housed inside the guide.
LOAD CONDITIONS
LOAD OR STROKE EQUIVALENCE
Admitted loads for each guide unit are shown in the catalogue. If the load is not aligned with the moving plate, it is possible to determine the equivalent load or stroke with a good approximation.
To check the admissible load
To check the arrow
1-206
TWIN CYLINDER SERIES S10
There are two sliding systems available: on bushes on ball recirculating bearings The frame is made up of two paired cylinders with a common anodized aluminium body containing slots for retracting sensors. There are 5 bores available: 2 x 12, 2 x 16, 2 x 20, 2 x 25 and 2 x 30.
TECHNICAL DATA
Pressure range bar MPa psi C mm/s
S10-12
S10-16
S10-20
S10-25
S10-30
Temperature range Fluid Piston speed Versions Sizes Bores Piston rod diameter Strokes
mm mm mm mm mm mm
3 to 7 0.3 to 0.7 43.5 to 101 -10 to +80 10 mm dried or lubricated filtered ai . Lubrication, if used, must be continuous. 30 to 100 System with sliding bushes/System with ball bushes available with stop screw or hydraulic decelerator 12 16 20 25 30 2 x 12 2 x 16 2 x 20 2 x 25 2 x 30 6 8 10 12 16 15 15 25 25 25 25 25 50 50 50 50 50 75 75 75 75 100 100 100 125 125 0.12 + (0.002 x C) 0.24 + (0.0025 x C) 0.51 + (0.005 x C) 0.76 + (0.006 x C) 1.3 + (0.009 x C) 0.21 + (0.002 x C) 0.48 + (0.0025 x C) 0.77 + (0.005 x C) 0.18 + (0.006 x C) 1.92 + (0.009 x C) (Multiply the value shown by the pressure in bar) 2.26 x DP 4 x DP 6.28 x DP 9.8 x DP 14.1 x DP 1.69 x DP 3 x DP 4.11 x DP 7.5 x DP 10.1 x DP (The values shown refer to the min. and max. strokes) 3 to 1.5 6 to 3 10 to 3.5 12 to 5.6 20 to 7 6 to 4 11 to 6 20 to 7 26 to 8 36 to 11
Weight (C = stroke mm) Sliding version Ball bearing version Theoretical thrust Thrust force Pull force Max. loads Sliding version Ball bearing version
Kg Kg da N da N N N
COMPONENTS a b c d d e f g h i j FLANGE: anodized aluminium REAR BASE: anodized aluminium BUFFER: rubber ADJUSTABLE STRIKER PLATE. Zinc-plated steel bis. HYDRAULIC DECELERATOR FRONT BASE: brass PISTON: brass MAGNET: Plastoferrite CYLINDER BODY: anodized aluminium STATIC O-RING: NBR BALL RE-CIRCULATION BUSH
VERSIONS: A With sliding bushes B With ball bushes

1-207
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF TWIN CYLINDER SERIES S10, ON BUSHES 12 to 30 mm
ACTUATORS
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1440122... W1440162... W1440202... W1440252... W1440302... 12 16 20 25 30 A 18 22 26 32 36 B 46 56 66 78 98 C 10 10 10 10 10 C1 50 62 68 74 87 C2 2 2 2 2 2 C3 60 74 82 90 105 D 4 5 6 7 8 E 20 26 29 32.5 37.5 E1 20 20 29 31.5 39.5 F 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 9 11 13 16 18 H 10 12 14 17 19 L 8 10 12 14 16 M 4.3 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 N 8 8 9 10.5 14 P 4 4 5 6 8 Q M3 M4 M4 M5 M6 Q1H7 4 4 4 4 6 R 5 6 7 7 8 R1 3 3 3 3 5 S 8 8 10 12 12 T 9 10 11 11 13
12 16 20 25 30
U 28 33 40 42 51
V 38 46 56 66 86
V1 54 64 82
W 3 3 3 5 5
X 20 26 30 39 52
Y 10 12 14 17 19
Z 1 1 1 1 1
AB M5 M6 M8 M10 M12
AG M5 M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
...Enter the stroke in mm (e.g. 12 stroke 50 = W1440122050) Strokes for bore 12 mm 15; 25; 50; Strokes for bore 16 mm 15; 25; 50; 75; Strokes for bore 20 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; Strokes for bore 25 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; Strokes for bore 30 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125;
1-208
DIMENSIONS OF TWIN CYLINDER SERIES S10, ON BALL BEARINGS 12 to 30 mm
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1440123... W1440163... W1440203... W1440253... W1440303... 12 16 20 25 30 A 18 22 26 32 36 B 46 56 66 78 98 C 10 10 10 10 10 C1 69 90 100 108 124 C2 2 2 2 2 2 C3 79 98 111 120 142 D 4 5 6 7 8 E 29.5 42 46.5 51.5 56 E1 29.5 38 43.5 46.5 58 F 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 9 11 13 16 18 H 10 12 14 17 19 L 8 10 12 14 16 M 4.3 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 N 8 8 9 10.5 14 P 4 4 5 6 8 Q M3 M4 M4 M5 M6 Q1H7 4 4 4 4 6 R 5 6 7 7 8 R1 3 3 3 3 5 S 8 8 10 12 12 T 9 10 11 11 13
12 16 20 25 30
U 47 57 69 72 88
V 38 46 56 66 86
V1 54 64 82
W 3 3 3 5 5
X 20 26 30 39 52
Y 10 12 14 17 19
Z 1 1 1 1 1
AB M5 M6 M8 M10 M12
AG M5 M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
...Enter the stroke in mm (e.g. 12 stroke 50 = W1440123050) Strokes for bore 12 mm 15; 25; 50; Strokes for bore 16 mm 15; 25; 50; 75; Strokes for bore 20 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; Strokes for bore 25 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; Strokes for bore 30 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125;
1-209
ACTUATORS
ACCESSORIES
MAGNETIC SENSOR 4, FOR SLIDE S10 12
ACTUATORS
Code W0950044180 W0950045390*
Description Sensor REED 2 wires 24 VDC 1 m Sensor HALL 3 wires 24 VDC 2 m
RETRACTABLE SENSOR WITH INSERTION FROM ABOVE, FOR SLIDE S10 16 to 30

NOTES
1-210
TWIN CYLINDER SLIDE WITH FIXED BODY SERIES S11
TECHNICAL DATA
Fluid Pressure range bar MPa psi C mm/s mm mm mm
S11-12
S11-16
S11-20
S11-25
S11-30
Temperature range Piston speed Versions Bores Piston rod diameter Strokes
20 mm filtered ai 1.5 to 7 0.15 to 0.7 43.5 to 101 -10 to +80 30 to 200 With sliding bushes / With ball bearing bushes / With stop screw / With hydraulic shock absorbers 12 16 20 25 30 6 8 10 12 16 25 25 25 25 25 50 60 50 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 100 100 100 100 125 125 125 150 150 X = 0.14 Y = 0.002 X = 0.25 Y = 0.002 16.9 x P Fr: 7 to 3 Fp: 4 to 1.5 Fr: 13 to 5 Fp: 6 to 3 X = 0.25 X = 0.5 X = 0.7 Y = 0.0035 Y = 0.045 Y = 0.007 X = 0.37 X = 0.78 X = 1.04 Y = 0.0035 Y = 0.045 Y = 0.007 30 x P 47 x P 75 x P (The values shown refer to the min. and max. strokes) Fr: 20 to 4 Fr: 35 to 4.5 Fr: 50 to 5.4 Fp: 4 to 1.5 Fp: 12 to 3 Fp: 15 to 3.5 Fr: 35 to 6.5 Fr: 58 to 7 Fr: 80 to 8 Fp: 11 to 3 Fp: 18 to 5 Fp: 23 to 6 X = 1.24 Y = 0.01 X = 1.98 Y = 0.01 101 x P Fr: 80 to 12 Fp: 20 to 4.5 Fr: 130 to 18 Fp: 50 to 8
Weight = X + (Y C) where C = stroke Sliding version Ball bearing version Theoretical thrust (P = relative pressure in bar) Max. loads Loads with sliding version Loads with ball bearing version
kg
N N N
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j FLANGE: anodized aluminium WASHER: steel BUFFER: rubber ADJUSTABEL STRIKER PLATE: Zinc-plated steel BASE: brass PISTON: brass MAGNET: plastoferrite CYLINDER BODY: anodized aluminium STATIC O-RINGS: NBR BUSH: ball bearing
VERSIONS: A With sliding bushes B With ball bearing bushes

1-211
There are two sliding systems available: on bushes on ball bearings The frame is made up of two paired through-rod cylinders with a common anodized aluminium body containing slots for retracting sensors. There are 5 bores available: 2 x 12; 2 x 16; 2 x 20; 2 x 25 and 2 x 30. The piston rods are united by means of a plate on which mechanical stops or hydraulic shock absorbers can be mounted.
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF TWIN-CYLINDER GUIDE UNITS SERIES S11, ON BUSHES 12 to 30
ACTUATORS
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1450122... W1450162... W1450202... W1450252... W1450302... 12 16 20 25 30 A 18 22 26 32 36 B 46 56 66 78 98 C 5 10 10 10 10 C1 45 50 55 60 70 C2 2 2 2 2 2 C3 65 74 83 92 106 C4 57 64 71 78 90 D 4 5 6 7 8 E 20 20 22.5 25 30 F 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 9 11 13 16 18 H 10 12 14 17 19 L 8 10 12 14 16 M 2 2 2 2 2 N 4.3 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 P 8 8 9 10.5 14 Q 4 4 5 6 8 R M3 M4 M4 M5 M6 R1H7 4 4 4 4 6 S 5 6 7 7 8 S1 3 3 3 3 5 T 3.3 4.3 4.3 5.2 5.2
12 16 20 25 30
U 6 8 8 9 9
V 3 4 4 5 5
W 14 15 16 19 21
X M4 M5 M5 M6 M6
Y 6 8 10 12 12
Z 38 46 56 66 86
Z1 54 64 82
AB 3 3 3 5 5
AC 20 26 30 39 52
AD 1 1 1 1 1
AE 10 12 14 17 19
AF 4 5 5 6 6
AG M5 M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
AM M8x1 M10x1 M10x1 M12x1 M14x1.5
AL 7 8.5 9 10 12
...Enter the stroke in mm (e.g. 12 stroke 50 = W1450122050) Strokes for bore 12 mm 25; 50; 75 Strokes for bore 16 mm 25; 50; 75; 100 Strokes for bore 20 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125 Strokes for bore 25 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150 Strokes for bore 30 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150
1-212
DIMENSIONS OF TWIN-CYLINDER GUIDE UNITS SERIES S11, ON BALL BEARINGS 12 to 30
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1450123... W1450163... W1450203... W1450253... W1450303... 12 16 20 25 30 A 18 22 26 32 36 B 46 56 66 78 98 C 5 10 10 10 10 C1 71 85 99 105 128 C2 2 2 2 2 2 C3 91 109 127 137 164 C4 83 99 115 123 148 D 4 5 6 7 8 E 33 37.5 44.5 47.5 59 F 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 9 11 13 16 18 H 10 12 14 17 19 L 8 10 12 14 16 M 2 2 2 2 2 N 4.3 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 P 8 8 9 10.5 14 Q 4 4 5 6 8 R M3 M4 M4 M5 M6 R1H7 4 4 4 4 6 S 5 6 7 7 8 S1 3 3 3 3 5 T 3.3 4.3 4.3 5.2 5.2
12 16 20 25 30
U 6 8 8 9 9
V 3 4 4 5 5
W 28 33 40 42 50
X M4 M5 M5 M6 M6
Y 6 8 10 6 12
Z 38 46 56 66 86
Z1 54 64 82
AB 3 3 3 5 5
AC 20 26 30 39 52
AD 1 1 1 1 1
AE 10 12 14 17 19
AF 4 5 5 6 6
AG M5 M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
AH M5 M6 M8 M10 M12
AM M8x1 M10x1 M10x1 M12x1 M14x1.5
AL 7 8.5 9 10 12
1-213
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF TWIN-CYLINDER GUIDE UNITS WITH SHOCK ABSORBERS SERIES S11, ON BUSHES 12 to 30
ACTUATORS
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1450124... W1450164... W1450204... W1450254... W1450304... 12 16 20 25 30 A 18 22 26 32 36 B 46 56 66 78 98 C 5 10 10 10 10 C1 45 50 55 60 70 C2 2 2 2 2 2 C3 65 74 83 92 106 C4 57 64 71 78 90 D 4 5 6 7 8 E 20 20 22.5 25 30 F 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 9 11 13 16 18 H 10 12 14 17 19 L 8 10 12 14 16 M 2 2 2 2 2 N 4.3 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 P 8 8 9 10.5 14 Q 4 4 5 6 8 R M3 M4 M4 M5 M6 R1H7 4 4 4 4 6 S 5 6 7 7 8 S1 3 3 3 3 5 T 3.3 4.3 4.3 5.2 5.2
12 16 20 25 30
U 6 8 8 9 9
V 3 4 4 5 5
W 14 15 16 19 21
X M4 M5 M5 M6 M6
Y 6 8 10 12 12
Z 38 46 56 66 86
Z1 54 69 82
AB 3 3 3 5 5
AC 20 26 30 39 52
AD 1 1 1 1 1
AE 10 12 14 17 19
AF 4 5 5 6 6
AG M5 M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
AH 30 35 35 36 60
AM M8x1 M10x1 M10x1 M12x1 M14x1.5
AL 7 8.5 9 10 12
1-214
DIMENSIONS OF TWIN-CYLINDER GUIDE UNITS, BALL BEARING VERSION WITH SHOCK ABSORBERS SERIES S11 12 to 30
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1450125... W1450165... W1450205... W1450255... W1450305... 12 16 20 25 30 A 18 22 26 32 36 B 46 56 66 78 98 C 5 10 10 10 10 C1 71 85 99 105 128 C2 2 2 2 2 2 C3 91 109 127 137 164 C4 83 99 115 123 148 D 4 5 6 7 8 E 33 37.5 44.5 47.5 59 F 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 9 11 13 16 18 H 10 12 14 17 19 L 8 10 12 14 16 M 2 2 2 2 2 N 4.3 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 P 8 8 9 10.5 14 Q 4 4 5 6 8 R M3 M4 M4 M5 M6 R1H7 4 4 4 4 6 S 5 6 7 7 8 S1 3 3 3 3 5 T 3.3 4.3 4.3 5.2 5.2
12 16 20 25 30
U 6 8 8 9 9
V 3 4 4 5 5
W 28 33 40 42 50
X M4 M5 M5 M6 M6
Y 6 8 10 6 12
Z 38 46 56 66 86
Z1 54 64 82
AB 3 3 3 5 5
AC 20 26 30 39 52
AD 1 1 1 1 1
AE 10 12 14 17 19
AF 4 5 5 6 6
AG M5 M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
AH 30 35 35 36 60
AM M8x1 M10x1 M10x1 M12x1 M14x1.5
AL 7 8.5 9 10 12
1-215
ACTUATORS
ACCESSORIES
MAGNETIC SENSOR 4, FOR SLIDE S11 12
ACTUATORS
Code W0950044180 W0950045390*

SPARE PARTS
SHOCK ABSORBERS
Code 0950004001 0950004002 0950004003 0950004004 12 16 - 20 25 30 Description Shock absorbers PMX 10 MF3 + nut M10x1 Shock absorbers PM 15 MF3 + nut M12x1 Shock absorbers SPM 25 MC-C + nut M14x1 Shock absorbers PR50 MC2 + nut M20x1.5
NOTES
1-216
TWIN CYLINDER SLIDE WITH FIXED PLATES SERIES S12
TECHNICAL DATA
Fluid Pressure range bar MPa psi C mm/s mm mm mm
S12-16
S12-20
S12-25
S12-30
Temperature range Piston speed Versions Bores Piston rod diameter Strokes
20 mm filtered ai 1.5 to 7 0.15 to 0.7 21.5 to 101 -10 to +80 30 to 200 With sliding bushes / With ball bearing bushes / With stop screw / With hydraulic shock absorbersi 16 20 25 30 8 10 12 16 25 25 25 25 60 50 50 50 75 75 75 75 100 100 100 100 125 125 125 150 150 X = 0.5 X = 0.7 X = 1.24 Y = 0.045 Y 0.007 Y = 0.01 X = 0.78 X = 1.04 X = 1.98 Y = 0.045 Y = 0.007 Y = 0.01 47 x P 75 x P 101 x P (The values shown refer to the min. and max. strokes) Fr: 20 to 4 Fr: 35 to 4.5 Fr: 50 to 5.4 Fr: 80 to 12 Fp: 4 to 1.5 Fp: 12 to 3 Fp: 15 to 3.5 Fp: 20 to 4.5 Fr: 35 to 6.5 Fr: 58 to 7 Fr: 80 to 8 Fr: 130 to 18 Fp: 11 to 3 Fp: 18 to 5 Fp: 23 to 6 Fp: 50 to 8 X = 0.25 Y = 0.0035 X = 0.37 Y = 0.0035 30 x P
Weight = X + (Y C) where C = stroke Sliding version Ball bearing version Theoretical thrust (P = relative pressure in bar) Max. loads Loads with sliding version Loads with ball bearing version
kg
N N N
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j k FLANGE: anodized aluminium WASHER: steel BUFFER: rubber ADJUSTABLE STRIKER PLATE: Zinc-plated steel BASE: brass PISTON: brass MAGNET: Plastoferrite CYLINDER BODY: anodized aluminium STATIC O-RINGS: NBR BUSH: ball bearing SCREW: pneumatically powered
VERSIONS: A With sliding bush B With ball bearing bush

1-217
Two sliding systems are available: on bushes on ball bearings The structure is made up of two paired through-rod cylinders with a common anodized aluminium body with grooves for mounting the retractable sensor. Five bores available: 2 x 16; 2 x 20; 2 x 25; 2 x 30. The rods are joined together by means of a plate on which the mechanical limit switches or hydraulic shock absorbers can be mounted. The compressed air ports are at the end of the piston rods.
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF TWIN-CYLINDER SLIDE SERIES S12 16 to 30
ACTUATORS
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1460162... W1460202... W1460252... W1460302... 16 20 25 30 A 22 26 32 36 B 56 66 78 98 C 10 10 10 10 C1 50 55 60 70 C2 2 2 2 2 C3 74 83 92 106 C4 64 71 78 90 D 5 6 7 8 E 20 22.5 25 30 F 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 11 13 16 18 H 12 14 17 19 L 10 12 14 16 M 2 2 2 2 N 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 P 8 9 10.5 14 Q 4 5 6 8 R M4 M4 M5 M6 R1H7 4 4 4 6 S 6 7 7 8 S1 3 3 3 5 T 4.3 4.3 5.2 5.2
16 20 25 30
U 8 8 9 9
V 4 4 5 5
W 15 16 19 21
X M5 M5 M6 M6
Y 8 10 12 12
Z 46 56 66 86
Z1 54 64 82
AB 3 3 5 5
AC 26 30 39 52
AD 1 1 1 1
AE 12 14 17 19
AF 5 5 6 6
AG M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
AH M6 M8 M10 M12
AM M10x1 M10x1 M12x1 M14x1.5
AL 8.5 9 10 12
...Enter the stroke in mm (e.g. 16 stroke 50 = W1450162050) Strokes for bore 16 mm 25; 50; 75; 100 Strokes for bore 20 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125 Strokes for bore 25 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150 Strokes for bore 30 mm 25; 50; 75; 100; 125; 150
1-218
DIMENSIONS OF TWIN-CYLINDER SLIDE SERIES S12 16 to 30
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1460163... W1460203... W1460253... W1460303... 16 20 25 30 A 22 26 32 36 B 56 66 78 98 C 10 10 10 10 C1 85 99 105 128 C2 2 2 2 2 C3 109 127 137 164 C4 99 115 123 148 D 5 6 7 8 E 37.5 44.5 47.5 59 F 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 11 13 16 18 H 12 14 17 19 L 10 12 14 16 M 2 2 2 2 N 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 P 8 9 10.5 14 Q 4 5 6 8 R M4 M4 M5 M6 R1H7 4 4 4 6 S 6 7 7 8 S1 3 3 3 5 T 4.3 4.3 5.2 5.2
16 20 25 30
U 8 8 9 9
V 4 4 5 5
W 33 40 42 50
X M5 M5 M6 M6
Y 8 10 6 12
Z 46 56 66 86
Z1 54 64 82
AB 3 3 5 5
AC 26 30 39 52
AD 1 1 1 1
AE 12 14 17 19
AF 5 5 6 6
AG M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
AH M6 M8 M10 M12
AM M10x1 M10x1 M12x1 M14x1.5
AL 8.5 9 10 12
1-219
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF TWIN-CYLINDER SLIDE WITH SHOCK ABSORBERS SERIES S12 16 to 30
ACTUATORS
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1460164... W1460204... W1460254... W1460304... 16 20 25 30 A 22 26 32 36 B 56 66 78 98 C 10 10 10 10 C1 50 55 60 70 C2 2 2 2 2 C3 74 83 92 106 C4 64 71 78 90 D 5 6 7 8 E 20 22.5 25 30 F 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 11 13 16 18 H 12 14 17 19 L 10 12 14 16 M 2 2 2 2 N 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 P 8 9 10.5 14 Q 4 5 6 8 R M4 M4 M5 M6 R1H7 4 4 4 6 S 6 7 7 8 S1 3 3 3 5 T 4.3 4.3 5.2 5.2
16 20 25 30
U 8 8 9 9
V 4 4 5 5
W 15 16 19 21
X M5 M5 M6 M6
Y 8 10 12 12
Z 46 56 66 86
Z1 54 64 82
AB 3 3 5 5
AC 26 30 39 52
AD 1 1 1 1
AE 12 14 17 19
AF 5 5 6 6
AG M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
AH 35 35 36 60
AM M10x1 M10x1 M12x1 M14x1.5
AL 8.5 9 10 12
1-220
DIMENSIONS OF TWIN-CYLINDER SLIDE WITH SHOCK ABSORBERS SERIES S12 16 to 30
VIEW FROM K
+ = ADD THE STROKE ++ = ADD TWICE THE STROKE Code W1460165... W1460205... W1460255... W1460305... 16 20 25 30 A 22 26 32 36 B 56 66 78 98 C 10 10 10 10 C1 85 99 105 128 C2 2 2 2 2 C3 109 127 137 164 C4 99 115 123 148 D 5 6 7 8 E 37.5 44.5 47.5 59 F 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 G 11 13 16 18 H 12 14 17 19 L 10 12 14 16 M 2 2 2 2 N 4.3 5.5 6.5 8.5 P 8 9 10.5 14 Q 4 5 6 8 R M4 M4 M5 M6 R1H7 4 4 4 6 S 6 7 7 8 S1 3 3 3 5 T 4.3 4.3 5.2 5.2
16 20 25 30
U 8 8 9 9
V 4 4 5 5
W 33 40 42 50
X M5 M5 M6 M6
Y 8 10 6 12
Z 46 56 66 86
Z1 54 64 82
AB 3 3 5 5
AC 26 30 39 52
AD 1 1 1 1
AE 12 14 17 19
AF 5 5 6 6
AG M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
AH 35 35 36 60
AM M10x1 M10x1 M12x1 M14x1
AL 8.5 9 10 12
1-221
ACTUATORS
ACCESSORIES
ACTUATORS
SPARES
SHOCK ABSORBERS
Code 0950004002 0950004003 0950004004 16 - 20 25 30 Description Shock absorbers PM10 MF2 + nut M10x1 Shock absorbers PR015 MF1 + nut M12x1 Shock absorbers PR025 MC2 + nut M14x1.5
NOTES
1-222
PRECISION SLIDES SERIES S13
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi C mm/s
10
16
20
Operating temperature Fluid Minimum and maximum speed Pneumatic fitting Type of guide Versions Strokes
mm
Theoretical thrust force, at 6 bar Theoretical pull force, at 6 bar Admitted loads Admitted kinetic energy Stroke tolerance Assembly position Weight
N N Joule mm kg
2 to 8 0.2 to 0.8 29 to 116 -10 to +80 Lubricated and unlubricated compressed air at 20 mm, must be uninterrupted when lubricated 30 to 500 M5 Ball recirculation Magnetic dual-acting with rubber buffer 10 10 10 10 25 25 25 25 ----50 50 17 47 120 188 13 40 104 158 See diagrams page 1-224 0.012 0.025 0.050 0.100 0 / +1.0 Any (horizontal and vertical) See table page 1-224
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o NUT: stainless steel SNAP RING: galvanised steel FRONT BASE: bronze BODY: anodized aluminium GUIDE: tempered stainless steel PISTON: aluminium BALL RECIRCULATION PAD: stainless steel BUFFER: NBR REAR BASE: anodized aluminium PLATE: anodized aluminium PISTON ROD GASKET: type EM, NBR O-RING: NBR PISTON ROD: stainless steel PISTON GASKET: type PZ, NBR MAGNET: neodymium ( 6 and 10) plastoferrite ( 16 and 20)
1-223
Series S13 precision slides feature a dual-acting pneumatic cylinder that has the sole purpose of pushing and pulling the load, a ground steel guide that is integral with the body, and a ball recirculation pad that is fixed onto the moving table and is designed to withstand all the loads and movements applied. This ensures accurate movement with virtually no play, and the piston rods do not suffer wear as there are no lateral loads. All the slides are equipped with sensor magnets. The body can be secured on many sides. The load side can be fixed onto the table from the top or the front. The compressed air supply can be connected on three sides. The retractable sensors can be fitted on the right or on the left. All these possibilities make the application extremely flexible. The width is extremely reduced to allow installation in small spaces and the combination of several reduced-pitch slides.
ACTUATORS
WEIGHTS
MASS/VELOCITY DIAGRAM M (kg) L (mm) = Mass applied = Distance between the axis of the piston rod and the barycentre of the mass v (mm/s) = Velocity of the slide vert = Limit with vertical movement
ACTUATORS
WEIGHT [gr] Stroke 10 25 50 6 68 90 --8 125 160 ---
Bore 16 230 280 350
20 455 550 660
WEIGHT OF MOVING PART [gr] Stroke 6 10 30 25 40 50 ---
8 50 68 ---
Bore 16 100 125 167
20 180 220 290
ADMITTED LOADS DIAGRAM
S13-6
S13-10
S13-16
S13-20
1-224
FIXING OPTIONS FIXING THE BODY A Lateral, via the through holes B Lateral, on the hole threads C Rear, on the threaded holes D Vertical, on the threaded holes FIXING THE MOVING TABLE E Front, on the threaded holes F Top, on the threaded holes N.B. Since the table is supported by a ball guide/pad, avoid applying excessive torques or forces. When securing the screws, hold the table, not the body, so that the torque discharges through the ball pad. C D
COMPRESSED-AIR SUPPLY The compressed air supply can be from the back, from the left or from the right. The slide comes with holes on the left and right that are plugged with screws and O-ring seals. If you wish to use the holes, remove the screws and O-rings and fix them in the holes in the back, applying a drop of adhesive to the screw thread.
1-225
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS
ACTUATORS
6 10 16
20 + = ADD THE STROKE Code W1471063...* W1471103...* W1471163...* W1471203...* 6 10 16 20 LT 31 35 42 52.5 B 19 23 27 34 C 18 20 25 32 D 10 12.5 12.5 15 E 39 47 53.5 64.5 F 38 46 52.5 63.5 G 5.5 7.5 10 11 I 2.9 4 3.75 4.5 J 7.5 9 10 10.5 K 15 18 26 34 MA M3 M4 M4 M5 pf 5 6 7 9 A 2 2 3 3 ps 4.5 4.5 7.5 7.5
Stroke 10 25 10 25 10 25 50 10 25 50 L 9 11 16 20
A 14 30 14 30 20 40 60 20 40 70 O N/2 N/2 N/2 N/2
N 10 30 10 30 10 30 25 10 30 25 P 8 11 14 14
H 42 62 49 69 58 78 98 64 84 104 Q 9 11 16 20 R 15 19 24 31
NF 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 S 10 12 12 15
M 14.5 15.5 19 23
6 10 16 20
T 5 5 10 10
U 9 13 17 20
V 16 20 25 32
W 10.5 13 17 20
X 18 20 25 32
Y 19 23 27 34
L 6 7.5 7.5 9.5
pn 3.5 4.5 4.5 7.5
ML M4 M5 M5 M6
DL 4 5 5 6
* Enter the stroke in mm (e.g. 6 stroke 10=W1471063010) Standard strokes: Bore 6 -> 10; 25 mm Bore 10 -> 10; 25 mm Bore 16 -> 10; 25; 50 mm Bore 20 -> 10; 25; 50 mm
1-226
ACCESSORIES
MAGNETIC SENSOR 4, FOR SLIDE S13
NOTES
1-227
ACTUATORS
Code W0950044180 W0950045390*
NOTES
1-228
ACTUATORS
SUMMARY HYDRAULIC-PNEUMATIC
P HYDRAULIC BRAKE SERIES BRK
PAGE 1-230
P INTEGRATED HYDRAULIC BRAKE
PAGE 1-238
1-229
SUMMARY HYDRAULIC-PNEUMATIC
ACTUATORS
BRK HYDRAULIC BRAKE
ACTUATORS
BRK HYDRAULIC BRAKE
This is a closed-loop hydraulic brake without its own power source. It is normally associated with an ISO 15552 pneumatic cylinder. It consists of an oil-filled cylinde , one or more regulation valves and a tank compensating for oil leaks. It is available in two versions: with regulation in piston rod extension, in retraction or both SKIP valve (slow/fast) or STOP valve or both, with NC or NO control After a certain operating time, the brake compensation tank needs to be topped up. Refer to the minimum mark on the dipstick. With the piston rod fully extended, the dipstick must project at least 15 mm from the tank cap. Use only COMLUBE DEXRON ATF hydraulic oil. During the first few work cycles, excess oil is ejected through a hole in the tank.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating temperature Fluid Adjustable load Speed Standard strokes Versions Cylinder coupling Connectable cylinders C
NBR From 10 to +70 Lubricated or unlubricated filtered ai . Lubrication, if used, must be continuous 7000 10 to 6000 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 special strokes up to 1000 on request. Regulation in piston rod extension and/or retraction. SKIP valves. STOP valves. Tank in-line or on the side. Flange kit ISO 15552 cylinders with bore 40 to 100
N mm/min mm
mm
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q
1-230
PISTON ROD: thick chromed steel HEADS: anodised aluminium alloy PISTON ROD GASKET: NBR rubber PISTON ROD GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert JACKET: drawn anodised aluminium alloy PISTON: aluminium alloy PISTON GASKET: NBR rubber OIL SEAL GASKET: polyurethane Static O-rings: NBR rubber SEALING DISK: plastic SPRINGS: zinc-plated steel SECURING/ASSEMBLY SCREW: self-threading screw (Tap Tite) OIL LEVEL STICK: zinc-plated steel OIL RECOVERY TANK VALVE for OIL FILLING FLOW REGULATION NEEDLE MINIMUM LEVEL
SKIP-STOP APPLICATION WITH VALVES

STOP SKIP
STOP
SKIP
Air inlet
Air inlet
In normally-open (NO) valves, flow moves freely from A to D. When po t C is supplied, this operates the SKIP valve and the fluid is forced through the bottleneck generated by the adjusting pin. When port B is supplied, this operates the STOP valve and interrupts the flow of fluid In normally-closed NC valves, flow is no mally inhibited. When port B is supplied, the fluid flows through but it is forced through the bottlenec generated by the adjusting pin. When port C is supplied, flow moves freely from A to D.
DIMENSIONS AND ORDERING CODES

HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN PISTON ROD EXTENSION
Symbol
Stroke 150 51150 B 109 129 U max 23 39 55 71 87 95
Code W170001____
Description Hydraulic brake with regulation in piston rod extension
151250 154 251350 174 351450 204 451500 229
____ = Enter the stroke Weight for stroke 0 mm = 1340 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN PISTON ROD EXTENSION, IN-LINE TANK

Symbol
Stroke 150 51150 B 92 112 U max 23 39 55 71 87 95
Code W170001____L
Description Hydraulic brake with regulation in piston rod extension, in-line tank
151250 137 251350 157 351450 187 451500 212
1-231
BRK HYDRAULIC BRAKE
ACTUATORS
NO
Air inlet
Air inlet
NC
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN PISTON ROD RETRACTION
ACTUATORS
Symbol
Stroke 150 51150 B 109 129 U max 23 39 55 71 87 95
Code W170011____
Description Hydraulic brake with regulation in piston rod retraction
151250 154 251350 174 351450 204 451500 229
BRK HYDRAULIC BRAKE HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN PISTON ROD EXTENSION/RETRACTION
Symbol
Stroke 150 51150 B 98 118 U max 23 39 55 71 87 95
Code Description W170021____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in piston rod extension/retraction
151250 143 251350 163 351450 193 451500 218
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION + SKIP VALVE HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION + STOP VALVE
Stroke 150 51150 B 109 129 U max 23 39 55 71 87 95
Symbol
Code W170101____
Description Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NO SKIP valve
151250 154 251350 174 351450 204 451500 229
W170201____
Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NO STOP valve
W170102____
Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NC SKIP valve
W170202____
Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NC STOP valve
1-232
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION + SKIP VALVE, IN-LINE TANK HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION + STOP VALVE, IN-LINE TANK
Stroke 150 51150 B 92 112 U max 23 39 55 71 87 95
151250 137 251350 157 351450 187 451500 212
W170201____L Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NO STOP valve, in-line tank W170102____L Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NC SKIP valve, in-line tank W170202____L Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NC STOP valve, in-line tank
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN RETRACTION + SKIP VALVE HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN RETRACTION + STOP VALVE
Stroke 150 51150 B 109 129 U max 23 39 55 71 87 95
Symbol
Code Description W170111____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in retraction + NO SKIP valve
151250 154 251350 174 351450 204 451500 229
W170211____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in retraction + NO STOP valve
W170112____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in retraction + NC SKIP valve
W170212____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in retraction + NC STOP valve
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION + SKIP/STOP VALVES

Symbol
Stroke 150 51150 B 109 129 U max 23 39 55 71 87 95
Code Description W170301____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NO SKIP/STOP valves
151250 154 251350 174 351450 204 451500 229
W170302____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NC SKIP/STOP valves
1-233
BRK HYDRAULIC BRAKE
ACTUATORS
Symbol
Code Description W170101____L Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NO SKIP valve, in-line tank
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION + SKIP/STOP VALVES, IN-LINE TANK
ACTUATORS
Symbol
Stroke 150 51150 B 92 112 U max 23 39 55 71 87 95
Code Description W170301____L Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NO SKIP/STOP valves, in-line tank
151250 137 251350 157 351450 187 451500 212
W170302____L Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension + NC SKIP/STOP valves, in-line tank
BRK HYDRAULIC BRAKE
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN RETRACTION + SKIP/STOP VALVES

Symbol
Stroke 150 51150 B 109 129 U max 23 39 55 71 87 95
Code Description W170311____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in retraction + NO SKIP/STOP valves
151250 154 251350 174 351450 204 451500 229
W170312____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in retraction + NC SKIP/STOP valves
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION/RETRACTION + EXTENSION STOP VALVE

Symbol
Stroke B U max 39 55 71 87 95 100150 118 151250 143 251350 163 351450 193 451500 218
Code Description W170023____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + extension NO STOP valve
W170024____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + extension NC STOP valve
____ = Enter the stroke Note: minimum stroke 100 mm Weight for stroke 0 mm = 1990 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
1-234
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION/RETRACTION + RETRACTION STOP VALVE

Stroke B U max 39 55 71 87 95
100150 118 151250 143 251350 163 351450 193 451500 218
W170026____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + retraction NC STOP valve
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION/RETRACTION + DUAL STOP VALVE

Symbol
Stroke 150 B 118 U max 39 55 71 87 95
151250 143 251350 163 351450 193 451500 218
Code Description W170221____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual NO STOP valve
W170222____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual NC STOP valve
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION/RETRACTION + DUAL SKIP VALVE

Symbol
Stroke 150 51150 B 98 118 U max 23 39 55 71 87 95
Code Description W170121____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual NO SKIP valve
151250 143 251350 163 351450 193 451500 218
W170122____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual NC SKIP valve
____= Enter the stroke Weight for stroke 0 mm = 1850 g Weight each mm = 4.2 g
1-235
BRK HYDRAULIC BRAKE
ACTUATORS
Symbol
Code Description W170025____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + retraction NO STOP valve
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION/RETRACTION + DUAL SKIP VALVE + PISTON ROD EXTENSION STOP VALVE
ACTUATORS
Symbol
Stroke B U max 39 55 71 87 95 100150 118 151250 143 251350 163 351450 193 451500 218
Code Description W170123____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual SKIP valve + piston rod extension NO STOP valve W170124____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual SKIP valve + piston rod extension NC STOP valve
BRK HYDRAULIC BRAKE
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION/RETRACTION + DUAL SKIP VALVE + PISTON ROD RETRACTION STOP VALVE
Symbol
Stroke B U max 39 55 71 87 95 100150 118 151250 143 251350 163 351450 193 451500 218
Code Description W170125____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual SKIP valve + piston rod retraction NO STOP valve W170126____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual SKIP valve + piston rod retraction NC STOP valve
HYDRAULIC BRAKE WITH REGULATION IN EXTENSION/RETRACTION + DUAL SKIP VALVE + DUAL STOP VALVE
Symbol
Stroke 150 B 118 U max 39 55 71 87 95
151250 143 251350 163 351450 193 451500 218
Code Description W170321____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual SKIP valve + dual NO STOP valve W170322____ Hydraulic brake with regulation in extension/retraction + dual SKIP valve + dual NC STOP valve
1-236
KEY TO CODES
W 1 7 0 W170 BRK hydraulic brake 0 1 2 3 0 Regulation Regulation + SKIP Regulation + STOP Regulation + SKIP + STOP 1 0 Extension 1 Retraction 2 Extension and retraction 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 No valve or NO NC + NO STOP in extension + NC STOP in extension + NO STOP in retraction + NC STOP in retraction 0300 STROKE Enter the desired stroke in four digits (e.g. 0500 for stroke 500) L L In-line tank, if present
Only for versions with piston rod regulation in extension In combination with regulation in extension/retraction or regulation + SKIP in extension/retraction
ACCESSORIES
FLANGE FOR MOUNTING WITH ISO 15552 CYLINDER
Code W0950402012 W0950502012 W0950632012 W0950802012 W0951002012
40 50 63 80 100
A 55 65 75 95 112
B 55 55 55 55
C D 38 38 46.5 38 56.5 38 72 38 89 38
E 109 121 131 151 168
F 26.5 32.5 37.5 47.5 56
F1 32.5 37.5 47.5 56
G H 55 35 61 40 66 45 76 45 84.5 55
H1 32 32 32 32 32
I 27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5
L 7 7 7 7 7
M 7 9 9 11 11
N 12 12 15 15 15
Weight [g] 418 540 792 1216 1535
Note: 1 pc. per pack complete with 4+4 screws
FLANGE SCREW KIT

Code W0950402111 W0950502111 W0950632111 W0950802111 Description Kit BRK-P/C-040 Kit BRK-P/C-050 Kit BRK-P/C-063 Kit BRK-P/C-080-100 Weight [g] 58 93 97 151
Note: code corresponds to 4 + 4 screws
1-237
ACCESSORIES FOR BRK HYDRAULIC BRAKE
ACTUATORS
INTEGRATED HYDRAULIC BRAKE
ACTUATORS
The integrated hydraulic brake is comprised of a pneumatic cylinder that acts as an actuator and an oleo-dynamic circuit that acts as a brake. The dimensions of the pneumatic cylinder (bore 63) comply with ISO 15552. The hydraulic circuit is comprised of a brake fluid tank and one or two flo regulation pins. It can mount one or more (slow-fast) SKIP or STOP valves that are normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC), for the piston rod extension and retraction. The basic feature of this device is that the driving force and the braking force are coaxial, so they do not generate undesired bending moments on the piston rod and the external structures connected to it. Due to its conception, this brake is particularly compact and has reduced dimensions compared to BRK external hydraulic brakes. After a certain operating time, the brake fluid tank must be topped up with oil. This needs doing when the oil level reaches the minimum mark on the rod. With the piston rod right out, the minimum level mark must not project less than 8-10 mm from the cap. Always use Comlube DEXRON ATF hydraulic oil or another compatible product. During the first operating cycles, excess oil is expelled through a hole in the tank. TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar MPa psi bar MPa psi C F NBR-POLYURETHANE 1 to 8 0.1 to 0.8 14.5 to 116 3 to 8 0.3 to 0.8 43.5 to 116 -10 to +70 14 to 156 Lubricated or unlubricated filtered ai . DEXRON ATF (Comlube) the list of compatible oils is available on the web site www.metalwork.it mm 63 N 1.725 N 1.150
NC valve actuation pressure
Operating temperature range Pneumatic circuit flui Hydraulic circuit flui Bore Thrust force generated at 6 bar Pull force generated at 6 bar Maximum load which can be applied from outside while the rod is lock N Version without valves and with closed pins: Thrust Load on the rod Traction Load on the rod Version with STOP NC valves not operated: Thrust Load on the rod Traction Load on the rod Version with STOP NO valves operated at 6 bar: Thrust Load on the rod Traction Load on the rod Version with STOP NO valves operated at 8 bar: Thrust Load on the rod Traction Load on the rod Speeds at 6 bar and 20C: with regulation pin with pin and NO STOP valve with pin and NC STOP valve with pin and NO SKIP valve with pin and NC SKIP valve with pin and NO STOP+SKIP valves with pin and NC STOP+SKIP valves without pin nor regulation (fast retraction) Standard strokes
6.000 5.000 6.000 5.000 6.000 5.000 6.000 5.000 mm/min 30 to 7.000 30 to 4.500 30 to 4.500 30 to 5.000 30 to 5.000 30 to 4.000 30 to 4.000 30.000 (Speeds measured on the brake with 500 mm stroke and using 10 mm pipes) mm 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 Other special strokes up to 500 available on request, but the dimensions of the brake are the same of the immediately higher stroke ones, and the front damping has no action. Piston-out, piston-in and dual regulation The following combinations of valves can be mounted on each regulated section: STOP NO, STOP NC, SKIP NO, SKIP NC, DOPPIO STOP NO, DOPPIO STOP NC, DOPPIO SKIP NO, DOPPIO SKIP NC, STOP NO+STOP NC, SKIP NO+SKIP NC, STOP NO+SKIP NO, STOP NC+SKIP NC, STOP NO+SKIP NC, STOP NC+SKIP NO All versions are provided with a magnet
Valve combinations
Sensor magnet
1-238
COMPONENTS OIL
a b c d e f g h i
GUIDE HOLD: galvanised steel O-RING: NBR PISTON ROD: thickly chromed steel PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert INSIDE PISTON: brass GUIDE RING: PTFE HEAD: anodized aluminium CUSHIONING GASKET: NBR
j JACKET: anodised and calibrated aluminium section k INTERNAL PIPE: brass l INTERMEDIATE PIPE: steel m PISTON: aluminium n PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane o MAGNET: plastoferrite p PISTON GASKET: NBR q PISTON ROD GASKET: polyurethane r SECURING/ASSEMBLY SCREW: self-tapping
s t 21 u 22 u
23 u u 24 25 u 26 u 27 u 28 u
BUSH: nickel-plated brass CHECK VALVE OIL FILLING VALVE REGULATION UNIT: anodised aluminium REGULATION PIN OIL RECOVERY TANK OIL LEVEL ROD: galvanised steel NC VALVE NO VALVE CUSHIONING PIN
1-239
ACTUATORS
SKIP-STOP APPLICATION WITH VALVES
ACTUATORS
NO
FROM CYLINDER TO TANK
NC
FROM CYLINDER TO TANK
STOP
SKIP Air inlet
Air inlet STOP SKIP
Air inlet
In normally-open (NO) valves, flow moves freely from A to D. When po t C is supplied, this operates the SKIP valve and the fluid is forced through the bottleneck generated by the adjusting pin. When port B is supplied, this operates the STOP valve and interrupts the flow of fluid In normally-closed NC valves, flow is no mally inhibited. When port B is supplied, the fluid flows through but it is forced through the bottlenec generated by the adjusting pin. When port C is supplied, flow moves freely from A to D. OVERALL DIMENSIONS OF THE VARIOUS VERSIONS
Stroke 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 B 106 131 131 131 171 171 216 216 301 301 U max 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 A 50 50 82 D 40 40 72
Type Regulation only 1 valve per side 2 valve per side
a Slots for slim sensor (only on the utility ports side)
KEY TO CODES
W 1 7 3 INTEGRATED BRAKE W173 Integrated brake 2 REGULATION 0 Out 1 In 2 Dual 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 PISTON ROD EXTENSION CONTROL VALVES Without valves NO Stop NC Stop NO Skip NC Skip NO Stop NO Skip NO Stop NC Skip NC Stop NO Skip NC Stop NC Skip 1 PISTON ROD RETRACTION CONTROL VALVES 0 Without valves 1 NO Stop 2 NC Stop 3 NO Skip 4 NC Skip 5 NO Stop NO Skip 6 NO Stop NC Skip 7 NC Stop NO Skip 8 NC Stop NC Skip 0 BORE 0 D63 0 5 0 0 STROKE Specify the desired stroke in 4 digits (e.g. 0500 for stroke 500)
N.B. With at least one extension control valve and one retraction control valve, type W1732_ _ _ is required.
1-240
ACCESSORIES
FOOT - MODEL A
+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950632001 63 AB AH 9 50 AO 47 AT 6 AU 32 TR 50 UH 75 H1 H2 Weight [g] 190 185 266
Note: Individually packed with 2 screws. N.B.: M8x40 UNI 5931 screws are required for fixing the rear head (see kit 0950636092)

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950632003 63 B 70 D 40 E 32 G H3 R 16 190 17 S 12 Weight [g] 394
Note: Supplied with 4 screws, 4 washers, 2 snap rings and 1 pin. N.B.: M8x40 UNI 5931 screws are required for fixing the rear head (see kit 0950636092)

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950632004 63 D 40 E 32 F 17 G H 16 12 H3 Weight [g] 190 316
Note: Supplied with 4 screws, 4 washers. N.B.: M8x40 UNI 5931 screws are required for fixing the rear head (see kit 0950636092)

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950632006 cil. E 63 32 F 24 H 12 H3 M 190 16 N 21 Weight [g] 336
Note: Supplied with 4 screws, 4 washers. N.B.: M8x40 UNI 5931 screws are required for fixing the rear head (see kit 0950636092)
1-241
ACCESSORIES FOR INTEGRATED HYDRAULIC BRAKE
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Code W0950632008
63
A 40
B 33
C 11
D 16
E 40
F 50
G 63
H 75
I 63
L 32
M 12
N Weight [g] 15 440
ISO HINGE FOR MODEL B - MODEL GS

Code W0950632108 63 B C D 39.5 56.5 75 E 9 G 50 J 17 L 12 M 16 N 15 Weight [g] 350

Code W0950632002 63 A1 A B 100 120 75 S 12 B1 50 D4 W 9 25 Weight [g] 670

+ = ADD THE STROKE Code W0950632002 63 A1 A B 100 120 75 S 12 B1 50 D4 L Weight [g] 9 170 670
Note: Supplied with 4 screws. N.B.: M8x40 UNI 5931 screws are required for fixing the rear head (see kit 0950636092)
1-242
ROD NUT - MODEL S
Note: Individually packed.
FORK MODEL GK-M

Code W0950502020 63 M C 16 32 B 16 A 32 L 83 F 64 D M16x1.5 N 40 Weight [g] 340

Code W0950502025 63 M C B1 B A 16 22 15 21 42 L F 85 64 D G CH M16x1.5 22 22 G1 Weight [g] 22 226

Code W0950502030 63 A B C D F M16x1.5 32 32 103 32 E 4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 Weight [g] 20 41 41 30 24 620
TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA
1-243
ACTUATORS
Code 0950502010
63
F M16x1.5
H 8
CH 24
Weight [g] 20
KIT OF REAR HEAD SCREWS
ACTUATORS
Code 0950636092
Description Kit of M8x40 UNI 5931 rear head fixing screw
Note: 4 items per pack.
CYLINDER BRACKET - VALVE SERIES KCV
Code 0950632090
63
A 81.5
B 40
C 42
D 110
ISO 1 E 77
D 1124
ISO 1 E 83
Applicable valves MACH 16 Series 70 1/8-1/4 ISO 1 - ISO 2
Weight [g] 101
KIT FOR FIXING VALVES TO BRACKETS

Code 0950002003 0950002004 0950002001 0950002002 Valve KIT MACH 16 Series 70 1/8-1/4 ISO 1 ISO 2 Composition 2 HEX. screws M3x25 with washer 2 HEX. screws M4x50 with washer Adaptor + ISO1 base side + screws + washers Adaptor + ISO2 base side + screws + washers Weight [g] 4 8 230 350
VALVE ASSEMBLY ON HYDRAULIC BRAKE
1-244

SENSOR
Code W0950000201 W0950000222 W0950000232 Description Sensor REED DSM2-C525 HS Sensor E. HALL PNP DSM3-N225 Sensor E. HALL NPN DSM3-M225
For technical data see page 1-286
SENSOR BRACKETS
Code W0950000712 Description Bracket D.50-63 DST 81
SLIM SENSOR
Code Description W0952025390 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952029394 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952022180 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m W0952028184 REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 W0952125556 HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX W0952025500* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952029504* HALL N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 W0952022500* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m W0952128184* REED N.O. sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 * For use when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses. For technical data see page 1-288
NOTES
1-245
ACTUATORS
TECHNICAL DATA NOTES TECHNICAL DATA
ACTUATORS
TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA TECHNICAL DATA
1-246
SUMMARY ELECTRIC CYLINDER
P ELECTRIC CYLINDER SERIES ELEKTRO ISO 15552
PAG. 1-248
P ELECTRIC MOTORS
PAG. 1-261
P DRIVES FOR MOTORS
PAG. 1-272
P CALCULATIONS FOR CHOOSING AN ELECTRIC CYLINDER
PAG. 1-279
1-247
SUMMARY ELECTRIC CYLINDER
ACTUATORS
ELECTRIC CYLINDER SERIES ELEKTRO ISO 15552
ACTUATORS
An electric cylinder with a connection interface in accordance with ISO 15552. The piston rod extension is controlled by a system with a hardened screw and recirculating ball screw. The piston has a guide strip calibrated to reduce to a minimum play with the barrel and hence vibration during ball screw rotation. The cylinder can be equipped with a built-in non-rotating system featuring two opposing slides that run in separate longitudinal slots in the barrel. The piston comes with magnets and the barrel has longitudinal slots for housing sensors. The piston rod has increased outside diameter and thickness to make it extra rigid and more resistant to radial and peak loads. A system for greasing the screws is included. Numerous standard accessories for pneumatic cylinders, including intermediate hinge, can be used for mounting the cylinder. The motor can be selected from an optimised range, which encompasses both STEPPING and BRUSHLESS motors. There is a version for in-line assembly, where the drive shaft is jointed directly onto the screw. There is also a geared motor version, where transmission is provided by pulleys and a cog belt with a transmission ratio of 1:1. Suitable motor drives are provided. Special adaptor flanges and joints can be provided if the customer wishes to use a particular make of motor. TECHNICAL DATA
Piston rod thread Environmental temperature range for STEPPING motors BRUSHLESS motors Electrical protection rating with STEPPING motors BRUSHLESS motors Maximum relative humidity of the air for IP55 STEPPING motor IP65 BRUSHLESS motor Minimum stroke for version with non-rotating Minimum stroke for version without non-rotating Maximum stroke Overall radial oscillation of the piston rod (without load) for 100 mm of stroke Versions Uncontrolled impact at the end of stroke Sensor magnet Maximum angle of twist of the piston rod for non-rotating version Work position C C 32 M10x1.25 50
in-line version
geared version
63
mm mm mm
M16x1.5 M16x1.5 from -10 to +50 from 0 to +40 IP40 or IP55 (see key to codes on page 1-257) IP40 or IP65 (see key to codes on page 1-257) 90% at 40C; 57% at 50C (no condensate) 90% (no condensate) Twice the screw pitch (to guarantee ball lubrication) 80 1500 0.4 With or without piston rod non-rotating NOT ALLOWED (it provides an extra-stroke minimum 5 mm) YES 130 1 045 Any
MECHANICAL FEATURES
Worm screw pitch (p) Worm screw diameter Static axial load (Fo) Dynamic axial load (F) Maximum number of revs Maximum speed (Vmax) mm mm N N 1/min mm/s 4 12
32 12 12 5 16
50
63
10 16 5 10 20 16 16 20 20 20 3200 4000 6500 5200 5600 10500 6670 4330 10010 12800 4880 Calculate mean axial load and the calculate life (see graphs on pages 1-251 and 1-252) 4000 3000 2500 267 800 250 500 800 208 417 833
WEIGHTS
Worm screw pitch (p) Weight at stroke 0 Additional weight per mm of stroke Moving mass at stroke 0 (non-rotating version) Additional moving mass per mm of stroke mm g g g g 4 896 3.98 270
32 12 973 3.96 353 1.25 5 1990 6.64 586
50 10 2043 6.62 629 1.84 16 2086 6.55 703 5 2942 6.25 956
63 10 3209 6.32 1215 1.98 20 3056 6.32 1067
1-248
MASS MOMENTS OF INERTIA

Worm screw pitch J0 at stroke 0 J1 per metre of stroke J2 per kg of load mm kgmm2 kgmm2/m kgmm2/kg 4 1.2407 12.2592 0.4053
32 12 2.4309 17.8468 4.0858 5 5.3455 35.2305 0.6333
50 10 6.1360 38.5264 2.5332 16 9.1113 49.1936 6.4849 5 12.4043 86.2990 0.6333
63
CALCULATION OF MEAN AXIAL LOAD Fm AND VERIFICATION Peak axial load in a work cycle must not exceed the static axial load Fo. The peak value is usually achieved during upward acceleration in vertical installation. Exceeding this value leads to greater wear and hence shorter life of the recirculating ball screw. Mean axial load Fm Fm = 3
SF
VX Vm x
q 100
= VX2 Vm q2 100 VX3 Vm q3 100
Fx1 Fx3 Fx [N] + ... Fx2
Fo Fm
Fm = 3
Fx13 x
VX1 Vm
q1 100
+ Fx23 x
+ Fx33 x
Fx = Axial load at stage x Fm = Mean axial load during extension Fo = Static axial load q = Time segment Vx = Speed in the phase x Vm = Average speed The mean axial load must not exceed the dynamic axial load: Fm F The graphs on pages 1-251 and 1-252 show screw life as a function of Fm BARREL CROSS SECTION
q1
q2 q [100%]
q3
a Slots for sensors b Slots for anti-rotation

1-249
Total mass moment o inertia Jtot = J0 + J1 . stroke [m] + J2 . load [kg]
ACTUATORS
10 14.8767 96.6652 2.5332
20 23.5427 116.3671 10.1327
COMPONENTS
ACTUATORS
a b c d e f g h i j k l m n
FRONT CYLINDER HEAD: anodised aluminium BARREL: extruded and anodised aluminium alloy PISTON ROD: ground chrome steel WORM SCREW: hardened steel BALL SCREW: steel REAR CYLINDER HEAD: anodised aluminium WIPER RING: polyurethane PISTON ROD GASKET: NBR (IP55/ IP65 version only) GUIDE BUSHING: steel strip with bronze and PTFE insert BUFFER: technopolymer MAGNET: plastoferrite GUIDE STRIP: self-lubricated calibrated technopolymer PISTON: alumunium BEARING: oblique with two ball rings
CRITICAL VELOCITY PEAK LOADS The two variables (stroke and motor revs) must meet the conditions in the graph below, otherwise resonance could be generated and affect the system.
Motor revs [1/min]
With vertical installations, the following load conditions applied to the piston rod must be met.
Axial load [N]
Stroke [mm]
Stroke [mm]
MAXIMUM RADIAL LOADS ON PISTON ROD

Radial loads [N]
PISTON ROD SPEED AS A FUNCTION OF rpm

rpm [1/min]
Stroke [mm] screw pitch 4 screw pitch 5 screw pitch 0
Speed [mm/s] screw pitch 12 screw pitch 16 screw pitch 20
Radial loads can be applied to the piston rod. They must not exceed the values in the table above, otherwise the guides on the piston rod and piston will be subjected to excessive wear.
1-250
The graph shows the direct correspondence between the number of turns (1/min) and the translation speed of the stem (mm/s). In any case all the other conditions and limitations of each specific cylinder will have to be complied.
DRIVE TORQUE AS A FUNCTION OF THE AXIAL LOAD APPLIED TO THE PISTON ROD
32
Motor torque [Nm]
3 2.5 2 1.5 1 0.5 0 0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400
50
Motor torque [Nm]
4.5 4 3.5 3 2.5 2 1.5 1 0.5 0 0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3200 3600
63
Motor torque [Nm]
5.5 5 4.5 4 3.5 2.5 2 1.5 1 0.5 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 3
Axial load [N] screw pitch 4 screw pitch12.7
Axial load [N] screw pitch 5 screw pitch10 screw pitch16
Axial load [N] screw pitch5 screw pitch10 screw pitch20
LIFE CHARACTERISTICS AS A FUNCTION OF THE MEAN AXIAL LOAD 32

Mean axial load [N]
2200 2000 1800 1600 1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
screw pitch 4 screw pitch 12.7
Cylinder life [km]
50
Mean axial load [N]
2800 2400 2000 1600 1200 800 400 0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
screw pitch 5 screw pitch 10 screw pitch 16
Cylinder life [km]
1-251
ACTUATORS
The friction generated in the mechanical system is taken into account.
ACTUATORS
63
Mean axial load [N]
4500 4000 3500 3000
screw pitch 5 screw pitch 10 screw pitch 20
2500 2000 1500 1000 500 0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
Cylinder life [km]
Life characteristics can vary considerably from those indicated in the graphs due to different operating conditions (radial loads, temperature, lubrication status, etc.). LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS LUBRICATION OF VERSION WITH NON-ROTATING PISTON ROD Retract the piston rod towards the rear head. The piston rod/piston/ ball screw/system must rest against the buffer of the rear head Unscrew the cap on the lubricator port (see note 1 to the drawing on page 1-253) Screw the lubricating pin (see accessory on page 1-259) into the thread. Make sure you enter the corresponding hole in the piston below Pump grease (code 9910506) in 4-5 times using a suitable lubricator Unscrew the lubricating pin and make the piston rod perform four complete strokes. The piston rod should end up in the initial (retracted) position Repeat the last two operations The operation of re-greasing will have to be repeated every 200 km, approximately.
LUBRICATION OF VERSION WITHOUT NON-ROTATING PISTON ROD Extend the piston rod completely. The piston rod/piston/ball screw/ system must rest against the buffer of the front head Unscrew the cap on the lubricator port (see note 1 to the drawing on page 1-253) Screw the lubricating pin (see accessory on page 1-259) into the thread. Make sure you enter the corresponding hole in the piston below. Pump grease (code 9910506) in 4-5 times using a suitable lubricator Unscrew the lubricating pin and make the piston rod perform four complete strokes. The piston rod should end up in the initial (extended) position Repeat the last two operations The operation of re-greasing will have to be repeated every 200 km, approximately.
1-252
DIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONS OF SINGLE CYLINDERS
1 = lubricator port (*) = for 63 only
32 50 63
B (d11) 30 40 45
B1 7 7 9
B2 19.5 28 34.5
BG 14.5 17.5 17.5
C1 16 25 25
CH1 17 21 24
CH2 17 24 26
CH3 6 8 8
D (f7) 20 25 30
D1 (h7) 8 10 12
D2 32 50 63
D4 (h7) 3 3 3
E 46 64.5 75.5
F 22 32 32
G 26 30 32
G1 26 30 32
H 9 9 9
KK M10x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5
L 160 194 210
L0 134 157 173
32 50 63
L1 86.3 100.8 112.3
L2 23 24 34
L3 27 28.4 39.5
MM 19 24 29
N 4.5 5.5 5.5
RT M6 M8 M8
TG 32.5 46.5 56.5
VA 3 5.5 5.5
VD 4.5 5.5 6.5
WH 26 37 37
MOTOR-DRIVE COUPLINGS FOR VARIOUS CYLINDER BORES

DRIVES CODES 37D1332000 (6A from 24 to 75VDC) 32 32 50 50 63
STEPPING MOTOR CODES
37M1110000 37M1120000 37M1120001 37M1430000 37M1440000 37M1450000
37D1221000 (4.4A from 24 to 45VDC) 32 32 -
37D1442000 (6A from 77 to 140VDC) 50 63
DRIVES CODES 37D2200000 (200W) 32 37D2400000 (from 400 to 750W) 32 50 50 63
BRUSHLESS MOTOR CODES
37M2200000 37M2220000 37M2220000 37M2330000 37M2330000
1-253
ACTUATORS
DIMENSIONS OF IN-LINE CYLINDERS
ACTUATORS
Size
Motor type BRUSHLESS
32
STEPPING
50 63
BRUSHLESS STEPPING
Code for cylinder complete with motor 371032_ _ _ _ _ _2200 371032_ _ _ _ _ _2220 371032_ _ _ _ _ _1110 371032_ _ _ _ _ _1120 371032_ _ _ _ _ _1121 371050_ _ _ _ _ _2330 371063_ _ _ _ _ _1450
Code for motor mounted on the cylinder 37M2200000 37M2220000 37M1110000 37M1120000 37M1120001 37M2330000 37M1450000
Motor torque [Nm] 0.64 1.27 0.8 1.2 1.2 2.39 6.7
Coupling flange 60 60 NEMA 23 NEMA 23 NEMA 23 80 NEMA 34
B 60 60 56 56 56 80 85.5
L1 62 62 45 45 45 77.4 63.5
L2 69.5 95.5 53.8 75.8 75.8 107.3 127
L3 15 15 12 12 12 35 16
Size 50
Motor type STEPPING
Code for cylinder complete with motor 371050_ _ _ _ _ _1430 371050_ _ _ _ _ _1440
Code for motor mounted on the cylinder 37M1430000 37M1440000
Motor torque [Nm] 2.4 4.2
Coupling flange NEMA 34 NEMA 34
B 83 83
B1 86 86
L1 61.4 61.4
L2 62 92.2
L3 25 25
Size 50 63
Motor type BRUSHLESS BRUSHLESS
Code for cylinder complete with motor 371050_ _ _ _ _ _2220 371063_ _ _ _ _ _2330
Code for motor mounted on the cylinder 37M2220000 37M2330000
Coupling flange 60 80
B 74.5 94
B1 60 80
L1 61.4 78.5
L2 95.5 107.3
L3 25 25
1-254
DIMENSIONS OF GEARED CYLINDERS
Size
Motor type
STEPPING 32 63 STEPPING
Code for cylinder Code for motor Motor complete with motor mounted on torque the cylinder [Nm] 371032_ _ _ _ _ _1110 37M1110000 0.8 371032_ _ _ _ _ _1120 37M1120000 1.2 371032_ _ _ _ _ _1121 37M1120001 1.2 371063_ _ _ _ _ _1450 37M1450000 6.7
Coupling flange NEMA 23 NEMA 23 NEMA 23 NEMA 34
B B1 (d11) 30 30 30 45 128.5 128.5 128.5 179.5
B2
B3
B4
B5
BG
L1
L2
L3
L4
TG
RT
VA
62 62 62 92
31 67.5 56 31 67.5 56 31 67.5 56 46 87.5 84.5
15 46 15 46 15 46 17 75.5
49 49 49 70
53.8 50 75.8 50 75.8 50 127 72
48 32.5 48 32.5 48 32.5 68 56.5
M6 M6 M6 M8
4 4 4 4
Size
Motor type
50
STEPPING
Code for cylinder Code for motor Motor complete with motor mounted on the torque cylinder [Nm] 371050_ _ _ _ _ _1430 37M1430000 2.4 371050_ _ _ _ _ _1440 37M1440000 4.2
B B1 (d11)
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6 BG
L1
L2
L3
TG
RT
VA
40 159.5 79 39.5 80 40 159.5 79 39.5 80
80 83
86 86
17 64.5 59 62 61 46.5 M8 17 64.5 59 92.2 61 46.5 M8
4 4
Size Motor type
Code for cylinder Code for motor Motor complete with motor mounted on the torque cylinder [Nm] 32 BRUSHLESS 371032_ _ _ _ _ _2200 37M2200000 0.64 371032_ _ _ _ _ _2220 37M2220000 1.27
B B1 (d11)
B2
B3
B4
B5
BG
L1
L2
L3
L4
TG
RT
VA
30 128.5 62 30 128.5 62
31 31
67.5 67.5
60 60
15 15
46 46
49 49
69.5 95.5
50 50
51 51
32.5 M6 32.5 M6
4 4
1-255
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
Size
50 63
Code for cylinder Code for motor Motor complete with motor mounted on the torque cylinder [Nm] BRUSHLESS 371050_ _ _ _ _ _2220 37M2220000 1.27 BRUSHLESS 371063_ _ _ _ _ _2330 37M2330000 2.39
Motor type
B (d11)
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
BG
L1
L2
L3
TG
RT
VA
40 159.5 79 45 179.5 92
39.5 80 46 87.5
60 80
17 17
64.5 75.5
59 95.5 61 70 107.3 72
46.5 56.5
M8 M8
4 4
Size
50
Code for cylinder Code for motor Motor complete with motor mounted on the torque cylinder [Nm] BRUSHLESS 371050_ _ _ _ _ _2330 37M2330000 2.39
Motor type
Coupling flange 80
B B1 (d11)
B2
B3
B4
B5
BG
L1
L2
L3
L4
TG
RT
VA
40 159.5 79 39.5 80
80
17 64.5 59 107.3 61
64 46.5 M8
NOTES
1-256
KEY TO CODES SINGLE CYLINDER

CYL 37 TYPE 37 Electric actuators 1 1 ISO 15552 electric cylinder 0 0 STD 32 BORE 32 50 63 0100 STROKE 1 2 4 5 6 7 1 SCREW PITCH Screw pitch 4 Screw pitch 5 Screw pitch 10 Screw pitch 12 Screw pitch 16 Screw pitch 20 5 VERSION Geared without antirotation IP40 Geared with antirotation IP40 Geared without antirotation IP55/IP65 Geared with antirotation IP55/IP65
5 6 7 8
KEY TO CODES - ELECTRIC CYLINDER WITH MOTOR

CYL 37 TYPE 37 Electric actuators 1 1 0 32 BORE 32 50 63 0100 STROKE 1 2 4 5 6 7 1 SCREW PITCH Screw pitch 4 Screw pitch 5 Screw pitch 10 Screw pitch 12 Screw pitch 16 Screw pitch 20 1 VERSION 1 In-line without antirotation IP40 2 In-line with antirotation IP40 3 In-line without antirotation IP55/IP65 4 In-line with antirotation IP55/IP65 5 Geared without antirotation IP40 6 Geared with antirotation IP40 7 Geared without antirotation IP55/IP65 8 Geared with antirotation IP55/IP65 1 1 DRIVE 1 STEPPING motor 2 BRUSHLESS motor 1 NEMA flange 23 2 Flange 60 3 Flange 80 4 NEMA flange 34 0 Torque 0.64 Nm 1 Torque 0.8 Nm 2 Torque 1.2 to 1.3 Nm 3 Torque 2.2 to 2.4 Nm 4 Torque 4.2 Nm 5 Torque 6.7 Nm 0 Base 1 Greater rpm 1 0
ISO 15552 electric cylinder
0 STD
version available for all STEPPING and BRUSHLESS motors, all sizes. version IP55 available for STEPPING motors, for only the sizes 50 and 63 all the motors. For 32 only for motor code 37M1120001; version IP65 available for BRUSHLESS motors, all sizes.
1-257
ACTUATORS
ACCESSORIES FOR ELECTRIC CYLINDER SERIES ELEKTRO ISO 15552: FIXINGS
FOOT - MODEL A
ACTUATORS
+ = ADD THE STROKE
Code W0950322001 W0950502001 W0950632001
32 50 63
AB 7 9 9
AH 32 45 50
AO 11 15 15
AT 4 4 6
AU 24 32 32
TR 32 45 50
E 45 45 75
XA 234 287 314
SA 232 282 309
Weight [g] 76 162 266

+ = ADD THE STROKE
Code W0950322003 W0950502003 W0950632003
32 50 63
UB 45 60 70
CB 26 32 40
FL 22 27 32
CD 10 12 16
XD 232 282 314
MR 10 12 16
L 12 15 20
Weight [g] 116 252 394
Note: Supplied with 4 screws, 4 washers, 2 snap-rings, 1 pin

+ = ADD THE STROKE
Code W0950322004 W0950502004 W0950632004
32 50 63
EW 26 32 40
FL 22 27 32
MR 11 13 17
CD 10 12 16
L 12 15 20
XD 232 282 314
Weight [g] 94 220 316

+ = ADD THE STROKE
Code W0950322006 W0950502006 W0950632006
32 50 63
DL 22 27 32
MS 16 19 24
L 12 15 20
XN 232 282 314
CX 10 12 16
EX 14 16 21
Weight [g] 106 236 336
INTERMEDIATE HINGE - MODEL EN

+ = ADD THE STROKE
Code 0950322107 0950502107 0950632107
32 50 63
X (min) 63 83 88
IN LINE 123 148 163
X (max) GEARED * * *
TM 50 75 90
TL 12 16 20
TD e 9 12 16 20
TK 22 28 36
UW 65 95 105
Weight [g] 170 580 950
* Depending on motor length Note: Supplied with 8 grub screws, 2 pins
1-258
GREASING NEEDLE

1 = GREASE NIPPLE B M8x1 UNI 7662 GALVANIZED
GREASE
Code 9910506 Description Grease pipe RHEOLUBE 363 AX1 Weight [g] 400

Code W0950322008 W0950502008 W0950632008 See page 1-37 32 50 63
ISO HINGE FOR MODEL B - MODEL GS

Code W0950322108 W0950502108 W0950632108 See page 1-38 32 50 63
ISO 15552 HINGE FOR MODEL B MODEL AB7
Code W0950322017 W0950502017 W0950632017 See page 1-38
32 50 63

Code W0950322002 W0950502002 W0950632002 See page 1-38 32 50 63
ROD NUT - MODEL S

Code 0950322010 0950502010 0950502010 See page 1-38 32 50 63
FORK MODEL GK-M

Code W0950322020 W0950502020 W0950502020 See page 1-39 32 50 63

Code W0950322025 W0950502025 W0950502025 See page 1-39 32 50 63
SELF ALIGNING ROD COUPLER MODEL GA-K
Code W0950322030 W0950502030 W0950502030 See page 1-39
32 50 63
COUNTER-HINGE FOR MODEL EN MODEL EL
Code W0950322009 W0950402009 W0950632009 See page 1-40
32 50 63
1-259
ACTUATORS
Code 0950327108 0950507108 0950637108
32 50 63
X 12 19.3 23.6
GUIDE UNIT
ACTUATORS
Version Sliding on bronze bushings (GDH)
Code W0700322... W0700502... W0700632...
Bore 32 50 63
Note: The guide units must only be used with anti-rotation cylinders.
For technical data and dimensions see page 1-42
Sliding on ball bearing (GDM)
W0700323... W0700503... W0700633...
32 50 63
Note: The guide units must only be used with anti-rotation cylinders. For technical data and dimensions see page 1-42

Code W0952025390 W0952029394 W0952022180 W0952028184 W0952125556 W0952025500* W0952029504* W0952022500* W0952128184* Description HALL NO sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m HALL NO sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 REED NO sensor, vertical insertion 2.5 m REED NO sensor, vertical insertion 300 mm M8 HALL NO sensor, vertical insertion 2 m ATEX HALL NO sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m HALL NO sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8 REED NO sensor, vertical insertion HS 2.5 m REED NO sensor, vertical insertion HS 300 mm M8
1-260
ELECTRIC MOTORS
TORQUE CURVES / TECHNICAL FEATURES OF ELECTRIC STEPPING MOTORS

STEPPING motor code 37M1110000 + drive code 37D1221000 (24VDC)
Motor torque [Nm]
0.90 0.80 0.70 0.60 0.50 0.40 0.30 0.20 0.10 0 0 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100
MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS Motor code Motor type Seal torque (with motor stopped) Coupling flang Base step angle Bipolar current Resistance Inductance Bipolar retaining torque Rotor inertia Theoretical acceleration Back E.M.F. Mass Degree of protection 24VDC drive code
Nm
A mH Nm kgmm2 rad . s-2 V/krpm kg
37M1110000 STEPPING 0.8 NEMA 23 1.80.09 4 0.41 1.6 1.1 21 50000 20 0.65 IP40 37D1221000
Motor revs. [1/min] 37M1110000 + 37D1221000 (24VDC)
STEPPING motor code 37M1120000 + drive code 37D1221000 (24VDC); STEPPING motor code 37M1120000 + drive code 37D1332000 (from 48 to 75VDC)
Motor torque [Nm]
1.40 1.20 1.00 0.80 0.60 0.40 0.20 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
Motor revs. [1/min]

37M1120000 + 37D1221000 (24VDC) 37M1120000 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1120000 + 37D1332000 (75VDC)
MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS Motor code Motor type Seal torque (with motor stopped) Coupling flang Base step angle Bipolar current Resistance Inductance Bipolar retaining torque Rotor inertia Theoretical acceleration Back E.M.F. Mass Degree of protection 24VDC drive code from 48 to 75VDC drive code
Nm
37M1120000 STEPPING 1.2 NEMA 23 1.80.09 4 0.48 2.2 1.65 36 45800 31 1 IP40 37D1221000 37D1332000
1-261
ELECTRIC MOTORS
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
STEPPING motor code 37M1120001 + drive code 37D1332000 (24-48-75VDC)

Motor torque [Nm]
1.40 1.20 1.00 0.80
0.60 0.40 0.20 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000
MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS Motor code Motor type Seal torque (with motor stopped) Coupling flang Base step angle Bipolar current Resistance Inductance Bipolar retaining torque Rotor inertia Theoretical acceleration Back E.M.F. Mass Degree of protection from 24 to 75VDC drive code
Nm
ELECTRIC MOTORS
37M1120001 STEPPING 1.2 NEMA 23 1.80.09 5.6 0.3 0.85 1.65 36 45800 23 1 IP43 37D1332000
Motor revs. [1/min]

STEPPING motor code 37M1430000 + drive code 37D1332000 (from 48 to 75VDC)

Motor torque [Nm]
2.50
2.00
1.50
1.00
0.50
0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS Motor code Motor type Seal torque (with motor stopped) Coupling flang Base step angle Bipolar current Resistance Inductance Bipolar retaining torque Rotor inertia Theoretical acceleration Back E.M.F. Mass Degree of protection from 48 to 75VDC drive code
Nm
37M1430000 STEPPING 2.4 NEMA 34 1.80.09 6 0.3 1.65 3 145 20600 50 1.5 IP43 37D1332000
Motor revs. [1/min]

37M1430000 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1430000 + 37D1332000 (75VDC)
STEPPING motor code 37M1440000 + drive code 37D1332000 (from 48 to 75VDC); STEPPING motor code 37M1440000 + drive code 37D1442000 (140VDC)
Motor torque [Nm]
4.50 4.00 3.50 3.00 2.50 2.00 1.50 1.00 0.50 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
Motor revs. [1/min]

MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS Motor code Motor type Seal torque (with motor stopped) Coupling flang Base step angle Bipolar current Resistance Inductance Bipolar retaining torque Rotor inertia Theoretical acceleration Back E.M.F. Mass Degree of protection from 48 to 75VDC drive code 140VDC drive code
Nm
37M1440000 STEPPING 4.2 NEMA 34 1.80.09 6 0.35 2.7 5.6 290 19300 93 2.5 IP43 37D1332000 37D1442000
1-262
STEPPING motor code 37M1450000 + drive code 37D1332000 (from 48 to 75VDC); STEPPING motor code 37M1450000 + drive code 37D1442000 (140VDC)
Motor torque [Nm]
6.50 6.00 5.00 4.00 3.00 2.00 1.00 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
Motor revs. [1/min]

MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS Motor code Motor type Seal torque (with motor stopped) Coupling flang Base step angle Bipolar current Resistance Inductance Bipolar retaining torque Rotor inertia Theoretical acceleration Back E.M.F. Mass Certification Tension disolement Degree of protection from 24 to 75VDC drive code 140VDC drive code
Nm
OVERLOAD CURVES FOR ELECTRIC BRUSHLESS MOTORS The torque used can exceed the nominal torque within the time limits shown in the diagram. Never exceed the maximum torque.
Time (s)
10000
1000
Tempo (s)
100
10
1 0
0.5
Rapporto nominal torque ratio Torque /coppia / coppia nominale
1.5
2.5
3.5 4
4.5
TORQUE CURVES / TECHNICAL FEATURES OF ELECTRIC BRUSHLESS MOTORS The following diagrams show the torque delivered by the motor with changing speed (rpm). Each diagram shows two separate curves: NOMINAL TORQUE curve: the nominal torque delivered by the motor with a duty cycle of 100% MAXIMUM TORQUE curve: the torque delivered by the motor with a duty cycle of less than 100%
BRUSHLESS motor code 37M2200000 + drive code 37D2200000 (200W)
Motor torque [Nm]
2.50
2.00
1.50
1.00
0.50
0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000
Motor revs. [1/min]

Nominal torque 37M2200000 + 37D2200000 (200W) Max torque 37M2200000 + 37D2200000 (200W)
MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS Motor code Motor type Nominal torque Coupling flange (square Nominal power Nominal speed Maximum speed Stall torque Maximum torque Inertia Encoder Mass Degree of protection Drive code Motor-drive connecting cable code 3 metres series R (fixed Motor-drive encoder cable code 3 metres series R (fixed Motor-drive connecting cable code 5 metres series R (fixed Motor-drive encoder cable code 5 metres series R (fixed
Nm mm W rpm rpm Nm Nm kgmm2 pulse/rev kg
37M2200000 BRUSHLESS 0.64 60 200 3000 6000 0.686 2.2 21.9 131072 (17 bit) 0.84 IP65 37D2200000 37C2130000 37C2230000 37C2150000 37C2250000
1-263
ELECTRIC MOTORS
37M1450000 STEPPING 6.7 NEMA 34 1.80.09 6 0.46 3.8 9.2 450 20500 161 4 UL, CSA, CE, RoHS 250VAC (350VDC) IP43 - F 37D1332000 37D1442000
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS

Motor torque [Nm]
5.00 4.50 4.00 3.50 3.00
ELECTRIC MOTORS
2.50 2.00 1.50 1.00 0.50 0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000
Motor revs. [1/min]

nominal torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W) max torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W)
37M2220000 BRUSHLESS 1.27 60 400 3000 6000 1.37 4.8 41.2 131072 (17 bit) 1.3 IP65 37D2400000 37C2130000 37C2230000 37C2150000 37C2150000
BRUSHLESS motor cod. 37M2330000 + drive code 37D2400000 (750W)

Motor torque [Nm]
8.00 7.00 6.00 5.00 4.00 3.00 2.00 1.00 0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000
Motor revs. [1/min]

37M2330000 BRUSHLESS 2.39 80 750 3000 6000 2.55 7.1 182 131072 (17 bit) 1.3 IP65 37D2400000 37C2130000 37C2230000 37C2150000 37C2250000
NOTES
1-264
AXIAL LOAD CURVES AS A FUNCTION OF SPEED (CYLINDER COMPELTE WITH MOTOR AND DRIVE)
N.B.: The load values already take into account the efficiency of the system. 32 with pitch 4 screw, STEPPING motors
Axial load [N]
1600 1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300
37M1110000 + 37D1221000 (24VDC) 37M1120000 + 37D1221000 (24VDC) 37M1120000 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1120000 + 37D1332000 (75VDC) 37M1120001 + 37D1332000 (24VDC) 37M1120001 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1120001 + 37D1332000 (75VDC)
Speed [mm/s]
32 with pitch 12 screw, STEPPING motors

Axial load [N]
550 500 450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0 0 200 400 600 800 1000
Speed [mm/s]

Axial load [N]
4500 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 0 0 50 100 150 200 250
37M1430000 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1430000 + 37D1332000 (75VDC) 37M1440000 + 37D1332000 (48VDC) 37M1440000 + 37D1332000 (75VDC) 37M1440000 + 37D1442000 (140VDC)
Speed [mm/s]
1-265
ELECTRIC MOTORS
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS

Axial load [N]
2500
2000
ELECTRIC MOTORS
1500
1000
500
0 0 100 200 300 400 500
Speed [mm/s]

Axial load [N]
1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
Speed [mm/s]

Axial load [N]
7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 0 0 50 100 150 200 250
Speed [mm/s]
1-266

Axial load [N]
3500 3000 2500
1500 1000 500 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450
Speed [mm/s]

Axial load [N]
1800 1600 1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
Speed [mm/s]
32 with pitch 4 screw, BRUSHLESS motors

Axial load [N]
7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300
nominal torque 37M2200000 + 37D2200000 (200W) nominal torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W) max torque 37M2200000 + 37D2200000 (200W) max torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W)
Speed [mm/s]
1-267
ELECTRIC MOTORS
2000
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS

Axial load [N]
2200 2000 1800 1600 1400
ELECTRIC MOTORS
1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
Speed [mm/s]

Axial load [N]
7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300
Speed [mm/s]

Axial load [N]
4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Speed [mm/s]
1-268
Axial load [N]

2500
2000
1500
1000
500
0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
Speed [mm/s]

Axial load [N]
7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 0 0 50 100 150 200 250
Speed [mm/s]

Axial load [N]
4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450
Speed [mm/s]
1-269
ELECTRIC MOTORS
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS

Axial load [N]
2000
1600
1200
ELECTRIC MOTORS
800
400
0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
Speed [mm/s]
DIMENSIONS OF ELECTRIC MOTORS

WIRING DIAGRAM
A 1 ORANGE
2
BLUE YELLOW RED
3 B
Motor type STEPPING
Motor code 37M1110000 37M1120000 37M1120001
Motor torque [Nm] 0.8 1.2 1.2
Coupling flange NEMA 23 NEMA 23 NEMA 23
d D 0/-0.013 0.025 6.35 38.1 6.35 38.1 6.35 38.1
H 7 7 10
L min 305 305 305
L1 0.8 53.8 75.8 75.8
L2 0.5 20.6 20.6 20.6
L3 L4 RT W 0.25 0.25 +0.5/0 0.5 5 1.5 4.5 56 5 1.5 4.5 56 5 1.5 4.5 56
W1 0.13 47.14 47.14 47.14
W3 max 26 26 39
W4 0.5 39 39 39
WIRING DIAGRAM
A 1 ORANGE
2
BLUE YELLOW RED
3 B
Motor type STEPPING
Motor code 37M1430000 37M1440000
d D 0/-0.018 0.025 9.525 73.025 12 73.025
H 10 10
L min 305 305
L1 62 92.2
L2 0.5 30 30
L3 L4 RT W 0.50 0.25 +0.5/0 0.5 4.8 1.5 5.4 82.5 4.8 1.5 5.4 82.5
W1 0.2 69.6 69.6
W3 37 37
W4 0.5 85.8 85.8
1-270
WIRING DIAGRAM
A 1 ORANGE
2
BLUE YELLOW RED
Motor type STEPPING
Motor code 37M1450000
Motor torque [Nm] 6.7
Coupling flange NEMA 34
d D 0/-0.018 0.025 14 73.025
H max 12
L min 305
L1 1 127
L2 0.5 30
L3 L4 0.50 0.25 8 1.5
L5 50
RT +0.2 5.6
W W1 0.5 0.25 85.5 69.6
W3 max 27
1 = screened encoder cable length 280 mm 2 = motor cable length 280 mm Motor type BRUSHLESS Motor code 37M2200000 37M2220000 37M2330000 Motor torque [Nm] 0.64 1.27 2.39 Coupling flange 60 60 80 d 0/-0.011 14 14 16 D h7 50 50 70 L 44.6 44.6 54.4 L1 1 69.5 95.5 107.3 L2 1 30 30 40 L3 6 6 8 L4 3 3 3 L5 55 55 55 L6 58 58 58 RT 5.5 5.5 6.6 W 60 60 80 W1 49.5 49.5 63.6
TABLE OF METAL WORK CODES AND SANYO DENKI MOTORS

Metal Work code 37M1110000 37M1120000 37M1120001 37M1430000 37M1440000 37M1450000 37M2200000 37M2220000 37M2330000 Description STEPPING motor 103-H7123-1749 STEPPING motor 103-H7126-1740 STEPPING motor 103-H7126-6640 STEPPING motor 103-H8221-6241 STEPPING motor 03-H8222-6340 STEPPING motor SM-2863-5255 BRUSHLESS motor R2AA06020F BRUSHLESS motor R2AA06040F BRUSHLESS motor R2AA08075F
1-271
ELECTRIC MOTORS
ACTUATORS
DRIVES FOR STEPPING MOTORS
4.4A 45V DC DRIVE FOR STEPPING MOTORS, CODE 37D1221000
ACTUATORS
The 37D1221000 is a ministep bipolar chopper drive made by RTA Srl. It comes with a STEP & DIRECTION interface for piloting medium-low power two-stage STEPPING motors with four, six or eight terminals. It has a supply voltage range of 45V DC. It comprises an open frame board and comes with separate logic and power screw connectors. It can control STEPPING motors with a nominal current up to 4.4A, the perfect choice for medium-low power applications using small motors.
DRIVE TECHNICAL DATA

Drive code Type of STEPPING motor drive Dimensions Connectors Onboard power supply Control Operating voltage range Current range Current values selected via a dip-switch Pulses per rev values selected by dip-switch Automatic current reduction with motor off Type of inputs Protections 37D1221000 Board 92 x 85 x 23 Screw type NO Step and direction 24 - 45 2.6 - 4.4 8 400, 800, 1600, 3200 YES (50%) Pull-up or Pull-down, settable Maximum and minimum voltage. Motor output short-circuiting. Thermal protection. Electronic damping circuit for maximum control of noise and vibration. 37M1110000; 37M1120000
mm
VDC A pulse/rev
Suitable for motors code
OVERALL DIMENSIONS AND WIRING DIAGRAM
Power connectors Connettori Potenza (AM1 e AM2 o C1) (AM1 and AM2 or C1)
Stepping motor
Shielded motor cable
Shield Schermo Phase B Fase B Fase B Phase -BFase APhase APhase A Fase A GROUND GROUND
-V DC nom -V DC nom +V DC nom +V DC nom
FIL
PE
PE
Trasf
GND Fault Out X4 In Dir. In Step In C. O In GND
8 6 5 4 3 2 1
1-272
Logic connector Connettore Logica (AM3 C2) (AM3oor C2)
6A 75V DC DRIVE FOR STEPPING MOTORS, CODE 37D1332000 This is a ministep bipolar chopper drive made by RTA Srl. It comes with a STEP & DIRECTION interface for piloting medium-low power two-stage STEPPING motors with four, six or eight terminals. It has a supply voltage range up to 75V DC, compact dimensions and considerable operating flexibilit . It consists of a board housed in a metal box and comes with separate logic and power pull-out screw connectors. It can control STEPPING motors with a nominal current up to 6A, the perfect choice for medium power applications using small and medium-size motors.

Drive code Type of STEPPING motor drive Dimensions Connectors Onboard power supply Control Operating voltage range Current range Current values selected via a dip-switch Pulses per rev values selected by dip-switch Automatic current reduction with motor off Type of inputs Protections 37D1332000 Metal box 110 x 108 x 34 Screw type, pull-out NO Step and direction 24 - 75 1.9 - 6 8 400, 500, 800, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3200, 4000 YES (50%) Opto-isolated Maximum and minimum voltage. Motor output short-circuiting. Thermal protection. Electronic damping circuit for maximum control of noise and vibration. 37M1120000; 37M1120001; 37M1430000; 37M1440000; 37M1450000
mm
VDC A pulse/rev
Stepping motor
Shielded motor cable
C1
Schermo Shield A A AAB B BB-V DC nom -V DC nom +V DC nom +V DC nom
PE
C2
10 9 8 7 6 5 Fault Out Step In Dir. In C. O In -
4 3 2 1
Messa a terra Drive chassis earth chassis azionamento
PE PE
1-273
ACTUATORS
6A 140V DC DRIVE FOR STEPPING MOTORS, CODE 37D1442000
ACTUATORS
This is a ministep bipolar chopper drive made by RTA Srl. It comes with a STEP & DIRECTION interface for piloting medium-high power two-stage STEPPING motors with four, six or eight terminals. It has a supply voltage range up to 140VDC, compact dimensions and considerable operating flexibilit . It consists of a board housed in a metal box. It does not require external ventilation and comes with separate logic and power pull-out screw connectors. It can control STEPPING motors with a nominal current up to 6A, the perfect choice for medium power applications requiring a DC supply.

Drive code Type of STEPPING motor drive Dimensions Connectors Onboard power supply Control Operating voltage range Current range Current values selected via a dip-switch Pulses per rev values selected by dip-switch Automatic current reduction with motor off Type of inputs Protections 37D1442000 Metal box 152 x 129 x 46 Screw type, pull-out NO Step and direction 77 - 140 1.9 - 6 8 400, 500, 800, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3200, 4000 YES (50%) Opto-isolated Maximum and minimum voltage. Motor output short-circuiting. Thermal protection. Electronic damping circuit for maximum control of noise and vibration. 37M1440000; 37M1450000
mm
VDC A pulse/rev

Stepping Motore passo-passo motor
PE
Schermo Shield
1 2 3 4 B BAA - V DC in +V DC
in
Cavo schermato Shielded Motore motor cable
5 6 7 8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
NC Fault
- Step - Dir. - C. O Aux GND
PE PE
MESSA A TERRA Drive chassis earth CHASSIS AZIONAMENTO
1-274
DRIVES FOR BRUSHLESS MOTORS
15A DRIVE FOR BRUSHLESS MOTORS, CODE 37D2200000 This drive made by SANYO DENKI is suitable for piloting BRUSHLESS motors. It features compact dimensions and considerable operating flexibilit . It consists of a board housed in a metal box. It comes with pull-out screw connectors for power and plug connectors for logic. It can control BRUSHLESS motors with a nominal current up to 15A.

Drive code Type of drive for BRUSHLESS motors Dimensions Power connectors and motor power Encoder connectors and signals Max output current Motor output stage Power voltage Logic voltage Control Auto-tuning Communication interface Protections Standards Other features 37D2200000 Metal box 45 x 168 x 130 Screw-type, pull-out Plug-type 3M 15 IGBT, PWM control, sinusoidal current Single-phase or three-phase (user configurable) 200-230 AC (+10%, -15%) 50/60 Hz ( 3 Hz) Single-phase 200-230VAC (+10%, -15%) 50/60 Hz ( 3 Hz) With analogue signal (proportional to speed and torque). Pulse-train (clock + direction; forward + backward pulse; 90 phase difference) 8 inputs and 8 outputs, user configurable Yes RS232 for settings and monitoring via a personal computer Integrated against overloads, input extra-voltages, incorporated filters for suppressing the system s own resonance frequencies. CE, UL and CSA. 5-digit display and programming keypad. Integrated closed-loop system with position, speed and torque control modes. Instant changeover option: position + speed; position + torque; speed + torque. Automatic dynamic braking circuit in a alarm and power-off conditions. Connector for external braking resistance (optional). Configuration and control software (optional) 37C2130000 37C2230000 37C2150000 37C2250000 37M2200000
mm
Code for 3-metre motor-drive connecting cable series R (fixed position Code for 3-metre motor-drive encoder cable series R (fixed position Code for 5-metre motor-drive connecting cable series R (fixed position Code for 5-metre motor-drive encoder cable series R (fixed position Suitable for motors code
1-275
ACTUATORS
30A DRIVE FOR BRUSHLESS MOTORS, CODE 37D2400000
ACTUATORS
This drive made by RTA Srl is suitable for piloting BRUSHLESS motors. It features compact dimensions and considerable operating flexibilit . It consists of a board housed in a metal box. It comes with pull-out screw connectors for power and plug connectors for logic. It can control BRUSHLESS motors with a nominal current up to 30A. All the system parameters can be configured and controlled usin (optional) R-Set up software.

Drive code Type of drive for BRUSHLESS motors Dimensions Power connectors and motor power Encoder connectors and signals Max output current Motor output stage Power voltage Logic voltage Control 37D2400000 Metal box 50 x 168 x 130 Screw-type, pull-out Plug-type 3M 30 IGBT, PWM control, sinusoidal current Single-phase or three-phase (user configurable) 200-230 AC (+10%, -15%) 50/60 Hz ( 3 Hz) Single-phase 200-230VAC (+10%, -15%) 50/60 Hz ( 3 Hz) With analogue signal (proportional to speed and torque). Pulse-train (clock + direction; forward + backward pulse; 90 phase difference) 8 inputs and 8 outputs, user configurable Yes RS232 for settings and monitoring via a personal computer. Integrated against overloads, input extra-voltages, incorporated filters for suppressing the system s own resonance frequencies CE, UL and CSA. 5-digit display and programming keypad. Integrated closed-loop system with position, speed and torque control modes. Instant changeover option: position + speed; position + torque; speed + torque. Automatic dynamic braking circuit in a alarm and power-off conditions. Connector for external braking resistance (optional). Configuration and control software (optional) 37C2130000 37C2230000 37C2150000 37C2250000 37M2220000; 37M2330000
mm
Auto-tuning Communication interface Protections Standards Other features
Code for 3-metre motor-drive connecting cable series R (fixed position Code for 3-metre motor-drive encoder cable series R (fixed position Code for 5-metre motor-drive connecting cable series R (fixed position Code for 5-metre motor-drive encoder cable series R (fixed position Suitable for motors code
1-276
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR BRUSHLESS MOTOR DRIVES a 5-DIGIT DISPLAY and PROGRAMMING KEYPAD: to display and modify parameters and monitor system operation in real time. b PC CONNECTOR: settings and monitoring by PC via RS232 (supplied with configuration software kit c POWER CONNECTOR: 230VAC, single-phase and three-phase (user configurable). Included in the supply. Separate supply section for logic/signal and power electronics. Integrated circuits protecting against overloads and input extra-voltages. d SIGNAL CONNECTOR: pulse-train command (clock + direction; forward + backward pulse; 90 phase difference) or with analogue signal (proportional to speed or torque) 8 inputs and 8 outputs, user configurable. Included in the supply. e CONNECTOR: for external braking resistance (optional) f ENCODER CONNECTOR: compatible with any type of Sanyo Denki encorder g MOTOR POWER CONNECTOR h EARTH CONNECTION Log on to www.metalwork.it to view the instruction manual.
a a
b DRIVES FOR BRUSHLESS MOTORS

1-277
d e g f
f ENCODER CABLE
Code 37C2230000 37C2250000 Description Drive-encoder connecting cable 3 m series R Drive-encoder connecting cable 5 m series R
g MOTOR POWER CABLE

Code 37C2130000 37C2150000 Description Drive-motor connecting cable 3 m series R Drive-motor connecting cable 5 m series R
EXTERNAL BRAKING RESISTANCES

Code 37D2R00000 Description 220W 50 braking resistance for RS1A03
Under certain operating conditions, such as sudden deceleration with high inertial load, it may be necessary to dissipate externally the reverse energy generated by the motor. The drive indicates this requirement via a specific ala m. Excess energy is dissipated externally via a braking resistance.
TABLE OF METAL WORK CODES FOR RTA OR SANYO DENKI DRIVES

Metal Work code 37D1221000 37D1332000 37D1442000 37D2200000 37D2400000 Description RTA CSD04V 4.4A from 24 to 45VDC RTA NDC96 (box type) 6A from 24 to 75VDC RTA PLUS A4 6A from 77 to 140VDC SANYO DENKI RS1A01 SANYO DENKI RS1A03
ACTUATORS
CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE + PC CONNECTING CABLE KIT
R-SETUP SOFTWARE CODE 37D2S00000
ACTUATORS
DRIVES FOR MOTORS
1-278
R-Setup communication software is used for parameter setting and complete control of all functions of the system. Access to parameter configuration can take place at three levels: basic level, standard level, advanced level. The software includes a detailed description of each parameter. In addition to parameter setting R-Setup software can accurately analyse operation of the system via the following functions. Monitor Display: real-time display of all details about the system. Trace Operation: a complete oscilloscope with 4 analogue channels and 4 digital channels. Use to save and print traces and settings. System Analysis: used to study the systems frequency response to identify and correct any mechancal resonance phenomena. JOG modes for speed (Jogging Operation) and position (Operation Pulse Feed Jogging) are also available.
GRAPHIC MONITOR Thanks to the integrated oscilloscope function, some important system parameters, such as speed and torque, can be displayed on the PC monitor. Data can be downloaded and saved in compatible Excel format. The time setting range is 10 ms to 2 s. Single values acquired and displayed can be read using the cursor.
NOTES
CALCULATIONS FOR CHOOSING AN ELECTRIC CYLINDER
CALCULATION METHOD FOR BRUSHLESS MOTORS

Denomination M Mass to move s Displacement t Total time ta Acceleration time td Deceleration time Angle of inclination Coefficient of frictio Fp Weight force F Friction Fe Other external forces Unit of measurement kg mm s s s N N N Formula Example 60 200 1 0.2 0.2 90 0 60 9.81 sine 90 = 590 60 9.81 cos 90 = 0 40
M 9.81 sen M 9.81 cos
1- Determination of maximum velocity and maximum acceleration
v max
stroke
ta Denomination v max Maximum piston rod velocity Unit of measurement mm/s
td Formula s (ta + td) t2 v max ta Ma 1000 F sullo stelo | Fp + Fe + Fi + F | | Fp + Fe + F | | Fp + Fe - Fi + F | F sullo stelo | - Fp - Fe + Fi + F | | - Fp - Fe + F | | - Fp - Fe - Fi + F | Example 200 = 250 (0.2 + 0.2) 12 250 = 1250 0.2 60 1250 = 75 1000 | 590 + 40 + 75 + 0 | = 705 | 590 + 40 + 0 | = 630 | 590 + 40 - 75 + 0 | = 555
a Fi Ftot
Piston rod acceleration and deceleration mm/s2 Force of inertia of the mass N
Total force N - In acceleration - At constant v - In deceleration The calculation assumes the load is raised. In descent it would be: Ftot Total force N - In acceleration - At constant v - In deceleration
| - 590 - 40 + 75 + 0 | = 505 | - 590 - 40 + 0 | = 630 | - 590 - 40 - 75 + 0 | = 705
1-279
When choosing an electric cylinder, it is necessary to follow a set procedure. First you need to determine the following for each stage of the operating cycle (piston rod extension, any pause time, retraction, and so on): - piston rod stroke - stroke time available - cylinder inclination with respect to the horizontal axis - mass to move - any coefficient of friction between mass and su face - external forces to overcome Using these values you can choose one or more cylinders suitable for the purpose based on piston rod thrust and load velocity. When a force needs to be exerted with the piston rod still (e.g. to create a locking vice), a BRUSHLESS motor must be chosen, because STEPPING motors are not suitable. Both BRUSHLESS and STEPPING motors are suitable in other cases. Once the electric cylinder (including motor and drive) has been chosen, you can make a detailed assessment of it based on the inertia of the moving part of the cylinder and the motor that are not known beforehand.
ACTUATORS
ACTUATORS
2 - Algebraic sum of the forces on the piston rod

F tot max F F tot med
ta
td
3 - Choosing an electric cylinder

The choice is made using the diagrams in the catalogue, which express the axial force as a function of velocity. Check that: - the electric cylinder can deliver the maximum total force (F tot max) during acceleration (short period) - the electric cylinder can deliver the mean total force (F tot med) during movement at a constanct velocity - the cylinder can reach the maximum velocity required For example, you can choose the 32 cylinder with 12 pitch 4 screw driven by a BRUSHLESS motor (37M2220000) and 400 W drive (37D2400000).
Axial load [N]
7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 0 0 50 100
Velocity [mm/s]
150
200
250
300
V max
BRUSHLESS motors can, for short periods, deliver torques exceeding nominal torques. The diagram below shows the ratio of maximum current and nominal input current (and hence maximum torque and nominal torque) and the duration of the possible overload. Time (s)
10000
1000
Tempo (s)
100
10
1 0
0.5
Rapporto nominal torque ratio Torque /coppia / coppia nominale
1.5
2.5
3.5 4
4.5
Denomination Verification of F tot ma Verification of F tot me Verification of v ma
Unit of measurement N N mm/s
Formula F available > Fp + Fe + Fi + F (for a short period, upper curve) F available > Fp + Fe + F (at steady rate, lower cur ve) v available > v max
Example 5150 705 1200 630 267 250
1-280
4 - Verification of the choice made

Having chosen the electric cylinder, you now know the data required to test it on the drive shaft. Denomination data Unit of measurement Formula pitch Screw pitch mm v max 60 n max Maximum number of motor revs rpm pitch a 2 Maximum angular acceleration of the rad/s2 motor pitch Moments of mass inertia 32 Worm screw pitch mm 4 12 5 J0 at stroke 0 kgmm2 2.4309 1.3262 5.3455
J1 for metre of stroke kgmm2/m 10.4223 17.8468 0.4053 4.0858 J2 for kg of load kgmm2/kg The moment of inertia of total mass Jtot is: Jtot = J0 + J1 x stroke [m] + J2 x load [kg] 35.2305 0.6333
Example 4 250 60 = 3750 4 1250 2 = 1963 4 50 10 6.1360

38.5264 2.5332
16 9.1113
49.1936 6.4849
5 12.4043
86.9290 0.6333
63 10 14.8767
96.6652 2.5332
20 23.5427
116.3671 10.1327
Denomination data J tot Moment of inertia of the moving parts of the cylinder J tot Moment of inertia for acceleration of the mass reduced at the motor J mot. Moment of inertia of the motor J rid Total moment of inertia reduced at the motor C acc Torque required to overcome inertia during acceleration Weights
Worm screw pitch (p) Weight at stroke 0 Additional weight per mm of stroke Moving mass at stroke 0 (non-rotating version) Additional moving mass per mm of stroke
Unit of measurement kgmm2 kgmm2 kgmm2 kgmm2 Nm
Formula J0 + J1 J2 M
s 1000
Example 1.3 + 10.4 200 = 3.4 1000 0.4 60 = 24 41.2 3.4 + 24 + 41.2 = 68.6 68.6 1963 = 0.13 1 10E6 50 10 2084
6.56
Motor specification J tot + J tot + J mot. J rid 1 10E6 32 4 875

3.98
mm g g g g
12
973 3.96 353 1.25
5 2043
6.62
16 2086
6.55
5 2942
6.25
63 10 3209
6.32
20 3056
6.32
246
629
696
1.84
703
956
1215
1.98
1067
The weight of the moving parts of the cylinder (piston rod, piston, etc.) that the cylinder has to support must also be taken into consideration.
Denomination data Mc Mass of the components Fpc Weight of the components C car Torque required to overcome friction, loads and external forces (consider a system efficiency of 0.8) C tot Total torque required
Unit of measurement kg N Nm
Formula Mc 9.81 sine pitch (Fp + Fpc + Fe + F) 2 0.8 1000
Example 0.246 + 0.00125 300 = 0.6 0.5 9.81 sine 90 = 4.9 4 (590 + 4.9 + 40 + 0) = 0.4 2 0.8 1000 0.13 + 0.4 = 053
Nm
C acc + C car
At this stage just check that: - the motor can deliver C tot during acceleration (short period) - the motor can deliver C car during movement at a constant velocity

Motor torque [Nm]
5.00 4.50 4.00 3.50 3.00 2.50 2.00 1.50 1.00 0.50 0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000
nominal torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W) maximum torque 37M2220000 + 37D2400000 (400W)
n max Denomination data Verification of C tot Verification of C ca
Motor revs [1/min]
Unit of measurement Nm Nm
Formula C available > C tot (for a short period, upper curve) C available > C car (at steady rate, lower curve)
Example 3.8 0.53 1 0.4
1-281
ACTUATORS
CALCULATION METHOD FOR STEPPING MOTORS
ACTUATORS
Denomination data M Mass to move s Displacement t Total time ta Acceleration time td Deceleration time Angle of inclination Coefficient of frictio Fp Weight force F Friction Fe Other external forces
Unit of measurement kg mm s s s N N N
Formula
M 9.81 sine M 9.81 cos
Example 60 300 2 0.2 0.2 0 0.1 60 9.81 sine 0 = 0 60 9.81 0.1 cos 0 = 60 40
1 - Determination of maximum velocity and maximum acceleration
v max
corsa
ta Denomination data v max Maximum piston rod velocity Unit of measurement mm/s
td Formula s (ta + td) t2 v max ta Ma 1000 F on the piston rod | Fp + Fe + Fi + F | | Fp + Fe + F | | Fp + Fe - Fi + F | Example 300 = 167 (0.2 + 0.2) 22 167 = 835 0.2 60 835 = 50 1000 | 0 + 40 + 50 + 60 | = 150 | 0 + 40 + 60 | = 100 | 0 + 40 - 50 + 60 | = 50
a Fi Ftot
Piston rod acceleration and deceleration mm/s2 Force of inertia Total force - In acceleration - At constant v - In deceleration N N
2 - Algebraic sum of the forces on the piston rod

F tot max F F tot med
ta
td
3 - Choosing an electric cylinder

The choice is made using the diagrams in the catalogue, which express the axial force as a function of velocity. Check that: - the electric cylinder can deliver the maximum total force during acceleration (up to maximum speed) - the cylinder can reach the maximum velocity required For example, you can choose the 32 cylinder with 12 pitch 4 screw driven by a STEPPING motor (37M1120001) and 48VDC drive (37D1332000).
1600 1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300
Axial load [N]
V max
Velocity [mm/s]
1-282
Denomination data Verification of Ftot ma Verification of v ma
Unit of measurement N mm/s
Formula F available > Fp + Fe + Fi + F v available > v max
Example 650 150 250 167
4 - Verification of the choice made

Having chosen the electric cylinder, you now know the data required to test it on the drive shaft. Denomination data pitch Screw pitch n max Maximum number of motor revs Unit of measurement mm rpm rad/s2 Formula v max 60 pitch a 2 pitch 50 10 6.1360
38.5264 2.5332
Maximum angular acceleration of the motor Moments of mass inertia
32
Worm screw pitch mm 4 12 J0 at stroke 0 kgmm2 2.4309 1.3262 J1 for metre of stroke kgmm2/m 10.4223 17.8468 0.4053 4.0858 J2 for kg of load kgmm2/kg The moment of inertia of total mass Jtot is: Jtot = J0 + J1 x stroke [m] + J2 x load [kg] 5
5.3455
35.2305 0.6333
16 9.1113
49.1936 6.4849
12.4043
86.2990 0.6333
63 10 14.8767
96.6652 2.5332
20 23.5427
116.3671 10.1327
Denomination data J tot Moment of inertia of the moving parts of the cylinder J tot Moment of inertia for acceleration of the mass reduced at the motor J mot. Moment of inertia of the motor J rid Total moment of inertia reduced at the motor C acc Torque required to overcome inertia during acceleration Weights
Worm screw pitch (p) Weight at stroke 0 Additional weight per mm of stroke Moving mass at stroke 0 (non-rotating version Additional moving mass per mm of stroke
Unit of measurement kgmm2 kgmm2 kgmm2 kgmm2 Nm
Formula J0 + J1 J2 M
s 1000
Example 1.3 + 10.4 300 = 4.4 1000 0.4 60 = 24 36 4.4 + 24 + 36 = 64.4 64.4 1311 = 0.1 1 10E6 50 63
16 2086 6.55 703 5 2942 6.25 956 10 3209 6.32 1215 1.98 20 3056 6.32 1067
Motor specification J tot + J tot + J mot. J rid 1 10E6 32
mm g g g g
4 875 3.98 246 1.25
12 973 3.96 353
5 2043 6.62 929
10 2084 6.56 696 1.84
The weight of the moving parts of the cylinder (piston rod, piston, etc.) that the cylinder has to support must also be taken into consideration.
Denomination data Mc Mass of the components Fpc Weight of the components C car Torque required to overcome friction, loads and external forces (consider a system efficiency of 0.8 C tot Total torque required
Unit of measurement kg N Nm
Formula Mc 9.81 sen pitch (Fp + Fpc + Fe + F) 2 0.8 1000 C acc + C car
Example 0.246 + 0.00125 300 = 0.6 0.6 9.81 sine 0 = 0 4 (0 + 0 + 40 + 60) = 0.1 2 0.8 1000 0.2
Nm
At this stage just check that the motor can deliver C tot during acceleration (up to maximum speed).
STEPPING motor code 37M1120001 + drive code 37D1332000 (24-48-75VDC)

Motor torque [Nm]
1.40 1.20 1.00 0.80 0.60 0.40 0.20 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000
n max
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000 5500
6000
Motor revs [1/min]
Denomination data Verification of C tot
Unit of measurement Nm
Formula C available > Ctot
Example 0.55 0.2
1-283
Example 4 167 60 = 2505 4 835 2 = 1311 4
ACTUATORS
VERIFICATION OF THE RECIRCULATING BALL SCREW AND THE BEARING Verification of the recirculating ball screw takes into consideration the maximum axial load and the weighted average axial load The peak value of axial load in a movement cycle must not exceed the static axial load Fo shown on the data sheet. The average axial load in a movement cycle must not exceed the dynamic axial load F shown on the data sheet. If these conditions are not met, the recirculating ball screw and/or the bearing will be subject to greater wear and hence a shorter life. The calculation of average axial load takes into consideration movements at constant speed during the cycle (nil acceleration and deceleration) and the respective axial loads on the piston rod. The Fm value thus calculated is used in the diagrams on pages 1-251 and 1-252 Life characteristics as a function of the mean axial load to determine the expected life of the cylinder. Fm = 3
ACTUATORS
SF
VX Vm x
q 100
= VX2 Vm q2 100 VX3 Vm q3 100
Fm = 3
Fx13 x
VX1 Vm
q1 100
+ Fx23 x
+ Fx33 x
+ ...
Fx = Axial load at stage x Fm = Mean forward axial load Fo = Static axial load of the screw q = Time segment Vx = Speed in the phase x Vm = Average speed
1-284
SUMMARY SENSORS AND ACCESSORIES T-SLOT
P ACCESSORIES: MAGNETIC SENSORS
PAGE 1-286
P ACCESSORIES FOR T-SLOT
PAGE 1-290
P SENSOR TESTER
PAGE 1-291
1-285
SUMMARY SENSORS AND ACCESSORIES T-SLOT
ACTUATORS
SENSOR SERIES DSM
ACTUATORS
Code W0950000201 W0950000222 W0950000232
Description Reed sensor DSM2-C525 HS E.HALL PNP sensor DSM3-N225 E. HALL NPN sensor DSM3-M225
TECHNICAL DATA SERIE DSM

Type Contact Max AC/DC voltage Max current at 25C Power with inductive load Power with resistive load Switch-on time Switch-off time Switch-on point Switch-off point Operating life Contact resistance Cable length Cable cross section Cable material Circuit REED + VARISTOR + LED 2 WIRES REED + VARISTOR + LED NO 3 to 48 V(DC); 3 to 220 (AC) 500 10 50 1.2 0.1 110 95 107 impulses 0.1 2.5 0.35 Soft PVC HALL VERSION PNP/NPN 3 WIRES HALL EFFECT NO PNP/NPN 6-24 V DC 250 6 0.8 3 15 8 109 impulses 2.5 0.35 Soft PVC
V mA VA Watt m sec m sec Gauss Gauss
m mm2
DC
Version NPN
AC
Version PNP
1-286
SENSOR SERIE DCB
W0950000253 W0950014360
12 to 100 12 to 100
HALL PNP sensor DCB3-N225 HALL NPN sensor DCB3-M225
TECHNICAL DATA SERIE DCB

Type Contact Max AC/DC voltage Max current at 25C Power with inductive load Power with resistive load Switch-on time Switch-off time Switch-on point Switch-off point Operating life Contact resistance Cable length Cable cross section Cable material Circuit REED + VARISTOR + LED 2 WIRES REED + VARISTOR + LED NO 3 to 48 (DC); 3 to 110 (AC) 300 8 15 0.5 0.1 110 60 107 impulses 0.1 2.5 0.35 Soft PVC HALL VERSION PNP/NPN 3 WIRES HALL EFFECT NO PNP/NPN 6-24 V DC 250 6 0.8 3 15 8 109 impulses 2.5 0.35 Soft PVC
V mA VA Watt m sec m sec Gauss Gauss
m mm2
DC
Version NPN
AC
Version PNP
1-287
ACTUATORS
Code W0950000252
Bore 12 to 100
Model REED sensor DCB 2C-425
Version Reed connector + bracket - CB Hall PNP connector + bracket - CB Hall NPN connector + bracket - CB

ACTUATORS
* For use on the rodless cylinder guide V 25 or when standard sensors do not detect the magnet, e.g. near metal masses.
TECHNICAL DATA
Type of contact Switch Supply voltage (Ub) Power Voltage variation Voltage drop Input current Output current Switching frequency Short-circuit protection Over-voltage suppression Polarity inversion protection EMC LED display Magnetic sensitivity Repeatability Degree of protection (EN 60529) Vibration and shock resistance Operating life Temperature range Sensor capsule material 2.5 m/2 m connecting cable Connecting cable with M8x1 Wire NO. Category ATEX Certification REED N.O. 10 to 30 AC/DC 3 (peak valve = 6) # 100 # 400 EN 60 947-5-2 Yellow 2.8 mT 25% 1.9 mT 20% (for HS) # 0.1 mT IP 67 30 g, 11 ms, 10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm 107 impulses -25 to +75 PA66 + PA6I/6T PVC; 2 x 0.12 mm2 Polyurethane; 2 x 0.14 mm2 2 HALL EFFECT N.O. PNP 10 to 30 DC 3 # 10% of Ub #2 # 10 # 100 # 5000 Yes Yes Yes EN 60 947-5-2 Yellow 2.8 mT 25% 2.1 mT 20% (for HS) # 0.1 mT IP 67 30 g, 11 ms, 10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm 109 impulses -25 to +75 PA66 + PA6I/6T PVC; 3 x 0.14 mm2 Polyurethane; 3 x 0.14 mm2 3 -
ATEX HALL EFFECT N.O. PNP 18 to 30 DC # 1.7 # 10% of Ub # 2.2 # 10 # 70 1000 Yes Yes Yes EN 60 947-5-2 Yellow 2.6 # 0.1 mT (Ub and ta fixed IP 68, IP 69K 30 g, 11 ms, 10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm 109 impulses -20 to +45 PA PVC; 3 x 0.12 mm2 3 II 3G Ex nA op is IIC T4 Gc X II 3D Ex tc IIIC T135C Dc IP67 X
V W V mA mA Hz
WIRING DIAGRAM
1-288
SENSOR 4
TECHNICAL DATA FOR W0950045390

Switch Tension in DC Tension in AC Current at 25C Power (ohmic load) On time Off time On point Off point Electric life (pulses) On voltage drop Nominal operating point Operating frequency Polarity reversal protection Short-circuit protection Degree of protection (EN 60529) Temperature range Sensor capsule material LED display Wiring NO. HALL EFFECT PNP From 6 to 30 --0.2 MAX 6 0.8 0.3 30 25 109 <1 From 30 to 50 MAX 200 YES NO IP 67 From -10 to +70 PA (+G) YELLOW 3
V V A W s s Gauss Gauss V Gauss Hz
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR W0950045390
1-289
ACTUATORS
Code W0950044180 W0950045390
ACCESSORIES T-SLOT
BAR FOR GROOVING
ACTUATORS
Code W0950000160
Description Bar for grooving L = 500 mm
Note: The code corresponds to 1 piece.
ACCESSORIES T-SLOT
SLOTTED FIXING PLATE

Code 0950003001 0950003002 Description M4 T-slotted fixing plat M3 T-slotted fixing plat Weight [g] 1 1
SLOTTED FIXINGPLATE
Code 0950003000 Description Fixing block Weight [g] 2
Note: Supplied complete with 1 M3 grub screw and 1 M4 grub screw
NOTES
1-290
SENSOR TESTER
This sensor tester features the following: a green light and acoustic signal indicating correct operation sensors can be checked without having to be disassembled M8 and M12 connections, and terminal board for direct connection to the wires PNP or NPN switching button 9V battery power supply automatic switch-off
TECHNICAL DATA
Container material Degree of protection Connections Additional connections Power supply Internal voltage Green light Yellow light Red light PA 6.6 blue IP00 M8 and M12 plug-socket type with 40 cm cable 3 terminals for wire connection 9V DC (battery type 6LR61) 15V DC tester switched on sensor in operation battery fla
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i CONTAINER (PA 6.6 blue) START BUTTON WIRE CONNECTION + (brown) WIRE CONNECTION (blue) OUTPUT CONNECTION (black) PNP/NPN SELECTOR M8x1 CONNECTOR M12x1 CONNECTOR LED COVER
Code W0950060000
Description Sensor tester
Dimension [mm] 63x88x24
Weight [g] 192
1-291
SENSOR TESTER
ACTUATORS
DISTRIBUTORS
DISTRIBUTORS
P P P
VALVES VALVE ISLANDS SLAVES FIELDBUS
PAGE
2-2
DISTRIBUTORS
2-1
PAGE 2-139 PAGE 2-189
VALVES SUMMARY
P MINIVALVES, SERIES VME-1 MECHANICALLY/HAND OPERATED
PAGE 2-4
P VALVES, SERIES PEV, PEDAL OPERATED
PAGE 2-8
P TWO HAND SAFETY VALVE SERIE SAFE AIR
PAGE 2-10
DISTRIBUTORS
P VALVES, SERIES 70
PAGE 2-12
VALVES SUmm Ar y
P VALVES, SERIES 70 ON BASE
PAGE 2-38
P VALVES, NAMUR
PAGE 2-43
P COILS AND CONNECTORS FOR SERIES 70 AND NAMUR VALVES
PAGE 2-46
P 10 mm SOLENOID VALVES SERIES PLT-10
PAGE 2-47
P BASES FOR PLT-10 MULTIPLE CONNECTION
PAGE 2-50
P SOLENOID VALVES PIV.M 15 mm
PAGE 2-56
P SOLENOID VALVES PIV ON BASE
PAGE 2-58
P SOLENOID VALVES PIV IN LINE
PAGE 2-63
2-2
P SOLENOID VALVE CNOMO
PAGE 2-66
P VALVES
PAGE 2-68
P VALVES MACH 11
PAGE 2-74
P VALVES MACH 16
PAGE 2-80
PAGE 2-87
P REDUCER WITH GAUGE, SERIES RMV
PAGE -100 2
P VALVES MACH 18 ISO 15407-1 VDMA 24563-02
PAGE -101 2
P VALVES ISO 5599/1, SERIES IPV-ISV
PAGE -107 2
P VALVE ISO 5599/1 SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC, SERIE ISV WITH M12 CONNECTOR
PAGE -114 2
P SANDWICH REGULATORS FOR ISO 5599/1 BASES ISO 1-2
PAGE -122 2
P VALVES FOR UL- AND CSA-APPROVED COILS
PAGE -123 2
P VALVES ISO 5599/1 SERIE SAFE AIR
PAGE -126 2
2-3
VALVES SUmmAry
P MULTIPLE CONNECTOR MACH 16
DISTRIBUTORS
MINIVALVES, MECHANICALLY AND HAND OPERATED SERIES VME
mINIVALVES, mECHANICALLy AND HAND OPEr ATED SEr IES VmE
DISTRIBUTORS
minivalves with 3/2 NO NC poppet, Installation in any position Push-in fitting for pipe 4 mm and m5 on the valve body Low actuation force r apid, accurate signal mechanical actuation The 2 places adapter allows manual actuation of 1 or 2 VmE valves with manual 22 panel actuators. Thus it is possible to obtain 3/2, 5/2, 5/3 open centre and 5/3 pressure centre pneumatic functions. On request, it is possible to place a NC-NO electric switch next to VmE valve for mixed solenoid/pneumatic signals.
TECHNICAL DATA
Valve fittin port Fluid Type Versions Operators: mechanical manual Operating pressure Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 Bar DP 0.5 Bar Flow rate at 6 Bar DP 1 Bar Actuation force Plunger at 6 Bar r ecommended lubricant Installation Compatibility with oils Push-in fittin for pipe diam. 4 and m5 (axial or side) Filtered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous With poppet mechanical and manual With Plunger Plunger for wall-mounting roller lever Unidirectional roller lever Depending on the type of actuation panel selected 0.5 to 10 -10 to +60 2.5 16.5 0.03 35 60 8 ISO and UNI FD22 In any position Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
bar C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min N
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b BUTTON: chemically nickel-plated brass c DISTANCE PLATES: Brass d GASKETS: NBr e PUSH-IN FITTING CAr Tr IDGES: stainless steel, brass and plastic f SPr INGS: stainless steel
2-4
PLUNGER 3/2 NO - AXIAL FITTINGS 4
PLUNGER 3/2 NO - SIDE FITTINGS 4
m5
m5
Code W3501000101 W3501000110
Description VmE1-10 NO 4 VmE1-16 NO m5
Weight [g] 42 36
Code W3501001100 W3501001110
Weight [g] 34 34
PLUNGER 3/2 NC - AXIAL FITTINGS 4 m5
PLUNGER 3/2 NC - SIDE FITTINGS 4 m5
Code W3501000100 W3501000111
Description VmE1-01 NC 4 VmE1-11 NC m5
Weight [g] 42 36
Code W3501001101 W3501001111
Weight [g] 34 34
PLUNGER FOR WALL MOUNTING, 3/2 NC - AXIAL FITTINGS 4 m5
PLUNGER FOR WALL MOUNTING, 3/2 NC - SIDE FITTINGS 4 m5
Code W3501000400 W3501000411
Weight [g] 54 48
Code W3501001401 W3501001411
Weight [g] 46 46
2-5
DISTRIBUTORS
UNIDIRECTIONAL ROLLER LEVER, 3/2 NC - AXIAL FITTINGS 4 m5
UNIDIRECTIONAL ROLLER LEVER, 3/2 NC - SIDE FITTINGS 4 m5
DISTRIBUTORS
Code W3501000300 W3501000311
Weight [g] 60 54
Code W3501001301 W3501001311
Weight [g] 52 52
ROLLER LEVER, 3/2 NO - AXIAL FITTINGS 4 m5
ROLLER LEVER, 3/2 NO - SIDE FITTINGS 4 m5
Code W3501000201 W3501000210
Weight [g] 58 52
Code W3501001200 W3501001210
Weight [g] 50 50
ROLLER LEVER, 3/2 NC - AXIAL FITTINGS 4 m5
ROLLER LEVER, 3/2 NC - SIDE FITTINGS 4 m5
Code W3501000200 W3501000211
Weight [g] 56 50
Code W3501001201 W3501001211
Weight [g] 52 50
2-6
MANUAL VME VALVES ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM NOTES: For 5/2 pneumatic operation, assemble a 3/2 NC plunger valve and a 3/2 NO one on the adapter. For 5/3 pneumatic operation with open centres, assemble two 3/2 NC plunger valves on the adapter. For 5/3 pneumatic operation with pressure centres, assemble two 3/2 NO plunger valves on the adapter.
NEW
OLD
ORDERING CODES
Symbol Reference a Code W3501000100 W3501000111 W3501001101 W3501001111 W3501000101 W3501000110 W3501001100 W3501001110 0351000050 W0351000015 W0351000011 W0351000030 W0351000031 W0351000032 W0351000033 W0351000034 W0351000035 W0351000036 W0351000037 W0351000016 W0351000018 W0351000013 W0351000017 W0351000014 W0351000049 W0351000050 W0351000021 W0351000056 Description 3/2 NC Axial fitting 4 3/2 NC Axial fitting m5 3/2 NC Side fitting 4 3/2 NC Side fitting m5 3/2 NO Axial fitting 4 3/2 NO Axial fitting m5 3/2 NO Side fitting 4 3/2 NO Side fitting m5 2 places adaptor thickness 6.8 mm r ed handler with horizontally pivoted lever Fat push button + 2 red/black coloured disks u Bistable fat push button without disk Black selector short lever at 2 positions with return Black selector short lever at 2 positions Black selector short lever at 3 positions with return Black selector short lever at 3 positions Black selector long lever at 2 positions with return Black selector long lever at 2 positions Black selector long lever at 3 positions with return Black selector long lever at 3 positions 2 positions key selector with extractable key in 2 positions 2 positions key selector with extractable key in 0 r ed mushroom-head push button 40 Black mushroom-head push button 40 r ed mushroom-head push button with lock 40 : reducer from 30 to 22.5 mm s Adapter for bore 30 G2326 : Key for ESC selectors Green disk for push button d Weight [g] 42 36 34 34 42 36 34 34 5 25 15 20 20 20 20 26 26 26 26 50 50 27 27 29
b c d e e f f g h i u It cant be supplied. As working replaced by selector with bistable short lever at 2 positions e. : Usable only with technopolymer body selectors. s Usable only with metal body selectors. j k l
2-7
DISTRIBUTORS
VALVES SERIES PEV PEDAL OPERATED
The valves series PEV with pedal are available in a wide range: 5/2 1/4 monostable and bistable with guarded pedal 3/2 m5 monostable, pedal not guarded 3/2 4 monostable, pedal not guarded 3/2 m5 in monostable and bistable configuratio with guarded pedal 3/2 4 in monostable and bistable configuratio with guarded pedal
VALVES SEr IES PEV PEDAL OPEr ATED
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
Valve fittin port Type Operating pressure Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6.3 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6.3 bar DP 1 bar Fluid Compatibility with oils bar mpa psi C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min 4 mono/ bistable guarded monostable not guarded m5 1/4 monostable not guarded mono/ bistable guarded mono/ bistable guarded 2.5 to 10 0.25 to 1 36 to 145 10 + 60 2.5 2.5 7.5 16.5 16.5 264.26 0.03 0.03 0.32 60 60 640 95 95 840 Filtered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
FLOW CHARTS 1/4 Flow rates (NI/min) Flow rates (NI/min) m5/ 4 mm
Pressure valves (bar)

2-8
Pressure valves (bar)
GUARDED PEDAL WITH VALVES 5/2 1/4 - 3/2 M5 - 3/2 4

Symbol Description Abbrev. Weight [g] 5/2 - 1/4 monostable, PEV 35 PES Pr 1027 guarded W3120000011 5/2 - 1/4 bistable, PEV 35 PEB Pr 1035 guarded PEV 03 PES Pr 883 W3120000301 3/2 m5 monostable, guarded W3120000321 3/2 4 monostable, PEV F3 PES Pr 887 guarded W3120000331 3/2 m5 bistable, PEV 03 PEB Pr 890 guarded W3120000311 3/2 4 bistable, PEV F3 PEB Pr 914 guarded W3120000021 5/2 - 1/4 monostable, PEV 35 PEC Pr 1014 with mechanical block and guarden The pedal-down position is maintained by a lever. When the foot presses on the lever, the pedal releases and can rise. When the foot presses on a locking lever, the pedal can be lowered. Code W3120000001
NOT-GUARDED PEDAL WITH VALVES 3/2 M5 - 3/2 4

Symbol Code W3120000411 W3120000401 Description Abbrev. Weight [g] 3/2 - m5 monostable, PEV 03 PES WP 188 not guarded 3/2 4 monostable, PEV F3 PES WP 192 not guarded
KEY TO CODES
PEV FAMILY PEV valve with pedal F DIMENSIONS 1/4 3 0 m5 4 F 3 FUNCTION 3/2 3 5 5/2 PE OPERATORS 14 pedal operated C RESETTING (12) mechanical springs mechanical block bistable WP FURTHER DETAILS WP not guarded PR guarded
PE
S C B
2-9
VALVES SEr IES PEV PEDAL OPEr ATED
DISTRIBUTORS
TWO HAND SAFETY VALVE SERIES SAFE AIR
TWO HAND SAFETy VALVE SEr IES SAFE AIr
DISTRIBUTORS
The two hand safety valve generates an output signal only if two synchronised pneumatic input signals are received. If one input signal is interrupted, the output signal is interrupted as well. The most common application involves connecting a manual button-controlled valve to each of the inputs and using the output signal as a start-of-cycle control for a pneumatically-operated machine. The two hand safety valve can be secured with through screws or a DIN bar adaptor. The complete pushbutton panel includes the dual manual control valve, two manual pushbuttons, and an emergency stop valve, all housed in a metal box to be mounted on a wall or stand. The pushbutton housing is supplied on request for anyone wishing to get a personalised pneumatic connection or drill holes to secure the unit.
TECHNICAL DATA
Compressed air couplings Fluid Version Standard mm Push-in fittin for 4 pipe Filtered, unlubricated compressed air, max 50 mm Single-control Complete pushbutton panel EN574 type IIIA, TV approvated according to 2006/42/EC Certifie TV-A-mHF/mG/10-5159 (code W3605000001) Certifie Bureau Veritas CV 003-12-2011 (code 0227700000) 0.4 l 0.05 pneuamtic spring operated 2.5 to 8 - 10 to +60 2.7 85 In any direction Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
Synchronisation, max. time between two signals De-activation time, with pipe L = max 1000 mm Actuation r eset Operating pressure Temperature range Nominal diameter Flow rate at 6 bar (0.6 mpa - 87 psi) DP 1 bar (0.1mPa -1.45 psi) mounting position Compatibility with oils
s s
bar C mm Nl/min
TWO HAND SAFETY VALVE

Code W3605000001 Description Two hand safety valve
18.1 8 40 5
Materials Body: technopolymer Internal parts: brass and technopolymer Gaskets: NBr Spring: alloy steel
34.5
25.7
56
14.8
7.6
4.4 13.2 24.2 30
a b
PUSHBUTTON HOUSING
Code W3120000212 Description Pushbutton housing
100
2 2
400
100
2-10
30
3.8
5.5
COMPLETE PUSHBUTTON PANEL
Code 0227700000
Description Complete pushbutton panel
Materials Pressure die-cast and painted aluminium alloy
MAIN COMPONENTS Code Description W3605000001 Dual manual safety valve W0351000011 monostable protected button - black disk W0351000014 Emergency stop button W3501000100 VmE1-01 NC 4 W3501001100 VmE2-01 NO 4 0351000050 Valve-button connecting base r L10 4 2L11001
Quantity 1 2 1 2 1 3 2
ACCESSORIES
CONNECTION BRACKETS ON THE BAR (DIN EN50022) ~50
~50 14
Code 0227300600 Individually packed
Description Connection brackets on DIN bar
~9
~9
14
2-11
TWO HAND SAFETy VALVE SEr IES SAFE AIr
DISTRIBUTORS
VALVES SERIES 70
This is metal Works full range. Available in three sizes: 1/8, 1/4, 1/2. Three versions: 3/2; 5/2; 5/3, four different types of actuation (mechanical, manual, pneumatic and electric). Series 70 valves can be used for a wide range of applications as they can be mounted in line, on the wall, on the cylinder using a special bracket, or in series on a multiple or manifold base.
VALVES SEr IES 70
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
Thread on the valve ports Operating pressure: monostable bistable asserved minimum pilot pressure Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Installation Fluid r ecommended lubricant maximum coil nut torque Compatibility with oils bar bar bar bar C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min
1/8 1/8
1/4 1/4
1/2 1/2
Nm
2.5 to 10 1 to 10 vacuum to 10 2.5 10 to +60 5 7.5 15 121.43 264.26 971.43 0.32 0.27 0.43 400 750 3200 550 1100 4600 In any position (vertical assembly is not recommended for bistable valves subjected to vibration) Filtered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous ISO e UNI FD 22 1 Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b CONTr OL/END CAP: Hostaform c SPOOL: chemically nickel-plated aluminium d DISTANCE PLATES: plastic e GASKETS: NBr f PISTONS: Hostaform g PISTON GASKET: NBr h FILTEr : sintered bronze i SPr INGS: special steel j OPEr ATOr : Brass pipe - Stainless steel core
2-12
FLOW CHARTS Flow rates (Nl/min) VALVES SEr IES 70, 1/8
Pressures (bar) VALVES SEr IES 70

2-13
Flow rates (Nl/min) VALVES SEr IES 70, 1/4
Pressures (bar)
Flow rates (Nl/min) VALVES SEr IES 70, 1/2
Pressures (bar)
DISTRIBUTORS
VALVES SERIES 70, HAND OPERATED

TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure range: version with direct control pilot-assisted version Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar bar bar C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min 1/8 1/4 1/2
Vacuum to 10 2.5 to 10 -10 to +60 15 5 7.5 121.43 264.26 971.43 0.32 0.27 0.43 400 750 3200 550 1100 4600
VALVES SEr IES 70, HAND OPEr ATED
DISTRIBUTORS
KEY TO CODES
MAV FAMILY MAV manual valves 2 DIMENSIONS 1/8 2 3 1/4 4 1/2 3 FUNCTION 3 3/2 5 5/2 6 5/3 8 2 x 3/2 PP OPERATORS 14 PP drawer VL axial lever LE 90 lever BRE arranged for manual panel actuators S RESETTING (12) pneumatic/ mechanical springs* mechanical springs bistable differential stable for 5/3 NC FURTHER DETAILS NC normally closed NO normally open OO no indication CC closed centres OC open centres PC pressure centres
A S B D O
*on demand
VALVES SERIES 70, HAND OPERATED, 1/8

90 LEVER 3/2 1/8 90 LEVER 5/2 1/8
Symbol
Code 7010000100 7010000200
Abbrev. mAV 23 LES NC mAV 23 LEB OO
Weight [g] 168 171
Symbol
Code 7010000300 7010000400
Abbrev. mAV 25 LES OO mAV 25 LEB OO
Weight [g] 194 197
2-14
FRONT LEVER 3/2, 1/8
Symbol
ANGULAR LEVER 5/3, 1/8
Symbol
Code 7010001150 7010001160
Abbrev. mAV 28 VLO OC mAV 28 VLS OC
Weight [g] 316 325
Symbol
Code 7010001000 7010000900 7010001100 7010000500 7010000600 7010000700
Abbrev. mAV 26 LES CC mAV 26 LES OC mAV 26 LES PC mAV 26 LEO CC mAV 26 LEO OC mAV 26 LEO PC
Weight [g] 242 242 242 194 194 194
2-15
Code 7010001400
Abbrev. mAV 23 VLB OO
Weight [g] 130
Symbol
Code 7010001700
Weight [g] 156
DISTRIBUTORS
DRAWER 3/2, 1/8
DRAWER 5/2, 1/8
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Code 7010001300 7010001200
Abbrev. mAV 23 PPB OO mAV 23 PPS NC
Weight [g] 134 134
Symbol
Code 7010001600 7010001500
Abbrev. mAV 25 PPB OO mAV 25 PPS OO
Weight [g] 160 160
PILOT-ASSISTED PLUNGER 3/2 1/8 FOR PANEL ACTUATORS
PILOT-ASSISTED PLUNGER 5/2 1/8 FOR PANEL ACTUATORS
Symbol
Code 7010001800
Abbrev. mAV 23 Br E NC
Weight [g] 124
Symbol
Code 7010001900
Abbrev. mAV 25 Br E OO
Weight [g] 150
2-16
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM FOR PILOT-ASSISTED HAND-OPERATED VALVES SERIES 70 WITH PANEL ACTUATORS
NEW
OLD
ORDERING CODES
Symbol Reference a a b c d e e f f g h i u It cant be supplied. As working replaced by selector with bistable short lever at 2 positions e. : Usable only with technopolymer body selectors. s Usable only with metal body selectors. j k l Code 7010001800 7010001900 0351000050 W0351000015 W0351000011 W0351000030 W0351000031 W0351000032 W0351000033 W0351000034 W0351000035 W0351000036 W0351000037 W0351000016 W0351000018 W0351000013 W0351000017 W0351000014 W0351000049 W0351000050 W0351000021 W0351000056 Description Pilot-assisted plunger 3/2, 1/8 Pilot-assisted plunger 5/2, 1/8 2 places adaptor thickness 6.8 mm r ed handler with horizontally pivoted lever Fat push button + 2 red/black coloured disks u Bistable fat push button without disk Black selector short lever at 2 positions with return Black selector short lever at 2 positions Black selector short lever at 3 positions with return Black selector short lever at 3 positions Black selector long lever at 2 positions with return Black selector long lever at 2 positions Black selector long lever at 3 positions with return Black selector long lever at 3 positions 2 positions key selector with extractable key in 2 positions 2 positions key selector with extractable key in 0 r ed mushroom-head push button 40 Black mushroom-head push button 40 r ed mushroom-head push button with lock 40 : reducer from 30 to 22.5 mm s Adapter for bore 30 G2326 : Key for ESC selectors Green disk for push button d Weight [g] 124 150 5 25 15 20 20 20 20 26 26 26 26 50 50 27 27 29
2-17
DISTRIBUTORS
VALVES SERIES 70, HAND-OPERATED, 1/4

90 LEVER 3/2, 1/4 90 LEVER 5/2, 1/4
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Code 7020000100 7020000200
Weight [g] 244 244
Symbol
Code 7020000300 7020000400
Weight [g] 290 290
Symbol
Code 7020001400
Weight [g] 194
Symbol
Code 7020001700
Weight [g] 244
90 LEVER 5/3, 1/4

Symbol Code 7020001000 7020000900 7020001100 7020000500 7020000600 7020000700 Abbrev. mAV 36 LES CC mAV 36 LES OC mAV 36 LES PC mAV 36 LEO CC mAV 36 LEO OC mAV 36 LEO PC Weight [g] 354 354 354 288 288 288
2-18
VALVES SERIES 70, HAND OPERATED, 1/2

90 LEVER 3/2, 1/2 90 LEVER 5/2, 1/2
Symbol
Code 7030000100 7030000200
Weight [g] 1443 1435
Symbol
Code 7030000300 7030000400
Weight [g] 1588 1630
90 LEVER 5/3, 1/2

Symbol Code 7030001000 7030000900 7030001100 7030000500 7030000600 7030000700 Abbrev. mAV 46 LES CC mAV 46 LES OC mAV 46 LES PC mAV 46 LEO CC mAV 46 LEO OC mAV 46 LEO PC Weight [g] 1810 1800 1800 1615 1605 1605
NOTES
2-19
DISTRIBUTORS
VALVES SERIES 70, MECHANICALLY OPERATED, 1/8

TECHNICAL DATA
Thread at valve ports Operation force at 6 bar: version with direct control pilot-assisted version Operating pressure: version with direct control pilot-assisted version Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar 1/8 N N bar bar C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min 50 6 Vacuum to 10 2.5 to 10 -10 to +60 5 121.43 0.32 400 550
VALVES SEr IES 70, mECHANICALLy OPEr ATED
DISTRIBUTORS
KEY TO CODES
MEV FAMILY MEV mechanically operated valves 2 DIMENSIONS 1/8 2 3 FUNCTION 3 3/2 5 5/2 T A OPERATORS 14 plunger bidirectional roller unidirectional roller sensitive plunger sensitive roller sensitive aerial frontal roller lever S RESETTING (12) mechanical springs pneumatic/mechanical spring* NC FURTHER DETAILS NC normally closed OO 5/2
TA BR UR TS RS AS LL
S A
*on demand
PLUNGER 3/2, 1/8
PLUNGER 5/2, 1/8
Symbol
Code 7001000100
Abbrev. mEV 23 TAS NC
Weight [g] 88
Symbol
Code 7001000110
Abbrev. mEV 25 TAS OO
Weight [g] 114
2-20
ROLLER LEVER 3/2, 1/8
ROLLER LEVER 5/2, 1/8
Symbol
Code 7001000500
Abbrev. mEV 23 Br S NC
Weight [g] 130
Symbol
Code 7001000510
Abbrev. mEV 25 Br S OO
Weight [g] 156
UNIDIRECTIONAL ROLLER 3/2, 1/8 LEVERS
UNIDIRECTIONAL ROLLER 5/2, 1/8 LEVERS
Symbol
Code 7001000600
Abbrev. mEV 23 Ur S NC
Weight [g] 136
Symbol
Code 7001000610
Abbrev. mEV 25 Ur S OO
Weight [g] 162
PILOT-ASSISTED PLUNGER 3/2 NC, 1/8
PILOT-ASSISTED PLUNGER 5/2, 1/8
Symbol
Code 7001000200
Abbrev. mEV 23 TSS NC
Weight [g] 126
Symbol
Code 7001000210
Abbrev. mEV 25 TSS OO
Weight [g] 152
2-21
DISTRIBUTORS
PILOT-ASSISTED ROLLER LEVER 3/2 NC, 1/8
PILOT-ASSISTED ROLLER LEVER 5/2, 1/8
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Code 7001000400
Abbrev. mEV 23 rSS NC
Weight [g] 138
Symbol
Code 7001000410
Abbrev. mEV 25 rSS OO
Weight [g] 164
PILOT-ASSISTED AERIAL 3/2 NC, 1/8
PILOT-ASSISTED AERIAL 5/2 NC, 1/8
Symbol
Code 7001000700
Abbrev. mEV 23 ASS NC
Weight [g] 142
Symbol
Code 7001000710
Abbrev. mEV 25 ASS OO
Weight [g] 168
ROLLER-LEVER 3/2 1/8

Operating torque: 0.5 Nm
ROLLER-LEVER 5/2 1/8

Operating torque: 0.5 Nm
Symbol
Code 7001000900
Abbrev. mEV 23 LLS NC
Weight [g] 189
Symbol
Code 7001000910
Abbrev. mEV 25 LLS OO
Weight [g] 216
2-22
VALVES SERIES 70, PNEUMATIC

TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure minimum pilot pressure monostable bistable Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Tr A / Trr monostable at 6 bar Tr A / Trr bistable at 6 bar bar bar bar C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min ms ms 1/8 1/4 Vacuum to 10 2.5 1 -10 to +60 7.5 264.26 0.27 750 1100 7/15 7/7 1/2
5 121.43 0.32 400 550 6/15 7/7
15 971.43 0.43 3200 4600 16/46 16/16
KEY TO CODES
PNV FAMILY PNV pneumatic valves 2 DIMENSIONS 1/8 2 3 1/4 4 1/2 3 FUNCTION 3 3/2 5 5/2 6 5/3 PN OPERATORS 14 PN pneumatic S RESETTING (12) mechanical springs bistable differential stable for 5/3 pneumatic/mechanical spring* NC FURTHER DETAILS OO 5/2 NC normally closed NO normally open CC closed centres OC open centres PC pressure centres
S B D O A
*on demand
VALVES SERIES 70, PNEUMATIC, 1/8

MONOSTABLE 3/2 NO, 1/8 MONOSTABLE 3/2 NC, 1/8
Symbol
Code 7010010400
Abbrev. PNV 23 PNS NO
Weight [g] 82
Symbol
Code 7010010200
Abbrev. PNV 23 PNS NC
Weight [g] 82
2-23
VALVES SEr IES 70, PNEUmATIC
DISTRIBUTORS
MONOSTABLE 5/2, 1/8
BISTABLE 5/2, 1/8
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Code 7010011100
Abbrev. PNV 25 PNS OO
Weight [g] 108
Symbol
Code 7010011200 7010011300
Abbrev. PNV 25 PNB OO PNV 25 PND OO
Weight [g] 122 128
BISTABLE 3/2, 1/8 VALVES SEr IES 70, PNEUmATIC
MONOSTABLE 5/3, 1/8
Symbol
Code 7010010100
Abbrev. PNV 23 PNB OO
Weight [g] 96
Symbol
Code 7010012100 7010012200 7010012300
Abbrev. PNV 26 PNS CC PNV 26 PNS OC PNV 26 PNS PC
Weight [g] 150 150 150
NOTES
2-24

Symbol
Code 7020010400
Weight [g] 124
Symbol
Code 7020010200
Weight [g] 122
MONOSTABLE 5/2, 1/4
BISTABLE 5/2, 1/4 VALVES SEr IES 70, PNEUmATIC
Symbol
Code 7020011100
Weight [g] 174
Symbol
Code 7020011200 7020011300
Weight [g] 174 198
BISTABLE 3/2, 1/4
MONOSTABLE 5/3, 1/4
Symbol
Code 7020010100
Weight [g] 134
Symbol
Code 7020012100 7020012200 7020012300
Weight [g] 124 124 124
2-25
DISTRIBUTORS

DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Code 7030010400
Weight [g] 905
Symbol
Code 7030010200
Weight [g] 905
VALVES SEr IES 70, PNEUmATIC
MONOSTABLE 5/2, 1/2
BISTABLE 5/2, 1/2
Symbol
Code 7030011100
Weight [g] 1090
Symbol
Code 7030011200 7030011300
Weight [g] 1077 1090
BISTABLE 3/2, 1/2
MONOSTABLE 5/3, 1/2
Symbol
Code 7030010100
Weight [g] 921
Symbol
Code 7030012100 7030012200 7030012300
Weight [g] 1200 1194 1196
2-26
VALVES SERIES 70, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC

TECHNICAL DATA
1/8 1/4 1/2 Operating pressure: monostable bar 2.5 to10 bistable bar 1 to 10 asserved bar Vacuum to 10 minimum pilot pressure bar 2.5 Operating temperature range C -10 to +60 Nominal diameter mm 5 7.5 15 Conductance C Nl/min bar 121.43 264.26 971.43 Critical ratio b bar/bar 0.27 0.43 0.32 Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Nl/min 400 750 3200 Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Nl/min 550 1100 4600 Tr A / Trr monostable at 6 bar ms 15/35 19/45 36/60 Tr A / Trr bistable at 6 bar ms 20/20 21/21 30/30 Hand operation bistable Coil voltage values 24VDC to 24VAC to 110VAC to 220VAC 50/60Hz Power 2 W (DC) 3VA (AC) 2 W (DC) 3VA (AC) 5W (DC) 5VA (AC) Voltage tolerance % -10 to +15 Insulation class F 155 maximum coil nut torque Nm 1
KEY TO CODES
SOV FAMILY SOV solenoid/ pneumatic 2 DIMENSIONS 2 1/8 3 1/4 4 1/2 3 FUNCTION 3 3/2 5 5/2 6 5/3 SO OPERATORS 14 SO solenoid SE solenoid assisted S RESETTING (12) mechanical springs bistable differential pneumatic pneumatic/mechanical spring* NC FURTHER DETAILS NC normally closed NO normally open CC closed centres OC open centres PC pressure centres OO 5/2
S B D P A
*on demand
VALVES SERIES 70, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC-PILOT-ASSISTED SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC, 1/8

Symbol
Code 7010020400
Abbrev. SOV 23 SOS NO
Weight [g] 100
Symbol
Code 7010020200 7010020500
Abbrev. SOV 23 SOS NC SOV 23 SES NC
Weight [g] 100 100
2-27
VALVES SEr IES 70, SOLENOID/PNEUmATIC
DISTRIBUTORS
MONOSTABLE 5/2, 1/8
BISTABLE 5/2, 1/8
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Code 7010021100 7010021500
Abbrev. SOV 25 SOS OO SOV 25 SES OO
Weight [g] 128 129
Symbol
Code 7010021200 7010021300 7010021600
Abbrev. SOV 25 SOB OO SOV 25 SOD OO SOV 25 SEB OO
Weight [g] 160 166 160
BISTABLE 3/2, 1/8
MONOSTABLE 5/3, 1/8
Symbol
Code 7010020100 7010020300
Abbrev. SOV 23 SOB OO SOV 23 SEB OO
Weight [g] 135 136
Symbol
Code 7010022100 7010022200 7010022300 7010022400 7010022500 7010022600
Abbrev. SOV 26 SOS CC SOV 26 SOS OC SOV 26 SOS PC SOV 26 SES CC SOV 26 SES OC SOV 26 SES PC
Weight [g] 190 190 190 188 188 188
2-28
VALVES SERIES 70, SOLENOID/PNEUMATICPILOT-ASSISTED SOLENOID/ PNEUMATIC, 1/4

Symbol
Code 7020020400
Weight [g] 152
Symbol
Code 7020020200 7020020500
Weight [g] 152 152
5/2 1/4 MONOSTABLE
5/2 1/4 BISTABLE
Symbol
Code 7020021100 7020021500
Weight [g] 200 200
Symbol
Code 7020021200 7020021300 7020021600
Weight [g] 236 252 242
2-29
DISTRIBUTORS
BISTABLE 3/2, 1/4
MONOSTABLE 5/3, 1/4
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Code 7020020100 7020020300
Weight [g] 190 190
Symbol
Code 7020022100 7020022200 7020022300 7020022400 7020022500 7020022600
Weight [g] 274 274 274 277 277 277
NOTES
2-30
VALVES SERIES 70, SOLENOID/PNEUMATICPILOT-ASSISTED SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC, 1/2

Symbol
Code 7030020400
Weight [g] 930
Symbol
Code 7030020200 7030020500
Weight [g] 930 923
MONOSTABLE 5/2, 1/2
BISTABLE 5/2, 1/2
Symbol
Code 7030021100 7030021500
Weight [g] 1120 1113
Symbol
Code 7030021200 7030021300 7030021600
Weight [g] 1140 1152 1127
2-31
DISTRIBUTORS
BISTABLE 3/2, 1/2
MONOSTABLE 5/3, 1/2
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Code 7030020100 7030020300
Weight [g] 955 942
Symbol
Code 7030022100 7030022200 7030022300 7030022400 7030022500 7030022600
Weight [g] 1265 1265 1265 1252 1252 1252
ACCESSORIES FOR SERIES 70 SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC VALVES

r efer to page 2-46 for coils and connectors
NOTES
2-32
ACCESSORIES: 1/8 MANIFOLDS FOR SERIES 70 PNV-SOV VALVES

MANIFOLD WITH 2 TO 7 POSITIONS + FITTINGS
Code 0221000200 0221000300 0221000400 0221000500 0221000600 0221000700 Description CSA-18-02 CSA-18-03 CSA-18-04 CSA-18-05 CSA-18-06 CSA-18-07 Weight [g] 70 99 131 162 192 229
BRACKET SET H120

Code 0221000190 Description CSA-18-OO Weight [g] 309
BRACKET SET H60

Code 0221000191 Description CSA-18-OC Weight [g] 213
BRACKET SET H30

Code 0221000192 Description CSA-18-OE Weight [g] 181
ACCESSORIES: 1/4 MANIFOLDS FOR SERIES 70 PNV-SOV VALVES

MANIFOLD WITH 2 TO 7 POSITIONS + FITTINGS
Code 0222000200 0222000300 0222000400 0222000500 0222000600 0222000700 Description CSA-14-02 CSA-14-03 CSA-14-04 CSA-14-05 CSA-14-06 CSA-14-07 Weight [g] 89 131 174 213 252 328
BRACKET SET H120

Code 0222000190 Description CSA-14-OO Weight [g] 338
BRACKET SET H60

Code 0222000191 Description CSA-14-OC Weight [g] 242
BRACKET SET H30

Code 0222000192 Description CSA-14-OE Weight [g] 209
2-33
ACCESSOr IES FOr VALVES SEr IES 70
DISTRIBUTORS
ACCESSORIES: MANIFOLD BASES FOR SERIES 70 PNV-SOV VALVES

MODULAR BASES FOR SERIES 70 SOV-PNV VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
1/8
Reference a b c d e f g h i Code 0226004150 0226004201 0226004200 0226004300 0226004600 0226004000 0226004500 0226004001 0226006600
1/4
Code 0226005150 0226005201 0226005200 0226005300 0226005600 0226005000 0226005500 0226005001 Description modular manifold base End plate without Or End plate with Or Intermediate part for upper feed Adapter for omega bar Intermediate diaphragm Blanking plate 3/2 cap Dimensional adapter
2-34
a MODULAR BASE
1/8 1/4
Code 0226004150 0226005150 Description Comp. mANIFOLD 1/8 Comp. mANIFOLD 1/4 Weight [g] 110 131
b END PLATE WITHOUT OR

1/8 1/4
Code 0226004201 0226005201 Description End plate without Or 1/8 End plate without Or 1/4 Weight [g] 52 57
c END PLATE WITH OR

1/8 1/4
Code 0226004200 0226005200 Description End plate with Or 1/8 End plate with Or 1/4 Weight [g] 74 80
d INTERMEDIATE PART FOR UPPER FEED

1/8 1/4
Code 0226004300 0226005300 Description Intermediate part for upper feed 1/8 Intermediate part for upper feed 1/4 Weight [g] 93 109
e ADAPTER FOR OMEGA BAR BASES (DIN EN 50022)

1/8 1/4
Code 0226004600 0226005600 Description Adapter 1/8 Adapter 1/4 Weight [g] 46 46
N.B.: Also for multiple bases
2-35
DISTRIBUTORS
f INTERMEDIATE DIAPHGRAM
1/8 1/4
Code 0226004000 0226005000 Description Intermediate diaphgram 1/8 Intermediate diaphgram 1/4 Weight [g] 2 3
DISTRIBUTORS
g BLANKING PLATE FOR UNUSED POSITIONS

1/8 1/4
Code 0226004500 0226005500 Description Comp. pcs 1/8 Comp. pcs 1/4 Weight [g] 23 29
h PLUG FOR 3/2

1/8 1/4
Code 0226004001 0226005001 Description Complete plug 3/2 1/8 Complete plug 3/2 1/4 Weight [g] 2 4
i DIMENSIONAL ADAPTER 1/8 1/4

Code 0226006600 Description Comp. adapt. 1/8, 1/4 Weight [g] 177
NOTES
2-36
ACCESSORIES: MULTIPLE BASES FOR SERIES 70 PNV-SOV VALVES

MULTIPLE BASES 1/8
Code 0223000201 0223000301 0223000401 0223000501 0223000601 0223000701 0223000801 0223000901 0223001001 Description 2-position base 3-position base 4-position base 5-position base 6-position base 7-position base 8-position base 9-position base 10-position base Abbrev. CVm-18-02 CVm-18-03 CVm-18-04 CVm-18-05 CVm-18-06 CVm-18-07 CVm-18-08 CVm-18-09 CVm-18-10 Weight [g] 236 321 407 494 587 711 760 842 923
MULTIPLE BASES 1/4

Code 0224000201 0224000301 0224000401 0224000501 0224000601 0224000701 0224000801 0224000901 0224001001 Description 2-position base 3-position base 4-position base 5-position base 6-position base 7-position base 8-position base 9-position base 10-position base Abbrev. CVm-14-02 CVm-14-03 CVm-14-04 CVm-14-05 CVm-14-06 CVm-14-07 CVm-14-08 CVm-14-09 CVm-14-10 Weight [g] 296 406 515 624 733 845 956 1055 1086
GASKET KIT
Code 0226004701 0226005701 Description Gasket kit for 1/8 base Gasket kit for 1/4 base Weight [g] 5 5
2-37
DISTRIBUTORS
VALVES SERIES 70, ON BASE
The series 70 valves on base, available in the airand solenoid-actuated versions, is an excellent clean solution for use when it is necessary to intervene on the valves without disconnecting the pipes. Here, the inlet, output and utility ports are in the base.
VALVES SEr IES 70, ON BASE
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure: monostable bistable pilot-assisted minimum pilot pressure Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar maximum torque coil nut bar bar bar bar C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min Nm 2.5 to 10 1 to 10 Vacuum to 10 2.5 -10 to +60 5 107.69 0.29 320 450 1
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b CONTr OL/BASE: Hostaform c SPOOL: chemically nickel-plated aluminium d DISTANCE PLATES: plastic e GASKETS: NBr f PISTONS: Hostaform g PISTON GASKET: NBr h FILTEr : sintered Bronze i SPr INGS: special steel j OPEr ATOr : Brass pipe Stainless steel core
FLOW CHART
2-38
MULTI-PURPOSE BASE FOR VALVES SERIES 70 ON BASE
Reference a
b c d e f
Code 0223100201 0223100401 0223100601 0223100801 0223101001 0223106301 0223106303 0223106302 0223106500 0226004600
Description 2-position base 1/8 on base 4-position base 1/8 on base 6-position base 1/8 on base 8-position base 1/8 on base 10-position base 1/8 on base Separate feed kit Exhaust regulation kit Exhaust feed kit Blanking plate Adapter for omega bar
KEY TO CODES
P N V FAMILY PNV pneumatic SOV elettro-pneumatic B DIMENSIONS B 1/8 on base 5 FUNCTION 5 5/2 6 5/3 P N OPERATORS 14 pneumatic solenoid solenoid assisted S RESETTING (12) mechanical springs bistable differential O O FURTHER DETAILS 5/2 closed centres open centres pressure centres
PN SO SE
S B D
OO CC OC PC
2-39
DISTRIBUTORS
VALVES, SERIES 70, PNEUMATIC, ON BASE

TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure minimum actuation pressure: monostable bistable Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Tr A / Trr monostable at 6 bar Tr A / Trr bistable at 6 bar bar bar bar C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min ms ms Vacuum to 10 2.5 1 -10 to +60 5 107.69 0.29 320 450 6/15 7/7
DISTRIBUTORS
MONOSTABLE 5/2 VALVES SEr IES 70, ON BASE
BISTABLE 5/2
Symbol
Code 7011011100
Abbrev. PNV B5 PNS OO
Weight [g] 125
Symbol
Code 7011011200 7011011300
Abbrev. PNV B5 PNB OO PNV B5 PND OO
Weight [g] 136 142
MONOSTABLE 5/3
NOTES
Symbol
Code 7011012100 7011012200 7011012300
Abbrev. PNV B6 PNS CC PNV B6 PNS OC PNV B6 PNS PC
Weight [g] 164 164 164
2-40
VALVES SERIES 70, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC ON BASE

TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure: monostable bistable pilot-assisted minimum pilot pressure Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Tr A / Trr monostable at 6 bar Tr A / Trr bistable at 6 bar Electrical technical data Coil voltage values Power Voltage tolerance Insulation class maximum coil nut torque bar bar bar bar C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min ms ms 2.5 to 10 1 to 10 Vacuum to 10 2.5 -10 to +60 5 107.69 0.29 320 450 15 / 35 20 / 20
24VDC/24VAC/110VAC/220VAC 50/60Hz 2 W (DC) 3VA (AC) % -10 to +15 F 155 Nm 1
MONOSTABLE 5/2
BISTABLE 5/2 VALVES SEr IES 70, ON BASE
Symbol
Code 7011021100 7011021500
Abbrev. SOV B5 SOS OO SOV B5 SES OO
Weight [g] 142 143
Symbol
Code 7011021200 7011021300 7011021600
Abbrev. SOV B5 SOB OO SOV B5 SOD OO SOV B5 SEB OO
Weight [g] 174 180 174
BISTABLE 5/3
Symbol Code 7011022100 7011022200 7011022300 7011022400 7011022500 7011022600 Abbrev. SOV B6 SOS CC SOV B6 SOS OC SOV B6 SOS PC SOV B6 SES CC SOV B6 SES OC SOV B6 SES PC Weight [g] 204 204 204 202 202 202
ACCESSORIES
2-41
DISTRIBUTORS
ACCESSORIES: MULTIPLE BASES
a MULTIPLE BASE
b SEPARATE FEED KIT
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0223100201 0223100401 0223100601 0223100801 0223101001
Description 2-position base 1/8 on base 4-position base 1/8 on base 6-position base 1/8 on base 8-position base 1/8 on base 10-position base 1/8 on base
Weight [g] 341 591 855 1093 1352
Code 0223106301
Description Separate feed kit 1/8
Weight [g] 65
c EXHAUST REGULATION KIT
d EXHAUST FEED KIT
Code 0223106303
Description Exhaust regulation kit 1/8
Weight [g] 75
Code 0223106302
Description Exhaust feed kit 1/8
Weight [g] 75
e BLANKING PLATE
f ADAPTER FOR BAR OMEGA (DIN EN 50022)
Code 0223106500
Description Blanking plate 1/8
Weight [g] 15
Code 0226004600
Description Adapter for bar omega 1/8
Weight [g] 46
2-42
NAMUR VALVES
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure: monostable, electric bar 2.5 to 10 bistable, electric bar 1to10 pilot-assisted, electric bar Vacuum to 10 minimum actuation pressure: monostable, pneumatic bar 2.5 bistable, pneumatic bar 1 Operating temperature range C 10 to +60 Nominal diameter mm 7.5 Conductance C Nl/min bar 264.26 Critical ratio b bar/bar 0.27 Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Nl/min 750 Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar (0.1 mpa - 14.5 psi) Nl/min 1100 r esponse time at 6 bar: Tr A/Trr monostable, pneumatic at 6 bar ms 7 / 15 Tr A/Trr bistable, pneumatic at 6 bar ms 7 / 7 Tr A/Trr monostable electric at 6 bar ms 19 / 45 Tr A/Trr bistable electric at 6 bar ms 21 / 21 Compatibility with oils Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
KEY TO CODES
P N V FAMILY PNV pneumatic SOV electro-pneumatic A DIMENSIONS A NAmUr 5 FUNCTION 5 5/2 4/2 4 P N OPERATORS 14 pneumatic solenoid S RESETTING (12) mechanical springs bistable O O FURTHER DETAILS OO 5/2 NC normally closed
PN SO
S B
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b CONTr OL/BASE: Hostaform c SPOOL: chemically nickel-plated aluminium d DISTANCE PLATES: plastic e GASKETS: NBr nitrile rubber f PISTONS: Hostaform g PISTON GASKET: NBr nitrile rubber h INTEr FACE GASKETS: NBr nitrile rubber i SPr INGS: special steel j OPEr ATOr : Brass pipe Stainless steel core
FUNCTIONING DIAGRAM 4/2 NAMUR VALVE During the piston retraction stage, the air for chamber A is taken from the air leaving chamber B. This prevents the dirty air from getting in from the outside enviroment.
2-43
NAmUr VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
MONOSTABLE, PNEUMATIC 4/2
BISTABLE, PNEUMATIC 4/2
DISTRIBUTORS
Symbol
Code 7021010110
Abbrev. PNV A4 PNS NC
Weight [g] 208
Symbol
Code 7021010210
Abbrev. PNV A4 PNB OO
Weight [g] 216
NAmUr VALVES
MONOSTABLE, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC 4/2
BISTABLE, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC 4/2
Symbol
Code 7021020110
Abbrev. SOV A4 SOS NC
Weight [g] 234
Symbol
Code 7021020210
Abbrev. SOV A4 SOB OO
Weight [g] 270
Symbol
Code 7021010100
Abbrev. PNV A5 PNS OO
Weight [g] 208
Symbol
Code 7021010200
Abbrev. PNV A5 PNB OO
Weight [g] 216
2-44
MONOSTABLE, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC 5/2
BISTABLE, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC 5/2
Symbol
Code 7021020100
Abbrev. SOV A5 SOS OO
Weight [g] 234
Symbol
Code 7021020200
Abbrev. SOV A5 SOB OO
Weight [g] 270
ACCESSORIES FOR NAMUR VALVES SOV, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC

NOTES
2-45
NAmUr VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
COILS AND CONNECTORS FOR SERIES 70 AND NAMUR VALVES
COILS
Voltage tolerance: -10% + 15% Insulation class: F155 Degree of protection: IP65 DIN 40050 with connector Avoid prolonged exposure to atmospheric agents Code W0215000151 W0215000101 W0215000111 W0215000121 W0215000131 Abbrev. Coil 22 8 BA 2W-12VDC Coil 22 8 BA 2W-24VDC Coil 22 8 BA 3.5VA-24VAC Coil 22 8 BA 3.5VA-110VAC Coil 22 8 BA 3.5VA-220VAC Coil temperature 100% ED: from 70C to 20C Ambient temperature According to Atex 94/9 CE rule, group 2, category 3 GD Nominal voltage 12Vcc 24Vcc 24V 50/60Hz 110V 50/60Hz 220V 50/60Hz Absorption Inrush 2W 2W 5.3VA 5.3VA 5.3VA
Holding 2W 2W 3.5VA 3.5VA 3.5VA
DISTRIBUTORS
COIL CONNECTORS
Code W0970510011 W0970510012 W0970510013 W0970510014 W0970510015 W0970510016 W0970510017 W0970510070 Type Standard LED 24V LED 110V LED 220V LED + VDr 24V LED + VDr 110V LED + VDr 220V Atex II 3 GD Colour Black Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Black Cable PG9 PG9 PG9 PG9 PG9 PG9 PG9 PG9
COILS AND CONNECTOr S FOr SEr IES 70 AND NAmUr VALVES
KIT COIL EEXM

Code 0227606913 0227606915 0227608013 0227608015 0227608023 0227608025 0227608033 0227608035 Description Kit for coil 30 24VDC EEXmT5 cable 3 m Kit for coil 30 24VDC EEXmT5 cable 5 m Kit for coil 30 24VAC EEXmT5 cable 3 m Kit for coil 30 24VAC EEXmT5 cable 5 m Kit for coil 30 110VAC EEXmT5 cable 3 m Kit for coil 30 110VAC EEXmT5 cable 5 m Kit for coil 30 230VAC EEXmT5 cable 3 m Kit for coil 30 230VAC EEXmT5 cable 5 m
According to Atex 94/9 CE rule, group II, category 2 GD
KIT COILS SIDE 22 IP65

Code 0222100100 Description Kit for coils 22 - IP65
Improved IP65 protection, even after prolonged exposure to atmospheric agents. Applicable to valves with a technopolymer control.
2-46
10-mm SOLENOID VALVES SERIES PLT-10
PLT-10 solenoid valves are the latest development in modern pneumatic design, where the main trends focus on miniaturisation, enhanced performance, reduced power and reliability. Numerous versions are available, all with an ISO 15218 pneumatic interface. The power required to operate the PLT-10 has been greatly reduced, ranging from 0.3 to 0.8 Watts. It is available with a LED indicating when it is active. monostable manual control is also possible. None of the versions will get damaged if the polarity is accidentally inverted.
TECHNICAL DATA
Type Operating temperature range (Te) Fluid temperature (Tg) Fluid Operating life Weight Voltage tolerance max operating frequency Switching factor Insulation class Index of protection Power connection C C 3/2 NC 5 to 50 5 to 50 Filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air Over 50 million cycles 12 10 % 30 Hz 100 % F155 IP51 PLUG IN
g DV f ED
COMPONENTS a Tr ANSPAr ENT COVEr: PA612-transparent n mANUAL SPr ING: AISI 302 (only for version with manual operated) b ASSEmBLy SCr EWS: galvanized steel o SPr ING: AISI 302 c COVEr: PA66 p WINDING: PPS - Copper wire d PIN e mOBILE COr E OVEr- STAmPING: FKm/FPm q FIXED COr E: AISI 430F r COIL-COVEr GASKET: NBr f mOBILE COr E: AISI 403F s ELECTr ONIC BOAr D g COIL OVEr- STAmPING: PA66 (only for version with electronic board) h BODy-COIL GASKET: NBr 70 i ASSEmBLy SCr EWS: galvanized steel j BODy GASKET: NBr k BODy: PA66 l mANUAL GASKET: NBr (only for version with manual operated) m mANUAL CONTr OL: OT58 nickel-plated brass (only for version with manual operated)
OPERATING CHART DE-ENEr GIZED ENEr GIZED DE-ENEr GIZED
2-47
10-mm SOLENOID VALVES SEr IES PLT-10
DISTRIBUTORS
PLT-10 WITH BASE AND CONNECTION ON THE SAME SIDE WITHOUT mANUAL WITH mANUAL
DISTRIBUTORS
Version (3/2 NC) Without LED
Manual Voltage [Volt] 722113340000 without 24VDC 722113340100 with 24VDC
Code
Power [Watt] 0.7 0.7
Through [mm] 0.6 0.6
Operating press. [bar] 3 to 7 3 to 7
Flow rate at 6 P=1 bar [Nl/min] 9 9
Tmax coil a 24VDC Te 20C a ED100% [C] 93 93
Weight [g] 12 12
With LED
722113541000 without 722113541100 with
24VDC 24VDC
0.9 0.9
0.6 0.6
3 to 7 3 to 7
9 9
93 93
12 12
SPEED-UP e LED
722116841000 without 722116841100 with
24VDC 24VDC
3/0.3 3/0.3
1.2 1.2
2 to 7 2 to 7
16 16
51 51
12 12
PLT-10 WITH BASE AND CONNECTION ON OPPOSITE SIDES WITHOUT mANUAL WITH mANUAL
Manuale Voltage [Volt] 722213340000 without 24VDC 722213340100 with 24VDC
Code
Operating press. [bar] 3 to 7 3 to 7
Tmax coil a 24VDC Te 20C a ED100% [C] 93 93
Weight [g] 12 12
With LED
722213541000 without 722213541100 with
24VDC 24VDC
0.9 0.9
0.6 0.6
3 to 7 3 to 7
9 9
93 93
12 12
SPEED-UP e LED
722216841000 without 722216841100 with
24VDC 24VDC
3/0.3 3/0.3
1.2 1.2
2 to 7 2 to 7
16 16
51 51
12 12
2-48
KEY TO CODES
7 2 2 FAMILY Solenoid valves series PLT-10 1 2 1 POSITIONING Base and connection on same side Base and connection opposite sides 1 POWER CONNECTION 1 Plug-in 3 THROUGH 3 0.6 mm 6 1.2 mm 3 POWER 3 0.7 W 5 0.9 W 8 3/0.3 W 4 VOLTAGE 4 24VDC 0 LED 0 1 LED 1 MANUAL CONTROL 0 1 manual monostable 0 0 VERSION 00 Standard
1 POSN.
+ POSN.
ACCESSORIES
PLUG-IN CONNECTOR
Code Description W0970512000 mACH 11 PLUG-IN connector L = 300
SPARE PARTS
INTERFACE GASKET
Code 0226009701 Description PLT-10 GASKET
N.B. 50 for pack
CAP FOR UNUSED POSITION

Code Description Weight [g] W0400100200 Acc. cap 10 mm 6
STANDARD SECURING SCREW (FOR ALUMINIUM)

Code 0226009702 Description PLT-10 screw for aluminium
N.B. 100 for pack
SECURING SCREWS FOR TECHNOPOLYMER

Code 0226009703 Description Screw PLT-10 for technopol.
N.B. 100 for pack When mounting on technopolymer bodies, use these screws instead of the ones supplied with the PLT-10. ATTENTION: approximative dimensions for not added glass plastic materials Its always advisable to effect assembling tests.
2-49
Code W0400100101 W0400100102 W0400100103 W0400100104 W0400100105 W0400100106 W0400100107 W0400100108 W0400100109 W0400100110
Description Base 1 posn. for PLT-10 Base 2 posn. for PLT-10 Base 3 posn. for PLT-10 Base 4 posn. for PLT-10 Base 5 posn. for PLT-10 Base 6 posn. for PLT-10 Base 7 posn. for PLT-10 Base 8 posn. for PLT-10 Base 9 posn. for PLT-10 Base 10 posn. for PLT-10
DISTRIBUTORS
DIMENSIONS OF BASES FOR PLT-10
BASES FOR PLT-10 MULTIPLE CONNECTION
BASES FOr PLT-10 mULTIPLE CONNECTION
DISTRIBUTORS
Series PLT-10 solenoid valves can be mounted on bases complete with electrical and pneumatic connections, from 4 to 24 positions. The electric contacts of each valve are linked to a single multiple connector via a printed circuit board. The connector has 9 pins or 25 pins, depending on the model and the number of valves that can be mounted. Versions with 25-pin connectors can interface with standard fiel buses by means of Profibus-D , Can-Open and Device-Net modules for multimach. (see page 2-178). The compressed-air supply is common to all the valves and can be provided on either side of the base by means of a 1/8 fitting Connection to the utilities is via automatic integrated cartridges for 4 pipe. The solenoid valve outlet is free, in a slot in the base. The bases can be secured from above using m3 screws, or on a DIN bar using a bracket (see accessories). The bases can mount various types of PLT-10 solenoid valves: 3/2 NC, 3/2 NO, with or without a manual actuator. With this modular system, you can select the desired sequence of valves (NC, NO, blind) and change it at any time.
TECHNICAL DATA
Supply voltage max input W 24 VDC 0.7 per position for PLT-10 STD without LED 0.9 per position for PLT-10 STD with LED 3/0.3 per position for PLT-10 NC with Speed-up 3/0.7 per position for PLT-10 NO with Speed-up Led mounted on the PLT-10 (on versions of solenoid valve where envisaged) 5 to 50 IP 40 24 9, of which 1 common, for versions with 4 and 8 positions 25, of which 1 common, for versions with 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24 positions
Valve actuation indicator Operating temperature range Protection degree (with valves and connectors mounted) maximum number of mountable PLT-10s Number of contacts
COMPONENTS a Anodized aluminium base b multi-pin electrical connector c Automatic integrated cartridges for 4 pipe d Electrical connectors for PLT-10 solenoid valves mounted on printed circuit board e Securing screw f Technopolymer cover
CONNECTION DIAGRAM 25 PIN 9 PIN
Position Nr PLT Position Nr PLT of electrical contact of electrical contact 1 PLT1 1 PLT1 2 PLT2 2 PLT2 3 PLT3 3 PLT3 4 PLT4 4 PLT4 5 PLT5 5 PLT5 6 PLT6 6 PLT6 7 PLT7 7 PLT7 8 PLT8 8 PLT8 9 PLT9 9 COmm ON (-) 10 PLT10 11 PLT11 12 PLT12 13 PLT13 14 PLT14 15 PLT15 16 PLT16 17 PLT17 18 PLT18 19 PLT19 20 PLT20 21 PLT21 22 PLT22 23 PLT23 24 PLT24 25 COmm ON (-) Pilot numbering from left to right, starting from the position closest to the connection.
2-50
ASSEMBLY OF SOLENOID VALVES AND ACCESSORIES
HOW TO SECURE THE BASE
A a Solenoid valve b Pneumatic circuit cap for blind position c Electric circuit cap for blind position (use two identificatio labels) d Identificatio label e Electrical connector CODES AND DIMENSIONS FOR BASES 9 AND 25 PINS
A From above using m3 screws B On a DIN bar, using the bracket and screws provided The bases come with the rear holes plugged by provided dowels.
Code 0210040004 0210040008 0210240004 0210240008 0210240012 0210240016 0210240020 0210240024
Description 4-posn. base PLT 10 9-PIN mult conn. 8-posn. base PLT 10 9-PIN mult conn. 4-posn. base PLT 10 25-PIN mult conn. 8-posn. base PLT 10 25-PIN mult conn. 12-posn. base PLT 10 25-PIN mult conn. 16-posn. base PLT 10 25-PIN mult conn. 20-posn. base PLT 10 25-PIN mult conn. 24-posn. base PLT 10 25-PIN mult conn.
N of PINS 9 9 25 25 25 25 25 25
N of positions 4 8 4 8 12 16 20 24
L1 81.9 122.5 104.8 145.4 186 226.6 267.2 307.8
L2 10.6 10.6 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5
L3 18 18 30 30 30 30 30 30
L4 41 41 63.9 63.9 63.9 63.9 63.9 63.9
L5 19.6 19.6 30.5 30.5 30.5 30.5 30.5 30.5
Weight [g] 160 235 210 280 355 430 500 575
2-51
DISTRIBUTORS
PLT-10 FOR MULTIPLE ELECTRIC CONNECTION

TECHNICAL DATA
Type Operating temperature range (Te) Fluid temperature (Tg) Fluid Operating life Weight Voltage tolerance Max operating frequency Switching factor Insulation class Degree of protection C C NC 3/2 NC ed NO 5 to 50 5 to 50 Filtered, lubricated or unlubricated air Over 50 million cycles 12 10 % 30 Hz 100 % F155 IP 51 IP 50 NO
g DV f ED
BASES FOR PLT-10 MULTIPLE CONNECTION
DISTRIBUTORS
OPERATING CHART
NC
NO
DE-ENERg IZED
ENERg IZED
DE-ENERg IZED
DE-ENERg IZED
ENERg IZED
DE-ENERg IZED
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r
2-52
TRANSPARENT COVER: PA612-transparent ASSEMBLy SCREWS: galvanized steel PIN MOBILE CORE OVER-STAMPINg: FKM/FPM MOBILE CORE: AISI 403F COIL OVER-STAMPINg: P A66 BODy-COIL g ASKET: NBR70 ASSEMBLy SCREWS: galvanized steel BODy g ASKET: NBR BODy: PA66 MANUAL g ASKET: NBR (only for version with manual operated) MANUAL CONTROL: OT58 nickel-plated brass (only for version with manual operated) MANUAL SPRINg: AISI 302 (only for version with manual operated) SPRINg: AISI 302 WINDINg: PPS - Copper wire FIxED CORE: AISI 430F COIL-COVER g ASKET: NBR ELECTRONIC BOARD (only for version with electronic board)
PLT-10 NC-NO FOR MULTIPLE ELECTRIC CONNECTION WITHOUT mANUAL WITH mANUAL
Code 722123340000 722123340100
Manual Voltage [Volt] without 24VDC with 24VDC
Operating pressure [bar] 3 to 7 3 to 7
T Max coil T at 24VDC Te 20C a ED100% [C] 93 93
Weight [g] 12 12
With LED
722123541000 722123541100
without 24VDC 0.9 with 24VDC 0.9
0.6 0.6
3 to 7 3 to 7
9 9
93 93
12 12
SPEED-UP and LED
722126841000 722126841100
without 24VDC 3/0.3 1.2 with 24VDC 3/0.3 1.2
2 to 7 2 to 7
16 16
51 51
12 12
Version (3/2 NO) SPEED-UP and LED
Code 722126841010 722126841110
Manual Voltage [Volt] without 24VDC 24VDC with
Power [Watt] 3/0.7 3/0.7
Operating pressure [bar] 2 to 7 2 to 7
T Max coil T at 24VDC Te 20C a ED100% [C] 51 51
Weight [g] 12 12
2-53
DISTRIBUTORS
ACCESSORIES
CONNECTION BRACKETS ON BAR OMEGA (DIN EN 50022)
Code 0227301600 Description Connection brackets on din BAr HDm/Cm Weight [g] 30
Supplied complete with one m4x45 screws and one m6 grub screw Individually packed
DISTRIBUTORS
CAP FOR UNUSED POSITION

Code W0400100200 Description Cap 10 mm Weight [g] 6
ACCESSOr IES FOr BASES FOr PLT-10 mULTIPLE CONNECTION
STRAIGHT AND 90 CONNECTOR KIT, 9 WIRES

Code 0226180102 Description Straight and 90 connector kit, 9 wires Weight [g] 31
STRAIGHT AND 90 CONNECTOR KIT, 25 WIRES

Code 0226180101 Description Straight and 90 connector kit, 25 wires Weight [g] 48
CABLES
Code 0226107201 0226107101 0226107102 Description 10-wire cable 19-wire cable 25-wire cable Weight [g] 86 122 130
Specify the number of metres desired
2-54
STRAIGHT PRE-WIRED CONNECTOR KIT

Code 0226900100 0226900250 0226900500 0226920100 0226920250 0226920500 Description Connector + 9-wire axial cable L = 1 m Connector + 9-wire axial cable L = 2.5 m Connector + 9-wire axial cable L = 5 m Connector + 25-wire axial cable L = 1 m Connector + 25-wire axial cable L = 2.5 m Connector + 25-wire axial cable L = 5 m Weight [g] 90 220 434 132 320 636
PRE-WIRED 90 CONNECTOR
Code 0226910100 0226910250 0226910500 0226930100 0226930250 0226930500 Description Connector + 9-wire 90 cable L = 1 m Connector + 9-wire 90 cable L = 2.5 m Connector + 9-wire 90 cable L = 5 m Connector + 25-wire 90 cable L = 1 m Connector + 25-wire 90 cable L = 2.5 m Connector + 25-wire 90 cable L = 5 m Weight [g] 90 220 434 132 320 636
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR PRE-WIRED PLUG CONNECTORS 25 PIN

Position of electrical contact 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Colour of the corresponding wire blue/black red/brown white/black red/blue black/orange yellow/red black/brown white/red red/black Position of electrical contact 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Colour of the corresponding wire brown/white red/orange light blue yellow/white yellow red/green orange orange/white green Position of electrical contact 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Colour of the corresponding wire yellow/black white blue/white brown green/white red green/black Position of electrical contact 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9 PIN
Colour of the corresponding wire green/black white blue/black blue yellow/black yellow red/black green white/black
IDENTIFICATION PLATE KIT

Code 0226107000 Description Identificatio plate kit Weight [g] 30
Comes in 10-pc. packs
R17 - PIPE RELEASE SPANNER

Code 2L17001 Description r L17 Tube from 3 to 10
Lenght = 140 mm
2-55
ACCESSOr IES FOr BASES FOr PLT-10 mULTIPLE CONNECTION
DISTRIBUTORS
SOLENOID VALVES PIV.M 15 mm
3/2 NC/NO direct control microvalves Possible assembly on single and multiple bases monostable manual actuation as standard Assembly in any position Operation with filtere lubricated or unlubricated air maximum ambient temperature: 50C Low power absorption
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA SOLENOID VALVES PIV.m 15 mm
Voltage tolerance Frequenza tensione alternativa (AC) max operating frequency Solenoid rating r esponse time Type of protection Power connection Insulation class Ambient temperature Fluid temperature Fluid Operating life materials % Hz Hz ms 10 to +15 50/60 30 100% ED z 10 IP 65 EN 60529 9.4 mm micro centre distance 155 10 to + 50 10 to + 50 Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air 100 million cycles Body: PPS Spring: 302 stainless steel FKm/FPm gaskets 30 monostable In any position
C C
Weight manual control Assembly position
KEY TO CODES
P I V FAMILY 1 3 6 1 AIR HOLE 1 mm 1.1 mm 1.5 mm 3 NUMBER OF WAYS 3 ways 3 M DIMENSIONS 15 x 15 M 0 THREAD 0 on base 1 VERSION 24 VDC 24 VAC 110 VAC 220 VAC N C FURTHER DETAILS NC normally closed NO normally open
1 3 5 7
2-56
PIV.M STD DIMENSIONS

Symbol Code W4015001000 W4015001010 W4015001020 W4015001030 W4015001100 W4015001110 W4015001120 W4015001130 W4015002000 W4015002010 W4015002020 W4015002030 Description PIV33m01 NC PIV33m03 NC PIV33m05 NC PIV33m07 NC PIV63m01 NC PIV63m03 NC PIV63m05 NC PIV63m07 NC PIV13m01 NO PIV13m03 NO PIV13m05 NO PIV13m07 NO Voltage [Volt] 24VDC 24VAC 110VAC 220VAC 24VDC 24VAC 110VAC 220VAC 24VDC 24VAC 110VAC 220VAC Flow rate [Watt] 2.5W 2W - 3VA 2W - 3VA 2W - 3VA 2.5W 2W - 3VA 2W - 3VA 2W - 3VA 2.5W 2W - 3VA 2W - 3VA 2W - 3VA Air [mm] 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1 1 1 1 Factor hole 0.42 0.42 0.42 0.42 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 Operating press. [bar] 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 6 0 to 6 0 to 6 0 to 6 0 to 6 0 to 6 0 to 6 0 to 6
MULTIPLE BASE FOR PIV.M 1 POSN. + POSN.

Code W0400101001 W0400101002 W0400101003 W0400101004 W0400101005 W0400101006 W0400101007 W0400101008 W0400101009 W0400101010 Description Single base 1 position multiple base 2 positions multiple base 3 positions multiple base 4 positions multiple base 5 positions multiple base 6 positions multiple base 7 positions multiple base 8 positions multiple base 9 positions multiple base 10 positions Abbrev. B5001 B5002 B5003 B5004 B5005 B5006 B5007 B5008 B5009 B5010 Weight [g] 6 24 34 46 58 70 82 98 106 114
END PLUG - UNUSED POSITION

Code W0400102000 Description End plug Weight [g] 6
END PLUG - PORT 1

Code W0400102002 Description End plug port 1 Weight [g] 4
MICRO ELECTRIC CONNECTOR 15 mm

Code W0970500011 W0970500012 W0970500013 W0970500015 W0970500016 Colour Black Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Type Standard LED 24V LED 110V LED + VDr 24V LED + VDr 110V
2-57
SOLENOID VALVES PIV.m 15 mm
DISTRIBUTORS
PIV VALVES ON BASE
PIV.I - PIV.T and PIV.B solenoid valves Assembly on base Bistable manual actuation Normally closed/normally open solenoid valves 2/2 3/2 Installation in any position Particularly suitable for high operating frequencies and low response times
PIV VALVES ON BASE
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
Absorption Voltage available Voltage tolerance max operating frequency Solenoid rating r esponse time Type of protection Type of coil Insulation class Ambient temperature Fluid temperature Fluid Woking life Weight maximum coil nut torque % Hz % ms
PIV.I ON BASE
PIV.T ON BASE
PIV.B ON BASE 10W - 13VA 24VDC / 24-110-220 VAC 50/60 Hz 10 to +15 15 100 10 to 15 IP 65 Coil side 30 DIN 43650 155 15 to 50 15 to 50 Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air 250 1
C C
g Nm
5W - 5VA 3.8W - 6.5VA 12-24 VDC / 24-110-220 VAC 24VDC / 24-110-220 VAC 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 10 to +15 10 to +15 30 30 100 100 8 to 15 8 to 15 IP 65 IP 65 Coil side 22 8 Coil side 22 9 DIN 43650 DIN 43650 155 155 15 to 50 15 to 50 15 to 50 15 to 50 Filtered lubricated Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air or unlubricated air 25 million cycles 25 million cycles 80 to 120 (according to the version) 85 1 1
COMPONENTS a manual control: technopolymer b Body: technopolymer c Sleeve locking plate d Spring: stainless steel e Sleeve: brass OT 58 f r ing nut for coil fixin g Gasket: NBr h mobile core i Spring: stainless steel j Spring: stainless steel k Gasket: NBr
2-58
PIV.I VALVES, OPERATOR 8, ON BASE

Symbol Code Description Air hole [mm] 1.2 1.6 1.2 1.6 Kv Factor 0.65 1 0.65 1 Max oper. pressure [bar] DC AC 5W 5VA 10 10 8 8 10 8 10 8
W4018000200 W4018000300 W4018001200 W4018001300
PIV42I0S NC PIV72I0S NC PIV43I0S NC PIV73I0S NC
PIV.T VALVES, OPERATOR 9, ON BASE

Symbol Code Description Air hole [mm] 1.6 1.8 1.6 1.8 Kv Factor 0.75 0.85 0.8 1 Pressure range [bar] DC AC 3.8W 6.5VA 0.5 to 7 0.5 to 7 0.5 to 6.5 0.5 to 6.5 0.5 to 10 0.5 to 8 0.5 to 10 0.5 to 8
W4025002100 W4025002300
PIV73T0B NC PIV83T0B NC
PIV.T VALVES, OPERATOR 9, ON BASE WITH CONVEYED EXHAUST

Symbol Code Description Air hole [mm] 1.6 1.8 1.6 1.8 Kv Factor 0.75 0.85 0.8 1 Pressure range [bar] DC AC 3.8W 6.5VA 0.5 to 7 0.5 to 7 0 to 6 0.5 to 6.5 0.5 to 10 0.5 to 8 0.5 to 10 0.5 to 8
W4025002001 W4025002501 W4025002000 W4025002500
PIV73T00 NO PIV83T00 NO PIV73T00 NC PIV83T00 NC
PIV.T VALVES, OPERATOR 13, ON BASE NOrm ALLy CLOSED

Symbol Code Description Air hole [mm] 2.4 Kv Factor 2.2 Max oper. pressure [bar] DC AC 10W 13VA 8 10
W4026003000
PIVy3B0S NC
2-59
PIV VALVES ON BASE
W4025002101 W4025002301
PIV73T0B NO PIV83T0B NO
DISTRIBUTORS
KEY TO CODES
P I V FAMILY 4 7 8 Y 5 AIR HOLE 1.2 mm 1.6 mm 1.8 mm 2.4 mm 3 NUMBER OF WAYS 2 2 ways 3 3 ways T CONNECTION I T B 22x22 operator 8 22x22 operator 9 30x30 operator 13 0 0 THREAD on base O B S O VERSION on base with conveyed exhaust on base standard N C FURTHER DETAILS NC normally closed NO normally open
DISTRIBUTORS
ACCESSORIES
MULTIPLE BASES FOR PIV.I SOLENOID VALVES, OPERATOR 8
Code W0400111101 W0400111102 W0400111103 W0400111104 W0400111105 W0400111106 W0400111107 W0400111108 W0400111109 W0400111110 Description Base 1 position Base 2 positions Base 3 positions Base 4 positions Base 5 positions Base 6 positions Base 7 positions Base 8 positions Base 9 positions Base 10 positions Abbrev. EB 6001 EB 6002 EB 6003 EB 6004 EB 6005 EB 6006 EB 6007 EB 6008 EB 6009 EB 6010 Weight [g] 22 50 76 102 128 154 180 206 232 258
ACCESSORIES FOR PIV VALVES ON BASE
MANIFOLD BASES FOR PIV.I SOLENOID VALVES, OPERATOR 8

Code W0400111200 W0400111201 W0400111202 Description Manifold base LH end plate RH end plate Abbrev. EB 8000 I EB 8000 TI EB 8000 T2 Weight [g] 24 17 15
BLANKING PLATE FOR PIV.I PIV.T VALVES, UNUSED POSITION

Code W0400112000 Description Unused position Abbrev. EB 6000 Weight [g] 5
MULTIPLE BASES FOR PIV.T SOLENOID VALVES, OPERATOR 9

Code W0400101101 W0400101102 W0400101103 W0400101104 W0400101105 W0400101106 W0400101107 W0400101108 W0400101109 W0400101110 Description Base 1 position Base 2 positions Base 3 positions Base 4 positions Base 5 positions Base 6 positions Base 7 positions Base 8 positions Base 9 positions Base 10 positions Abbrev. 19001 19002 19003 19004 19005 19006 19007 19008 19009 19010 Weight [g] 36 104 148 192 236 280 324 368 452 456
2-60
NC/NO ADAPTER FOR PIV.T VALVES

Code W0400101190 Description NC/NO adapter Abbrev. I-9000 Weight [g] 15
BASE BLANKING PLATE FOR PIV.T VALVES, UNUSED POSITIONS

Code W0400112000 Description Blanking plate Abbrev. B6000 Weight [g] 5
MULTIPLE BASES FOR PIV.B VALVES

Code W0400101201 W0400101202 W0400101203 W0400101204 W0400101205 W0400101206 W0400101207 W0400101208 W0400101209 Description Base 1 position Base 2 positions Base 3 positions Base 4 positions Base 5 positions Base 6 positions Base 7 positions Base 8 positions Base 9 positions Abbrev. B4001 B4002 B4003 B4004 B4005 B4006 B4007 B4008 B4009 Weight [g] 42 94 142 188 234 280 326 372 418
BASE BLANKING PLATE FOR PIV.B VALVES, UNUSED POSITIONS

Code W0400112001 Description Blanking plate Weight [g] 14
COILS, SIDE 22 mm FOR PIV.I SOLENOID VALVES, OPERATOR 8

Voltage tolerance: 10 to +15% Insulation class: F155 Degree of protection: IP65 EN60529 with connector Avoid prolonged exposure to the atmospheric agents. maximum coil temperature at 100% use: 70C at 20 ambient temperature According to Atex 94/9 CE rule, group 2, category 3 GD Code W0215000051 W0215000001 W0215000011 W0215000021 W0215000031 Abbrev. Coil 22 8 5W-12VDC Coil 22 8 5W-24VDC Coil 22 8 5VA-24VAC Coil 22 8 5VA-110VAC Coil 22 8 5VA-220VAC Nominal voltage 12Vcc 24Vcc 24V 50/60Hz 110V 50/60Hz 220V 50/60Hz Absorption Inrush Holding 5W 5W 5W 5W 8VA 5VA 8VA 5VA 8VA 5VA
2-61
ACCESSOr IES FOr PIV VALVES ON BASE
DISTRIBUTORS
COILS, SIDE 22 mm FOR PIV.T SOLENOID VALVES, OPERATOR 9

Voltage tolerance: 10 to +15% Insulation class: F155 Degree of protection: IP65 EN60529 with connector Avoid prolonged exposure to the atmospheric agents maximum coil temperature at 100% use: 70C at 20 ambient temperature Code W0216000001 W0216000011 W0216000021 W0216000031 Abbrev. Coil 22 9 3.8W-24VDC Coil 22 9 6.5VA-24VAC Coil 22 9 6.5VA-110VAC Coil 22 9 6.5VA-220VAC Nominal voltage 24Vcc 24V 50/60Hz 110V 50/60Hz 220V 50/60Hz Absorption Inrush Holding 3.8W 3.8W 9VA 6.5VA 9VA 6.5VA 9VA 6.5VA
DISTRIBUTORS
COILS, SIDE 22 mm FOR PIV.B SOLENOID VALVES

Voltage tolerance: 10 to +15% Insulation class: m180 Degree of protection: IP65 EN60529 with connector Avoid prolonged exposure to the atmospheric agents Code W0216001001 W0216001011 W0216001021 W0216001031 Abbrev. Coil 30 13 10W-24VDC Coil 30 13 13VA-24VAC Coil 30 13 13VA-110VAC Coil 30 13 13VA-220VAC Nominal voltage 24Vcc 24V 50/60Hz 110V 50/60Hz 220V 50/60Hz Power absorption (average power input) 10W 13VA 13VA 13VA
ACCESSOr IES FOr PIV VALVES ON BASE
CONNECTORS, SIDE 22 mm FOR PIV.I-PIV.T

CONNECTORS, SIDE 30 mm FOR PIV.B

Code W0970520033 W0970520034 W0970520035 W0970520036 W0970520037 W0970520038 W0970520039 Type Standard LED 24V LED 110V LED 220V LED + VDr 24V LED + VDr 110V LED + VDr 220V Colour Black Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Cable PG11 PG11 PG11 PG11 PG11 PG11 PG11
NOTES
2-62
PIV VALVES IN LINE
PIV.I PIV.B in-line solenoid valves Threaded ports: m5, G1/8, G1/4 2/2 3/2 solenoid valves - normally closed/normally open Installation in any position Particularly suitable for high operating frequencies and low response times.
TECHNICAL DATA
Absorption Voltage available Voltage tolerance max operating frequency Solenoid rating r esponse time Type of protection Type of coil Insulation class Ambient temperature Fluid temperature Fluid Working life Weight maximum coil/nut torque Note on use: The 2/2 NC and 2/2 NO valves work only with inlet pressure $ outlet pressure.
PIV.I IN LINE 5W to 5VA 24Vdc - 24-110-220 Vac - 50/60 Hz 10 to 15 30 100 8 to 15 IP 65 Coil side 22 8 DIN 43650 155 15 to 50 15 to 50 Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air 25 million cycles 35 to 40 (depending on version) 1
PIV.B IN LINE 10W - 13VA 24Vdc - 24-110-220 Vac - 50/60 Hz 10 to 15 15 100 10 to 15 IP 65 Coil side 30 DIN 43650 155 15 to 50 15 to 50 Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air 130 1
% Hz % ms
C C
Nm
COMPONENTS a Body: aluminium b Springs: steel c Sleeve d Gasket: NBr e Springs: steel f mobile core g Gasket: FKm/FPm h Coil locking ring
2-63
PIV VALVES IN LINE
DISTRIBUTORS
PIV.I VALVES, OPERATOR 8 mm, IN LINE M5 1/8 m5

Symbol Code Description Input thread m5 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 m5 G1/8 Air hole [mm] 1.2 2.4 1.2 1.6 1.4 1.4 Kv Factor 0.65 2 0.65 1.2 0.8 0.8 Max oper. pressure [bar] DC AC 5W 5VA 30 30 6 7 30 30 15 14 10 10 10 10
W4017000100 W4017001300 W4017001100 W4017001200 W4017000101 W4017001201
PIV42I5S NC PIV92I8S NC PIV42I8S NC PIV72I8S NC PIV72I5S NO PIV72I8S NO
DISTRIBUTORS
W4017003100 W4017004100 W4017004200 W4017004201
PIV43I5S NC PIV43I8S NC PIV73I8S NC PIV73I8S NO
m5 G1/8 G1/8 m5
1.2 1.2 1.6 1.4
0.65 0.65 1 0.7
10 10 6.5 6
10 10 6.5 7
1/8
PIV VALVES IN LINE PIV.B VALVES, OPERATOR 13, IN LINE

Symbol Code Description Input thread G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G1/8 G1/8 G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 Air hole [mm] 1.6 1.6 2.4 2.4 3 1.6 1.6 2.4 3 2.4 4 6 2.4 Factor kv 1.2 1.2 2 2.8 4 1.4 1.4 2.8 4 3 7 9 2.6 Max oper. pressure [bar] DC AC 10W 13VA 6 12 6 12 3 4 8 10 5.5 6 14 17 14 17 8 8 5.5 6 15 30 6 12 1.5 5 13 15
W4026005001 W4026005101 W4026005111 W4026005010 W4026005020 W4026005000 W4026005100 W4026005110 W4026005120 W4026004000 W4026004010 W4026004020 W4026004001
PIV73B8S NO PIV73B4S NO PIV93B4S NO PIV93B8S NC PIVW3B8S NC PIV73B8S NC PIV73B4S NC PIV93B4S NC PIVW3B4S NC PIV92B4S NC PIVX2B4S NC PIVZ2B4S NC PIV92B4S NO
KEY TO CODES
P I V FAMILY 4 7 9 W X Z 7 AIR HOLE 1.2 mm 1.6 mm 2.4 mm 3 mm 4 mm 6 mm 2 NUMBER OF WAYS 2 2 ways 3 3 ways B CONNECTION I B 22 x 22 operator 8 30 x 30 operator 13 5 4 8 4 THREAD m5 G1/4 G1/8 S 5 VERSION standard N C FURTHER DETAILS NC normally closed NO normally open
2-64
ACCESSORIES
COIL, SIDE 30 mm - FOR PIV.B SOLENOID VALVES
Voltage tolerance: 10 to +15% Insulation class: m180 Degree of protection: IP65 EN60529 with connector Avoid prolonged exposure to the atmospheric agents Code W0216001001 W0216001011 W0216001021 W0216001031 Abbrev. Coil 30 13 10W-24VDC Coil 30 13 13VA-24VAC Coil 30 13 13VA-110VAC Coil 30 13 13VA-220VAC Nominal voltage 24Vcc 24V 50/60Hz 110V 50/60Hz 220V 50/60Hz Absorption (average) 10W 13VA 13VA 13VA
COIL, SIDE 22 mm - FOR PIV.I SOLENOID VALVES

Voltage tolerance: 10 to +15% Insulation class: F155 Degree of protection: IP65 EN60529 with connector Avoid prolonged exposure to the atmospheric agents maximum temperature of coil at 100% use: 70C at 20 ambient temperature According to Atex 94/9 CE rule, group 2, category 3 GD Code W0215000051 W0215000001 W0215000011 W0215000021 W0215000031 Abbrev. Coil 22 8 5W-12VDC Coil 22 8 5W-24VDC Coil 22 8 5VA-24VAC Coil 22 8 5VA-110VAC Coil 22 8 5VA-220VAC Nominal voltage 12Vcc 24Vcc 24V 50/60Hz 110V 50/60Hz 220V 50/60Hz Absorption Inrush Holding 5W 5W 5W 5W 8VA 5VA 8VA 5VA 8VA 5VA
CONNECTOR, SIDE 22 mm
CONNECTOR, SIDE 30 mm
2-65
ACCESSOr IES FOr PIV VALVES IN LINE
DISTRIBUTORS
CNOMO SOLENOID VALVE
Solenoid valve to CNOmO 060580. 3/2 version normally closed Bistable and monostable manual actuation Assembly on manifold base
CNOmO SOLENOID VALVE
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure Operating temperature range Solenoid rating Fluid System Nominal flo rate Tr A/Trr at 6 bar maximum coil nut torque bar C max 10 10 to 60 100% ED Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air With poppet 40 22/32 10
Nl/min ms Nm
COMPONENTS
DIMENSIONS
a VALVE BODy: HOSTAFOrm b GASKETS: NBr c OPEr ATOr : Brass pipe Stainless steel core MODULAR CONFIGURATION OF CNOMO BASES a Two fixin screws (included in input kit) b CNOmO manifold base kit c CNOmO manifold base input kit
Code 9453920 9453922
Description Cnomo 3/2 with monostable manual actuation Cnomo 3/2 with bistable manual actuation
2-66
ACCESSORIES
CNOMO MANIFOLD BASE INPUT KIT
Code 0227000200 Description Cnomo manifold base input kit
CNOMO MANIFOLD BASE KIT

Code 0227000150 Description Cnomo manifold base kit
COILS, SIDE 30 mm
Electric contact DIN 43650 Shape A Voltage tolerance: 10% to +10% Insulation class: F155 Degree of protection: IP65 EN 60529 with connector Solenoid rating: 100% ED maximum coil temperature at 100% ED use 70C at 20 ambient temperature Code W0210010100 W0210011100 W0210012100 W0210013100 Abbrev. Coil 30 8 4W-24VDC Coil 30 8 4VA-24VAC Coil 30 8 4VA-110VAC Coil 30 8 4VA-220VAC Nominal voltage 24Vcc 24V 50/60Hz 110V 50/60Hz 220V 50/60Hz Absorption Inrush Holding 5W 4W 10VA 4VA 10VA 4VA 10VA 4VA
CONNECTOR ON SIDE 30 mm
2-67
ACCESSOr IES FOr CNOmO SOLENOID VALVE
DISTRIBUTORS
VALVES
VALVES mINImACH
DISTRIBUTORS
Space-saving valve, ideal for in industrial automation applications. made according to the well-proven design of the mach series, the minimach has a painted aluminium body to ensure extra sturdiness and reliable operation in even the harshest of environments. The internal seals are made of FKm/FPm and are compatible with all oils used in compressors. The pneumatic couplings are m5 threaded, allowing the user to choose the diameter, type and angle of the fitting. The valve can be mounted in line or on a panel or multiple-port base. The following versions are available: 3/2 normally open or normally closed 5/2 monostable or bistable 5/3 closed centres, open centres, pressure centres. Electropneumatic actuation with a 24V DC pilot.
TECHNICAL DATA
Valve port thread Type of actuation maximum external diameter of fittings Operating temperature range Fluid Pressure range Flow rate at 6 bar P 1 3/2 Flow rate at 6 bar P 1 5/2 Flow rate at 6 bar P 1 5/3 Voltage range Power Solenoid rating manual operator TrA/Trr 3/2 at 6 bar TrA/Trr 5/2 monostable at 6 bar TrA/Trr 5/2 bistable at 6 bar TrA/Trr 5/3 at 6 bar Insulation class Degree of protection Installation Compatibility with oils m5 electric-pneumatic 11 -10 to +60 14 to +140 Filtered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous 0.3 to 0.7 3 to 7 44 to 102 140 170 80 24 VDC 10% 0.9 100% ED monostable 8/23 8/30 15/15 9/30 F155 IP 51 In any position. As for the bistable ones, if subject to vibration, the vertical assembly is not advisable Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
mm C F mPa bar psi Nl/min Nl/min Nl/min W
ms ms ms ms
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: chemically nickel-plated aluminium b CONTrOL/END CAP: Hostaform c SPOOL: chemically nickel-plated aluminium d DISTANCE PLATES: tecnopolymer e GASKETS: FKm-FPm f PISTONS: Hostaform g PISTON GASKET: Polyurethane h FILTEr: sintered bronze i SPrINGS: special steel j PILOT: with integrated coil
2-68
FLOW CHART Flow rates (Nl/min) 3/2
Outlet pressure (bar) VALVES mINImACH

2-69
Flow rates (Nl/min) 5/2
Outlet pressure (bar)
Flow rates (Nl/min) 5/3
Outlet pressure (bar)
DISTRIBUTORS
HOW TO FIX THE VALVE TO THE BASE Proceed as follows: 1. screw the pins A onto the valve 2. secure them with the ready-mounted grub screws B on the base (0.5 Nm max) ImPOr TANT To secure properly, press the valve down onto the base while tightening the two grub screws. Do not tighten one grub screw completely before starting to tighten the other.
VALVES mINImACH
DISTRIBUTORS
HOW TO FIX THE BASE A B C D From the top using m4 screws From below using m5 screws From the side using m4 screws From the top on the DIN bar via the m4 screws and bracket code 0225004600 (using 1 screw per bracket) KEY TO CODES
M S V FAMILY MSV minivalves solenoid 0 DIMENSIONS 0 m5 5 FUNCTION 3 3/2 5 5/2 6 5/3 S O OPERATORS 14 SO solenoid B RESETTING (12) B bistable S mechanical springs O O FURTHER DETAILS NC normally closed NO normally open OO 5/2 standard CC closed centres OC open centres PC pressure centres 2 4 V D C 24VDC
2-70
MINIMACH VALVES SOLENOID-PNEUMATIC

MONOSTABLE 3/2 MONOSTABLE 5/2
Symbol
Code 7080020532
Abbrev. mSV 03 SOS NC 24VDC
Weight [g] 36.2
Symbol
Code 7080020132
Abbrev. mSV 05 SOS OO 24VDC
Weight [g] 43.3
7080020632
mSV 03 SOS NO 24VDC
36.2
BISTABLE 5/2
MONOSTABLE 5/3
Symbol
Code 7080020112
Abbrev. mSV 05 SOB OO 24VDC
Weight [g] 57
Symbol
Code 7080020212
Abbrev. mSV 06 SOS CC 24VDC
Weight [g] 57
7080020312
mSV 06 SOS OC 24VDC
57
7080020412
mSV 06 SOS PC 24VDC
57
2-71
VALVES mINImACH
DISTRIBUTORS
ACCESSORIES: MULTIPLE BASE

3/2 MULTIPLE BASE BLANKING PLATE FOR 3/2 VALVES
ACCESSOr IES FOr VALVES mINImACH
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0225010201 0225010401 0225010601 0225010801
Description Base 2 posn. for 3/2 valves minimach Base 4 posn. for 3/2 valves minimach Base 6 posn. for 3/2 valves minimach Base 8 posn. for 3/2 valves minimach
Position 2 4 6 8
Weight [g] 60 99 135 178
Code 0226009500
Description Blanking plate for 3/2 bases minimach
Weight [g] 9.5
5/2 - 5/3 MULTIPLE BASE
BLANKING PLATE FOR 5/2 - 5/3 VALVES
Code 0225020201 0225020401 0225020601 0225020801
Description Base 2 posn. for 5/2-5/3 valves minimach Base 4 posn. for 5/2-5/3 valves minimach Base 6 posn. for 5/2-5/3 valves minimach Base 8 posn. for 5/2-5/3 valves minimach
Position 2 4 6 8
Weight [g] 95 154 211 270
Code 0226009501
Description Blanking plate for 5/2-5/3 bases minimach
Weight [g] 11
2-72
ACCESSORIES
PLUG-IN CONNECTOR
SPARE PARTS
PLUG-IN PILOT
Code W0970512000
Description Plug-in connector for mACH 11 L = 300
Code Description 722113541100 PLT-10 722113541100
ADAPTER FOR BAR OMEGA (DIN EN 50022)
KIT OF SPARE GASKET BASES FOR 3/2 VALVES
Code 0225004600
Descrizione Adapter for bar omega
Weight [g] 46
Code 0226009000
Description Kit of spare gasket bases for 3/2 valves
Weight [g] 2.5
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
KIT OF SPARE GASKET BASES FOR 5/2 - 5/3 VALVES
Code 0226009010
Description multiple base diaphragm
Weight [g] 3.5
Code 0226009001
Description Kit of spare gasket bases for 5/2-5/3 valves
Weight [g] 2.5
2-73
ACCESSOr IES - SPAr E PAr TS FOr VALVES mINImACH
DISTRIBUTORS
MACH 11 VALVES
The mach 11 in-line valves with m7 threaded connection come in the following versions: 5/2 monostable and bistable 5/3 with closed, open or pressure centres. Control: pneumatic solenoid/pneumatic 24 V With an exceptional compact design only 11 mm wide, and excellent high performance, these valves can be used in numerous applications in industrial automation.
mACH 11 VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
Valve port thread Pilot thread maximum external diameter of fittings Operating temperature range Fluid Screw for valve wall-mounting Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Pressure range m7 m5 Pneumatic: m7 = 11 - m5 = 9 - Electric: m7 - m5 = 11 -10 to +60 Filtered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous m3 400 Electric pilot-assisted Pneumatic Electric monostable: 2 to 7 pilot pressure: 2 to 7 monostable control pres.values: 2 to 10 bistable: 2 to 7 valve: vacuum to 10 bistable control pres. values: 1 to 10 5/3: 2 to 7 control pressure 5/3: 2 to 10 valve: vacuum to 10 24 VDC 10% 24 VDC 10% 0.9 0.9 F155 F155 IP 51 IP 51 100% ED 100% ED 10 / 45 10 / 45 4 / 9 22 / 22 22 / 22 4 / 4 22 / 22 22 / 22 4 / 4 Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
mm C
Voltage range Power Insulation class Degree of protection Solenoid rating Tr A/Trr monostable at 6 bar Tr A/Trr bistable at 6 bar Tr A/Trr 5/3 monostable at 6 bar Compatibility with oils
Nl/min bar W ms ms ms
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b CONTr OL/BASE: Hostaform c SPOOL: Aluminium d GASKETS: Polyurethane e PISTONS: Hostaform f PISTON GASKET: Polyurethane g FILTEr : sintered bronze h PILOT: with integrated coil i SPr INGS: special steel j r EmOVABLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE
2-74
MODULARITY
HOW TO FIX THE BASE
KEY TO CODES
M S V FAMILY MSV mini-solenoid valve MSV mini-pneumatic valve 1 DIMENSIONS 1 m7 5 FUNCTION 5 5/2 6 5/3 S O OPERATORS 14 SO solenoid SE solenoid assisted PN pneumatic B RESETTING (12) B bistable S mechanical springs O O FURTHER DETAILS OO 5/2 standard CC closed centres OC open centres PC pressure centres 2 4 V D C 24VDC
2-75
mACH 11 VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
MACH 11 VALVES, PNEUMATIC

MONOSTABLE 5/2
Symbol Code 7061010130 Abbrev. mPV 15 PNS OO Weight [g] 52
mACH 11 VALVES, PNEUmATIC
DISTRIBUTORS
MONOSTABLE 5/3
Symbol Code 7061010210 7061010310 7061010410 Abbrev. mPV 16 PNS CC mPV 16 PNS OC mPV 16 PNS PC Weight [g] 62 62 62
BISTABLE 5/2
Symbol Code 7061010110 Abbrev. mPV 15 PNB OO Weight [g] 52
2-76
MACH 11 VALVES, SOLENOID-PNEUMATIC

MONOSTABLE 5/2
Symbol Code 7061020132 7061030132 Abbrev. mSV 15 SOS OO 24VDC mSV 15 SES OO 24VDC Weight [g] 60 60
MONOSTABLE 5/3
Symbol Code 7061020212 7061020312 7061020412 7061030212 7061030312 7061030412 Abbrev. mSV 16 SOS CC 24VDC mSV 16 SOS OC 24VDC mSV 16 SOS PC 24VDC mSV 16 SES CC 24VDC mSV 16 SES OC 24VDC mSV 16 SES PC 24VDC Weight [g] 82 82 82 82 82 82
BISTABLE 5/2
Symbol Code 7061020112 7061030112 Abbrev. mSV 15 SOB OO 24 VDC mSV 15 SEB OO 24 VDC Weight [g] 72 88
2-77
mACH 11 VALVES, SOLENOID-PNEUmATIC
DISTRIBUTORS
ACCESSORIES: MANIFOLD BASES
a MULTIPLE MANIFOLD BASE
b SEPARATE FEED MANIFOLD BASE
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0227400201 0227400301 0227400401 0227400601 0227400801
Description Base, 2 posn. for mach 11 Base, 3 posn. for mach 11 Base, 4 posn. for mach 11 Base, 6 posn. for mach 11 Base, 8 posn. for mach 11
Weight [g] 94 140 186 282 378
Code 0227400200
Description Separate feed manifold base for mach 11
Weight [g] 44
ACCESSOr IES FOr mACH 11 VALVES
c 90 END PLATE
d STRAIGHT END PLATE
Code 0227400101
Description 90 end plate 1/4 mach 11
Weight [g] 82
Code 0227400100
Description Straight end plate 1/4 for mach 11
Weight [g] 93
e BLANKING PLATE
f FEED BLOCK
Code 0227400500
Description Blanking plate for mach 11
Weight [g] 13
Code 0227400503
Description m7 feed block for mach 11
Weight [g] 11
2-78
g DIAPHRAGM
h BASE FIXING PLATE
Code 0227400000
Description Diaphragm for mach 11 bases
Weight [g] 3
Code 0227400504
Description Fixing plate for mach 11 bases
Weight [g] 28
ACCESSORIES
PLUG-IN CONNECTOR
Code W0970512000 Description Plug-in connector for mach 11 L = 300
CONNECTION BRACKET ON BAR OMEGA (DIN EN 50022)

~50
Code 0227300600
Description Connection bracket on DIN bar
SPARE PARTS
PLUG-IN PILOT
Code Description 722113541100 PLT-10 722113541100
~9
14
2-79
ACCESSOr IES - SPAr E PAr TS FOr mACH 11 VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
MACH 16 VALVES
Available in size 1/8 only, versions 5/2 and 5/3 and with pneumatic and solenoid actuation. The mach 16 valve is a typical small size valve, only 16 mm wide, with excellent performance 750 NL/min flo rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar. The valve can be used in line, on a panel or on a base (multiple or manifold) The mach design is the result of the miniaturisation concept with the same durability, sturdiness and reliability.
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
Valve port thread Type of control maximum outer diameter of gaskets for ports 1 - 3 - 5 maximum outer diameter for ports 2 - 4 Operating temperature range minimum pressure pilot-pneumatic controls Operating pressure Fluid r ecommended lubricant Solenoid pilot manual Number of ways in base Screws for wall-mounting single valve Screws for base-mounting valve Installation Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Conductance C Critical ratio b Compatibility with oils 1/8 m5 pneumatic actuation - Solenoid/pneumatic operation with integrated coil 15 15 -10 to +60 monostable with pneumatic spring: see picture on page 2-82 1.6 bar for monostable valves mechanical spring 1 bar for bistable valves 1.9 bar for valves 5/3 vacuum -10 Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air lubrication, if used, must be continuous ISO e UNI FD22 Integrated coil DIN 43650 C shape monostable on solenoid pilot (with bistable manual valve on request) 1-3-5 and pilot exhaust 2 screws m3 2 screws m2.5x30 In any position (vertical assembly is not recommended for bistable valves subjected to vibration) 540 750 149.8 0.525 Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
mACH 16 VALVES
mm mm C bar bar bar bar
Nl/min Nl/min Nl/min bar bar/bar
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b CONTr OL/BASE: Hostaform c SPOOL: Aluminium d GASKETS: Polyurethane e PISTONS: Hostaform f PISTON GASKET: Polyurethane g INTEr FACE GASKETS: NBr nitrile rubber h PILOT: with integrated coil
FLOW CHART
2-80
MANIFOLD BASES
Reference a b c d e f g h
Code 0227100201 0227100150 0227100301 0227100302 0227100200 0225004500 0227100000 0227300600
Description m16/VDmA Input end-plate kit m16 manifold base kit m16 separate feed manifold base kit m16 exhaust feed manifold base kit m16/VDmA output end-plate kit m16 blanking plate Intermediate diaphragm Connection bracket on DIN-bar
KEY TO CODES
M S V FAMILY MSV solenoid/pneumatic MPV pneumatic 2 DIMENSIONS 2 1/8 5 FUNCTION 5 5/2 6 5/3 S O OPERATORS 14 SO solenoid/pneumatic SE solenoid pilot PN pneumatic B RESETTING 12 pneumatic spring mechanical springs bistable O O FURTHER DETAILS OO 5/2 CC closed centres OC open centres PC pressure centres 2 4 V D C VOLTAGE 24VDC 24VAC 110VAC 220VAC
P S B
2-81
mACH 16 VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
MACH 16 VALVES MPV, PNEUMATIC

TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure minimum operating pressure: monostable with pneumatic spring monostable with mechanical spring monostable 5/3 bistable Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar r epositioning response times at 6 bar: monostable bistable r epositioning response times at 6 bar: monostable bistable bar bar Vacuum to10 see graph 1.6 1.9 1 149.8 0.525 540 750 4 4 8.4 4
Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min ms ms ms ms
mACH 16 VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
MONOSTABLE 5/2
BISTABLE 5/2
Symbol
Code 7062010100 7062010130
Abbrev. mPV 25 PNP OO mPV 25 PNS OO
Weight [g] 60 61
Symbol
Code 7062010110
Abbrev. mPV 25 PNB OO
Weight [g] 62
MONOSTABLE 5/3
OPERATING PRESSURE
Symbol
Code 7062010210 7062010310 7062010410
Abbrev. mPV 26 PNS CC mPV 26 PNS OC mPV 26 PNS PC
Weight [g] 73 73 73
minimum actuation pressure (bar)
Supply pressure (bar)
2-82
MACH 16 VALVES MPV, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC

TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure: monostable bistable pilot-assisted minimum pilot pressure Operating temperature range Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Tr A / Trr monostable at 6 bar Tr A / Trr bistable at 6 bar Type of operation: manual Pilot with integrated coil Power Voltage tolerance Insulation class Degree of protection Solenoid rating Electrical contacts bar 1.9 to10 1 to10 Vacuum to10 2 -10 to +60 149.8 0.525 540 750 12 / 26 21 / 21 monostable on the solenoid pilot (also with bistable manual valve on request) 24 VDC - 24 VAC - 110 VAC - 220 VAC 1 -10% to +15% F 155 IP 65 EN60529 with connector 100% ED DIN 43650 C shape
bar C Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min ms ms
MONOSTABLE 5/2
Symbol Code 7062020102 7062020103 7062020104 7062020105 7062020132 7062020133 7062020134 7062020135 7062030132 7062030133 7062030134 7062030135 Abbrev. mSV 25 SOP OO 24VDC mSV 25 SOP OO 24VAC mSV 25 SOP OO 110VAC mSV 25 SOP OO 220VAC mSV 25 SOS OO 24VDC mSV 25 SOS OO 24VAC mSV 25 SOS OO 110VAC mSV 25 SOS OO 220VAC mSV 25 SES OO 24VDC mSV 25 SES OO 24VAC mSV 25 SES OO 110VAC mSV 25 SES OO 220VAC Weight [g] 92 92 92 92 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93
BISTABLE 5/2
Symbol Code 7062020112 7062020113 7062020114 7062020115 7062030112 7062030113 7062030114 7062030115 Abbrev. mSV 25 SOB OO 24VDC mSV 25 SOB OO 24VAC mSV 25 SOB OO 110VAC mSV 25 SOB OO 220VAC mSV 25 SEB OO 24VDC mSV 25 SEB OO 24VAC mSV 25 SEB OO 110VAC mSV 25 SEB OO 220VAC Weight [g] 124 124 124 124 125 125 125 125
2-83
mACH 16 VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
MONOSTABLE 5/3
Symbol Code 7062020212 7062020213 7062020214 7062020215 7062020312 7062020313 7062020314 7062020315 7062020412 7062020413 7062020414 7062020415 7062030212 7062030213 7062030214 7062030215 7062030312 7062030313 7062030314 7062030315 7062030412 7062030413 7062030414 7062030415 Abbrev. mSV 26 SOS CC 24VDC mSV 26 SOS CC 24VAC mSV 26 SOS CC 110VAC mSV 26 SOS CC 220VAC mSV 26 SOS OC 24VDC mSV 26 SOS OC 24VAC mSV 26 SOS OC 110VAC mSV 26 SOS OC 220VAC mSV 26 SOS PC 24VDC mSV 26 SOS PC 24VAC mSV 26 SOS PC 110VAC mSV 26 SOS PC 220VAC mSV 26 SES CC 24VDC mSV 26 SES CC 24VAC mSV 26 SES CC 110VAC mSV 26 SES CC 220VAC mSV 26 SES OC 24VDC mSV 26 SES OC 24VAC mSV 26 SES OC 110VAC mSV 26 SES OC 220VAC mSV 26 SES PC 24VDC mSV 26 SES PC 24VAC mSV 26 SES PC 110VAC mSV 26 SES PC 220VAC Weight [g] 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 143 143 143 143 143 143 143 143 143 143 143 143
mACH 16 VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
CONNECTOR 15 mm SHAPE C TO DIN 43650
Code W0970501021 W0970501022 W0970501025
ACCESSORIES FOR MACH 16 VALVES MSV, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC

Description Connector 15 mm shape C DIN 43650 Connector 15 mm shape C DIN 43650 LED 24V Connector 15 mm shape C DIN 43650 LED+VDr 24V
SPARE PARTS FOR MACH 16 VALVES MSV, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC

COIL MACH 16 (OLD)
Code W4015101000 W4015101010 W4015101020 W4015101030 Description In-line pilot m16 24VDC In-line pilot m16 24VAC 50/60 HZ In-line pilot m16 110VAC 50/60 HZ In-line pilot m16 220VAC 50/60 HZ
COIL MACH 16 (NEW)

Code W4015301000 W4015301010 W4015301020 W4015301030 Description In-line pilot m16 24VDC In-line pilot m16 24VAC 50/60 HZ In-line pilot m16 110VAC 50/60 HZ In-line pilot m16 220VAC 50/60 HZ
NB: if the pilot to be replaced bears the writing CE, you have to order among the NEW pilots, otherwise order among the OLD pilots
2-84
MANIFOLD BASES FOR MACH 16 VALVES
a MACH 16 INPUT END-PLATE
b MACH 16 MANIFOLD BASE
Code 0227100201
Description Input end-plate kit m16/VDmA
Weight [g] 125
Code 0227100150
Description manifold base kit m16
Weight [g] 121
c MACH 16 SEPARATE FEED MANIFOLD BASE

A Separate feed B Separate exhaust
d MACH 16 EXHAUST FEED MANIFOLD BASE

A Exhaust feed B Separate exhausts C Separate feed/exhausts
Code 0227100301
Description manifold base kit-separate feed m16
Weight [g] 119
Code 0227100302
Description manifold base kit-exhaust feed m16
Weight [g] 113
e MACH 16 OUTPUT END-PLATE
f BLANKING PLATE UNUSED POSITION
Code 0227100200
Description Output end-plate kit m16/VDmA
Weight [g] 122
Code 0225004500
Description Accessories - blanking plate for mach 16
Weight [g] 18
2-85
ACCESSOIr ES FOr mACH 16 VALVES
DISTRIBUTORS
g INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
h CONNECTION BRACKET ON BAR OMEGA (DIN EN 50022)

~50 ~50 14 14
Code 0227100000
Description Intermediate diaphragm
Weight [g] 1
Code 0227300600
Description Connection bracket on DIN bar
~9 ~9
Weight [g] 7
DISTRIBUTORS
MULTIPLE BASES FOR MACH 16 VALVES

MULTIPLE BASE FOR MACH 16 ADAPTER FOR BAR OMEGA (DIN EN 50022)
ACCESSOIr ES FOr mACH 16 VALVES
Code 0225000201 0225000401 0225000601 0225000801 0225001001 0225001201
Description Base CVm.PN-08-02-0-000 Base CVm.PN-08-04-0-000 Base CVm.PN-08-06-0-000 Base CVm.PN-08-08-0-000 Base CVm.PN-08-10-0-000 Base CVm.PN-08-12-0-000
N of positions 2 4 6 8 10 12
Weight [g] 180 286 390 500 613 706
Code 0225004600
Description Omega-adapter mach 16
Weight [g] 46
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
GASKET KIT (FOR OLD BASES)
Code 0226007001
Description m16 multiple base gasket kit
Weight [g] 5
KIT OF SPARE INTEGRATED GASKET
Code 0227100001
Description Acc. multiple base diaphragm
Weight [g] 6
Code 0226007003
Description m16 multiple base gasket kit
Weight [g] 5
2-86
MULTIPLE CONNECTORS MACH 16
TECHNICAL DATA
Supply voltage maximum absorption Valve actuation indicator Protection Operating temperature range Degree of protection with valves mounted Insulation class Electromagnetic compatibility maximum number of solenoid valves which can be applied n of contacts Pre-wired version Cable length n of wires Wire section Shielding Cable Cable outside diameter 24VDC - 24VAC 50 mA for each position yellow LED Fuse -10 to +60 IP65 In compliance with IEC 664-1and VDE 0110 Group C In compliance with EEC 366/89 16 19, 16 of which for solenoid valves, 2 common and 1 earth 5 19, 16 of which for solenoid valves, 2 common and 1 earth 0.22 Tin plated covering 80 to 90% Outer oil-proof and flame-proo PVC sheath 8.5
m mm2
mm
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR VERSION WITH CONNECTOR

Position of electrical contact V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 V7 V8 V9 V10 V11 V12 V13 V14 V15 V16 GROUND COM COM Colour of the corresponding wire Green /black yellow White/black Blue r ed yellow/black White Brown/red r ed/white r ed/black Green/red Blue/red Brown Orange/black Orange Blue/black yellow/red Brown/black Green
NOTES
2-87
mULTIPLE CONNECTOr S mACH 16
DISTRIBUTORS
mach 16 valves can be mounted on bases with pneumatic or electrical connection. The electric contacts of the individual valves are connected by means of a printed circuit board in a sealed conduit to a single connection point suitable for up to 16 controls. The number 16 was chosen because the number of outputs of most PLC output boards is 16 or a multiple of it. The system has numerous alternatives and variants for a wide range of requirements: Base for monostable or bistable valves. Connection via a multiple connector or wired cable. Supply of individual parts or ready prepared bases or complete valve units The configuratio can be modifie at any time to convert bases for monostable valves into bases for bistable valves. The return cable can be used to connect two monostable valve units to a single multiple connector. All versions are certifie for electromagnetic compatibility and hence they bear the CE mark. The system is prearranged for mounting a slave for fiel buses, which can be added at any time. Valve units with multiple pneumatic/electrical connection are supplied complete with valves and are tested. System modularity means that the valve sequence can be ordered to meet your own requirements (see key to codes).
COMPONENTS
DISTRIBUTORS
a multiple base: extruded anodised aluminium b modular base: anodised aluminium c main assembly, version with connector d main assembly, pre-wired version e Secondary unit/additional secondary unit f 10-wire return cable g Socket for 10-wire return cable KEY TO CODES
A FAMILY A multiple base for solenoid/pneumatic connection mach 16 B manifold base for mach 16 solenoid/pneumatic connection 0 8 NO. OF POSITIONS 04 4 posn. 06 6 posn. 08 8 posn. 10 10 posn. 12 12 posn.
h LED (LED on = Solenoid valve energised) i Identificatio label (for writing on) j Bistable solenoid valve mACH 16 k monostable solenoid valve mACH 16 m 19-wire cable for pre-wired version n Blanking plate - pneumatic position: anodised aluminium
o Small blanking plate - electric connector: painted aluminium
B M B electrical connection only for monostable valves electrical connection for bistable valves
W C 5 MCN electrical connection WC5 pre-wired cable 5 m ACM additional connection for monostable battery
0 8 SIZE 08 G 1/8
M M 6 V L M M6 M8 V L L6 L8 J J6 J8 K G G6 G8 O E E6 E8 F B B6 B8 C A D mSV 25 SmS OO mSV G5 SmS OO mSV H5 SmS OO mSV 25 SCS OO mSV 25 SmP OO mSV G5 SmP OO mSV H5 SmP OO mSV 25 SmB OO mSV G5 SmB OO mSV H5 SmB OO mSV 25 SCB OO mSV 26 SmS CC mSV G6 SmS CC mSV H6 SmS CC mSV 26 SCS CC mSV 26 SmS OC mSV G6 SmS OC mSV H6 SmS OC mSV 26 SCS OC mSV 26 SmS PC mSV G6 SmS PC mSV H6 SmS PC mSV 26 SCS PC blanking plate intermediate diaphragm
2 4 V D C VOLTAGE 24VDC 24VAC
N.B.: The valve insertion order inside the descriptive key is the following, starting from the connector, from the left towards the right: the firs left square corresponds to the firs valve close to the connector on the base. There are 12 squares available for the description: if you order a base with less than 12 positions, complete by placing a 0 in the remaining boxes.
2-88
MACH 16 VALVES FOR MULTIPLE CONNECTOR
M MONOSTABLE 5/2, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC - MECHANICAL SPRING

Symbol Code 7062040132 7062040133 Description mSV 25 SmS OO 24VDC mSV 25 SmS OO 24VAC Weight [g] 92 92
Symbol
V MONOSTABLE 5/2,
SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC, PILOT-ASSISTED - MECHANICAL SPRING

Symbol Code 7062060132 7062060133 Description mSV 25 SCS OO 24VDC mSV 25 SCS OO 24VAC Weight [g] 93 93
L MONOSTABLE 5/2, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC - PNEUMATIC SPRING

Symbol Code 7062040102 7062040103 Description mSV 25 SmP OO 24VDC mSV 25 SmP OO 24VAC Weight [g] 93 93
Symbol
Code 7066040102 7067040102 7066040103 7067040103
Description mSV G5 SmP OO 24VDC mSV H5 SmP OO 24VDC mSV G5 SmP OO 24VAC mSV H5 SmP OO 24VAC
6 8 6 8
H 32.7 34 32.7 34
Weight [g] 96 98 96 98
2-89
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 7066040132 7067040132 7066040133 7067040133
Description mSV G5 SmS OO 24VDC mSV H5 SmS OO 24VDC mSV G5 SmS OO 24VAC mSV H5 SmS OO 24VAC
6 8 6 8
H 32.7 34 32.7 34
Weight [g] 96 98 96 98
J BISTABLE 5/2, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC

Symbol Code 7062040112 7062040113 Description mSV 25 SmB OO 24VDC mSV 25 SmB OO 24VAC Weight [g] 139 139
Symbol
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 7066040112 7067040112 7066040113 7067040113
Description mSV G5 SmB OO 24VDC mSV H5 SmB OO 24VDC mSV G5 SmB OO 24VAC mSV H5 SmB OO 24VAC
6 8 6 8
H 32.7 34 32.7 34
Weight [g] 143 146 143 146
K BISTABLE 5/2,
SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC, PILOT-ASSISTED
Symbol Code 7062060112 7062060113 Description mSV 25 SCB OO 24VDC mSV 25 SCB OO 24VAC Weight [g] 140 140
G MONOSTABLE
5/3, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC - CLOSED CENTRES

Symbol Code 7062040212 7062040213 Description mSV 26 SmS CC 24VDC mSV 26 SmS CC 24VAC Weight [g] 142 142
Symbol
Code 7066040212 7067040212 7066040213 7067040213
Description mSV G6 SmS CC 24VDC mSV H6 SmS CC 24VDC mSV G6 SmS CC 24VAC mSV H6 SmS CC 24VAC
6 8 6 8
H 32.7 34 32.7 34
Weight [g] 146 146 146 146
2-90
O MONOSTABLE 5/3, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC, PILOT-ASSISTED - CLOSED CENTRES

Symbol Code 7062060212 7062060213 Description mSV 26 SCS CC 24VDC mSV 26 SCS CC 24VAC Weight [g] 143 143
E MONOSTABLE 5/3 SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC - OPEN CENTRES

Symbol Code 7062040312 7062040313 Description mSV 26 SmS OC 24VDC mSV 26 SmS OC 24VAC Weight [g] 142 142
Symbol
Code 7066040312 7067040312 7066040313 7067040313
Description mSV G6 SmS OC 24VDC mSV H6 SmS OC 24VDC mSV G6 SmS OC 24VAC mSV H6 SmS OC 24VAC
6 8 6 8
H 32.7 34 32.7 34
Weight [g] 146 146 146 146
F MONOSTABLE 5/3 SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC, PILOT-ASSISTED - OPEN CENTRES

Symbol Code 7062060312 7062060313 Description mSV 26 SCS OO 24VDC mSV 26 SCS OO 24VAC Weight [g] 143 143
2-91
DISTRIBUTORS
B MONOSTABLE 5/3, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC - PRESSURE CENTRES

Symbol Code 7062040412 7062040413 Description mSV 26 SmS PC 24VDC mSV 26 SmS PC 24VAC Weight [g] 142 142
Symbol
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 7066040412 7067040412 7066040413 7067040413
Description mSV G6 SmS PC 24VDC mSV H6 SmS PC 24VDC mSV G6 SmS PC 24VAC mSV H6 SmS PC 24VAC
6 8 6 8
H 32.7 34 32.7 34
Weight [g] 146 146 146 146
C MONOSTABLE 5/3, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC, PILOT-ASSISTED - PRESSURE CENTRES

Symbol Code 7062060412 7062060413 Description mSV 26 SCS PC 24VDC mSV 26 SCS PC 24VAC Weight [g] 143 143
SPARE PARTS
COIL MACH 16 (OLD)
Code W4015201000 W4015201010 Description Pilot multiple connection 24 VDC Pilot multiple connection 24 VAC
COIL MACH 16 (NEW)

Code W4015401000 W4015401010 Description In-line pilot 24 VDC In-line pilot 24 VAC 50/60 Hz
N.B.: if the pilot to be replaced bears the writing CE, you have to order among the NEW pilots, otherwise order among the OLD pilots.
2-92
BASES WITH MULTIPLE CONNECTION

MONOSTABLE SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC BASE WITH 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 POSITIONS
BISTABLE SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC BASE WITH 12 POSITIONS
With multiple connector With pre-wired cable
Pos.-Nr. 12 12
Description CVm EP 08 12 B mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 12 B WC5 . . . . .
Code 24VDC 0225201201 0225501201
Code 24VAC 0225211201 0225511201
Weight [g] 1315 4700
. . . . . : 24VDC = direct current 24VAC = alternating current
2-93
Pos.-Nr. 4 6 8 10 12 With pre-wired cable 4 6 8 10 12 . . . . . : 24VDC = direct current 24VAC = alternating current With multiple connector
L1 148.5 182.5 216.5 250.5 284.5 148.5 182.5 216.5 250.5 284.5
L2 86 120 154 188 222 86 120 154 188 222
L3 153 187 221 255 289 153 187 221 255 289
Description CVm EP 08 04 m mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 06 m mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 08 m mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 10 m mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 12 m mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 04 m WC5 . . . . . CVm EP 08 06 m WC5 . . . . . CVm EP 08 08 m WC5 . . . . . CVm EP 08 10 m WC5 . . . . . CVm EP 08 12 m WC5 . . . . .
Code 24VDC 0225100401 0225100601 0225100801 0225101001 0225101201 0225400401 0225400601 0225400801 0225401001 0225401201
Code 24VAC 0225110401 0225110601 0225110801 0225111001 0225111201 0225410401 0225410601 0225410801 0225411001 0225411201
Weight [g] 504 644 784 924 1264 3642 3781 3923 4070 4195
DISTRIBUTORS
BISTABLE SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC BASE WITH 10 POSITIONS
DISTRIBUTORS
With multiple connector With pre-wired cable
Pos.-Nr. 10 10
Description CVm EP 08 10 B mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 10 B WC5 . . . . .
Code 24VDC 0225201001 0225501001
Code 24VAC 0225211001 0225511001
Weight [g] 1245 4600
BISTABLE SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC BASE WITH 4, 6, 8 POSITIONS
With multiple connector
Pos.-Nr. 4 6 8 With pre-wired cable 4 6 8 . . . . . : 24VDC = direct current 24VAC = alternating current
L1 148.5 182.5 216.5 148.5 182.5 216.5
L2 86 120 154 86 120 154
L3 153 187 221 153 187 221
L4 113 147 181 113 147 181
Description CVm EP 08 04 B mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 06 B mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 08 B mCN . . . . . CVm EP 08 04 B WC5 . . . . . CVm EP 08 06 B WC5 . . . . . CVm EP 08 08 B WC5 . . . . .
Code 24VDC 0225200401 0225200601 0225200801 0225500401 0225500601 0225500801
Code 24VAC 0225210401 0225210601 0225210801 0225510401 0225510601 0225510801
Weight [g] 770 965 1200 3910 4086 4264
2-94
ADDITIONAL MONOSTABLE SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC BASE WITH 4, 6, 8 POSITIONS
Pos.-Nr. 4 6 8
L2 86 120 154
L3 117.5 151.5 185.5
L4 113 147 181
Description CVm EP 08 04 m ACm . . . . . CVm EP 08 06 m ACm . . . . . CVm EP 08 08 m ACm . . . . .
Code 24VDC 0225300401 0225300601 0225300801
Code 24VAC 0225310401 0225310601 0225310801
Weight [g] 500 640 780
NOTES
2-95
DISTRIBUTORS
MODULAR MULTIPLE CONNECTOR KIT
DISTRIBUTORS
It is possible to buy the various assembly kits separately, to obtain a wide range of customised applications. The main units of the version with connector a or the pre-wired version b can easily be assembled with the multiple base l or the modular manifold base m. The manifold base allows particular circuits on the individual valves (feed from exhaust outlets, pressure differentiation, etc.) Likewise, on the other side it is also simple to mount the secondary unit c. This possibility is very interesting because it allows you to convert a base for monostable valves into a base for bistable valves. If you fi an additional secondary unit d on a base, you obtain an additional solenoid base that can be connected by means of return cables to a main base for monostable valves. The only thing to remember is that in all cases the total number of positions (connection to solenoid valve coil) must not exceed sixteen. The 10 pin return cable f is used when a main unit and a secondary
unit, or only one additional secondary unit, are mounted together on the multiple (or manifold) base. It has to be connected to the sockets shown in the diagram. For different requirements, it is also possible to have return cables with a connector at one end only g, or just the 10-wire cable h. These types are available in different lengths. A 10-wire connector kit i is also available if you need to complete the wiring. In the version with a connector, the 19-wire flyin connector e pilots the entire assembled base. This connector must be welded onto the 19-wire cable k, which is available in different lengths. The 19-wire connector complete with cable j is available in various lengths. The male connector q allows the free electrical connection of the multiple connector to be used, in order to control the valves placed in the system or to control the bistable valves by a monostable multiple electrical connection base.
2-96
a MAIN KIT - VERSION WITH CONNECTOR

Code 0226500401 0226510401 0226500601 0226510601 0226500801 0226510801 0226501001 0226511001 0226501201 0226511201 Description main multiple connection kit, 4 positions 24VDC main multiple connection kit, 4 positions 24VAC main multiple connection kit, 6 positions 24VDC main multiple connection kit, 6 positions 24VAC main multiple connection kit, 8 positions 24VDC main multiple connection kit, 8 positions 24VAC main multiple connection kit, 10 positions 24VDC main multiple connection kit, 10 positions 24VAC main multiple connection kit, 12 positions 24VDC main multiple connection kit, 12 positions 24VAC Weight [g] 245 245 280 280 308 308 344 344 396 396
b MAIN MULTIPLE PRE-WIRED CONNECTION KIT

Code 0226400401 0226410401 0226400601 0226410601 0226400801 0226410801 0226401001 0226411001 0226401201 0226411201 Description Pre-wired multiple main connector kit, 4 positions 24VDC Pre-wired multiple main connector kit, 4 positions 24VAC Pre-wired multiple main connector kit, 6 positions 24VDC Pre-wired multiple main connector kit, 6 positions 24VAC Pre-wired multiple main connector kit, 8 positions 24VDC Pre-wired multiple main connector kit, 8 positions 24VAC Pre-wired multiple main connector kit, 10 positions 24VDC Pre-wired multiple main connector kit, 10 positions 24VAC Pre-wired multiple main connector kit, 12 positions 24VDC Pre-wired multiple main connector kit, 12 positions 24VAC Weight [g] 3350 3350 3400 3400 3423 3423 3460 3460 3490 3490
c SECONDARY KIT
Code 0226200401 0226210401 0226200601 0226210601 0226200801 0226210801 Description multiple secondary connector kit, 4 positions 24VDC multiple secondary connector kit, 4 positions 24VAC multiple secondary connector kit, 6 positions 24VDC multiple secondary connector kit, 6 positions 24VAC multiple secondary connector kit, 8 positions 24VDC multiple secondary connector kit, 8 positions 24VAC Weight [g] 166 166 210 210 257 257
d ADDITIONAL SECONDARY KIT

Code 0226300401 0226310401 0226300601 0226310601 0226300801 0226310801 Description multiple secondary connector kit, 4 positions 24VDC multiple secondary connector kit, 4 positions 24VAC multiple secondary connector kit, 6 positions 24VDC multiple secondary connector kit, 6 positions 24VAC multiple secondary connector kit, 8 positions 24VDC multiple secondary connector kit, 8 positions 24VAC Weight [g] 158 158 199 199 243 243
2-97
DISTRIBUTORS
f 10-WIRE RETURN CABLE
g 10-WIRE RETURN CABLE - ONE END WITH CONNECTOR
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0226150022 022615....
Description 10-whire return cable L = 22 cm 10-whire return cable
Code 022613....
Description 10-wire return cable - one end with connector
....Length in cm Please contact our sales office
....Length in cm Please contact our sales office
h CABLE WITH 10 CONNECTORS
i 10-WIRE CONNECTOR KIT
Code 0226107201
Description 10-wires cable
Code 0226170002
Description 10-wire connector kit
Please specify the desired length in metres
j 19-WIRE CABLE, ONE END WITH CONNECTOR
l SET OF IDENTIFICATION PLATES
Code 0226140250 0226140500 0226141000 0226141500 0226142000 0226143000
Description 19-wire cable, one end with connector L = 2.5 m 19-wire cable, one end with connector L = 5 m 19-wire cable, one end with connector L = 10 m 19-wire cable, one end with connector L = 15 m 19-wire cable, one end with connector L = 20 m 19-wire cable, one end with connector L = 30 m
Code 0226107000
Description Set of identificatio plates
Package: 10 pieces
m ELECTRIC CONTACT GASKETS
n SET OF MULTIPLE BASE GASKETS
Code 0226107001
Description Set of electric contact gaskets
Code 0226007001
Description Set of m16 multiple base gaskets
Package: 10 pieces
2-98
o ELECTRIC CONNECTION BLANKING PLATE
p BASE BLANKING PLATE
Code 0225004502
Description mach 16 electric connection blanking plate
Code 0225004500
Description mach 16 base blanking plate
q MALE CONNECTOR
r KIT OF MULTIPLE BASE GASKETS
Code Description W0970504021 male connector 2 mm max power for each position = 5W max total power of multiple connector = 36W Example of a male connector
Code 0226007003
Description Kit of m16 multiple base integrate gaskets
SOV 1/8 SOV 1/4 SOV 1/2 SOV on base mACH 16 mACH 18 ISO 1 ISO 2 PIV valves APr : progressive starter V3V: circuit switching valve
NOTES
2-99
DISTRIBUTORS
REDUCER WITH GAUGE FOR VALVES, SERIES RMV
r EDUCEr WITH GAUGE FOr VALVES, SEr IES rmV
DISTRIBUTORS
The rmV-series miniature pressure regulator with pressure gauge for valves is specificall conceived for mounting on the outlets of valves with a 1/8 port. With limited cross dimension, it can be fitte to a series of small valves. The body is 16.5 mm wide and fit exactly on the valves of the mach 16 series for multiple electrical connection. Using the rmV, it is possible to differentiate the pressure of each single output of the valves. For example, if you mount it on port 2 and not on port 4, the pressure can be reduced on port 2 only. If you mount one for each port, the pressure on port 2 will differ from that on port 4, which in turn is less than the feed pressure (outlet 1). There are three 1/8 threaded rmV ports that are pneumatically connected in parallel. A small pressure gauge is mounted in one port; another port is plugged by an A7-type fittin and a third can take a fitting The user, however, can decide whether the layout of components is to be modifie or not. He might, for example, decide to mount three fitting to create a three-port reduced-pressure distributor.
TECHNICAL DATA
Threaded input connection Threaded output connection r egulation range bar mpa psi Input pressure bar mpa psi Flow rate at 6.3 bar (0.63 mpa - 91 psi) DP 1 bar Nl/min Flow rate at free exhaust at 6.3 bar (0.63 mpa - 91 psi) l/min N Fluid maximum temperature at 10 bar (1 mpa - 145 psi) Assembly position Use instructions 1/8 male 1/8 female 1 to 8 0.1 to 0.8 14.5 to 116 2 to 10 0.2 to 1 29 to 145 140 360 Filtered lubricated or unlubricated air C -10 to +60 F +14 to + 140 On valves The pressure must always be regulated in increasing values
DIMENSIONES
Code 9061601
Description rm V 1/8
APPLICATIONS - ASSEMBLY
Fixing the reducer onto the valve 3 outputs with G1/8 thread When mounting on valve units, with a pitch of less than 23 mm, alternate the gauge positions
2-100
VALVES TO ISO 15407-1/ VDMA 24563-02 SERIES MACH 18
mach 18 valve is manufactured according to the ISO 1507-1 standard, which in turn absorbs the VDmA 24563-02 rule. It comes in 5-way versions with 2 and 3 positions with solenoid or pneumatic actuation.
TECHNICAL DATA
Fluid Operating pressure: monostable monostable 5/3 bistable pilot-assisted minimum pilot pressure Operating temperature range Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Installation Assembly r ecommended lubricant Solenoid pilot manual Compatibility with oils Filtered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous bar 1.5 to 10 Vacuum to 10 pneumatic/1.9 to 10 solenoid/pneumatic Vacuum to 10 pneumatic/1 to 10 solenoid/pneumatic Vacuum to 10 2 to 10 -10 to +60 114.86 0.25 340 470 In any position (vertical assembly is not recommended for bistable valves subjected to vibration) On manifold bases ISO and UNI FD 22 Integrated coil to DIN 43650 C-shape monostable on solenoid pilot (with manual monostable on request) Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
bar C Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b CONTr OL/END CAP: Hostaform c SPOOL: Aluminium d GASKETS: Polyurethane e PISTONS: Hostaform f PISTON GASKET: Polyurethane g FILTEr : sintered bronze h PILOT: with integrated coil i SPr INGS: special steel
FLOW CHART
2-101
VALVES TO ISO 15407-1/VDmA 24563-02 SEr IES mACH 18
DISTRIBUTORS
MODULARITY

Reference a b c d e f g h
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0227100201 0227200150 0227200300 0227100200 0227200500 0227100000 0227300600 0227200800
Description ISO 15407-1 input end plate kit ISO 15407-1 manifold side base kit ISO 15407-1 intermediate bases ISO 15407-1 output end plate kit ISO 15407-1 blanking plate Intermediate diaphragm Connection bracket on DIN bar ISO 15407-1 individual base kit
KEY TO CODES
M S V FAMILY MSV solenoid/pneumatic MPV pneumatic D DIMENSIONS D ISO 15407-1/ VDmA 24563-02 5 FUNCTION 5 5/2 6 5/3 S O OPERATORS 14 SO solenoid/pneumatic SE solenoid-pilot-assisted PN pneumatic S RESETTING (12) mechanical springs bistable O O FURTHER DETAILS OO 5/2 CC closed centres OC open centres PC pressure centres 2 4 V D C VOLTAGE 24VDC 24VAC 110VAC 220VAC
S B
2-102
MACH 18 ISO 15407-1/VDMA 24563-02 MPV PNEUMATIC

TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure: minimum operating pressure: monostable monostable 5/3 bistable Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Actuation response times at 6 bar: monostable bistable r epositioning response times at 6 bar monostable bistable Operating temperature range bar bar Vacuumto10 1.5 1.9 1 114.86 0.25 340 470 4 4 8,4 4 -10 + 60
Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min ms
MONOSTABLE 5/2
MONOSTABLE 5/3
Symbol
Code 7063010130
Abbrev. mPV D5 PNS 00
Weight [g] 80
Symbol
Code 7063010210 7063010310 7063010410
Abbrev. mPV D6 PNS CC mPV D6 PNS OC mPV D6 PNS PC
Weight [g] 93 93 93
BISTABLE 5/2
NOTES
Symbol
Code 7063010110
Abbrev. mPV D5 PNB OO
Weight [g] 78
2-103
DISTRIBUTORS
ms
MACH 18 ISO 15407-1/VDMA 24563-02 SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC MSV

TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure: monostable monostable 5/3 bistable pilot-assisted minimum pilot pressure Operating temperature range Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Tr A / Trr monostable at 6 bar Tr A / Trr bistable at 6 bar Type of manual actuation Pilot with integrated coil Power Voltage tolerance Insulation class Degree of protection Solenoid rating Electrical contacts bar 1.5 to 10 1.9 to 10 1 to 10 Vacuum to 10 2 -10 to +60 114.86 0.25 340 470 12 / 26 21 / 21 monostable on solenoid pilot (with bistable manual valve on request) 24 VDC - 24 VAC - 110 VAC - 220 VAC 1 -10% to -15% F 155 IP 65 EN60529 with connector 100% ED DIN 43650 C Shape
DISTRIBUTORS
bar C Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min ms ms
MONOSTABLE 5/2
Symbol Code 7063020132 7063020133 7063020134 7063020135 7063030132 7063030133 7063030134 7063030135 Abbrev. mSV D5 SOS OO 24VDC mSV D5 SOS OO 24VAC mSV D5 SOS OO 110VAC mSV D5 SOS OO 220VAC mSV D5 SES OO 24VDC mSV D5 SES OO 24VAC mSV D5 SES OO 110VAC mSV D5 SES OO 220VAC Weight [g] 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
MONOSTABLE 5/3
Symbol Code 7063020212 7063020213 7063020214 7063020215 7063020312 7063020313 7063020314 7063020315 7063020412 7063020413 7063020414 7063020415 7063030212 7063030213 7063030214 7063030215 7063030312 7063030313 7063030314 7063030315 7063030412 7063030413 7063030414 7063030415 Abbrev. mSV D6 SOS CC 24VDC mSV D6 SOS CC 24VAC mSV D6 SOS CC 110VAC mSV D6 SOS CC 220VAC mSV D6 SOS OC 24VDC mSV D6 SOS OC 24VAC mSV D6 SOS OC 110VAC mSV D6 SOS OC 220VAC mSV D6 SOS PC 24VDC mSV D6 SOS PC 24VAC mSV D6 SOS PC 110VAC mSV D6 SOS PC 220VAC mSV D6 SES CC 24VDC mSV D6 SES CC 24VAC mSV D6 SES CC 110VAC mSV D6 SES CC 220VAC mSV D6 SES OC 24VDC mSV D6 SES OC 24VAC mSV D6 SES OC 110VAC mSV D6 SES OC 220VAC mSV D6 SES PC 24VDC mSV D6 SES PC 24VAC mSV D6 SES PC 110VAC mSV D6 SES PC 220VAC Weight [g] 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156 156
2-104
BISTABLE 5/2
Symbol Code 7063020112 7063020113 7063020114 7063020115 7063030112 7063030113 7063030114 7063030115 Abbrev. mSV D5 SOB OO 24VDC mSV D5 SOB OO 24VAC mSV D5 SOB OO 110VAC mSV D5 SOB OO 220VAC mSV D5 SEB OO 24VDC mSV D5 SEB OO 24VAC mSV D5 SEB OO 110VAC mSV D5 SEB OO 220VAC Weight [g] 143 143 143 143 143 143 143 143
ACCESSORIES
CONNECTOR 15 mm DIN 43650 SHAPE C
Code W0970501021 W0970501022 W0970501025 Description Connector 15 mm C shape DIN 43650 Connector 15 mm C shape DIN 43650 LED 24V Connector 15 mm C shape DIN 43650 LED+VDr 24V
SPARE PARTS
PILOT MACH 18 (OLD)
Code W4015101000 W4015101010 W4015101020 W4015101030 Description In-line pilot 24VDC In-line pilot 24VAC 50/60 Hz In-line pilot 110VAC 50/60 Hz In-line pilot 220VAC 50/60 Hz
PILOT MACH 18 (NEW)

Code W4015301000 W4015301010 W4015301020 W4015301030 Description In-line pilot 24VDC In-line pilot 24VAC 50/60 Hz In-line pilot 110VAC 50/60 Hz In-line pilot 220VAC 50/60 Hz
N.B.: if the pilot to be replaced bears the writing CE, you have to order among the NEW pilots, otherwise order among the OLD pilots.
2-105
DISTRIBUTORS
BASES TO ISO 15407-1/VDMA 24563-02 FOR MACH 18 VALVES
a INPUT END PLATE
b MANIFOLD BASE, SIDE PORTS
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0227100201
Description ISO 15407-1 input end plate kit
Weight [g] 125
Code 0227200150
Description ISO 15407-1 manifold base, side ports kit
Weight [g] 125
c INTERMEDIATE UPPER PORTS
d OUTPUT END PLATE
Code 0227200300
Description ISO 15407-1 intermediate upper ports kit
Weight [g] 118
Code 0227100200
Description ISO 15407-1 output end-plate kit
Weight [g] 122
e BLANKING PLATE - UNUSED POSITION
f INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
Code 0227200500
Description ISO 15407-1 blanking plate
Weight [g] 24
Code 0227100000
Description Intermediate diaphragm
Weight [g] 2
g CONNECTION BRACKETS ON THE BAR OMEGA (DIN EN 50022)

~50
h INDIVIDUAL BASE
Code 0227300600
Description Connection brackets on DIN bar
~9
14
Weight [g] 7
Code 0227200800
Description ISO 15407-1 individual base kit
Weight [g] 51
2-106
VALVES ISO 5599/1, SERIES IPV-ISV
The assembly surface dimensions of ISO1, ISO2 and ISO 3 valves are to ISO5599-1. They are available in the 5-way versions with 2 and 3 positions and with pneumatic or solenoid actuation.
TECHNICAL DATA
Fluid Operating pressure: monostable bistable pilot-assisted minimum pilot pressure Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Installation Assembly r ecommended lubricant Solenoid pilot manual maximum coil nut torque Compatibility with oils bar
ISO 1
ISO 2
ISO 3
Filtered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous Vacuum to 10 pneumatic / 2.5 to 10 solenoid/pneumatic Vacuum to 10 pneumatic / 1 to 10 solenoid/pneumatic Vacuum to 10 2.5 -10 to +60 7.5 12 15 250 657.14 971.43 0.36 0.25 0.43 700 1800 3200 1100 2700 4600 In any position (vertical assembly is not recommended for bistable valves subjected to vibration) On single and manifold bases according to ISO 5599/1 ISO and UNI FD 22 to CNOmO/in-line pilot / m12 to CNOmO Bistable on solenoid pilot monostable on valve body 1 Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
bar C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min
Nm
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b END CAP: HOSTAFOrm c SPOOL: chemically nickel-plated aluminium d DISTANCE PLATES: plastic e GASKETS: NBr f PISTONS: HOSTAFOrm g PISTON GASKET: NBr h FILTEr : sintered bronze i SPr INGS: special steel j OPEr ATOr : Brass pipe Stainless steel core
2-107
VALVES ISO 5599/1, SEr IES IPV-ISV
DISTRIBUTORS
FLOW CHART ISO 1 Flow rates (Nl/min) ISO 2 Flow rates (Nl/min)
DISTRIBUTORS
Pressure (bar) VALVES ISO 5599/1, SEr IES IPV-ISV ISO 3 Flow rates (Nl/min)
Pressure (bar)
Pressure (bar) KEY TO CODES

I P V FAMILY IPV ISO pneumatic ISV ISO solenoid/pneumatic 5 DIMENSIONS 5 ISO 1 6 ISO 2 7 ISO 3 5 FUNCTION 5 5/2 6 5/3 PN OPERATORS 14 pneumatic solenoid/pneumatic electric pilot-assisted solenoid/pneumatic in line solenoid assisted in line m12 m12 solenoid/pneumatic m12 solenoid assisted S RESETTING (12) mechanical springs bistable differential O O FURTHER DETAILS 5/2 closed centres open centres pressure centres
PN SO SE DO DE CO CE
S B D
OO CC OC PC
Only for ISO 1 Only for ISO 1 and ISO 2
2-108
VALVES ISO 5599/1, PNEUMATIC SERIES IPV

TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure bar minimum operation pressure: monostable bar bistable bar Operating temperature range C Nominal diameter mm Conductance C Nl/min bar Critical ratio b bar/bar Flow rate at 6 bar P 0.5 bar Nl/min Flow rate at 6 bar P 1 bar Nl/min r esponse times at 6 Bar: monostable ms bistable ms r epositioning response times at 6 Bar: monostable ms bistable ms manual ISO 1 ISO 2 Vacuum to 10 2.5 1 -10 to +60 7.5 12 15 250 657.14 971.43 0.36 0.25 0.43 700 1800 3200 1100 2700 4600 12 20 24 30 35 45 ISO 3
30 43 55 20 30 45 monostable on valve body
PNEUMATIC ACTUATION ISO 1

Symbol Code 7051011100 7051011200 7051011300 7051012100 7051012200 7051012300 Abbrev. IPV 55 PNS OO IPV 55 PNB OO IPV 55 PND OO IPV 55 PNS CC IPV 55 PNS OC IPV 55 PNS PC Weight [g] 310 310 310 310 310 310


2-109
DISTRIBUTORS
VALVES ISO 5599/1, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC, SERIES ISV

TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure: monostable bistable pilot-assisted minimum pilot pressure Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Tr A / Trr monostable at 6 bar Tr A / Trr bistable at 6 bar Solenoid pilot manual Coils maximum coil nut torque Nm bar 2.5 to 10 1 to 10 Vacuum to 10 2.5 -10 to +60 12 15 7.5 657.14 971.43 250 0.36 0.25 0.43 700 1800 3200 2700 4600 1100 24 / 50 39 / 60 50 / 120 20 / 20 25 / 25 35 / 35 Standards CNOmO Bistable on solenoid pilot monostable on valve body 30 mm side DIN 43650 Form A ISO 22 mm side 1 ISO 1 ISO 2 ISO 3
DISTRIBUTORS
bar C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min ms ms
MONOSTABLE 5/2 ISO 1 VALVES ISO 5599/1, SEr IES IPV-ISV

Symbol Code 7051021100 7051021400 Abbrev. ISV 55 SOS OO ISV 55 SES OO Weight [g] 344 344
MONOSTABLE 5/2 ISO 2


2-110
BISTABLE 5/2 ISO 1 - MONOSTABLE 5/3 ISO 1

Symbol Code 7051021200 7051021300 7051022100 7051022200 7051022300 7051021500 7051021600 7051022400 7051022500 7051022600 Abbrev. ISV 55 SOB OO ISV 55 SOD OO ISV 56 SOS CC ISV 56 SOS OC ISV 56 SOS PC ISV 55 SEB OO ISV 55 SED OO ISV 56 SES CC ISV 56 SES OC ISV 56 SES PC Weight [g] 388 375 372 372 372 388 375 372 372 372


2-111
DISTRIBUTORS
VALVES ISO 5599/1, PNEUMATIC, SERIES ISV WITH IN-LINE SOLENOID PILOT
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure: monostable bistable pilot-assisted minimum pilot pressure Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Tr A / Trr monostable at 6 bar Tr A / Trr bistable at 6 bar Solenoid pilot manual Coils bar 2.5 to 10 1 to 10 Vacuum to 10 2.5 -10 to +60 7.5 250 0.36 700 1100 24 / 50 20 / 20 In line pilot Bistable on solenoid pilot 30 mm side DIN 43650 Form A ISO 22 mm side 1 ISO 1
DISTRIBUTORS
bar C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min ms ms
maximum coil nut torque
Nm

Symbol Code 7053021100 7053021400 Abbrev. ISV 55 DOS OO ISV 55 DES OO Weight [g] 396 396
BISTABLE 5/2 ISO 1

Symbol Code 7053021200 7053021500 Abbrev. ISV 55 DOB OO ISV 55 DEB OO Weight [g] 450 450

Symbol Code 7053022100 7053022200 7053022300 7053022400 7053022500 7053022600 Abbrev. ISV 56 DOS CC ISV 56 DOS OC ISV 56 DOS PC ISV 56 DES CC ISV 56 DES OC ISV 56 DES PC Weight [g] 517 516 516 517 516 515
2-112
COILS AND CONNECTORS FOR ISO 5599/1 SOLENOID VALVES SERIES ISV
COILS SIDE 22 mm
Voltage tolerance: 10% to + 15% Insulation class: F155 Degree of protection: IP65 EN60529 with connector Avoid prolonged exposure to the atmospheric agents Code W0215000151 W0215000101 W0215000111 W0215000121 W0215000131 Abbrev. Coil 22 8 BA 2W-12VDC Coil 22 8 BA 2W-24VDC Coil 22 8 BA 3.5VA-24VAC Coil 22 8 BA 3.5VA-110VAC Coil 22 8 BA 3.5VA-220VAC Coil temperature 100% ED: 70C at 20C Ambient temperature According to Atex 94/9 CE rule, group 2, category 3 GD Nominal voltage 12Vcc 24Vcc 24V 50/60Hz 110V 50/60Hz 220V 50/60Hz Absorption Inrush 2W 2W 5.3VA 5.3VA 5.3VA
Holding 2W 2W 3.5VA 3.5VA 3.5VA
COILS SIDE 30 mm
Electric contact DIN43650 shape A ISO 4400 Voltage tolerance: -10% + 10% Insulation class: F155 Code W0210010100 W0210011100 W0210012100 W0210013100 Abbrev. Coil 30 8 4W-24VDC Coil 30 8 4VA-24VAC Coil 30 8 4VA-110VAC Coil 30 8 4VA-220VAC Degree of protection: IP65 EN60529 with connector Avoid prolonged exposure to the atmospheric agents According to Atex 94/9 CE rule, group 2, category 3 GD Nominal voltage 24Vcc 24V 50/60Hz 110V 50/60Hz 220V 50/60Hz Absorption Inrush 5W 10VA 10VA 10VA
CONNECTOR FOR COILS SIDE 22 mm

CONNECTOR FOR COILS SIDE 30 mm

KIT COIL EEXM

Code Description 0227606913 Kit for coil 30 24 VDC EEXmT5 cable 3 m 0227606915 Kit for coil 30 24 VDC EEXmT5 cable 5 m 0227608013 Kit for coil 30 24 VAC EEXmT5 cable 3 m 0227608015 Kit for coil 30 24 VAC EEXmT5 cable 5 m 0227608023 Kit for coil 30 110 VAC EEXmT5 cable 3 m 0227608025 Kit for coil 30 110 VAC EEXmT5 cable 5 m 0227608033 Kit for coil 30 230 VAC EEXmT5 cable 3 m 0227608035 Kit for coil 30 230 VAC EEXmT5 cable 5 m According to Atex 94/9 CE rule, group II, category 2 GD
KIT COILS SIDE 22 IP65

Code 0222100100 Description Kit for coil 22 - IP65
Improved IP65 protection, even after prolonged exposure to atmospheric agents. Applicable to valves with a technopolymer control.
2-113
Holding 4W 4VA 4VA 4VA
DISTRIBUTORS
VALVES ISO 5599/1, SOLENOID/PNEUMATIC, SERIES ISV WITH M12 CONNECTOR

TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure: monostable bistable pilot-assisted minimum pilot pressure Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6 bar DP 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Tr A / Trr monostable at 6 bar Solenoid pilot manual Coil power Voltage Electrical connection Degree of protection Electrical protection bar 2.5 to 10 1 to1 0 Vacuum to 10 2.5 -10 to +60 7.5 12 250 657.14 0.25 0.36 700 1800 1100 2700 78 / 180 22 / 60 With built-in coil monostable on solenoid pilot monostable on valve body 1.2 W 24 VDC 10% m12 IP65 EN60529 Transil ISO 1 ISO 2
bar C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min ms
DISTRIBUTORS
VALVES ISO 5599/1, SOLENOID/PNEUmATIC, SEr IES ISV WITH m12 CONNECTOr

Symbol Code 7054021100 7054021400 Abbrev. ISV 55 COS OO ISV 55 CES OO Weight [g] 508 508

Symbol Code 7055021100 7055021400 Abbrev. ISV 65 COS OO ISV 65 CES OO Weight [g] 901 901
2-114

Symbol Code 7054021200 7054021300 7054022100 7054022200 7054022300 7054021500 7054021600 7054022400 7054022500 7054022600 Abbrev. ISV 55 COB OO ISV 55 COD OO ISV 56 COS CC ISV 56 COS OC ISV 56 COS PC ISV 55 CEB OO ISV 55 CED OO ISV 56 CES CC ISV 56 CES OC ISV 56 CES PC Weight [g] 512 490 496 496 496 512 490 496 496 496

Symbol Code 7055021200 7055021300 7055022100 7055022200 7055022300 7055021500 7055021600 7055022400 7055022500 7055022600 Abbrev. ISV 65 COB OO ISV 65 COD OO ISV 66 COS CC ISV 66 COS OC ISV 66 COS PC ISV 65 CEB OO ISV 65 CED OO ISV 66 CES CC ISV 66 CES OC ISV 66 CES PC Weight [g] 860 860 868 868 868 860 860 868 868 868
WIRING DIAGRAM
mONOSTABLE
BISTABLE
2-115
VALVES ISO 5599/1, SOLENOID/PNEUmATIC, SEr IES ISV WITH m12 CONNECTOr
DISTRIBUTORS
BASES ISO 5599/1 FOR VALVES SERIES IPV-ISV SIZE 1 AND 2
BASES ISO 5599/1 FOr VALVES SEr IES IPV-ISV SIZE 1 AND 2
Reference a b c d e f g h i j k l m
DISTRIBUTORS
Code ISO 1 0228000150 0228000155 0228000200 0228000201 0228000210 0228000300 0228000301 0228000500 0228000400 0228000600 0228000100 0228000110 0228000700
Code ISO 2 0228001150 0228001155 0228001200 0228001201 0228001210 0228001300 0228001301 0228001500 0228001400 0228001100 0228001110 0228001700
Description manifold base - side ports manifold base with bottom ports Input end plate Additional input end plate Blind end plate Intermediate - top ports Intermediate - back ports Blanking plate Intermediate diaphragm ISO 1/ISO 2 port adapter Individual base - side ports Base - bottom ports Assembly kit
2-116
a MANIFOLD BASE, SIDE PORTS

ISO 1 ISO 2
Code 0228000150 0228001150
Description manifold base, side ports, ISO 1 manifold base, side ports, ISO 2
Weight [g] 314 131
b MANIFOLD BASE, BOTTOM PORTS

ISO 1 ISO 2
Code 0228000155 0228001155
Description manifold base, bottom ports, ISO 1 manifold base, bottom ports, ISO 2
Weight [g] 314 505
c INPUT END PLATE

ISO 1 ISO 2
Code 0228000200 0228001200
Description Input end plate ISO 1 Input end plate ISO 2
Weight [g] 129 206
d ADDITIONAL INPUT END PLATE

ISO 1 ISO 2
Code 0228000201 0228001201
Description Additional input end plate, ISO 1 Additional input end plate, ISO 2
Weight [g] 84 162
2-117
DISTRIBUTORS
e BLIND END PLATE

ISO 1 ISO 2
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0228000210 0228001210
Description Blind end plate, ISO 1 Blind end plate, ISO 2
Weight [g] 79 130
f INTERMEDIATE TOP PORTS

ISO 1 ISO 2
Code 0228000300 0228001300
Description Intermediate top ports, ISO 1 Intermediate top ports, ISO 2
Weight [g] 235 299
g INTERMEDIATE REAR PORTS

ISO 1 ISO 2
Code 0228000301 0228001301
Description Intermediate rear ports, ISO 1 Intermediate rear ports, ISO 2
Weight [g] 237 299
h BLANKING PLATE
ISO 1 ISO 2
Code 0228000500 0228001500
Description Blanking plate, ISO 1 Blanking plate, ISO 2
Weight [g] 47 96
2-118
i INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
j DIMENSION ADAPTER
Code 0228000400 0228001400
Description Intermediate diaphragm, ISO 1 Intermediate diaphragm, ISO 2
Weight [g] 4 7
Code 0228000600
Description Dimension adapter ISO 1-2
Weight [g] 454
k INDIVIDUAL BASE SIDE PORTS

ISO 1 ISO 2
Code 0228000100 0228001100
Description Individual base side ports, ISO 1 Individual base side ports, ISO 2
Weight [g] 165 257
l INDIVIDUAL BASE BOTTOM PORTS

ISO 1 ISO 2
Code 0228000110 0228001110
Description Individual base bottom ports, ISO 1 Individual base bottom ports, ISO 2
Weight [g] 197 304
m ASSEMBLY KIT
ISO 1 ISO 2
Code 0228000700 0228001700
Description Assembly kit, ISO 1 Assembly kit, ISO 2
Weight [g] 47 47
2-119
DISTRIBUTORS
BASES ISO 5599/1 FOR VALVES SERIES IPV-ISV SIZE ISO 3
BASES ISO 5599/1 FOr VALVES SEr IES IPV-ISV SIZE ISO 3
Reference b c h k l
DISTRIBUTORS
Code ISO 3 0228002155 0228002200 0228002500 0228002100 0228002110
Description manifold base with bottom ports Input end plate Blanking plate Individual base - side ports Base - bottom ports
2-120
b MANIFOLD BASE, BOTTOM PORTS
c INPUT END PLATE
Code 0228002155
Description manifold base, bottom ports, ISO 3
Weight [g] 720
Code 0228002200
Description Input end plate, ISO 3
Weight [g] 670
h BLANKING PLATE
k INDIVIDUAL BASE
SIDE PORTS
Code 0228002500
Description Blanking plate, ISO 3
Weight [g] 265
Code 0228002100
Description Individual base side ports, ISO 3
Weight [g] 360
l INDIVIDUAL BASE BOTTOM PORTS
NOTES
Code 0228002110
Description Individual base bottom ports, ISO 3
Weight [g] 420
2-121
BASES ISO 5599/1 FOr VALVES SEr IES IPV-ISV SIZE ISO 3
DISTRIBUTORS
SANDWICH REGULATORS FOR ISO 5599/1 BASES ISO1-2
TECHNICAL DATA
max upstream pressure Pressure range Pressure gauge range Flow rate at 6 bar DP 1 bar Operating temperature range Fixing screw on ISO 5599/1 base Installation Instructions for use
ISO 1
ISO 2
bar 13 bar 0 to 12 bar 0 to 12 Nl/min 400 550 C 10 to +60 m5 ant-extraction m6 anti-extraction In any position Downstream pressure must always be set to increasing values
SANDWICH rEGULATOr S FOr ISO 5599/1 BASES ISO1-2
DISTRIBUTORS
SANDWICH REGULATOR FOR ISO 1 VALVES
Symbol Code 0228000804 Description Sandwich regulator 1 0 to 12 bar ISO 1 Weight [g] 760
0228000814*
Sandwich regulator 3 0 to 12 bar ISO 1
760
* A pilot-assisted valve needs to be used since port 1 relieves pressure, it is not under pressure
SANDWICH REGULATOR FOR ISO 2 VALVES

Symbol Code 0228001804 Description Sandwich regulator 1 0 to 12 bar ISO 2 Weight [g] 900
0228001814*
Sandwich regulator 3 0 to 12 bar ISO 2
900
* A pilot-assisted valve needs to be used since port 1 relieves pressure, it is not under pressure
2-122
VALVES FOR UL- AND CSA-APPROVED COILS
The following valves come in a version for use with UL and CSA-approved coils. Series 70 valves, sizes 1/8, 1/4 and 1/2 Series 70 valves on base Namur valves ISO 5599/1 valves, sizes 1 and 2 ISO 5599/1 valves with in-line pilot UL certification refers to the coil system and pilot; CSA certification refers to the coil only.
NOTES UL is an independent organisation involved in the safety certificatio of products for the North American market. Coils and solenoid pilots are certifie under UL 429 - Electrically operated valves. The Ur mark concerns UL-recognised components and is used for ones that are part of a larger product or system. This is why Ur can be read on the coil. The certificatio of these components is only valid if they are used in the manufacturers stated conditions (in our case voltage 10% etc.). The company that manufactures the certifie components is included in a UL-listing of certifie manufacturers. The list does not include the name metal Work, but rather the name Nass magnet (UL file mH13513), with which we have an agreement for the supply and customisation of coils and solenoid valves. The use of approved coils and pilots does not automatically certify the whole valve, nor application of a specifi machine or plant. Such approval will therefore be up to the manufacturer of the machine or plant. CSA (Canadian Standard Association) safety standards are applicable in Canada. The coil complies with CSA 22.2. The valves on which these coils can be mounted have the same code and description as those of the corresponding standard valves, followed by the suffi L. Example: Code Description Standard version 7020020400 SOV 33 SOS NO Approved version 7020020400L SOV 33 SOS NO L
All valves and units of this type have a painted or anodized aluminium control and can only mount metal Work coils having a code that begins with W0217 (approved coil). For the technical data, a diagram of the components and the code key, please refer to the section in the catalogue of the corresponding family of standard valves. UL AND CSA COILS Ur -marked coils are therefore components that can form part of a larger product of system. Approval of the component is valid in the above operating conditions only. The coils must be mounted on suitable valves, ones for which the Metal Work code ends with L.
Voltage tolerance: 10% Insulation class: F155 Degree of protection: IP65 EN60529 with connector Avoid prolonged exposure to the atmospheric agents Temperature range: from +20C at +50C (DC version) from +20C at +40C (AC version) max coil temperature at ED 100%: from +58C at +20C (DC version) from +81C at +20C (AC version)
Code W0217000151 W0217000101 W0217000111 W0217000121
Abbrev. Coil 22 9 2,9W 12VDC Ur Coil 22 9 2,6W 24VDC Ur Coil 22 9 6/4.9 VA 24V 50/60Hz Ur Coil 22 9 6/4.9 VA 110V 50/60Hz Ur
W0217000131
Coil 22 9 6/4.9 VA 230V 50/60Hz Ur
Nominal voltage 12Vcc 24Vcc 24V 50 Hz 24V 60 Hz 110V 50 Hz 110V 60 Hz 48 Vcc 230V 50 Hz 230V 60 Hz
Absorption 2.9 W 2.6 W 6VA 4.9VA 6 VA 4.9 VA 2.7 VA 6 VA 4.9 VA
2-123
VALVES FOr UL- AND CSA-APPr OVED COILS
DISTRIBUTORS
ELECTROPNEUMATIC CONTROL FOR: SERIES 70 VALVES 1/8, SERIES 70 VALVES ON BASE

SERIES 70 VALVES 1/8 Symbol Code 7010020400L 7010020200L 7010021100L 7010021200L 7010020100L
Abbrev. SOV 23 SOS NO L SOV 23 SOS NC L SOV 25 SOS OO L SOV 25 SOB OO L SOV 23 SOB OO L SOV 26 SOS CC L SOV 26 SOS OC L SOV 26 SOS PC L
Weight [g] 130 130 158 220 195 250 250 250
DISTRIBUTORS
7010022100L 7010022200L 7010022300L
SERIES 70 VALVES ON BASE 7011021100L 7011021200L 7011022100L 7011022200L 7011022300L
SOV B5 SOS OO L SOV B5 SOB OO L SOV B6 SOS CC L SOV B6 SOS OC L SOV B6 SOS PC L
172 234 264 264 264
ELECTROPNEUMATIC CONTROL FOR: SERIES 70 VALVES 1/4, NAMUR VALVES

SERIES 70 VALVES 1/4 Symbol Code 7020020400L 7020020200L 7020021100L 7020021200L 7020020100L 7020022100L 7020022200L 7020022300L
Abbrev. SOV 33 SOS NO L SOV 33 SOS NC L SOV 35 SOS OO L SOV 35 SOB OO L SOV 33 SOB OO L SOV 36 SOS CC L SOV 36 SOS OC L SOV 36 SOS PC L
Weight [g] 197 197 245 326 280 364 364 364
VALVES NAMUR 7021020100L 7021020200L SOV A5 SOS OO L SOV A5 SOB OO L 280 360
2-124
ELECTROPNEUMATIC CONTROL FOR: SERIES 70 VALVES 1/2

Symbol Code 7030020400L 7030020200L 7030021100L 7030021200L 7030020100L 7030022100L 7030022200L 7030022300L Abbrev. SOV 43 SOS NO L SOV 43 SOS NC L SOV 45 SOS OO L SOV 45 SOB OO L SOV 43 SOB OO L SOV 46 SOS CC L SOV 46 SOS OC L SOV 46 SOS PC L Weight [g] 930 930 1120 1140 955 1265 1265 1265
ELECTROPNEUMATIC CONTROL FOR: ISO 5599/1 VALVES

Overall length of monostable valves 5/2 (included solenoid pilot): add 2 mm to the length of the corresponding standard ones. Overall length of bistable valves 5/2 and monostable valves 5/3 (included solenoid pilot): add 4 mm to the length of the corresponding standard ones. ISO 5599/1 VALVES - ISO 1 Symbol Code 7051021100L 7051021200L 7051022100L 7051022200L 7051022300L
Abbrev. ISV 55 SOS OO L ISV 55 SOB OO L ISV 56 SOS CC L ISV 56 SOS OC L ISV 56 SOS PC L
Weight [g] 374 448 432 432 432
ISO 5599/1 VALVES - ISO 2 7052021100L 7052021200L 7052022100L 7052022200L 7052022300L
ISV 65 SOS OO L ISV 65 SOB OO L ISV 66 SOS CC L ISV 66 SOS OC L ISV 66 SOS PC L
745 800 780 780 780
CNOMO SOLENOID VALVE Code Description 9453922L Cnomo 3/2 with bistable manual actuation
ELECTROPNEUMATIC CONTROL FOR: VALVES ISO 5599/1 WITH IN-LINE SOLENOID PILOT
Symbol Code 7053021100L 7053021200L 7053022100L 7053022200L 7053022300L A = 20 for 5/2 28.5 for 5/3 Abbrev. ISV 55 DOS OO L ISV 55 DOB OO L ISV 56 DOS CC L ISV 56 DOS OC L ISV 56 DOS PC L Weight [g] 396 450 516 516 516
2-125
DISTRIBUTORS
VALVES ISO 5599/1 SERIES SAFE AIR
Starting from a series of sturdy, reliable valves, such as those to ISO 5599/1, some special features have been added, such as the presence of a valve status diagnostic system and the creation of a double channel guaranteeing architecture redundancy. The simplest version features one electropneumatically-operated 5/2 monostable valve. It is common knowledge that when this type of valve is in the idle state (coil not energized), port 1 is connected to port 2, and port 4 relieves. When the valve is operated (coil energized), port 1 is connected to port 4, and port 2 relieves. When the coil is de-energized again, the valve is returned to the idle state (so port 4 relieves) by means of a spring that returns the spool to the home position. In the event of a failure, the spool may remain in the actuating position, even with coil de-energized, leaving port 4 pressurized. To offset this problem, we have added a Hall-effect sensor that reads the spool position. This means that when the valve is deactivated, the sensor is on, and when the valve is activated, the sensor is off. A status in which the sensor is off and the coil de-energized indicates a problem. To reduce the probability of risk during plant maintenance, the manual actuator mounted on the Cnomo electric control is the monostable type. The sensor inside the valve is available in the standard version with a 2.5m three-wire cable (standard or ATEX certified or with an m8 connector and a 300 mm cable. This valve, which is available in 3 sizes for the ISO 5599/1 series, is a category 2 component according to ISO EN 13849 and is suitable for use in safety circuits up to PL=c. For those requiring higher PLs, we have also developed a double-channel version (redundant) that requires the use of ISO 5599/1 valves with a monitored coil arranged so that ports 2 are in parallel and ports 4 are in series. If just one of the valves de-energizes, port 4 relieves, so, even if one of the two coils remains blocked, the other guarantees relief of the compressed-air circuit. In this case, too, the presence of spool position sensors can be used to monitor the status. The double valve is also available in 3 sizes for the ISO 5599/1 series. It is a category 4 component according to ISO EN 13849 and is suitable for use in safety circuits up to PL=e. Both the single- and the double-channel valve come with: - a Type-Approval n P13104/11/mC/nb issued by Bureau Veritas in accordance with EN ISO 13849 - a certificat of compliance examination to the machinery Directive 2006/42/EC CV **No. CV 002-10-2011 released by Bureau Veritas.
2-126
VALVES ISO 5599/1 SEr IES SAFE AIr
DISTRIBUTORS
SINGLE VALVE ISO 5599/1 SERIES SAFE AIR

TECHNICAL DATA
Fluid Operation Operating pressure: non-assisted pilot-assisted minimum pilot pressure Operating temperature range Nominal diameter Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6.3 bar p 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6.3 bar p 1 bar Tr A/Trr at 6.3 bar Conductance C on relief Critical ratio b on relief Flow rate on free exhaust at 6.3 bar Installation Assembly Solenoid pilot manual actuator r ecommended lubricant Compatibility with oils Coils ISO 1 ISO 2 ISO3 Filtered unlubricated air (50m); lubrication, if used, must be continuous 5/2 monostable bar from 2.5 to 10 from vacuum to 10 2.5 from -10 to +60 (from -10 to +45 for Atex version) 7.5 12 15 250 657 971 0.36 0.43 0.43 700 1800 3200 1100 2700 4600 12 / 30 24 / 43 50 / 120 267 817 1095 0.34 0.24 0.56 1850 5900 6500 any position On single or manifold bases to ISO 5599/1 (*) to CNOmO monostable on solenoid pilot and valve body ISO and UNI FD 22 See webpage www.metalwork.it/eng/materiali_compatibilita.html 30 mm side, 8 hole EN175301-803 connection, type A 22 mm side, 8 hole EN175301-803 connection, type B Certifie EN 60204.1 and VDE 0580 r efer to the Accessories section for the electrical features page 14 (*) IP65 with coil and connector mounted max. 78 dBA with silenced relief 1 In accordance with machinery Directive, Annexe V (**) II 3G Ex nA c IIC T4 Gc x -10C<Ta<45C II 3D Ex tc IIIC T135C IP65 Dc Cuts off the power supply and relieves the air circuit connected to port 4 Hall effect (refer to page 13 for sensor details) 40 x 106 cycles 2 Low (80 %) Suitable for use in safety circuits up to PL=c
Class of protection Noise level max coil ring nut torque CE marking ATEX category (only for versions with an ATEX sensor) Safety function Type of sensor used B10d Category - ISO EN 13849 DC PL - ISO EN 13849
Nm
* To avoid malfunctions, we recommend using metal Work accessories ** The declaration can be downloaded from www.metalwork.it IMPORTANT: Do not mount 2 or more SAFE AIr valves in adjacent positions. A ny ferromagnetic masses must be at least 30mm from the sensor. P revent magnetic field from creating disturbance in the sensor area.
COMPONENTS a VALVE BODy: Aluminium b END CAP: Hostaform c SPOOL: chemically nickel-plated aluminium d DISTANCE PLATES: plastic e GASKETS: NBr f PISTONS: Hostaform g PISTON GASKET: NBr h FILTEr : sintered bronze i SPr INGS: special steel j OPEr ATOr : Brass pipe Stainless steel core k LOCKING rING: special steel l mAGNET: Neodymium m SENSOr : Hall effect
2-127
DISTRIBUTORS
bar C mm Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min ms/ms Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min
FLOW CHARTS - SINGLE VALVE ISO 1 - ON DELIVEr y ISO 1 - ON rELIEF
DISTRIBUTORS
Flow rates [Nl/min]
Flow rates [Nl/min]
Outlet pressure [bar]
ISO 2 - ON DELIVEr y VALVES ISO 5599/1 SEr IES SAFE AIr
ISO 2 - ON rELIEF
Flow rates [Nl/min]
Flow rates [Nl/min]
ISO 3 - ON DELIVEr y
ISO 3 - ON rELIEF
Flow rates [Nl/min]
Flow rates [Nl/min]
KEY TO CODES
ISV FAMILY ISV ISO solenoid/ pneumatic 5 DIMENSIONS 5 ISO1 6 ISO2 7 ISO3 5 FUNCTION 5 5/2 SO OPERATORS 14 SO solenoid/ pneumatic SE electric pilot-assisted S RESETTING 12 mechanical springs OO FURTHER DETAILS OO 5/2 3F SENSOR 3F 2.5 m 3 wires M8 0.3 m m8 AT 2 m ATEX
2-128
5/2 MONOSTABLE - ISO 1

Symbol Code 7057021100 7057121100 7057221100 7057021400 7057121400 7057221400 Abbrev. ISV 55 SOS OO 3F ISV 55 SOS OO m8 ISV 55 SOS OO AT ISV 55 SES OO 3F ISV 55 SES OO m8 ISV 55 SES OO AT Sensor 2.5 m 3 wires 0.3 m m8 2 m ATEX 2.5 m 3 wires 0.3 m m8 2 m ATEX Weight [g] 380 350 370 380 350 370


2-129
DISTRIBUTORS
EXAMPLE OF A SAFETY CIRCUIT WITH A SINGLE VALVE Below is an example of a wiring diagram for controlling metal Work SAFE AIr single valves using Pilz components. Circuit components: - a Pilz safety module PNOZ s3 for controlling the emergency stop button; terminal y32 indicates the status of the module, which can be relayed to the machine control logic - an emergency stop button S1 (Pilz - PIT es Set) linked to terminals S11-S12-S22-S23 of the PNOZ s3 - a metal Work SAFE AIr solenoid valve, the 24 VDC coil of which is fed by terminal 14 of the PNOZ s3 (the other terminal of the coil is 0 V); the valves Hall-effect sensor is 24 VDC - a start/reset button S2 - a relay K1, controlled by the valve sensor; an NO contact of the relay is in series with button S2 of the PNOZ s3. Expected behaviour with the system operating correctly: - system deactivated: contact 14 is OFF the coil is de-energized the sensor is ON relay K1 is energized contact K1 is closed contact y32 is OFF - with the system activated via the start/reset button: contact 14 is ON the coil is energized the sensor is OFF relay K1 is de-energized contact K1 is open contact y32 is ON In the event of a malfunction (e.g. spool jam), the coil is de-energized but the sensor remains OFF, relay K1 remains de-energized, contact K1 remains open (preventing subsequent restarts) and contact y32 is OFF. In the event of a valve fault, the circuit in the diagram below does not allow relief of the compressed air system. Sensor status must be monitored to assess valve operation. Contact y32 indicates the status of the PNOZ s3, not the status of the sensor. All the electrical connections between the various components must comply with the applicable safety regulations. If the emergency button is operated at a frequency of 1 actuation per hour, the circuit activates a safety function with PL = c (calculations made with the PAScal programme by Pilz). responsibility for fina checking that PL lies with the person assembling the circuit.
2-130
DISTRIBUTORS
DOUBLE VALVE ISO 5599/1 SERIES SAFE AIR

TECHNICAL DATA
Fluid Operation Operating pressure: non-assisted pilot-assisted minimum pilot pressure Operating temperature range Conductance C Critical ratio b Flow rate at 6.3 bar p 0.5 bar Flow rate at 6.3 bar p 1 bar Conductance C on relief Critical ratio b on relief Flow rate on free exhaust at 6.3 bar Tr A/Trr at 6.3 bar Installation Solenoid pilot manual actuator r ecommended lubricant Compatibility with oils Coils ISO 1 ISO 2 ISO3 Filtered unlubricated air (50m); lubrication, if used, must be continuous double 5/2 monostable bar from 2.5 to 10 from vacuum to 10 2.5 from -10 to +60 (from -10 to +45 for Atex version) 228 498 720 0.40 0.24 0.44 770 1250 2500 1050 1750 3400 222 554 724 0.30 0.02 0.41 1600 4000 5300 12 / 30 24 / 43 50 / 120 any position to CNOmO monostable on solenoid pilot and valve body ISO and UNI FD 22 See webpage www.metalwork.it/eng/materiali_compatibilita.html 30 mm side, 8 hole EN175301-803 connection, form A 22 mm side, 8 hole EN175301-803 connection, form B Certifie EN 60204.1 and VDE 0580 r efer to the Accessories section for electrical features page 14 (*) IP65 with coil and connector mounted max. 78 dBA with silenced relief in accordance with machinery Directive, Annexe V (**) II 3G Ex nA c IIC T4 Gc x -10C<Ta<45C II 3D Ex tc IIIC T135C IP65 Dc 1 Icuts off the power supply and relieves the air circuit connected to port 4 Hall effect (refer to page 13 for sensor details) 40x106 cycles 4 High ( 99 %) 80 Suitable for use in safety circuits up to PL=e
Class of protection Noise level CE marking ATEX category (only for versions with an ATEX sensor) max coil ring nut torque Safety function Type of sensor used B10d Category - ISO EN 13849 DC CCF PL - ISO EN 13849
Nm
* To avoid malfunctions, we recommend using metal Work accessories ** The declaration can be downloaded from www.metalwork.it IMPORTANT: ny ferromagnetic masses must be at least 30mm from the sensor. A P revent magnetic field from creating disturbance in the sensor area.
WIRING DIAGRAM
2-131
DISTRIBUTORS
bar C Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min Nl/min Nl/min bar bar/bar Nl/min ms/ms
FLOW CHARTS - DOUBLE VALVE ISO 1 - ON DELIVEr y ISO 1 - ON rELIEF
DISTRIBUTORS
Flow rates [Nl/min]
Flow rates [Nl/min]
ISO 2 - ON DELIVEr y VALVES ISO 5599/1 SEr IES SAFE AIr
ISO 2 - ON rELIEF
Flow rates [Nl/min]
Flow rates [Nl/min]
ISO 3 - ON DELIVEr y
ISO 3 - ON rELIEF
Flow rates [Nl/min]
Flow rates [Nl/min]
KEY TO CODES
ISV FAMILY ISV ISO solenoid/ pneumatic 5 DIMENSIONS 5 ISO1 6 ISO2 7 ISO3 5 FUNCTION 5 5/2 SO OPERATORS 14 SO solenoid/ pneumatic SE electric pilot-assisted S RESETTING 12 mechanical springs DD FURTHER DETAILS DD double 5/2 3F SENSOR 3F 2.5 m 3 wires M8 0.3 m m8 AT 2 m ATEX
2-132
DOUBLE 5/2 MONOSTABLE
Code 7057021110 7057121110 7057221110 7057021410 7057121410 7057221410 7058021110 7058121110 7058221110 7058021410 7058121410 7058221410 7059021110 7059121110 7059221110 7059021410 7059121410 7059221410
Size ISO 1 ISO 1 ISO 1 ISO 1 ISO 1 ISO 1 ISO 2 ISO 2 ISO 2 ISO 2 ISO 2 ISO 2 ISO 3 ISO 3 ISO 3 ISO 3 ISO 3 ISO 3
Abbrev. ISV 55 SOS DD 3F ISV 55 SOS DD m8 ISV 55 SOS DD AT ISV 55 SES DD 3F ISV 55 SES DD m8 ISV 55 SES DD AT ISV 65 SOS DD 3F ISV 65 SOS DD m8 ISV 65 SOS DD AT ISV 65 SES DD 3F ISV 65 SES DD m8 ISV 65 SES DD AT ISV 75 SOS DD 3F ISV 75 SOS DD m8 ISV 75 SOS DD AT ISV 75 SES DD 3F ISV 75 SES DD m8 ISV 75 SES DD AT
A 112 112 112 112 112 112 146 146 146 146 146 146 186 186 186 186 186 186
B 152.5 152.5 152.5 152.5 152.5 152.5 176 176 176 176 176 176 188 188 188 188 188 188
C 100 100 100 100 100 100 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116
D 118 118 118 118 118 118 145 145 145 145 145 145 155 155 155 155 155 155
E 86 86 86 86 86 86 113 113 113 113 113 113 123 123 123 123 123 123
F1 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2
F2 m5 m5 m5 m5 m5 m5 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/8
G 50 50 50 50 50 50 63 63 63 63 63 63 78 78 78 78 78 78
H 100 100 100 100 100 100 134 134 134 134 134 134 174 174 174 174 174 174
I 88 88 88 88 88 88 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104
L 6 6 6 6 6 6 13 13 13 13 13 13 9 9 9 9 9 9
S 23.5 23.5 23.5 23.5 23.5 23.5 29 29 29 29 29 29 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5
Sensor 2.5 m 3 wires 0.3 m m8 2 m ATEX 2.5 m 3 wires 0.3 m m8 2 m ATEX 2.5 m 3 wires 0.3 m m8 2 m ATEX 2.5 m 3 wires 0.3 m m8 2 m ATEX 2.5 m 3 wires 0.3 m m8 2 m ATEX 2.5 m 3 wires 0.3 m m8 2 m ATEX
Weight [g] 2100 2100 2100 2100 2100 2100 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 5300 5300 5300 5300 5300 5300
NOTES
2-133
DISTRIBUTORS
EXAMPLE OF A SAFETY CIRCUIT WITH A DOUBLE VALVE Below is an example of a wiring diagram for controlling double valves SAFE AIr a metal Work using Pilz components. Circuit components: - a Pilz PNOZ mm 0.1p modular safety system - an emergency stop button S1 (Pilz - PIT es Set) linked to terminals T0-T1-I8-I9 of the PNOZ mm 0.1p - a metal Work double solenoid valve SAFE AIr , the 24 VDC coils of which are fed by terminals O0 (SV1) and O1 (SV2) of the PNOZ mm 0.1p (the other terminals of the coils are OV); the valves Hall-effect sensors are 24 VDC - the sensor signals are relayed to terminals 16 (SV1) and 17 (SV2) of the PNOZ mm 0.1p - a start/reset button S2 Expected behaviour with the system operating correctly: - system deactivated: contacts O0 and O1 are OFF the coils are de-energized the sensors are ON (and hence signals to terminals 16 and 17) if one of the sensors is OFF, the Pilz module does not allow subsequent start/reset - with the system activated via the start/reset button: contacts O0 and O1 are ON the coils are energized the sensors are OFF (and hence signals to terminals 16 and 17) The PNOZ mm0.1p module is programmed so that: - when either sensor is OFF, and the coils are de-energized, the module does not allow subsequent restarts. - when the valves are energized, the 2 sensors must go off within the valve actuation time (12 ms for ISO1s, 24 ms for ISO2s and 50 ms for ISO3s), otherwise the 2 valves are switched off again. The programme can be downloaded from www.metalwork.it (the licence for programming Pilz modules is not included). All the electrical connections between the various components must comply with the applicable safety regulations. If the emergency button is operated at a frequency of 1 actuation per hour, the circuit activates a safety function with PL = e (calculations made with the PAScal programme by Pilz). r esponsibility for fina checking that PL lies with the person assembling the circuit.
2-134
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA SENSOR

Type of contact Switch Supply voltage (Ub) Power Voltage variation Voltage drop Input current Output current Switching frequency Short-circuit protection Over-voltage suppression Polarity inversion protection EMC LED display Magnetic sensitivity Repeatability Degree of protection (EN 60529) Vibration and shock resistance Operating life Temperature range Sensor capsule material 2.5 m/2 m connecting cable Connecting cable with M8x1 Wire NO. Category ATEX Certification EFFETTO HALL N.O. PNP from 10 to 30 DC 3 # 10% of Ub #2 # 10 # 100 # 5000 Yes Yes Yes EN 60 947-5-2 Yellow 2.8 mT 25% # 0.1 mT IP 67 30 g, 11 ms, from 10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm 109 impulses from -25 to +75 PA66 + PA6I/6T PVC; 3 x 0.14 mm2 Polyurethane; 3 x 0.14 mm2 3 -
ATEX EFFETTO HALL N.O. PNP from 18 to 30 DC # 1.7 # 10% of Ub # 2.2 # 10 # 70 1000 Yes Yes Yes EN 60 947-5-2 Yellow 2.6 mT # 0.1 mT (Ub and ta fixed IP 68, IP 69K 30 g, 11 ms, from 10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm 109 impulses from -20 to +45 PA PVC; 3 x 0.12 mm2 3 II 3G Ex nA op is IIC T4 Gc X II 3D Ex tc IIIC T135C Dc IP67 X
V W V mA mA Hz
WIRING DIAGRAM SENSOR
ACCESSORIES
Refer to page 2-113 for coils and connectors
NOTES
2-135
VALVES ISO 5599/1 SERIES SAFE AIR
DISTRIBUTORS
2-136
DISTRIBUTORS
NOTES
NOTES
2-137
DISTRIBUTORS
2-138
DISTRIBUTORS
NOTES
SUMMARy OF vAl ve ISl An DS
P HDM + MUl TI-pOle c Onnec TIOn
PAGE 2-140
P HDM + AS-Interface
PAGE 2-144
P HDM + pROFIBUS-Dp
PAGE 2-149
P HDM + c An open
PAGE 2-153
P HDM + B&R
PAGE 2-159
P HDM vAlveS, In TeRMeDIATeS eleMen TS An D Acce SSORIeS
PAGE 2-162
P MUl TIMAc H
PAGE 2-166
P MUl TIMAc H + pROFIBUS
SEE
PAGE 2-190
P MUl TIMAc H + c An open
SEE
PAGE 2-190
P MUl TIMAc H + DevIce -ne T
SEE
PAGE 2-190
P MUl TIMAc H + B&R
PAGE 2-174
P c M cleve R MUl TIMAc H
PAGE 2-175
2-139
Summ Ar y of v Al v E iSl And S
DISTRIBUTORS
+ MUl TI-pOle c Onnec TIOn
hdm s are the ideal solution for those requiring the unbeatable performance, flexibility and modularity of multimach valves combined with sturdy mechanics and a high degree of protection against external agents. Each valve is enclosed in a reinforced technopolymer protective shell that acts as a shock-absorber and prevents the infiltration of di t. t he class of protection is iP65. t he smooth, rounded design makes hdm s ideal for applications requiring frequent washing without the deposit of residues. All the pneumatic connections are on one side, with built-in push-in fittings. t he user interface is on another side so that the fitter and the se vice engineer have everything at hand. f lexibility is total: there are 1-16 valves, input and output terminals for pipes of different sizes and intermediate modules for separate inputs and outputs. o ne very important new feature is that valves of different capacities can be mounted as required. t hree different valve sizes can be combined at will. t his means a valve can be replaced at any time by another one offering a different performance. it only takes a few seconds to replace or add a valve. t o do this, merely loosen the two grub screws fixing the valve to the adjacent ones. Since the electrical signal is relayed from one valve to the next by means of gold-plated contacts connected to an electronic board, the electrical connections are entirely automatic. t he ratio of the hdm s flow rate to its dimensions is unrivalled miniaturisation and efficiency have reached a peak
DISTRIBUTORS
hdm + mul ti- Pol E conn Ection
TECHNICAL DATA
v alve port connections 4,6,8,10 mm automatic fitting for po ts 2 and 4 / power supply port for 10 or 12 mm automatic fitting / 3/8 thread for exhaust po t, m5 thread for exhaust pilot port c onnection on the end-plate for the supply of pilots Automatic fitting 4 m maximum number of pilots 16 maximum number of valves 16 ( same as the max. no. of pilots ) o perating temperature range c -10 to +60 f luid f iltered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous f low rate at 6.3 bar DP 1 bar n l/min 11.5 mm 4 11.5 mm 6 14 mm 8 23 mm 8 23 mm 10 version 5/2 and 3/2 200 500 650 1000 1200 version 5/3 200 300 300 500 500 Pressure range bar X (pilot supply) 1-11 (valve supply) t erminal 1-1 3 to 7 vacuum at 10 t erminal 1 3 to 7 v oltage range 24 vdc 10% Power W 0.9 c ontrol Pn P o n Pn insulation class f 155 degree of protection iP65 (with conveyed exhust) Solenoid rating 100% Ed tr A/trr 2x3/2 monostable at 6 bar ms 8 / 45 tr A/trr 5/2 monostable at 6 bar ms 8 / 33 tr A/trr 5/2 bistable at 6 bar ms 20 / 20 tr A/trr 5/3 cc monostable at 6 bar ms 20 / 20 n ote on use insert the pipes in the fittings, before passing air through the valves, otherwise the basket may be pulled out of its seat by the flow of ai . c ompatibility with oils Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
COMPONENTS
a b c d e f g h k l m n o p q
2-140
Exhaust - Solenoid pilot 82/84 v alve supply - port 1 t hreaded connection of exhausts 3/5 v alve supply - port 11 Electrical control supply X Blind end-plate or right end-plate 1-11 Screw for valve wall-mounting u tility port for pipe 4, 6, 8 or 10 mm manual control l Ed (l Ed on, solenoid valve energised) Pneumatic symbol identification of the monostable or bistable manual contro v alve ordering code v alve identification cod Blank space for valve number
n o p q
THE MULTIMACH WORLD: FLEXIBILITY t he numbers permit rapid identification of the function and assembly position of the single elements represented as follows. Refer to page 2-162 for valves, intermediates elements and common accessories.
FIXING THE BASE
A f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal. B C f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the bottom and the rear of the terminals. D f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the front of the terminals. An opening for the pipes is made in the plate. E f ixing on the din bar with end-plate 1 or 1-11 and blind and plate, using the push-in bracket code 0227301600. F l ateral fixing using the blind te minal, and its the m4 threads on the side lateral. Note: The sole fixing admitted is the one showed. KEY TO CODES
H D M VALVE h eavy duty multimach iP65 2 INPUT END-PLATE 2 End-plate 1-11 pipe 10 3 End-plate 1 pipe 10 2S End-plate 1-11 pipe 12 8 ELECTRICAL BASE 8 d -Sub 25 wire M MANUAL TYPE monostable manual control Bistable manual control I6 - W 8 - W 6 - O 4 - L 8 - 5 TYPE OF VALVE n 2 3/2 nc n 2 3/2 no 3/2 no + 3/2 nc 5/2 monostable 5/2 bistable 5/3 monostable 5/2 monostable right-end-plate 1-11 pipe 12 blind end-plate Passing-intermede Blind intermediate Exhaust section c artridge 4 c artridge 6 c artridge 8 - 14 mm c artridge 8 - 23 mm c artridge 10 1 4 - 1 6 FURTHER DETAILS 14 iP65 25-wire shell 16 n 2 brackets for din bar
M B
* u ses a single Pin (like the v ) and occupies 2 signals.
I W L V K O *F 4 5 6 7 20 4 6 8 8S 10
2-141
DISTRIBUTORS
WIRING DIAGRAM
Bistable or n 2 3/2 5/2 mostable type v 5/2 mostable type f
DISTRIBUTORS
not E: t he type f monostable valve uses one Pin only (like the v ) but occupies 2 signals.
Common (P25)
b END-PLATE 1-11-25D - PIPE 10

Code 0227301200 Description Weight [g] End-plate hdm 1-11-25d 370 10 t his end-plate allows for supplies to be differentiated Port 2 Port 4 Pilot supply
A = h oles for 25-pin iP51 connectors (for example, code 0226180101)
2S v END-PLATE 1-11-25D - PIPE 12

Code 0227301220 Description End-plate hdm 1-11-25d 12 Weight [g] 370
t his end-plate allows for supplies to be differentiated Port 2 Port 4 Pilot supply
2-142
c END-PLATE 1-25D - PIPE 10

Code 0227301201 Description End-plate hdm 1-25d 10 Weight [g] 370
Acce SSORIeS
n 45 CONNECTOR KIT, 25 WIRES IP65
CABLES
Code 0226180107
Description 45 connector kit, 25 wires iP 65
Weight [g] 65
Code Description 0226107201 10-wire cable 0226107101 19-wire cable 0226107102 25-wire cable Specify the number of metres desired.
Weight [g] 86 122 130
PRE-WIRED 45 CONNECTOR KIT, 25 WIRES IP65
Code 0226960100 0226960250 0226960500
Description c onnector iP 65 + 25-wire 45 cable l = 1 m c onnector iP 65 + 25-wire 45 cable l = 2.5 m c onnector iP 65 + 25-wire 45 cable l = 5 m
Weight [g] 190 390 740
Code 0226107000
Description identification plate ki
c omes in 10-pc. packs
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR PRE-WIRED PLUG CONNECTOR 25 pIn

Position of electrical contact 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Colour of the corresponding wire blue/black red/brown white/black red/blue black/orange yellow/red black/brown white/red Position of electrical contact 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Colour of the corresponding wire red/black brown/white red/orange light blue yellow/white yellow red/green orange Position of electrical contact 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Colour of the corresponding wire orange/white green yellow/black white blue/white brown green/white red Position of electrical contact 25 Colour of the corresponding wire green/black
2-143
DISTRIBUTORS
+ AS-Interface
hdm + AS- interface
t he hdm +AS-interface system has been designed in such a way that the pneumatic input terminal contains all the electronics, signals and AS-i connectors. it is a very compact and sturdy system where everything is housed in a thick casing aluminium to protect the delicate components against impact. t he valves and accessories are hdm standard, which means that you only need to replace the input terminal to convert the valve island with multiple connector into an AS-i island. All the advantages of the hdm system can be exploited: the possibility of mounting valves of different size, with fittings for pipes 4, 6 or 8; the insertion of intermediate modules with separate power supply or outlets; aluminium valves with chemical nickel plating enclosed in a protective casing in reinforced technopolymer, with an index of protection iP65. t he arrangement of the functions continues the traditional optimisation of the hdm s: the user interface of the valves and bus all on one side, so that the fitter and se vice engineer have everything within easy reach: all compressed air connections on the other side; the connectors for AS-i cables on the opposite side longitudinally, so that several valve islands can be arranged in line, fixed on a din bar. t here are many AS-i terminal variants to meet all possible requirements: with 1 node, for controlling up to 4 valve solenoid pilots; with 2 nodes, for controlling up to 8 solenoid pilots; with 1 note for output and input for controlling up to 4 solenoid pilots and receiving up to 4 input signals. t he input connectors are m8 or m12; with 2 nodes for output and input for controlling up to 8 solenoid pilots and receiving up to 8 input signals with m8 connectors; power supply with the AS-i yellow cable only; power supply with two cables: the yellow AS-i cable and the black power supply cable. traditional v.2.1 addressing or extended AB v.3.0 address for an increase in the node numbers which can be connected up to 62 and for a better diagnostics Note: if you use valves 8S type or 10 exploiting their flow capacity it is necessary that the feeding pressure is at least 6 bar (to avoid the pressure to decrease too much on the pilots).
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
v alve port connections maximum number of pilots maximum number of valves o perating temperature range f luid f low rate at 6.3 bar DP 1 bar 4,6,8,10 mm automatic fitting for po ts 2 and 4 / power supply port for 10 or 12* automatic fitting 3/8 thread for exhaust port, m5 thread for exhaust pilot port t erminal with 1 node = 4 / terminal with 2 node = 8 t erminal with 1 node = 4 ( same as the max. no. of pilots ) / terminal with 2 node = 8 ( same as the max. no. of pilots ) -10 to +60 f iltered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous 11.5 mm 4 11.5 mm 6 14 mm 8 23 mm 8 23 mm 10 200 500 650 1000 1200 200 300 300 500 500 X (pilot supply) 1-11 (valve supply) 3 to 7 bar vacuum at 10 bar 3 to 7 bar 24 vdc 10% 0.9 f 155 iP 65 (with conveyed exhaust, and unused in Put S sealed with caps/plugs) 100% Ed 8 / 45 8 / 33 20 / 20 20 / 20 insert the pipes in the fittings, before passing air through the valves, othe wise the basket may be pulled out of its seat by the flow of ai . *with right-end-plate 1-11 Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
c n l/min version 5/2 and 3/2 version 5/3 t erminal 1-11 t erminal 1
Pressure range
v oltage range Power for each pilot Solenoid Pilot insulation class degree of protection Solenoid rating tr A/trr 2x3/2 monostable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/2 monostable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/2 bistable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/3 cc monostable at 6 bar n ote on use
ms ms ms ms
c ompatibility with oils
COMPONENTS
a c d f g h k l m n o p q r s t 2-144 Exhaust - Solenoid pilot 82/84 t hreaded connection of exhausts 3/5 v alve supply - port 1-11-X Blind end-plate or right-end-plate 1-11 Screw for valve wall-mounting u tility port for pipe 4, 6, 8, 10 mm manual control l Ed (l Ed on, solenoid valve energised) Pneumatic symbol identification of the monostable or bistable manual contro v alve ordering code v alve identification cod Blank space for valve number Black cable for 24v (if present) AS-int Erf Ac E yellow cable AS-int Erf Ac E led
n o p q
THE MULTIMACH WORLD: FLEXIBILITY t he numbers permit rapid identification of the function and assembly position of the single elements represented as follows. Refer to page 2-162 for valves, intermediates elements and common accessories.
2 nod ES
1 nod E
FIXING THE BASE
A f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal. B C f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the bottom and the rear of the terminals. D f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the front of the terminals. An opening for the pipes is made in the plate. E f ixing on the din bar with end-plate 1 or 1-11 and blind and plate, using the push-in bracket code 0227301600. F l ateral fixing using the blind te minal, and its the m4 threads on the side lateral. Note: The sole fixing admitted is the one showed.
2-145
hdm + AS- interface
DISTRIBUTORS
KEY TO CODES
H D M VALVE h eavy duty multimach iP65 3 INPUT END-PLATE 3 End-plate 1 A S - 4 ELECTRICAL BASE v ersion with standard address AS-4 1 node, 4 out, yellow cable AS-8 2 nodes, 8 out, yellow cable AO-4 1 node, 4 out e 4 in m8, yellow cable AP-4 1 node, 4 out e 4 in m12, yellow cable AZ-4 1 node, 4 out, yellow cable and black cable AZ-8 2 nodes, 8 out, yellow cable and black cable AE-4 1 node, 4 out e 4 in m8, yellow cable and black cable AE-8 2 nodes, 8 out e 8 in m8, yellow cable and black cable M MANUAL TYPE M monostable manual control B Bistable manual control I6 - W 8 - W 6 - O 4 - L 8 - 5 TYPE OF VALVE I n 2 3/2 nc W n 2 3/2 no L 3/2 no + 3/2 nc V 5/2 monostable K 5/2 bistable O 5/3 monostable *F 5/2 monostable 4 right-end-plate 1-11 pipe 12 5 blind end-plate 6 Passing-intermede 7 Blind intermediate 20 Exhaust section 4 c artridge 4 6 c artridge 6 8 c artridge 8 - 14 mm 8S c artridge 8 - 23 mm 10 c artridge 10 1 6 FURTHER DETAILS 16 n 2 brackets for din bar
DISTRIBUTORS
hdm + AS- interface WIRING DIAGRAM
* u ses a single Pin (like the v ) and occupies 2 signals
NOTE: t he type f monostable valve uses one Pin only (like the v ) but occupies 2 signals.
Bistable or n2 3/2
5/2 monostable type V
5/2 monostable type F
node 2
node1
Common
c END-PLATE 1 AS-4, AS-8

Code 0227301202 0227301208 Description Weight [g] End-plate hdm 1 AS-4 465 1 node, 4 o ut, yellow cable End-plate hdm 1 AS-8 454 2 nodes, 8 o ut, yellow cable
* m7 plug for 2nd node addressing. n .B. f or versions with 2 nodes only ** 21 for AS-8
2-146
c END-PLATE 1 AO-4, M8
Code 0227301218 Description Weight [g] End-plate hdm 1 Ao -4 759 1 node, 4 o ut and 4 in m8, yellow cable
c END-PLATE 1 AP-4, M12

Code 0227301212 Description Weight [g] End-plate hdm 1 AP-4 756 1 node, 4 o ut and 4 in m12, yellow cable
c END-PLATE 1 AE-4, M8
Code 0227301214 Description Weight [g] End-plate hdm 1 AE-4 761 1 node, 4 o ut and 4 in m8, yellow cable and black cable
2-147
hdm + AS- interface
DISTRIBUTORS
c END-PLATE 1 AE-8, M8
Code 0227301216 Description Weight [g] End-plate hdm 1 AE-8 773 2 nodes, 8 o ut and 8 in m8, yellow cable and black cable
DISTRIBUTORS
c END-PLATE 1 AZ-4, AZ-8

hdm + AS- interface
Code 0227301204 Description Weight [g] End-plate hdm 1 AZ-4 467 1 node, 4 o ut, yellow cable and black cable 456 End-plate hdm 1 AZ-8 2 nodes, 8 o ut, yellow cable and black cable
0227301210
* m7 plug for 2nd node addressing. n .B. f or versions with 2 nodes only ** 21 for AZ-8
Acce SSORIeS
AS-interface ADDRESS CONNECTOR KIT
SpAReS
AS-interface CONNECTOR KIT
Code 0226950150
Description AS-interface address connector cable l = 1 m
Code 0226950151
Description AS-interface connector kit
M8 - M12 PLUG
Code 0240009039 0240009040
Description Plu G m8 Plu G m12
2-148
+ pROFIBUS-Dp
t he hdm +Profi Bu S system has been designed in such a way that the pneumatic input terminal contains all the electronics, signals and connectors. it is a very compact and sturdy system where everything is housed in a thick casing aluminium to protect the delicate components against impact. t he valves and accessories are hdm standard, which means that you only need to replace the input terminal to convert the valve island with multiple connector into an Profi Bu S island. All the advantages of the hdm system can be exploited: the possibility of mounting valves of different size, with fittings for pipes 4, 6 or 8; the inse tion of intermediate modules with separate power supply or outlets; aluminium valves with chemical nickel plating enclosed in a protective casing in reinforced technopolymer, with an index of protection iP65. t he arrangement of the functions continues the traditional optimisation of the hdm : the user interface of the valves and bus all on one side, so that the fitter and se vice engineer have everything within easy reach: all compressed air connections are on the other side, and the electrical connectors and selectors are at the end of the island. It is advisable to earth the system to prevent electrical or electrostatic discharge from damaging the electronic circuit.
TECHNICAL DATA
v alve port connections c onnection on the end-plate 1-11 for the supply of pilots maximum number of pilots maximum number of valves o perating temperature range c f luid f low rate at 6.3 bar DP 1 bar n l/min version 5/2 and 3/2 version 5/3 Pressure range t erminal 1-11 terminal 1 v oltage range Power for each pilot Solenoid Pilot insulation class degree of protection Solenoid rating tr A/trr 2x3/2 monostable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/2 monostable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/2 bistable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/3 cc monostable at 6 bar n ote on use W 4,6,8,10 mm automatic fitting for po ts 2 and 4 / power supply port for 10 or 12* automatic fitting 3/8 thread for exhaust port, m5 thread for exhaust pilot port Automatic fitting 4 m 16 16 (same as the max. no. of pilots) -10 to +60 f iltered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous 11.5 mm 4 11.5 mm 6 14 mm 8 23 mm 8 23 mm 10 200 500 650 1000 1200 200 300 300 500 500 X (pilot supply) 1-11 (valve supply) 3 to 7 bar vacuum at 10 bar 3 to 7 bar 24 vdc 10% (slave protected against overload and reverse polarity) 0.9 f 155 iP65 (with conveyed exhust, and that - in case of no use - the Bu S out connector gets plugged) 100% Ed 8 / 45 8 / 33 20 / 20 20 / 20 insert the pipes in the fittings, before passing air through the valves,othe wise the gasket may be pulled out of its seat by the flow of ai . *with right-end-plate 1-11 Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
ms ms ms ms
c ompatibility with oils Profibus DP module for HDM valves Protection max input power (all valves on ) Addressing h ighest settable address number default address Peripheral defect diagnosis defects reported module status in the event of peripheral defect data bit value o utput status in the absence of communication
o utputs protected against overloads and shortcircuits 500 mA By rotary selectors 99 3 l ocal l Ed indicator and relay to master o utput shortcircuit or overload. Auxiliary power supply failure. Profibus communication active t he peripheral defect bit is active and accessible at the master station. 0 = not enabled 1 = enabled disabled
2-149
hdm + P rofi Bu S-dP
DISTRIBUTORS
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h k l m n o p q r Exhaust - Solenoid pilot 82/84 v alve supply - port 1 t hreaded connection of exhausts 3/5 v alve supply - port 11 Electrical control supply X Blind end-plate or right-end-plate-1-11 Screw for valve wall-mounting u tility port for pipe 4, 6, 8 or 10 mm manual control l Ed (l Ed on, solenoid valve energised) Pneumatic symbol identification of the monostable or bistable manual contro v alve ordering code v alve identification cod Blank space for valve number Profibus te minal
DISTRIBUTORS
2-150
THE MULTIMACH WORLD: FLEXIBILITY t he numbers permit rapid identification of the function and assembly positio of the single elements represented as follows. Refer to page 2-162 for valves, intermediates elements and common accessories.
FIXING THE BASE
A f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal. B C f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the bottom and the rear of the terminals. D f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the front of the terminals. An opening for the pipes is made in the plate. E f ixing on the din bar with end-plate 1 or 1-11 and blind and plate , using the push-in bracket code 0227301600. F l ateral fixing using the blind te minal, and its the m4 threads on the side lateral. Note: The sole fixing admitted is the one showed.
KEY TO CODES
H D M VALVE h eavy duty multimach iP65 2 INPUT END-PLATE 2 End-plate 1-11 3 End-plate 1 P ELECTRICAL BASE P profibus dP M MANUAL TYPE monostable manual control Bistable manual control I6 - W 8 - W 6 - O 4 - L 8 - 5 TYPE OF VALVE I n 2 3/2 nc W n 2 3/2 no L 3/2 no + 3/2 nc V 5/2 monostable K 5/2 bistable O 5/3 monostable *F 5/2 monostable 4 right-end-plate 1-11 pipe 12 5 blind end-plate 6 Passing-intermede 7 Blind intermediate 20 Exhaust section 4 c artridge 4 6 c artridge 6 8 c artridge 8 - 14 mm 8S c artridge 8 - 23 mm 10 c artridge 10 1 6 FURTHER DETAILS n 2 brackets for din bar
M B
16
1 = +24v bus 2 = +24v valve 3 = Gnd 4 = Gnd
Po WEr Su PPl y (m8)
Bu S out (female connector) (m12 cod . B)
Bu S in (male connector) (m12 cod . B)
1 = +5v * 2=A 3 = ov * 4=B 4 = Shield
* do don tconn Ect Pin 1 andfor external used only * not conn Ect : feeding Pin 3: to be for terminationthe external terminating resistors. feeding of resistances - f or correct communication, use Profibus cables at least 1 metre long. - t he shield should be evenly distributed around the thread. Should this not be possible, the shield can be connected to prin 5. Both of these methods can also 1 Adressing be used in combination. B t erminal resistances
C r eset button faulty D r esettable 1 Adressing fuse E indicator l Ed B terminal resistances F eset button C r Grounding faulty D r esettable fuse E indicator l ed F Grounding
Bistable or n2 3/2 not E: t he type f monostable valve uses one Pin only (like the v ) but occupies 2 signals.
5/2 monostable type v
5/2 monostable type f
c ommon
2-151
WIRING DIAGRAM
DISTRIBUTORS
b END-PLATE 1-11 PROFIBUS-DP

Code 0227301231 Description End-plate hdm 1-11 Profi Bu S Weight [g] 730
DISTRIBUTORS
c END-PLATE 1 PROFIBUS-DP
Code 0227301230 Description End-plate hdm 1 Profi Bu S Weight [g] 730
Acce SSORIeS
M12 MALE CONNECTOR OUT-BUS M12 FEMALE CONNECTOR IN-BUS
Code 0240009035
Description male connector B coding
Code 0240009036
Description m12 female connector B coding
M8 CONNECTOR FOR POWER SUPPLY

Pin 1 2 3 4 c able color Brown White Blue Black
M8 - M12 PLUG
Code 0240009037
Description m8 connector for power supply wire 5 m
Code 0240009039 0240009040
Description Plug m8 Plug m12
2-152
+ c An open
TECHNICAL DATA
valve port connections c onnection on the end-plate 1-11 for the supply of pilots maximum number of pilots maximum number of valves o perating temperature range c f luid f low rate at 6.3 bar DP 1 bar n l/min version 5/2 and 3/2 version 5/3 Pressure range terminal 1-11 terminal 1 voltage range Power for each pilot Solenoid Pilot insulation class degree of protection Solenoid rating tr A/trr 2x3/2 monostable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/2 monostable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/2 bistable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/3 cc monostable at 6 bar n ote on use W 4,6,8,10 mm automatic fitting for po ts 2 and 4 / power supply port for 10 or 12* automatic fitting 3/8 thread for exhaust port, m5 thread for exhaust pilot port Automatic fitting 4 m 16 16 (same as the max. no. of pilots) -10 to +60 f iltered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous 11.5 mm 4 11.5 mm 6 14 mm 8 23 mm 8 23 mm 10 200 500 650 1000 1200 200 300 300 500 500 X (pilot supply) 1-11 (valve supply) 3 to 7 bar vacuum at 10 bar 3 to 7 bar 24 vdc 10% (slave protected against overload and reverse polarity) 0.9 f 155 iP65 (with conveyed exhausts and with not used connectors plugged) 100% Ed 8 / 45 8 / 33 20 / 20 20 / 20 insert the pipes in the fittings, before passing air through the valves,othe wise the gasket may be pulled out of its seat by the flow of ai . * with right-end-plate 1-11 Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
ms ms ms ms
c ompatibility with oils CANopen module for HDM valves Protection max input power (all valves on ) Addressing h ighest settable address number default address Peripheral defect diagnosis defects reported module status in the event of peripheral defect data bit value o utput status in the absence of communication INPUT module for HDM valves Sensor supply voltage max sensor power (distribuited over eight connectors) t ype of input Protection Active in Put signalling
o utputs protected against overloads and shortcircuits 800 mA By diP SWitch 127 1 l ocal l Ed indicator and relay to master o utput shortcircuit or overload. Auxiliary power supply failure. c An open communication active. t he peripheral defect bit is active and accessible at the master station. 0 = not enabled 1 = enabled disabled
mA
24 vdc 10% (depending on the supply of the c An open module) 40 Pn P for sensor 2-3 wires according to En 60947-5-2 Protected inputs against overload and short-circuit o ne l Ed for each in Put
2-153
hdm + c An open
DISTRIBUTORS
t he hdm +c An open system has been designed in such a way that the pneumatic input terminal contains all the electronics, signals and connectors. it is a very compact and sturdy system where everything is housed in a thick casing aluminium to protect the delicate components against impact. t wo versions of end-plate are available: one can handle up to 16 controls (16 o ut) and one up to 16 controls and 8 inputs (16 o ut + 8 in). t he input connectors are m12. t wo inputs can be connected to each connector. t he functions are arranged to ensure the same optimisation as the hdm s. t he user interface is all on one side to facilitate the work of the fitter and se vice engineer. All pneumatic connections are on one side; the electrical connectors and selectors are on top of the island.
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h k l m n o p q r Exhaust - Solenoid pilot 82/84 v alve supply - port 1 t hreaded connection of exhausts 3/5 v alve supply - port 11 Electrical control supply X Blind end-plate or right-end-plate 1-11 Screw for valve wall-mounting u tility port for pipe 4, 6, 8 or 10 mm manual control l Ed (l Ed on, solenoid valve energised) Pneumatic symbol identification of the monostable or bistable manual contro v alve ordering code v alve identification cod Blank space for valve number c An open terminal
DISTRIBUTORS
hdm + c An open
2-154
THE MULTIMACH WORLD: FLEXIBILITY t he numbers permit rapid identification of the function and assembly positio of the single elements represented as follows. Refer to page 2-162 for valves, intermediates elements and common accessories.
FIXING THE BASE
KEY TO CODES
H D M VALVE h eavy duty multimach iP65 2 INPUT END-PLATE 2 End-plate 1-11 3 End-plate 1 CAN O ELECTRICAL BASE CAN O c An open 16 out Put CAN I/O c An open 8 in Put e 16 out Put M MANUAL TYPE monostable manual control Bistable manual control I6 - W 8 - W 6 - O 4 - L 8 - 5 TYPE OF VALVE I n 2 3/2 nc W n 2 3/2 no L 3/2 no + 3/2 nc V 5/2 monostable K 5/2 bistable O 5/3 monostable *F 5/2 monostable 4 right-end-plate 1-11 pipe 12 5 blind end-plate 6 Passing-intermede 7 Blind intermediate 20 Exhaust section 4 c artridge 4 6 c artridge 6 8 c artridge 8 - 14 mm 8S c artridge 8 - 23 mm 10 c artridge 10 1 6 FURTHER DETAILS n 2 brackets for din bar
M B
16
WIRING DIAGRAM
PoWER SUPPLY
a Adressing b t erminal resistances and baud-rate setting c indicator l Ed d Grounding
2-155
hdm + c An open
DISTRIBUTORS
A f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal. B C f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the bottom and the rear of the terminals. D f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-11 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the front of the terminals. An opening for the pipes is made in the plate. E f ixing on the din bar with end-plate 1 or 1-11 and blind and plate , using the push-in bracket code 0227301600. F l ateral fixing using the blind te minal, and its the m4 threads on the side lateral. Note: The sole fixing admitted is the one showed.
2-o
END-PLATE 1-11 CANopen O

Code 0227301251 Description End-plate 1-11 hdm c An open out Put Weight [g] 745
h andles 16 out Put S (solenoid pilots)
DISTRIBUTORS
3-o
END-PLATE 1 CANopen O
Code 0227301253 Description End-plate 1 hdm c An open out Put Weight [g] 746
hdm + c An open
2 - i/o
END-PLATE 1-11 CANopen I/O

Code 0227301250 Description End-plate 1-11 hdm c An open in -out Weight [g] 734
3 - i/o
END-PLATE 1 CANopen I/O

Code 0227301252 Description End-plate 1 hdm c An open in -out Weight [g] 735
2-156
Acce SSORIeS
STRAIGHT CONNECTOR FOR CANopen POWER SUPPLY
Code W0970513001 Description Acc. 5-pin m12x1 straight connector
STRAIGHT CONNECTOR WITH CANopen POWER CABLE

Code W0970513002 Description Acc. 5-pin m12x1 straight connector with wire l = 5 m
Pin 1 2 3 4 5
Cable color Brown White Blue Black Grey
FEMALE CONNECTOR FOR CANopen BUS-IN

Code 0240009055 Description m12 female connector, A coding
MALE CONNECTOR FOR CANopen BUS-OUT

Code 0240009038 Description male connector Bus A coding
2-157
hdm + c An open
DISTRIBUTORS
STRAIGHT CONNECTOR WITHOUT CABLE FOR CANopen INPUT

Code 0240009021 Description Straight fitting without cabl
DISTRIBUTORS
STRAIGHT CONNECTOR WITH CABLE FOR CANopen INPUT

Code 0240009002 0240009003 Description Straight, with 1.5 m cable Straight, with 5 m cable
hdm + c An open
Pin 1 2 3 4
Cable colour Brown White Blue Black
Y-DISTRIBUTOR WITH CABLE AND M12 STRAIGHT CONNECTORS FOR CANopen INPUT
Code 0240009031 0240009032 Description y-d istributor cable 0.6 m y-d istributor cable 1.5 m
M12 PLUG FOR BUS OUT E INPUT CANopen

Code 0240009040 Description Plug m12
2-158
+ B&R
B&R c Onnec TORS An D MODUle S

IP20 7XV---50-11 SMART CONNECTOR
it is a plug connector with iP20 protection that contains the X system electronics. it can be connected with hdm islands, using the special input end-plate, type 1, code 0227301207 or the special input end-plate type 1-11, code 0227301206.
IP67 7XV---50-51 SMART CONNECTOR

it is a plug connector with iP67 protection, that contains the X system electronics. it can be connected with hdm islands, using the special input end-plate type 1, code 0227301207, or the special input end-plate, type 1-11 code 0227301206.
X67 1/O SYSTEM MODULES

t hese are modules with iP67 protection, connected to the X system, for handling inputs and outputs. it is interesting to note that their size is such that they can be fixed directly to the hdm input end-plate type 1-11, code 0227301206 (N.B. NOT to be fixed to the HDM end-plate type 1, code 0227301207).
X67 BUS CONTROLLER MODULES

t hese are modules with protection iP67, receiving a signal according to one of the dP Profibus, c An open, device n et, Ethernet Powerlink protocols (the module code differs obviously according to the protocol being controlled). t he output signal is according to the X-system. t hese are gateways converting the signals of a field bus into an X-system. t hese modules control the inputs and/or outputs via the m8 connectors provided. t hey can be fixed directly to the hdm input end-plate type 1-11, code 0227301206 (N.B. NOT to be fixed to the HDM end-plate, type 1, code 0227301207).
X2X
X2X
Profi Bu S-dP dEvic E-n Et c An -o PEn Eth Ern Et
X2X
2-159
hdm + B& r
DISTRIBUTORS
An advanced field bus system inte facing with the multimach world. B&r has developed a new standard for automation, called formul A X. f or further details about features, functions and qualities of this system, reference must be made to the B&r documentation, also available on the web site www.br-automation.com An overview is given below. t he X-system is a system handling analogue and digital inputs and outputs for local or remote use, which B&r defines as decentralised backplane. different types of modules are available. We present those designed for connection with multimach and hdm valve islands. We only indicate the B&r s code root, since each type of module comes in different variants, that differ by number of signals handled, that can be 8, 16 or 24, and by type of signal, that can be input, output or input/output indifferently. c ommon to all the modules is the presence of 4 connections: a signal input, a signal output for the following modules, a power input (24v dc ), a power output for the following modules.
APPLICATIONS OF B&R MODULES TO HDM END-PLATES

Refer to page 2-162 for valves, intermediates elements and common accessories.
End-plate 1 or end-plate 1-11
hdm + B& r
Refer to page 2-162 for valves, intermediates elements and common accessories.
DISTRIBUTORS
End-plate 1-11 only
u ser n2 screws m4x8 or m4x10
KEY TO CODES
H D M VALVE h eavy duty multimach iP65 2 INPUT END-PLATE 2 End-plate 1-11 3 End-plate 1 B & R ELECTRICAL BASE B&R f it for B&r M MANUAL TYPE monostable manual control Bistable manual control I6 - W 8 - W 6 - O 4 - L 8 - 5 TYPE OF VALVE I n 2 3/2 nc W n 2 3/2 no L 3/2 no + 3/2 nc V 5/2 monostable K 5/2 bistable O 5/3 monostable *F 5/2 monostable r ight-end-plate 1-11 4 pipe 12 5 Blind end-plate 6 Passing-intermede Blind intermediate 7 20 Exhaust section c artridge 4 4 6 c artridge 6 8 c artridge 8 - 14 mm 8S c artridge 8 - 23 mm 10 c artridge 10 1 6 FURTHER DETAILS n 2 brackets for din bar
M B
16
2-160
HDM 1-11 END-PLATE FOR B&R

Code 0227301206 Description hdm 1-11 end-plate kit for B&r Weight [g] 340
HDM 1 END-PLATE FOR B&R

Code 0227301207 Description hdm 1 end-plate kit for B&r Weight [g] 380
NOTES
2-161
hdm + B& r
DISTRIBUTORS
- vAl veS, In TeRMeDIATeS eleMen TS An D Acce SSORIeS
hdm valve can be included in islands with any available input terminal. So the same valve can be connected to the multiple connection terminal, the AS-interface terminal, the Profi bus dP, terminal or the c An -o pen terminal. Note: if you use valves 8S type or 10 exploiting their flow capacity, it is appropriate to choose the inlet end plate 1-11 type by feeding the pilots separately (to avoid the pressure to decrease too much on the pilots). If you use simultaneously more than one valve 8S or 10 it is necessary to potentiate the pneumatic feeding by inserting end plates having 12 mm pipe and/or through intermediate modules
DISTRIBUTORS
hdm - v Al v ES, int Erm EdiAt ES El EmEnt S And Acc ESSori ES
MANUAL CONTROLS
mono St ABl E ov Errid E Por t 2 servo-assisted Press and hold the manual control in position (not necessary for bistable type K valve) r elease the manual control: - t he manual control returns to the home position. - valves type i, W, l , v, f, and o reposition. - t he type K valve remains switched
mono St ABl E ov Errid E Por t 4 servo-assisted Press and hold the manual control in position (not necessary for bistable type K valve) r elease the manual control: - t he manual control returns to the home position. - valves type i, W, l , v and f reposition. - t he type K valve remains switched With type f and v valves, this manual control is not present.
BiSt ABl E ov Errid E Por t 2 servo-assisted Press the manual control right in then turn it clockwise 90 degrees and l eave it in position. r otate the manual control 90 degrees anticlockwise, and then release it. - t he manual control returns to the home position. - valves type i, W, l , v, f, and o reposition. - t he type K valve remains switched
BiSt ABl E ov Errid E Por t 4 servo-assisted Press the manual control right in then turn it 90 degrees clockwise and l eave it in position. r otate the manual control 90 degrees anticlockwise, and then release it: - t he manual control returns to the home position. - valves type i, W, l and o reposition. - t he type K valve remains switched With type f and v valves, this manual control is not present.
N.B.: t he pilot power supply X must be present.
t he reference code for the monostable control ends in 0 (2 for type f ). Example: 707203053
t he reference code for the monostable control ends in 1 (3 for type f ). Example: 707203053
a VALVE DIMENSIONS
Symbol
*uses a single Pin (like the v ) and occupies 2 signals
I4 W4 L4 V4 *F4 K4 O4
Code 7071030530 7071030531 7071030630 7071030631 7071030730 7071030731 7071030130 7071030131 7071030132 7071030133 7071030110 7071030111 7071030210 7071030211
Manual control monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable
Weight [g] 130
130
130
115
115
130
130
2-162
a VALVE DIMENSIONS
Symbol
I6 W6 L6 V6 *F6 K6 O6
Code 7072030530 7072030531 7072030630 7072030631 7072030730 7072030731 7072030130 7072030131 7072030132 7072030133 7072030110 7072030111 7072030210 7072030211
Weight [g] 130
130
130
115
115
130
130
Symbol
I8 W8 L8 V8 *F8 K8 O8
Code 7073030530 7073030531 7073030630 7073030631 7073030730 7073030731 7073030130 7073030131 7073030132 7073030133 7073030110 7073030111 7073030210 7073030211
Weight [g] 140
140
140
130
130
140
140
a VALVE DIMENSIONS
8S
Symbol
I8S W8S L8S V8S *F8S K8S O8S
Code 7077030530 7077030531 7077030630 7077030631 7077030730 7077030731 7077030130 7077030131 7077030132 7077030133 7077030110 7077030111 7077030210 7077030211
Weight [g] 260
260
260
241
241
253
262
2-163
a VALVE DIMENSIONS
DISTRIBUTORS
a VALVE DIMENSIONS
10
Symbol
I10 W10 L10 V10
Code 7078030530 7078030531 7078030630 7078030631 7078030730 7078030731 7078030130 7078030131 7078030132 7078030133 7078030110 7078030111 7078030210 7078030211
Weight [g] 250
250
250
231
DISTRIBUTORS
231
*F10 K10 O10
243
252
f INTERMEDIATE THROUGH
g INTERMEDIATE BLIND
Code 0227301301
Description intermediate through hdm
Weight [g] 120
Code 0227301302
Description intermediate blind hdm
Weight [g] 117
t INTERMEDIATE EXHAUST SWITCH
d RIGHT-END-PLATE
1-11 PIPE 12
Code 0227301303
Description intermediate exhaust switch hdm
Weight [g] 125
Code 0227301221
Description r igth-end-plate hdm 1-11 12
Weight [g] 630
t his end-plate allows for supplies to be differentiated: Port 2 Port 4
2-164
e BLIND END-PLATE
Code 0227301500 Description Blind end-plate hdm Weight [g] 230
Acce SSORIeS
p CONNECTION BRACKETS ON DIN BAR

Code 0227301600 Description c onnection brackets on din bar hdm /cm Weight [g] 30 Supplied complete with one m4x45 screws and one m6 grub screw individually packed
SILENCER FOR FITTING, 8

Code W0970530084 Description Silencer for fittin , 8 Weight [g] 15
At the 3/5-exhaust port of the intermediate throughreference 6 and of the exhaust switch reference 20

r 17 Code 2L17001 2017001 Rif. rl 17 r 17 Length [mm] 140 95 Tube from 3 to 10 from 4 to 14
rl 17
SpAReS
GRUB SCREW KIT
Code 0227301800 Description Grub screw for multimach hdm /cm
c omes in 1 + 1 pc. packs
2-165
DISTRIBUTORS
MUl TIMAc H
mul tim Ach
DISTRIBUTORS
multimach is not a mere valve, it is an electropneumatic distribution island - a single block ready for connection to power and air delivery pipes and a multi-pin cable. All the pneumatic connections are situated on one side with built-in push-in fittings. t he user interface is on the other side so that the fitter or se viceman has everything within an easy reach: manual controls, active valve signalling lights, compressed air system diagram, valve identification plates. t he user can count on four different orientations for the electric connector. multimach provides full flexibility in the application of valves: 1 to 24 valves, power plates and drain for pipes of various sizes, electric 9- or 25-pin plug connector. But the real novelty, is the possibility of mounting valves of different flow rates: three di ferent valves can be mounted at a time and a valve can be replaced with another of a different flow rate. t his revolutionary concept enables the user to optimise space and costs and adapt the unit to different performance requirements. t he ratio between the flow rate of the multimach system and sizes is incomparable: the top in terms of miniaturisation and efficienc .
TECHNICAL DATA
v alve port connections c onnection on the end-plate for the supply of pilots o perating temperature range c f luid Screw for valve - wall-mounting f low rate at 6 bar DP 1bar n l/min v oltage range Power W insulation class degree of protection Solenoid rating Pressure range t erminal 1-11 bar t erminal 1 bar t erminal 1 reduced bar tr A/trr 2x3/2 monostable at 6 bar ms tr A/trr 5/2 monostable at 6 bar ms tr A/trr 5/2 bistable at 6 bar ms tr A/trr 5/3 cc monostable at 6 bar ms n ote on use c ompatibility with oils 4,6,8 mm automatic fitting for po ts 2 and 4 / power supply port for 8 or 10 automatic fitting 3/8 thread for exhaust port, m5 thread for exhaust pilot port Automatic fitting -10 to +60 f iltered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous According to the end-plate used: see page 2-155 11 mm 4: 200 11 mm 6: 500 14 mm 8: 700 24 vdc 10% 1.2 f 155 iP51 100% Ed X (pilot supply) 1-11 (valve supply) 3 to 7 max vacuum at 10 bar 3 to 7 3 to 7 8 / 45 8 / 33 20 / 20 20 / 20 insert the pipes in the fittings, before passing air through the valves, otherwise the basket may be pulled out of its seat by the flow of ai . Please refer to page 6-7 of the tecnical documentation
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j k l m n Exhaust Solenoid pilot v alve supply - port 1 Electrical multiple connection with 9 or 25 pins t hreaded connection of exhausts 3/5 v alve supply Electrical control supply l Ed (l Ed on, solenoid valve energised) r emovable identification label Blind end-plate Screw for valve wall-mounting u tility port for pipe 8 mm u tility port for pipe 6 mm u tility port for pipe 4 mm manual control
2-166
THE MULTIMACH WORLD: FLEXIBILITY the numbers per mit rapid identification of the function and assembly position of the single elements represented as follows
FIXING THE BASE
A B C D
fixing with reduced end-plate 1, codE 0227300300, supplied complete with bracket fixing with end-plate 1-11 codE 0227300200 or with end-plate codE 0227300201 fixing with end-plate 1-11 codE 0227300200 or with end-plate 1 codE 0227300201 using the m4-thread found on the m5 end-plate fixing on the din bar with end-plate 1-11 codE 0227300 using the reduced end-plate 1 codE 0227300300 or end-plate codE 0227300201 using the push-in bracket codE 0227300600. if you have to remove the base from the bar, this is rapid and can be performed without using any tools.
KEY TO CODES
M 5 1 VALVE multimach iP51 2 INPUT END-PLATE End-plate 1-11 End-plate 1 reduced End-plate 1 8 ELECTRICAL BASE 8 Axial 25-wire connector base 9 Axial 9-wire connector base 10 25-wire rear connector base 11 9-wire rear connector base I6 - W 8 - W 6 - O 4 - L 8 - 5 TYPE OF VALVE I n 2 3/2 nc W n 2 3/2 no L 3/2 no + 3/2 nc V 5/2 monostable K 5/2 bistable O 5/3 monostable 5 Blind end-plate 6 Passing-intermede 7 Blind intermediate 20 Exhaust section 4 car tridge 4 6 car tridge 6 8 car tridge 8 1 2 - 1 4 FURTHER DETAILS 12 9-wire connector 14 25-wire connector 16 Brackets for din bar
2 3 4
2-167
mul timAch
DISTRIBUTORS
a VALVE DIMENSIONS 4
Symbol
I4 W4 L4
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 7068030532
Manual control monostable
Weight [g] 118
7068030632
monostable
118
7068030732
monostable
118
V4 K4 O4
7068030132
monostable
100
7068030112
monostable
114
7068030212
monostable
115
mul tim Ach
Symbol
I6 W6 L6 V6 K6 O6
Code 7069030532
Weight [g] 110
7069030632
monostable
110
7069030732
monostable
110
7069030132
monostable
90
7069030112
monostable
107
7069030212
monostable
108
Symbol
I8 W8 L8 V8 K8 O8
2-168
Code 7070030532
Weight [g] 124
7070030632
monostable
124
7070030732
monostable
124
7070030132
monostable
105
7070030112
monostable
120
7070030212
monostable
121
b END-PLATE 1-11
c END-PLATE 1
Code 0227300200
Description End-plate kit 1-11
Weight [g] 223
Code 0227300201
Description End-plate kit 1
Weight [g] 224
t his end-plate allows for supplies to be differentiated: port 2, port 4 and pilot supply
Code 0227300300
Description r educed end-plate kit 1
Weight [g] 148
Code 0227300500
Description Blind end-plate
Weight [g] 168
f INTERMEDIATE THROUGH
Code 0227300301
Description intermediate through
Weight [g] 92
Code 0227300302
Description intermediate blind
Weight [g] 89
2-169
mul tim Ach
d REDUCED END-PLATE 1
e BLIND END-PLATE
DISTRIBUTORS
h AXIAL CONNECTOR BASE, 25 WIRES
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0227300303
Description intermediate exhaust switch
Weight [g] 95
Code 0226180001
Description Axial connector base kit, 25 wires
Weight [g] 54
mul tim Ach
i AXIAL CONNECTOR BASE, 9 WIRES
j REAR CONNECTOR BASE, 25 WIRES
Code 0226180002
Description Axial connector base kit, 9 wires
Weight [g] 51
Code 0226180003
Description r ear connector base kit, 25 wires
Weight [g] 73
k REAR CONNECTOR BASE, 9 WIRES
l STRAIGHT AND 90 CONNECTOR KIT, 9 WIRES
Code 0226180004
Description rEA r conn Ector
BASE Kit, 9 Wir ES
Weight [g] 77
Code 0226180102
Description Straight and 90 connector kit, 9 wires
Weight [g] 31
2-170
n STRAIGHT AND 90 CONNECTOR KIT, 25 WIRES
p CONNECTION BRACKETS ON THE BAR OMEGA (DIN EN 50022)

~50
~9
14
Code 0226180101
Description Straight and 90 connector kit, 25 wires
Weight [g] 48
Code 0227300600 individually packed
Description c onnection brackets on din bar
Weight [g] 8
Code 0226180399 0226180400 0226180401
Description c onnector kit + wire 1-6* c onnector kit + wire 7-12** c onnector kit + wire13-30***
Weight [g] 3 4 5 Code W0970530084 Description Silencer for fittin , 8 Weight [g] 15
f or valve connection from 1st to 6th position counting from the connector * ** f or valve connection from 7th to 12th position, counting from the connector *** f or valve connection from 13th to 30th position, counting from the connector
At the 3/5-exhaust port of the reduced end-plate 1 ref. 4 and of the intermediate through of the exhaust switch ref. 20
CABLES
NOTES
Cod. Description 0226107201 10-wire cable 0226107101 19-wire cable 0226107102 25-wire cable Specify the number of metres desired
Weight [g] 86 122 130
2-171
mul tim Ach
q r s CONNECTOR KIT + WIRE
DISTRIBUTORS
STRAIGHT PRE-WIRED CONNECTOR KIT
PRE-WIRED 90 CONNECTOR
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0226900100 0226900250 0226900500 0226920100 0226920250 0226920500
Description c onnector + 9-wire axial cable l = 1 m c onnector + 9-wire axial cable l = 2.5 m c onnector + 9-wire axial cable l = 5 m c onnector + 25-wire axial cable l = 1 m c onnector + 25-wire axial cable l = 2.5 m c onnector + 25-wire axial cable l = 5 m
Weight [g] 90 220 434 132 320 636
Code 0226910100 0226910250 0226910500 0226930100 0226930250 0226930500
Description c onnector + 9-wire 90 cable l = 1 m c onnector + 9-wire 90 cable l = 2.5 m c onnector + 9-wire 90 cable l = 5 m c onnector + 25-wire 90 cable l = 1 m c onnector + 25-wire 90 cable l = 2.5 m c onnector + 25-wire 90 cable l = 5 m
Weight [g] 90 220 434 132 320 636
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR PRE-WIRED PLUG CONNECTORS 25 pIn

Position of electrical contact 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Colour of the corresponding wire blue/black red/brown white/black red/blue black/orange yellow/red black/brown white/red red/black Position of electrical contact 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Colour of the corresponding wire brown/white red/orange light blue yellow/white yellow red/green orange orange/white green Position of electrical contact 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Colour of the corresponding wire yellow/black white blue/white brown green/white red green/black Position of electrical contact 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9 pIn
Colour of the corresponding wire green/black white blue/black blue yellow/black yellow red/black green white/black
mul tim Ach
MALE CONNECTOR KIT + CONTACTS + COMMON TERMINAL
Code 0226180201 0226180202
Description male connector kit - 25 pins male connector kit - 9 pins
Code 0226107000
Description identification plate ki
GRUB SCREW
l enght = 140 mm Code 0227300800 Description Grub screw for multimach Code 2L17001 Description rl 17 Tube from 3 to 10
c omes in 10-pc. pack
2-172
WIRING DIAGRAM OF THE 9-PIN CONNECTOR note: available with positive common wire on request.
WIRING DIAGRAM OF THE 25-PIN CONNECTOR note: available with positive common wire on request. note: available with positive common wire on request.
2-173
mul timAch
DISTRIBUTORS
MUl TIMAc H + B&R
An advanced field bus system inte facing with the multimach world. B&r has developed a new standard for automation, called formul A X. f or further details about features, functions and qualities of this system, referance must be made to the B&r documentation, also available on the web site www.br-automation.com r efer to page 2-159 for details of iP20 and iP67 intelligent connectors and X67 modules. B&r smart connectors can be connected to multimach islands using the multimach connector support for B&r presented below.
mul tim Ach + B& r
DISTRIBUTORS
APPLICATIONS OF B&R MODULES TO THE MULTIMACH CONNECTOR SUPPORT r efer to page 2-156 for valves, intermediates elements and common accessories. MULTIMACH CONNECTOR SUPPORT FOR B&R
Code 0226180005 Description 25-pin connector support kit for B&r Weight [g] 140
2-174
cleve R MUl TIMAc H
THE VALVE IN DETAIL c lever multimach valves can be used to form autonomous and intelligent valve island subsystems. Each valve has a microchip that performs a series of functions connected with operation and dialogue with the valves before and after it. v alves communicate via serial transmission. cm refers to the communication protocol patented by metal Work. it is a field-bus in its own right, designed specifically for v y easy control of islands of pneumatic solenoid valves. cm valves have a diagnosis system that detects electrical faults. it can also be used to verify during installation that all connections are correct. cm s communicate with the Pc /Plc via multi-core cables, which means applications with cm s do not require the use of other field-buses or master and slaves. Addressing of single outputs is not required as the connection number of each solenoid pilot is assigned automatically based on the position occupied by the valve.
SMART VALVE Each valve comes with a microchip that controls operation and dialogue with the other valves.
LOCAL DIAGNOSTICS Each c lever multimach valve has a l Ed diagnostic system that identifies immediately whether a pilot is energized, the contact is interrupted or there is a short-circuit.
le D 14 OFF On (green) On (green) OFF ReD (flashing OFF On (red) OFF GReen (flashing le D 12 OFF OFF On (green) On (green) OFF ReD (flashing OFF On (red) OFF DeSc RIpTIOn OF THe FAUl n o fault, Ev 1-Ev 2=off n o fault, Ev 1=on - Ev 2=off n o fault, Ev 1-Ev 2=on n o fault, Ev 1=off - Ev 2=on Solenoid pilot Ev 1 interrupted or disconnected Solenoid pilot Ev 2 interrupted or disconnected Solenoid pilot Ev 1 short circuit Solenoid pilot Ev 2 short circuit data update time out, communication faulty
2-175
c m cl Ev Er mul tim Ach
DISTRIBUTORS
INPUT MODULES By choosing the specially designed c lever c enter you can add in Put /out Put signal management modules, wich can be used for: diGitAl in Put S, as cylinder sensors for example diGitAl out Put S An Alo Gu E in Put S (but the l Eds do not light up) An Alo Gu E out Put S (but the l Eds do not light up) t hey can be combined, even on the same module. you can choose between Pn P or n Pn connections via a dip switch-type selector. All the in Put S/out Put S must be the same type, i.e. all Pn P or n Pn .
DISTRIBUTORS
CLEVER CENTER t he c lever c enter input terminal converts signals in parallel from the connector pins into a serial transmission to the valves. it interprets the return signals from the valve, relays signals to any slave islands and sends diagnosis messages back to the Pc /Plc .
44-pin connector for valves
44-pin connector for inputs
MAXIMUM EXPANSION u p to 4 modules can be connected, giving a total of 32 input signals. o rdering code
0227302900
A yellow l Ed for each input/output (visible for digital types)

2-176
EXAMPLE OF A CM LAYOUT t he c lever c enter can relay command signals to other islands of slaves. t ransmission, in serial mode, is via a cable with m8 connectors. c ommands can be sent from the first slave island to other slave islands in cascade, again via cables with m8 connectors. Addresses are assigned automatically, based on intuitive sequential logic. t his means that other slaves can be added downstream at any time, until all 32 available outputs are in use.
Slave 1 m8 Serial connection input/output module 3
Slave 2
Slave 3 input/output module 4
c lever c enter input/output module 1 input/output module 1
Slave 4
NOTES
2-177
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
v alve port connections c onnection on the end-plate 1-11 for the supply of pilots maximum number of pilots maximum number of valves o perating temperature range c f luid f low rate at 6 bar DP 1bar n l/min Pressure range t erminal 1-11 t erminal 1 v oltage range 4,6,8 mm automatic fitting for po ts 2 and 4 / power supply port for 10 automatic fitting 3/8 thread for exhaust port, m5 thread for exhaust pilot port Automatic fitting 4 m 32 32 (same as the max. no. of pilots) -10 to +60 f iltered air without lubrication; lubrication, if used, must be continuous 11 mm 4 = 200 11 mm 6 = 500 14 mm 8 = 800 X (pilot supply) 1-11 (valve supply) 3 to 7 bar vacuum at 10 bar 3 to 7 bar 24 vdc 10% (slave protected against overload and reverse polarity) 0.9 f 155 iP65 (with conveyed exhust, and that - in case of no use) n ominal icc 30 mA - instantaneous icc (+ # 25 ms) 650 mA 1.5 l ocal through l Ed and out fault reporting. f or defects signalled look at the manual. o utlets protected against overload and short-circuit 100% Ed ,10 8 / 45 8 / 33 20 / 20 20 / 20 insert the pipes in the fittings, before passing air through the valves otherwise the gasket may be pulled out of its seat by the flow of ai . Please refer to page 6-7 of the technical documentation
DISTRIBUTORS
Power for each pilot Solenoid Pilot insulation class degree of protection dc input current without valve modules max input current with all valves on diagnosis Solenoid rating maximum latency time of the serial transmission tr A/trr 2x3/2 monostable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/2 monostable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/2 bistable at 6 bar tr A/trr 5/3 cc monostable at 6 bar n ote on use c ompatibility with oils INPUT module for CM islands Sensor supply voltage max sensor power input impedance max input voltage t ype of input Protection Active input signalling
ms ms ms ms ms
mA K v cc
24 vdc 10% 200 (distributed over eight connectors) 3.9 -5 to +30 Pn P/n Pn configurable via dip switc Protected inputs against overload and short-circuit o ne l Ed for each in Put
COMPONENTS a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r
2-178
Exhaust - Solenoid pilot 82/84 v alve supply - port 1 t hreaded connection of exhausts 3/5 v alve supply - port 11 Electrical control supply X Blind end-plate Screw for valve wall-mounting u tility port for pipe 8 mm u tility port for pipe 6 mm u tility port for pipe 4 mm manual control l Ed (l Ed on, solenoid valve energised) Pneumatic symbol identification of the monostable or bistable manual contro v alve ordering code v alve identification cod Blank space for valve number c lever c enter terminal
THE CLEVER MULTIMACH WORLD: FLEXIBILITY t he numbers permit rapid identification of the function and assembly position of the single elements represented as follows
FIXING THE BASE
A f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-1 input terminal and the blind terminal. B C f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-1 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the bottom and the rear of the terminals. D f ixing from above using the 1 or 1-1 input terminal and the blind terminal, using the m5 threads on the front of the terminals. An opening for the pipes is made in the plate. f ixing on the din bar with end-plate 1 or 1-11 and blind and plate , using the push-in bracket code 0227301600. E l ateral fixing using the blind te minal, and its the m4 threads on the side lateral. F Note: The sole fixing admitted is the one showed.
2-179
DISTRIBUTORS
KEY TO CODES CLEVER MULTIMACH

C M VALVE c lever multimach 2 INPUT END-PLATE 2 End-plate 1-11 3 End-plate 1 I/O FUNCTION O o nly valves I/O input/o utput and valves ADD Additional (slave) M MANUAL TYPE monostable manual control Bistable manual control I6 - W8 - W6 - O4 - L8 - 5 TYPE OF VALVE I n 2 3/2 nc W n 2 3/2 no L 3/2 no + 3/2 nc V 5/2 monostable K 5/2 bistable O 5/3 monostable 5 blind end-plate 6 Passing-intermede 7 Blind intermediate 20 Exhaust section 4 c artridge 4 6 c artridge 6 c artridge 8 8 M8 - M8 - 15 - 16 FURTHER DETAILS module 8 input m8 Shell 44 pin Shell 44 + 44 pin n 2 brackets for din bar
M B
M8 14 15 16
DISTRIBUTORS
MANUAL CONTROLS c m cl Ev Er mul tim Ach
mono St ABl E ov Errid E Por t 2 servo-assisted Press and hold the manual control in position (not necessary for bistable type K valve) r elease the manual control: - t he manual control returns to the home position. - valves type i, W, l , v and o reposition. - t he type K valve remains switched
mono St ABl E ov Errid E Por t 4 servo-assisted Press and hold the manual control in position (not necessary for bistable type K valve) r elease the manual control: - t he manual control returns to the home position. - valves type i, W, l , v and o reposition. - t he type K valve remains switched With type v valves, this manual control is not present.
BiSt ABl E ov Errid E Por t 2 servo-assisted Press the manual control right in then turn it clockwise 90 degrees and l eave it in position. r otate the manual control 90 degrees anticlockwise, and then release it. - t he manual control returns to the home position. - valves type i, W, l , v and o reposition. - t he type K valve remains switched
BiSt ABl E ov Errid E Por t 4 servo-assisted Press the manual control right in then turn it 90 degrees clockwise and l eave it in position. r otate the manual control 90 degrees anticlockwise, and then release it: - t he manual control returns to the home position. - valves type i, W, l v and o reposition. - t he type K valve remains switched With type v valves, this manual control is not present.
n .B.: t he pilot power supply X must be present. t he reference code for the monostable control ends in 0.
n .B.: t he pilot power supply X must be present.
il codice di riferimento per il comando bistabile quello con finale 1
Example: 707403053
Example: 707403053
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR THE CLEVER CENTER TERMINAL - OUTPUTS ONLY
a indicator l Ed b Grounding
2-180
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR THE CLEVER CENTER TERMINAL - INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
in Put conn Ection
diAGr Am
mAl E
f EmAl E
a indicator l Ed b Grounding c input selector type Pn P/n Pn WIRING DIAGRAM FOR THE ADDITIONAL TERMINAL
a indicator l Ed b Grounding
2-181
DISTRIBUTORS
a VALVE DIMENSIONS
4
Symbol Code 7074030530 7074030531 7074030630 7074030631 7074030730 7074030731 7074030130 7074030131 7074030110 7074030111 7074030210 7074030211 Manual control monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable monostable bistable Weight [g] 130
I4 W4 L4
DISTRIBUTORS
130
130
115
V4 K4 O4
130
130
a VALVE DIMENSIONS
6
I6 W6 L6 V6 K6 O6
130
130
115
130
130
a VALVE DIMENSIONS
8
I8 W8 L8 V8 K8 O8
2-182
140
140
130
140
140
2-o
OUTPUT END-PLATE 1-11
3-o
OUTPUT END-PLATE 1
t erminator Code Description 0227302200 End-plate cm kit 1-11 out t his end-plate allows for supplies to be differentiated: port 2, port 4 and pilot supply n ote: terminator included Weight [g] 722 Code 0227302201
t erminator Description End-plate cm kit 1 out Weight [g] 722
n ote: terminator included
INPUT END-PLATE 1-11
INPUT END-PLATE 1
terminator Code Description 0227302223 End-plate cm kit 1-11 in t his end-plate allows for supplies to be differentiated: port 2, port 4 and pilot supply n ote: terminator included Weight [g] 722 Code 0227302225
terminator Description End-plate cm kit 1 in Weight [g] 722
n ote: terminator included
2 - Add
ADDITIONAL END-PLATE 1-11
3 - Add
ADDITIONAL END-PLATE 1
Code 0227302224
Description End-plate cm kit 1-11 Add
Weight [g] 770
Code 0227302226
Description End-plate cm kit 1 Add
Weight [g] 770
t his end-plate allows for supplies to be differentiated: port 2, port 4 and pilot supply
2-183
2 - i/o
3 - i/o
DISTRIBUTORS
e BLIND EN-PLATE
f INTERMEDIATE THROUGHT
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0227302500
Description Blind en-plate cm
Weight [g] 230
Code 0227302301
Description intermediate throught cm
Weight [g] 120
Code 0227302302
Description intermediate blind cm
Weight [g] 117
Code 0227302303
Description intermediate exhaust switch cm
Weight [g] 125
n 44-PIN CUP CONNECTOR KIT IP 65
o 44+44 PIN CUP CONNECTOR KIT IP 65 FOR I/O
Code 0226180108
Description 44-pin cup connector kit ip 65
Weight [g] 60
Code 0226180109
Description 44+44 pin cup connector kit ip 65 for i/o
Weight [g] 80
2-184
p CONNECTION BRACKETS ON DIN BAR
Code 0227301600
Description c onnection brackets on din bar hdm /cm
Weight [g] 30
Code W0970530084
Description Silencer for fittin , 8
Weight [g] 15
Supplied complete with one m4x45 screws and one grub screw individually packed
At the 3/5-exhaust port of the intermediate through reference 6 and the exhaust switch reference 20
M8 8-INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
in Put Pn P 1 = + 24 vdc 3 = ovdc 4 = in Put out Put Pn P 1 = + 24 vdc 3 = ovdc 4 = in Put diP SWitch in Put n Pn 1 = + 24 vdc 3 = ovdc 4 = in Put out Put n Pn 1 = + 24 vdc 3 = ovdc 4 = in Put diP SWitch
out Put An Alo Gic
in Put An Alo Gic
Code 0227302900
Description m8 8-input module cm
Weight [g] 273
CABLES
M8 INPUT CONNECTOR
Code 0226107201 0226107101 0226107102 0226107103
Description 10-wire cable 19-wire cable 25-wire cable 44-wire cable
Weight [g/m] 86 122 130 160
Specify the number of metres desired
M8 PLUG
Pin 1 3 4 Cable colour Brown Blue Black
Code 0240009039
Description Plug m8
Code 0240009009
Description m8-m8 straight connector with 3 m cable
2-185
8 - m8
DISTRIBUTORS
44-PIN PRE-WIRED CUP CONNECTOR
44+44-PIN PRE-WIRED CUP CONNECTOR
DISTRIBUTORS
Code 0226950500
Description Acc. connet. iP 65 + cable 44-wire l = 5 m
Weight [g] 740
Code 0226980500
Description Acc. connet. iP 65 + cable 44 + 44-wire l = 5 m
Weight [g] 1550
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR THE 44-PIN CUP CONNECTOR KIT 44 pIn FeMAle pRe-WIReD FOR vAlve
Position of electrical contact 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Corresponding wire colour white brown green yellow gray pink blue violet gray/pink red/blue white/green brown/green white/yellow yellow/brown white/gray gray/brown white/pink pink/brown white/blue brown/blue white/red brown/red white/black brown/black gray/green yellow/gray pink/green yellow/pink green/blue yellow/blue green/red yellow/red green/black gray/blue gray/red red red red yellow/black pink/red pink/blue black black black Function o ut 1 o ut 2 o ut 3 o ut 4 o ut 5 o ut 6 o ut 7 o ut 8 o ut 9 o ut 10 o ut 11 o ut 12 o ut 13 o ut 14 o ut 15 o ut 16 o ut 17 o ut 18 o ut 19 o ut 20 o ut 21 o ut 22 o ut 23 o ut 24 o ut 25 o ut 26 o ut 27 o ut 28 o ut 29 o ut 30 o ut 31 o ut 32 f ault reporting nc nc +24v dc +24v dc +24v dc c onfig. n P/n Pn nc nc 0 v dc 0 v dc 0 v dc
44 pIn MAle pRe-WIReD FOR Inp UT/OUTpUT

Position of electrical contact 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Corresponding wire colour white brown green yellow gray pink blue violet gray/pink red/blue white/green brown/green white/yellow yellow/brown white/gray gray/brown white/pink pink/brown white/blue brown/blue white/red brown/red white/black brown/black gray/green yellow/gray pink/green yellow/pink green/blue yellow/blue green/red yellow/red green/black gray/blue gray/red red red red yellow/black pink/red pink/blue black black black Function in 1 in 2 in 3 in 4 in 5 in 6 in 7 in 8 in 9 in 10 in 11 in 12 in 13 in 14 in 15 in 16 in 17 in 18 in 19 in 20 in 21 in 22 in 23 in 24 in 25 in 26 in 27 in 28 in 29 in 30 in 31 in 32 nc nc nc +24v dc +24v dc +24v dc nc nc nc 0 v dc 0 v dc 0 v dc
2-186
u M8 PREWIRED CONNECTOR FOR VALVE ISLANDS CONNECTIONS 23

Code 0240005003 0240005005 0240005006 0240005008
Pin 1 2 3 4 Cable colour Brown White Blue Black
Description m8 prewired connector for valve islands conn. cm m8 prewired connector for valve islands conn. cm m8 prewired connector for valve islands conn. cm m8 prewired connector for valve islands conn. cm
l l l l
=5m =1m =3m = 10 m
M8 INPUT CONNECTOR
Code 0240009010 Description m8 3-pin straight connector

Code 0226107000 Description identification plate ki
GRUB SCREW KIT

Code 0227301800 c omes 1 + 1 packs Description Grub screw for multimach hdm /cm
R17 - DISASSEMBLY KEY

Code 2L17001 Description rl 17 Tube from 3 to 10
l enght = 140 mm
2-187
DISTRIBUTORS
2-188
DISTRIBUTORS
NOTES
FIELDBUS SUMMARY
P HDM + AS-Interface
SEE
PAGE 2-144
P HDM + PROFIBUS-DP
SEE
PAGE 2-149
P HDM + CANopen
SEE
PAGE 2-153
P HDM + B&R
SEE
PAGE 2-159 FIELDBUS SUMMARY

2-189
P PROFIBUS-DP/CANopen/DEVICE NET FOR MULTIMACH AND BASES FOR PLT-10 MULTIPLE CONNECTION
PAGE 2-190
P MULTIMACH + B&R
SEE
PAGE 2-174
P INPUT/OUTPUT PROFIBUS-DP IP67 M12
PAGE 2-195
P INPUT PROFIBUS-DP IP67 M8
PAGE 2-199
DISTRIBUTORS
PROFIBUS-DP/CANopen/DEVICE-NET FOR MULTIMACH AND BASES FOR PLT-10 MULTIPLE CONNECTION
The expandable modular slaves for Multimach and bases for PLT-10 multiple connection follow the same application philosophy of total modularity common to the Multimach system. With full freedom, the slave can be configured by fitting the various modules offered: Slaves are available for 3 alternate bus systems: PROFIBUS-DP, CAN-OPEN, DEVICE NET. Each of these can manage 24 outputs. The slaves are mounted on a 35 mm DIN bar, next to the Multimach unit. The electric connection between the slave and the unit is simply obtained with a kit comprised of pre-wired, 25-pin Sub-D connectors with a 25-core cable. Other modules up to a maximum of 15 (31 for DeviceNet) can be fitted alongside the slaves to manage other inputs and outputs. These modules are electrically connected together, using a small plate-connector (housed under the modules, inside the DIN bar). There are 4 other types of modules available: for 8 digital inputs; for 8 digital outputs; for 4 analogue inputs and for 4 analogue outputs. With this system, a maximum of 144 Inputs/Outputs can be managed with just one slave!
DISTRIBUTORS
TECHNICAL DATA
Supply voltage EMC and ESD test Resistance to vibration and impacts test Operating temperature range Storage temperature Admitted relative humidity Assembly 24 VDC + 20% - 15% in compliance with IEC 801-2/IEC 801/4 (up to level 3: 8kV/2kV) according to IEC68-2-6/IEC 68-2-27 (1g/12g) 0 to 60 - 40 to + 85 95% 35 mm DIN bar
C C
THE MULTIMACH WORLD: SLAVES, INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
2-190
a SLAVE PROFIBUS-DP 24 OUTPUT

Code 0240004002 Slave kit SLAVE PROFIBUS+DO24xDC24V
c CAN-OPEN SLAVE, 24 OUTPUTS

Code 0240004022 Slave kit SLAVE CAN-OPEN+DO24xDC24V
Technical data CANopen-Interface Transmission speed Max number of modules which can be connected Output interface Number of outputs Nominal supply voltage Maximum current for each output Absorption 24 V (out excluded)
9 pins SubD 10 k Baud up to 1 Mbaud 31 (depending on the maximun corrent) 25 pins SubD 24 24 VDC 1A, max total 4A 800 mA
2-191
DISTRIBUTORS
Technical data PROFIBUS-Interface Transmission speed Max number of modules which can be connected Output interface Number of outputs Output data Nominal supply voltage Maximum current for each output Absorption 24V (out excluded)
RS485: 9 pins SubD 9.6 kBaud up to 12 Mbaud 31 (depending on the maximun corrent) 25 pins SubD 24 4 Byte (3used +1) 24 VDC 1A, max total 4A 800 mA
d DEVICE NET SLAVE, 24 OUTPUTS

Code 0240004032 Slave kit SLAVE DEVICE-NET+DO24xDC24V
DISTRIBUTORS
Technical data DEVICE-NET-Interface Transmission speed Max number of modules which can be connected Output interface Number of outputs Nominal supply voltage Maximum current for each output Absorption 24 V (out excluded)
DeviceNet Open Style 125, 250, 500 k Baud 31 (depending on the maximun corrent) 25 pins SubD 24 24 VDC 1A, max total 4A 800 mA
e 8-DIGITAL INPUT MODULE

Code 0240004053 Description DI 8XDC24V unit
Technical data Nominal input voltage Number of inputs Input data Input voltage at 1 Output voltage at 0 Response time Internal Bus voltage Absorption 5V BUS
24 VDC 8 1 Byte 1528.8V 05V 3 ms 5V 20 mA
f 8-DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE

Code 0240004051 Description DO 8XDC24V 0.5A unit
Technical data Nominal voltage Number of outputs Output data Absorption for each channel Internal Bus voltage Absorption 5V BUS
24 VDC 8 1 Byte 1A (max 8A) 5V 70 mA
2-192
g 4-ANALOG INPUT MODULE

Code 0240004054 Description AL 4X16 BIT unit
Technical data Number of Inputs Input data Input range
Resolution Input resistance Time Internal Bus voltage Absorption 5V BUS
h 4-ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE

Code 0240004055 Description AO 4X12 BIT unit
Technical data Number of outputs Output data Output range Resolution Output resistance Conversion time Internal Bus voltage Absorption 5V BUS
4 8 Byte Voltage 010V, 10V, 15V Current 020 mA, 420 mA, 20 mA 12 BIT Minimum voltage 1 k, Maximum current 500 0.45 ms 5V 75 mA
i SLAVE/MULTIMACH CONNECTION KIT

Code 0226940000 Description Slave/Multimach connection kit
NOTES
2-193
DISTRIBUTORS
4 8 Byte Voltage 0 to 50 mV, 0...10V, 4 mV, 4V, 10V, Current 0/420 mA, +/-20 mA Temperature Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000 Resistance 60 , 600 , 3000 , 16000 Thermoelements J, K, N, R, T, S 12/16 Bit 20M voltage, 85 current 570 ms 5V 280 mA
CONNECTING ONE SLAVE WITH SEVERAL VALVE UNITS
DISTRIBUTORS
In order to make the best use of the available slave outputs, they can be distributed over several valve units using double-output connectors. The above drawing refers to one possible configuration, but the user can combine cables and connectors as required. The connector mounted on the slave is used to distribute the outputs on two cables. A cable for a certain number of outputs goes to connectors and . Some wires are soldered to the connector pins and the unused ones can be soldered to the wires of another cable from the second output carrying signals to the next unit.
25-PIN PLUG CONNECTOR KIT, DOUBLE OUTPUT FOR SLAVE
25-PIN PLUG CONNECTOR KIT, DOUBLE OUTPUT FOR MULTIMACH AND PLT-10
Code 0226180105
Description 25-pin plug connector for slave
Code 0226180106
Description 25-wire connector double output kit
Complete with 2 cable clamps for wiring 2 cables
Complete with 2 cable clamps for wiring 2 cables
9-PIN PLUG CONNECTOR, STRAIGHT OR 90 OUTPUT FOR MULTIMACH
CABLES
Code 0226180102
Description 9-pin plug connector
Code Description 0226107201 10-wire cable 0226107101 19-wire cable 0226107102 25-wire cable Indicate the desired length in metres
2-194
INPUT/OUTPUT PROFIBUS-DP IP 67 M12
The Profibus DP IP 67 is a robust metallic slave that can be connected flexibly sin M12 connectors to outputs and solenoid valves and/or inputs. Each connector can be used freely for: 1 Output + 1 diagnostic Input 2 Outputs 1 Output + 1 Input 2 Inputs 1 Input + 1 diagnostic Input Each slave can handle a total of 16 signals, each according to one of the above combinations. Diagnostics provides information on the type and location of the error of each channel with: de-activation of the coupling point involved and not the complete module; signal to the controller; display with local LEDs. One single slave or an island of solenoid valves complete with slave and connectors can be ordered. The catalogue shows the 1/8 and 1/4 valve islands in the 70 series and the ISO5599 valve islands, size 1 and size 2. TECHNICAL DATA
Application Supply voltage Degree of protection Temperature Field Bus Data 8 inputs or outputs + 8 inputs or outputs or diagnostic 24 VDC (18V......30,2V), according to EN 61131-2 IP67 0 to 55C (32 to 131 F) Profibus-DP EN 5017 synchronous or Freeze-Mode 12MBit/s rotating switches BCD, 0......99 pnp proximnity sensors or EN 61131-2 compatable mechanical limit switch 24 VDC (18-30.2V) to EN 61131-2; 200 mA for M12 coupling point. One LED for each 24 VDC (18-30.2V) output, to EN 61131-2; cumulative I 9A 1.6 A, system protected by fuse in case of short-circuit 10W 20 Hz Ohm, 20 Hz induction One LED for each output RUN-LED LED + alarm signal to master Red LED for channel on M12 coupling point PIN 2 diagnostic with red LED for M12 coupling point and signal to master N.B.: for the disposition of the contact, please look at the connectors at the following pages
Transmission protocol Transmission mode Transmission speed Addresses Inputs Output Technical Data Type Supply Indicator Output Technical Data Voltage Maximum current for each actuator Maximum current contemporary Maximum signal exchange frequency Indicator LED Autotest Field bus Insufficient voltage signa Short-circuit sensor INPUT or OUTPUTS Autotest Desina (pin 2)
COMPONENTS a b IN-OUT diagnostic connectors c Led Power, Error, Run d IN feeding connector e OUT feeding connector f IN BUS connector g OUT BUS connector h Rotaring switches for addressing i Diagnostic LED for single channel
BUS IN/OUT 1 = VP 2 = A (green) 3 = DGN 4 = B (red) 5 = Sch Thread, Sch POWER-SUPPLY IN/OUT 1 = GND 2 = GND 3 = PE 4 = Sensor feeding 5 = Actuator feeding
IN/OUT CONNECTORS 1 = +24 VDC 2 = Diagnostic input Digital input -. Closure contact Opening contact Digital output 3 = O VDC 4 = Digital input -. Closure contact Opening contact Digital output 5 = PE
2-195
DISTRIBUTORS
SLAVE IP67
Code 0240008001 Description 8 I/O + 8 I/O/autotest Profibu
DISTRIBUTORS
IP67 SLAVE, COMPLETE WITH SERIES 70 VALVES
A B C 1/8 Manifold 25 105 142 1/8 Multiple 25 105 142 1/4 Manifold 27 112 156 1/4 Multiple 27 112 156 D 225 225 239 239 E 20 20 25 25 F G K P Q 305 24 R Q + K + (A x *n-1) Q + K + (A x *n-1)
12.5 85.8 103.5 230 7 10 7 98 115 230
85.5 104.5 237 98 118 237
31.5 Q + K + (A x *n-1) 27 Q + K + (A x *n-1)
*n = number of mounted valves N.B.: the unit is supplied complete with cables for valves
KEY TO CODES
B U S P P Profibu V V IP67 B C B 70 1/8 70 1/4 O O Multiple base 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 0 2 2 positions 4 positions 6 positions 8 positions 10 positions 12 positions 14 positions 16 positions D H Z M J G E B A D D SOV 23 SOS NO - SOV 33 SOS NO SOV 23 SOS NC - SOV 33 SOS NC SOV 23 SOB 00 - SOV 33 SOB 00 SOV 25 SOS 0 - SOV 35 SOS 00 SOV 25 SOB 00 - SOV 35 SOB 00 SOV 26 SOS CC - SOV 36 SOS CC SOV 26 SOS OC - SOV 36 SOS OC SOV 26 SOS PC - SOV 36 SOS PC Blanking plate
2-196
IP67 SLAVE, COMPLETE WITH ISO VALVES
ISO1 ISO2
A 43 56
B 80 90
C 140 165
D 158 180
E 28 35
F 10.5 12.5
G 76.4 77.5
H 22 26
L 11 14
M 47 61
N 150 178
P 230 240
R H + L + (A x *n) H + L + (A x *n)
*n = number of mounted valves N.B.: the unit is supplied complete with cables for valves
KEY TO CODES
B U S P P Profibu V V IP67 D E D ISO1 ISO2 1 1 Manifold base side 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 0 2 2 positions 4 positions 6 positions 8 positions 10 positions 12 positions 14 positions 16 positions M J G E B A MM ISV 55 SOS 00 - ISV 65 SOS 00 ISV 55 SOB 00 - ISV 65 SOB 00 ISV 56 SOS CC - ISV 66 SOS CC ISV 56 SOS OC - ISV 66 SOS OC ISV 56 SOS PC - ISV 66 SOS PC Blanking plate
2-197
DISTRIBUTORS
ACCESSORIES
90 ELBOW WITHOUT CABLE STRAIGHT FITTING WITHOUT CABLE
Code 0240009001
Description 90 Elbow without cable
Code 0240009021
Description Straight fitting without cabl
DISTRIBUTORS
90 ELBOW WITH CABLE

STRAIGHT FITTING WITH CABLE

Code 0240009022 0240009023
Description 90 curve with cable 1.5 m 90 curve with cable 5 m
Code 0240009002 0240009003
Description Straight, with 1.5 m cable Straight, with 5 m cable
Y-DISTRIBUTOR WITH CABLE AND M12 STRAIGHT CONNECTORS
MALE CONNECTOR FOR FEEDING IN
Code 0240009031 0240009032
Description Y-Distributor cable 0.6 m Y-Distributor cable 1.5 m
Code 0240009033
Description Male connector IN feeding
FEMALE CONNECTOR FOR FEEDING OUT
M12 MALE CONNECTOR OUT-BUS
Code 0240009034
Description Female connector OUT feeding
Code 0240009035
Description M12 male connector B coding
M12 FEMALE CONNECTOR IN-BUS
PLUG M12
Code 0240009036
Description M12 female connector B coding
Code 0240009040
Description M12 plug
2-198
INPUT PROFIBUS-DP IP67 M8
The Profibus DP COM ACT input module is a sturdy and compact IP67 slave that can be used for connecting up to 8 inputs. A series of diagnostic functions provides information on the state of operation through lights and signals to the controller.
TECHNICAL DATA
Application Power supply Index of protection Temperature range Field Bus technical data Transmission protocol Transmission mode Transfer rate Addresses Input technical data Type Power supply Signal Input 0 signal voltage Input 1 signal voltage Diagnosis Field bus INPUT short-circuit sensor 8 PNP inputs 24 VDC (13-28 V) IP67 -20 to +70C RH 5-95% - no condensate DP-VO Profibus to EN 50170 Synchronous or Freeze-Mode Up to 12 MBit/s Rotary switches, 1...99 PNP proximity sensors or IEE 1131-2 compact mechanical stop 24 VDC (18 to 28 V) One green LED for each input 2...5 V 10...30 V NET LED+alarm signal to master Red LED for each channel at M8 connection point M8 (600 mA)
SLAVE IP67
Code 0240008002 Description IP67 M8 PROFIBUS INPUT
2-199
DISTRIBUTORS
PIN ASSIGNMENT
PROFIBUS CONNECTORS BUS OUT M12 female connector B coding for profibu 1 - 5 VDC power 2 - Bus A 3 - GND 4 - Bus B 5 - Screen BUS IN M12 male connector B coding for profibu 1 - 5 VDC power 2 - Bus A 3 - GND 4 - Bus B 5 - Screen
DISTRIBUTORS
POWER CONNECTOR INPUT PROFIBUS-DP IP67 M8 M12 male connector A coding 1 - Power supply module and input 2 - NC 3 - GND 4 - GND 5 - INPUT
INPUT CONNECTORS M8 three-pole female connector A coding 1 - 24VDC 3 - GND 4 - INPUT
LED ASSIGNMENT
NETWORK (red): slave not configured or not communicating with master (green): slave configured and communicating with master
MODULE FAILURE (red): check signal LEDs
Channel LEDs (inputs) (green): input enabled (red): sensor faulty, +24V power supply short-circuit
NOT USED INPUT MODULE POWER SUPPLY (green): on
2-200
M12 BUS-OUT MALE CONNECTOR
M12 BUS-IN FEMALE CONNECTOR
Code 0240009035
Description M12 male connector, B coding
Code 0240009036
Description M12 female connector, B coding
M8-M12 PLUG
M8 INPUT CONNECTOR WITH CABLE
Code 0240009039 0240009040
Description M8 plug M12 plug
Code 0240009009
Description M8-M8 straight connector with 3 m cable
M8 INPUT CONNECTOR
M12 STRAIGHT SUPPLY CONNECTOR
Code 0240009010
Description M8 3-pin straight connector
Code W0970513001
Description 5-pin M12x1 straight connector
M12 STRAIGHT SUPPLY CONNECTOR WITH CABLE

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Cable colour Brown White Blue Black Grey
M12 90 SUPPLY CONNECTOR
Code W0970513002
Description 5-pin M12x1 straight connector with 5 m cable
Code W0970513003
Description M12x1 5-pin 90connector
M12 90 SUPPLY CONNECTOR WITH CABLE

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Cable colour Brown White Blue Black Grey
NOTE
Code W0970513004
Description M12x1 5-pin 90 connector with 5m cable
2-201
DISTRIBUTORS
UNITS
UNITS
P P P P P P
SYNTESI BIT SKILLAIR NEW DEAL ONE
PAGE
3-2
UNITS
3-1
PAGE 3-49 PAGE 3-74 PAGE 3-144 PAGE 3-191
PRECISION REGULATORS, PROPORTIONAL VALVES, PRESSURE SWITCHES PAGE 3-205
SUMMARY
P INTRODUCTION
PAGE 3-4
P KEY TO CODES
PAGE 3-7
P FILTER
PAGE
3-8
P DEPURATOR
PAGE 3-11
P ACTIVE CARBON FILTER
PAGE 3-14
UNITS
P REGULATOR
PAGE 3-17
P IN-SERIES REGULATOR SUMMARY Syntesi
PAGE 3-20
P FILTER-REGULATOR
PAGE 3-23
P LUBRICATOR
PAGE 3-27
P SHUT-OFF VALVE
PAGE 3-30
P PROGRESSIVE STARTER
PAGE 3-33
P PRESSURE SWITCHES
PAGE 3-35
P AIR TAKE-OFF
PAGE 3-37
3-2
P FR+LUB
PAGE 3-38
P V3V+FR+LUB
PAGE 3-40
P FIL+DEP
PAGE 3-42
P FIL+LUB
PAGE 3-44
P ACCESSORIES
PAGE 3-46
3-3
SUMMARY Syntesi
UNITS
P SPARE PARTS
PAGE 3-47
AIR TREATMENT UNIT
Syntesi is an important milestone achieved by Metal Work, the result of thirty years experience producing air-treatment units. It has been studied in minute detail to obtain the best possible performance in a reduced space and with limited weight. The capacity is much higher than that of other units of the same size. This modular unit features a very simple yet effective system that requires no brackets, stay bolts or yoke for assembling the elements. The basic version of Syntesi incorporates numerous functions that are not provided or are only optional with traditional units. Examples are padlockable knobs, additional pneumatic ports on the front and back, flow options from left to right or vice versa, regulators with compensation system - which are accurate even when the upstream pressure changes, with rapid downstream pressure relief - full indelible marking, automatic condensate drain even in size 1, and 360 visual inspection of oil and condensate levels.
TECHNICAL DATA
Threaded port Max. input pressure Flow rate Min/max temperature at 10 bar; 1 MPa; 145 psi Padlockable knob Fluid Mounting position Direction of flow Additional air take-off, for pressure gauges or fittings Wall fixing screws Certification for potentially explosive atmosphere according to 94/9/CE bar MPa psi C 1/8
SIZE 1
1/4 15 1.5 217
SIZE 2
1
AIR TREATMENT UNIT Syntesi
3/8 3/8 1/2 3/4 13 1.3 188 See catalogue of the various elements from -10 to +50 from -10 to +50 The knobs of the regulators, filter regulators and standard sectioning valves can all be padlocked Compressed air or other inert gases See catalogue of the various elements Flow options right to left or vice versa 1/8, front and rear, on all modules 1/4, front and rear, on all modules No. 2 M4 screws No. 2 M5 screws Ex II 3 GD c T5 T 100C -20C<Ta<50C
UNITS
3-4
NOTES
MODULARITY AND FLEXIBILITY
The various elements of Syntesi can be fixed together and connected to the air feed and delivery circuit using nickel brass or passivated aluminium bushes . The bushes are easy to remove by unscrewing the two front screws . This solution has numerous advantages: - Reduced overall dimensions. - Free composition of multiple elements, without the need for brackets, stay bolts or yoke. - The metal threads of the fittings, including taper thread, allow high torques. - Maximum flexibility, a unit can be transformed at any time by adding an element or replacing a port with another one, e.g. 1/4 instead of 1/8. - The pneumatic inlet port can be the same or different from the outlet port. Standard ports Syntesi are: 1/8, 1/4, 3/8 for size 1; 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1 for size 2; intermediate, air take-off. For the insertion of the bushings on the size 2 it could be necessary to push with the assistance of a vice. Additional ports . On the front and back of all Syntesi is an (1/8 for size 1, 1/4 for size 2) port for use with pressure gauges or pressure switches or, considering the high flow rate, as additional air take-off . These ports are downstream of the element, so, for example, a regulator port can supply air at a set pressure or a filter port can supply filtered air (not valid for actived carbon filter and depurator). Wall fixing. Only two through screws are needed. No bulky brackets or additional flanges are required. Regulator fixing bracket. The regulators and filter regulators can be fixed in position using a steel bracket . Padlockable knob . The knobs on the regulators, filter regulator and sectioning valves can all be padlocked. The steel plate is included in the supply. You can insert up to two padlocks on size 1, and up to three padlocks on size 2.
3-5
UNITS
MOUNTING OPTIONS On the wall, using two screws Using a bracket On a panel
UNITS
FIXING TO FRONT PORTS
ROTARY BUSHINGS
LASER MARKING
Do not use a spanner for fixin taper threaded elements to the front ports. Mount by hand and apply a liquid sealant (not teflo ).
3/4 and 1 bushings in Size 2 rotate freely to facilitate assembly operations.
The following is marked indelibly on the body: - Metal Work trademark - Code - Maximum pressure and temperature - Degree of filtratio or pressure range, where relevant - Week and year of manufacture - Atex category - Made in Italy
3-6
KEY TO CODES SINGLE ELEMENT

56 SYNTESI 56 Syntesi 1 SIZE 1 Size 1 1 THREADED INPUT CONNECTION 0 Without bushing 1 1/8 port 2 1/4 port 3 3/8 port 0 Without bushing 3 3/8 port 4 1/2 port 5 3/4 port 6 1 port F ELEMENT F Filter D Depurator C Active carbon filte R Pressure regulator B Filter-regulator L Lubricator V Shut off valve A Progressive starter S Pressure switches P Air take-off 10 TYPE Varies from element to element 1 THREADED OUTPUT CONNECTION 0 Without bushing 1 1/8 port 2 1/4 port 3 3/8 port 0 Without bushing 3 3/8 port 4 1/2 port 5 3/4 port 6 1 port
2 Size 2
KEY TO CODES UNIT COMPOSED OF TWO OR THREE ELEMENTS

56 SYNTESI 56 Syntesi 1 SIZE 1 Size 1 2 Size 2 1 THREADED INPUT CONNECTION 1 1/8 port 2 1/4 port 3 3/8 port 3 3/8 port 4 1/2 port 5 3/4 port 6 1 port V ELEMENT 1 F Filter D Depurator C Active carbon filte R Pressure regulator B Filter regulator L Lubricator V Shut off valve A Progressive starter S Pressure switches P Air Take-off 10 TYPE Varies from element to element B ELEMENT 2 F Filter D Depurator C Active carbon filte R Pressure regulator B Filter regulator L Lubricator V Shut off valve A Progressive starter S Pressure switches P Air Take-off 24 TYPE Varies from element to element L ELEMENT 3 F Filter D Depurator C Active carbon filte R Pressure regulator B Filter regulator L Lubricator V Shut off valve A Progressive starter S Pressure switches P Air Take-off 10 TYPE Varies from element to element 1 THREADED OUTPUT CONNECTION 1 1/8 port 2 1/4 port 3 3/8 port 3 3/8 port 4 1/2 port 5 3/4 port 6 1 port
3-7
UNITS

Katalog

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Katalog

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

G E N E R A L C ATA L O G U E

Our team works

Quality in design, production and distribution

ITALY AUTHORIZED DEALER

FOREIGN AUTHORIZED DEALER

PAGE PAGE PAGE

PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE

SAFETY COMPONENTS: OVERVIEW OF THE STANDARDS PAGE

P GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA

CYLINDERS ACCORDING TO STANDARDS AND VARIANTS

P ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDERS SERIES TP

P ACCESSORIES FOR ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDERS

P ISO 15552 CYLINDERS

P ISO 15552 CYLINDERS SERIES STD

P ISO 15552 CYLINDERS TYPE A

P ISO 15552 CYLINDERS SERIES 3

P ISO 15552 LOW FRICTIONS CYLINDERS

P ISO 15552 ULTRA-LOW FRICTIONS CYLINDERS

P ISO 15552 CYLINDERS WITH COMBI PISTON ROD GASKET

P ISO 15552 CYLINDERS DIMENSIONS

P ISO 15552 TWO-FLAT CYLINDERS

P ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS FOR ISO 15552 CYLINDERS

P TWIN-ROD CYLINDER SERIES TWNC

P ISO 15552 CYLINDERS 160-200

P ISO 21287 CYLYNDER SERIES LINER

P COMPACT CYLINDERS SERIES CMPC

P COMPACT CYLINDERS SERIES CMPC TWO-FLAT

P COMPACT STOPPER CYLINDER

P SHORT-STROKE CYLINDERS SERIES SSCY

P CARTRIDGE MICRO-CYLINDER SERIES CRTC

P COMPACT GUIDED CYLINDERS SERIES CMPG

P RODLESS CYLINDER WITH GUIDE V

P RODLESS CYLINDER WITH BALL RECIRCULATING GUIDE

P RODLESS CYLINDER SERIES DOUBLE

P RODLESS CYLINDER WITH MAGNETIC SLIDING SERIES MAGNETIC SLIDE

STAINLESS STELL CYLINDERS

P STAINLESS STEEL ROUND CYLINDERS RNDC

P STAINLESS STEEL ISO 15552 CYLINDERS

GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA

GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA

GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA

CONSUMPTION OF AIR IN THE CYLINDERS

Piston rod diameter d mm 4 6 8 12 12 16 20 20 25 32 32 40 40

32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200

GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA

FORCE OF SPRINGS IN SINGLE-ACTING CYLINDERS (THEORETICAL)

Force with spring extended N 35 51 64 64

Force with spring extended N 1.5 3 4 5 6 15 20 25

Force with spring extended N 1 1 3 5 12 17

Force with spring extended N 34 50 62

Force with spring extended N

FORCES GENERATED DURING THRUST AND TRACTION (THEORETICAL)

GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA

GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA

32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200

Weight [g] each mm 1.64 2.09 3.02 3.36

Weight [g] each mm 2.54 3.72 4.78 7.50

x Stroke 20x15 32x20 50x30 80x30 80x40

Roller version Weight [g] 220 460 1.300 4.500 4.750

GENERAL TECHNICAL DATA

ISO 6432 MINI-CYLINDERS SERIES STD

DIMENSIONS OF STANDARD VERSIONS

BE M12x1.25 M12x1.25 M16x1.5 M16x1.5 M22x1.5 M22x1.5